Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Springer
Joseph L. Doob
University of nIinois
Department of Mathematics
101 West Windsor Road 11104
Urbana, IL 61802
USA
e-mail: doob@lmath.uiuc.edu
ISSN 1431-0821
ISBN 978-3-540-41206-9
This work is 8ubject to copyright All rights are reserved, whether the whole or part of the material is
concerned, speclfically the rights of translation, reprinting. reuse of illustrations. recitation, broadcasting.
reproduction on miaofilm or in any other war. Ind storage in deta blnb. Duplication of this publication or
parts thereof is permitted only under the provisions of the German Copyright Law of September 9.1965. in its
rumnt venion, and permission for use must alwayI be obtaincd from Springer-Verlag. Violations Ire liable
for prosec:ution under the German Copyright Law.
The use of general descriptive names, registered names, trademarks etc. in this publication does not imply.
even in the absence of a speclfic statement, tbat such names are uempt from the relevant protective laws and
regulations Ind therefore free for general use.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be translated or reproduced in any form
without written eonsent from Springer-Verlag, 175 Fifth Avenue, New York, New
York 10010, V.S.A.
98765432 I
Introduction xxi
Notation and Conventions xxv
Part I
Classical and Parabolic Potential Theory
Chapter I
Introduction to the Mathematical Background of Classical Potential
Theory..................................................... 3
1. The Context of Green's Identity........ 3
2. Function Averages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. Harmonic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4. Maximum-Minimum Theorem for Harmonic Functions 5
5. The Fundamental Kernel for IR N and Its Potentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
6. Gauss Integral Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
7. The Smoothness of Potentials; The Poisson Equation... 8
8. Harmonic Measure and the Riesz Decomposition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. II
Chapter II
Basic Properties of Harmonic, Subharmonic! and Superharmonic
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1. The Green Function of a Ball; The Poisson Integral. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2. Harnack's Inequality 16
3. Convergence of Directed Sets of Harmonic Functions 17
4. Harmonic, Subharmonic, and Superharmonic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 18
5. Minimum Theorem for Superharmonic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
6. Application of the Operation "CB •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 20
7. Characterization of Superharmonic Functions in Terms of Harmonic
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8. Differentiable Superharmonic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
9. Application of Jensen's Inequality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
10. Superharmonic Functions on an Annulus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 24
II. Examples....................................................... 25
12. The Kelvin Transformation (N ~ 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 26
vi Contents
Chapter III
Infima of Families of Superharmonic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
I. Least Superharmonic Majorant (LM) and Greatest Subharmonic
Minorant (GM)............. 35
2. Generalization of Theorem I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3. Fundamental Convergence Theorem (Preliminary Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4. The Reduction Operation 38
5. Reduction Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6. A SmaIlness Property of Reductions on Compact Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7. The Natural (Pointwise) Order Decomposition for Positive Superharmonic
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter IV
Potentials on Special Open Sets 45
l. Special Open Sets, and Potentials on Them. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2. Examples....................................................... 47
3. A Fundamental SmaIlness Property of Potentials 48
4. Increasing Sequences of Potentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5. Smoothing of a Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6. Uniqueness of the Measure Determining a Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7. Riesz Measure Associated with a Superharmonic Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
8. Riesz Decomposition Theorem...................... 52
9. Counterpart for Superharmonic Functions on 1R 2 of the Riesz
Decomposition 53
10. An Approximation Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter V
Polar Sets and Their Applications 57
I. Definition....................................................... 57
2. Superharmonic Functions Associated with a Polar Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3. Countable Unions of Polar Sets.................................... 59
4. Properties of Polar Sets 59
5. Extension of a Superharmonic Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6. Greenian Sets in 1R 2 as the Complements of Nonpolar Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
7. Superharmonic Function Minimum Theorem (Extension of
Theorem 11.5). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8. Evans-Vasilesco Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9. Approximation of a Potential by Continuous Potentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
10. The Domination Principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
II. The Infinity Set of a Potential and the Riesz Measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Contents VB
Chapter VI
The Fundamental Convergence Theorem and the Reduction
Operation '. . . . . 70
l. The Fundamental Convergence Theorem .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2. Inner Polar versus Polar Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3. Properties of the Reduction Operation 74
4. Proofs of the Reduction Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5. Reductions and Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chapter VII
Green Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
l. Definition of the Green Function GD • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • . • • • • . • • • • 85
2. Extremal Property of GD . . • . . . • • . • • . • • • • • • • . . • . • . . • • . . . • . • . • • • • • • • 87
3. Boundedness Properties of GD • • . • . . • • . . • • . • . . . • • . • • • . • . • • . • . . . . . • • • 88
4. Further Properties of GD •...••...•••.•.•••.•.•..•••••...•.......•• 90
5. The Potential GD/l of a Measure 11 ............................ 92
6. Increasing Sequences of Open Sets and the Corresponding Green Function
Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7. The Existence of GD versus the Greenian Character of D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
8. From Special to Greenian Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
9. Approximation Lemma............ .. 95
10. The Function GD (·, OlD-I,} as a Minimal Harmonic Function. . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Chapter VIII
The Dirichlet Problem for Relative Harmonic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . 98
I. Relative Harmonic, Superharmonic, and Subharmonic Functions . . . . . . . 98
2. The PWB Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3. Examples............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4. Continuous Boundary Functions on the Euclidean Boundary (h == I) .... 106
5. h-Harmonic Measure Null Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6. Properties of PWBh Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
7. Proofs for Section 6 III
8. h-Harmonic Measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
9. h-Resolutive Boundaries........................................... 118
10. Relations between Reductions and Dirichlet Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
II. Generalization of the Operator t~ and Application to G Mh . • . • . . • . . . • • • 123
12. Barriers......................................................... 124
13. h-Barriers and Boundary Point h-Regularity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
14. Barriers and Euclidean Boundary Point Regularity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
15. The Geometrical Significance of Regularity (Euclidean Boundary, h == I) . 128
16. Continuation of Section 13 130
17. h-Harmonic Measure /l~ as a Function of D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
18. The Extension G; ofGD and the Harmonic Average I1D(e,G;(",·» When
DeB.......................................................... 132
19. Modification of Section 18 for D = 1R 2 • . . . • • . . . . • . • . . . • . • . . • . . • . . . . . 136
20. Interpretation of tPD as a Green Function with Pole 00 (N = 2) . . . . . . . .. . 139
21. Variant of the Operator tB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • . • . • • • • • • • . • • • • • • . . 140
viii Contents
Chapter IX
Lattices and Related Classes of Functions 141
I. Introduction..................................................... 141
2. LM~ u for an h-Subharmonic Function u 141
3. The Class D(Jl~_) 142
4. The Class LP(Jl~_) (p ~ I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
5. The Lattices (S±, ~) and (S+, 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 145
6. The Vector Lattice (S,~) 146
7. The Vector Lattice SOl' ....................•.•...•............... , . 148
8. The Vector Lattice Sp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . 149
9. The Vector Lattice Sqb .. . • . • . . . . . • . •. . . . . . . • . . . . • . • • . . • . . • . . . . • .. . 150
10. The Vector Lattice S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 151
II. A Refinement of the Riesz Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
12. Lattices of h-Harmonic Functions on a Ball. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 152
Chapter X
The Sweeping Operation .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
I. Sweeping Context and Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2. Relation between Harmonic Measure and the Sweeping Kernel . . . . . . . . . 157
3. Sweeping Symmetry Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 158
4. Kernel Property of b~ . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . . .. . 158
5. Swept Measures and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6. Some Properties of b~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
7. Poles of a Positive Harmonic Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
8. Relative Harmonic Measure on a Polar Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 164
Chapter XI
The Fine Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
I. Definitions and Basic Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2. A Thinness Criterion 168
3. Conditions That ~EAI 169
4. An Internal Limit Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
5. Extension of the Fine Topology to IR N u {oo}. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6. The Fine Topology Derived Set of a Subset of IR N • . . . . . . • • . • . . . . • . • • • . 177
7. Application to the Fundamental Convergence Theorem and to Reductions. 177
8. Fine Topology Limits and Euclidean Topology Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
9. Fine Topology Limits and Euclidean Topology Limits (Continued) . . . . . . 179
10. Identification of AI in Terms ofa Special Function u·................. 180
II. Quasi-Lindelof Property 180
12. Regularity in Terms of the Fine Topology........................... 181
13. The Euclidean Boundary Set of Thinness ofa Greenian Set............. 182
14. The Support of a Swept Measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
15. Characterization oqJl~A 183
16. A Special Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
17. The Fine Interior ofa Set of Constancy ofa Superharmonic Function... 184
18. The Support of a Swept Measure (Continuation of Section 14) . . . . . . . . . . 185
19. Superharmonic Functions on Fine-Open Sets......................... 187
20. A Generalized Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Contents ix
Chapter XII
The Martin Boundary 195
I. Motivation................................................. . . . . . 195
2. The Martin Functions ...... 196
3. The Martin Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4. Preliminary Representations of Positive Harmonic Functions and Their
Reductions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
5. Minimal Harmonic Functions and Their Poles 200
6. Extension of Lemma 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
7. The Set of Nonminimal Martin Boundary Points ...... 202
8. Reductions on the Set of Minimal Martin Boundary Points 203
9. The Martin Representation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
10. Resolutivity of the Martin Boundary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
11. Minimal Thinness at a Martin Boundary Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12. The Minimal-Fine Topology....................................... 210
13. First Martin Boundary Counterpart of Theorem XI.4(c) and (d) 213
14. Second Martin Boundary Counterpart of Theorem XI.4(c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
15. Minimal-Fine Topology Limits and Martin Topology Limits at a Minimal
Martin Boundary Point. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
16. Minimal-Fine Topology Limits and Martin Topology Limits at a Minimal
Martin Boundary Point (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
17. Minimal-Fine Martin Boundary Limit Functions..................... 216
18. The Fine Boundary Function of a Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
19. The Fatou Boundary Limit Theorem for the Martin Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
20. Classical versus Minimal-Fine Topology Boundary Limit Theorems for
Relative Superharmonic Functions on a Ball in IR N • • • . • . . . . • • . • . . • • • • . 221
21. Nontangential and Minimal-Fine Limits at a Half-space Boundary. . . . . . 222
22. Normal Boundary Limits for a Half-space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
21. Boundary Limit Function (Minimal-Fine and Normal) of a Potential on a
Half-space ............................ 225
Chapter XIII
Classical Energy and Capacity 226
I. Physical Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
2. Measures and Their Energies 227
3. Charges and Their Energies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4. Inequalities between Potentials, and the Corresponding Energy
Inequalities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
5. The Function Dt-+GDJl..... 230
6. Classical Evaluation of Energy; Hilbert Space Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
7. The Energy Functional (Relative to an Arbitrary Greenian Subset D of
IR N). • • . • . • • . • • • • • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . • . . . . . . . • • • • • • 233
8. Alternative Proofs of Theorem 7(b+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
x Contents
Chapter XIV
One-Dimensional Potential Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
1. Introduction....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
2. Harmonic, Superharmonic, and Subharmonic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
3. Convergence Theorems 256
4. Smoothness Properties of Superharmonic and Subharmonic Functions. . . 257
5. The Dirichlet Problem (Euclidean Boundary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6. Green Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
7. Potentials of Measures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
8. Identification of the Measure Defining a Potential 259
9. Riesz Decomposition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
10. The Martin Boundary.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Chapter XV
Parabolic Potential Theory: Basic Facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
1. Conventions..................................................... 262
2. The Parabolic and Coparabolic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
3. Coparabolic Polynomials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
4. The Parabolic Green Function of IR N • • • . . . . . • • . . . • . • • . . . . • • • • • • • • • • . 266
5. Maximum-Minimum Parabolic Function Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
6. Application of Green's Theorem.......... 269
7. The Parabolic Green Function of a Smooth Domain; The Riesz Decom-
position and Parabolic Measure (Formal Treatment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8. The Green Function of an Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
9. Parabolic Measure for an Interval .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
10. Parabolic Averages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
11. Harnack's Theorems in the Parabolic Context. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
12. Superparabolic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
13. Superparabolic Function Minimum Theorem 279
14. The Operation iii and the Defining Average Properties of Superparabolic
Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
15. Superparabolic and Parabolic Functions on a Cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
16. The Appell Transformation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
17. Extensions of a Parabolic Function Defined on a Cylinder 283
Contents Xl
Chapter XVI
Subparabolic, Superparabolic, and Parabolic Functions on a Slab . 285
I. The Parabolic Poisson Integral for a Slab . 285
2. A Generalized Superparabolic Function Inequality . 287
3. A Criterion of a Subparabolic Function Supremum . 288
4. A Boundary Limit Criterion for the Identically Vanishing of a Positive
Parabolic Function . 288
5. A Condition that a Positive Parabolic Function Be Representable by a
Poisson Integral . 290
6. The V(tlJi-) and D(jlJi-) Classes of Parabolic Functions on a Slab . 290
7. The Parabolic Boundary Limit Theorem . 292
8. Minimal Parabolic Functions on a Slab . 293
Chapter XVII
Parabolic Potential Theory (Continued) 295
I. Greatest Minorants and Least Majorants . 295
2. The Parabolic Fundamental Convergence Theorem (Preliminary Version)
and the Reduction Operation . 295
3. The Parabolic Context Reduction Operations . 296
4. The Parabolic Green Function . 298
5. Potentials . 300
6. The Smoothness of Potentials . 303
7. Riesz Decomposition Theorem . 305
8. Parabolic-Polar Sets . 305
9. The Parabolic-Fine Topology . 308
10. Semipolar Sets . 309
II. Preliminary List of Reduction Properties . 310
12. A Criterion of Parabolic Thinness . 313
13. The Parabolic Fundamental Convergence Theorem . 314
14. Applications of the Fundamental Convergence Theorem to Reductions
and to Green Functions . 316
15. Applications of the Fundamental Convergence Theorem to the Parabolic-
Fine Topology . 317
16. Parabolic-Reduction Properties . 317
17. Proofs of the Reduction Properties in Section 16 . 320
18. The Classical Context Green Function in Terms of the Parabolic Context
Green Function (N;::: I) . 326
19. The Quasi-LindelOf Property . 328
Chapter XVIII
The Parabolic Dirichlet Problem, Sweeping, and Exceptional Sets ... 329
I. Relativization of the Parabolic Context; The PWB Method in this
Context . 329
2. h-Parabolic Measure . 332
3. Parabolic Barriers . 333
4. Relations between the Classical Dirichlet Problem and the Parabolic
Context Dirichlet Problem . 334
5. Classical Reductions in the Parabolic Context . 335
Xli Contents
Chapter XIX
The Martin Boundary in the Parabolic Context. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
I. Introduction............................................. . . . . . . . . 363
2. The Martin Functions of Martin Point Set and Measure Set Pairs. . . . . . . 364
3. The Martin Space iJM 366
4. Preparatory Material for the Parabolic Context Martin Representation
Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
5. Minimal Parabolic Functions and Their Poles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
6. The Set of Nonminimal Martin Boundary Points 370
7. The Martin Representation in the Parabolic Context. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
8. Martin Boundary of a Slab iJ = IRN X ]0, J[ with 0 < J ~ + 00 . . • . . . • . . 371
9. Martin Boundaries for the Lower Half-space of iRN and for iRN • • • • . . . • . . 374
10. TheMartinBoundaryofiJ=]O,+oo[x]-oo,J[ 375
II. PWB h Solutions on iJM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . 377
12. The Minimal-Fine Topology in the Parabolic Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
13. Boundary Counterpart of Theorem XVIII.14(f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
14. The Vanishing of Potentials on OM iJ 381
15. The Parabolic Context Fatou Boundary Limit Theorem on Martin Spaces 381
Part 2
Probabilistic Counterpart of Part I
Chapter I
Fundamental Concepts of Probability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
I. Adapted Families of Functions on Measurable Spaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
2. Progressive Measurability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
3. Random Variables .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Contents Xlll
Chapter II
Optional Times and Associated Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
I. The Context of Optional Times.................................... 413
2. Optional Time Properties (Continuous Parameter Context). .. . . . . . . . . . . 415
3. Process Functions at Optional Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
4. Hitting and Entry Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
5. Application to Continuity Properties of Sample Functions............. 421
6. Continuation of Section 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
7. Predictable Optional Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
8. Section Theorems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
9. The Graph of a Predictable Time and the Entry Time of a Predictable
Set. .. 426
10. Semipolar Subsets of IR+ x n ...................................... 427
II. The Classes D and LP of Stochastic Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12. Decomposition of Optional Times; Accessible and Totally Inaccessible
Optional Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Chapter III
Elements of Martingale Theory 432
I. Definitions...................................................... 432
2. Examples....................................................... 433
3. Elementary Properties (Arbitrary Simply Ordered Parameter Set) 435
4. The Parameter Set in Martingale Theory 437
5. Convergence of Supermartingale Families 437
6. Optional Sampling Theorem (Bounded Optional Times) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
7. Optional Sampling Theorem for Right Closed Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
8. Optional Stopping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
9. Maximal Inequalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
10. Conditional Maximal Inequalities ................... 444
II. An LP Inequality for Submartingale Suprema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
12. Crossings....................................................... 445
13. Forward Convergence in the L 1 Bounded Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
14. Convergence of a Uniformly Integrable Martingale 451
15. Forward Convergence of a Right Closable Supermartingale . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
16. Backward Convergence ofa Martingale.......... 454
XIV Contents
Chapter IV
Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales. . . . . . . . 463
1. Continuity Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
2. Optional Sampling of Unifonnly Integrable Continuous Parameter
Martingales 468
3. Optional Sampling and Convergence of Continuous Parameter
Supennartingales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
4. Increasing Sequences of Supennartingales 473
5. Probability Version of the Fundamental Convergence Theorem of Potential
Theory......................................................... 476
6. Quasi-Bounded Positive Supennartingales; Generation ofSupennartingale
Potentials by Increasing Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
7. Natural versus Predictable Increasing Processes (I = 1.+ or IR+) . . . . . . . . . 483
8. Generation of Supennartingale Potentials by Increasing Processes in the
Discrete Parameter Case 488
9. An Inequality for Predictable Increasing Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
10. Generation of Supennartingale Potentials by Increasing Processes for
Arbitrary Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
II. Generation of Supennartingale Potentials by Increasing Processes in the
Continuous Parameter Case: The Meyer Decomposition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
12. Meyer Decomposition of a Submartingale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
13. Role of the Measure Associated with a Supennartingale;
The Supermartingale Domination Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
14. The Operators t, LM, and GM in the Continuous Parameter Context. . . . 500
15. Potential Theory on IR+ x Q. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
16. The Fine Topology of IR+ x Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
17. Potential Theory Reductions in a Continuous Parameter Probability
Context. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
18. Reduction Properties. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
19. Proofs of the Reduction Properties in Section 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
20. Evaluation of Reductions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
21. The Energy of a Supennartingale Potential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
22. The Subtraction of a Supennartingale Discontinuity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
23. Supennartingale Decompositions and Discontinuities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Chapter V
Lattices and Related Classes of Stochastic Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
1. Conventions; The Essential Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
2. LMx(.) when {x(.),.F(·)} Is a Submartingale 521
Contents XV
Chapter VI
Markov Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
I. The Markov Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
2. Choice of Filtration 544
3. Integral Parameter Markov Processes with Stationary Transition Proba-
bilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
4. Application of Martingale Theory to Discrete Parameter Markov
Processes 547
5. Continuous Parameter Markov Processes with Stationary Transition
Probabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
6. Specialization to Right Continuous Processes 552
7. Continuous Parameter Markov Processes: Lifetimes and Trap Points. . . . 554
8. Right Continuity of Markov Process Filtrations; A Zero-One (0-1) Law. . 556
9. Strong Markov Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
10. Probabilistic Potential Theory; Excessive Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
II. Excessive Functions and Supermartingales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
12. Excessive Functions and the Hitting Times of Analytic Sets (Notation and
Hypotheses of Section II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
13. Conditioned Markov Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
14. Tied Down Markov Processes............. 567
15. Killed Markov Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Chapter VII
Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
I. Processes with Independent Increments and State Space IR N • . . • . . . . • • . . 570
2. Brownian Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
3. Continuity of Brownian Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
4. Brownian Motion Filtrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
5. Elementary Properties of the Brownian Transition Density and Brownian
Motion......................................................... 581
6. The Zero-One Law for Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
7. Tied Down Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
8. Andre Reflection Principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
9. Brownian Motion in an Open Set (N ~ I)......... 589
10. Space-Time Brownian Motion in an Open Set..... 592
II. Brownian Motion in an Interval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
XVI Contents
Chapter VIII
The Ito Integral. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
I. Notation........................................................ 599
2. The Size ofro 601
3. Properties of the Ito Integral. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
4. The Stochastic Integral for an Integrand Process in r o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
5. The Stochastic Integral for an Integrand Process in r. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
6. Proofs of the Properties in Section 3 . 607
7. Extension to Vector-Valued and Complex-Valued Integrands........... 611
8. Martingales Relative to Brownian Motion Filtrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
9. A Change of Variables 615
10. The Role of Brownian Motion Increments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
I I. (N = 1) Computation of the Ito Integral by Riemann-Stieltjes Sums. . . . . 620
12. Ito's Lemma..................................................... 621
13. The Composition of the Basic Functions of Potential Theory with Brownian
Motion......................................................... 625
14. The Composition of an Analytic Function with Brownian Motion. . . . . . . 626
Chapter IX
Brownian Motion and Martingale Theory 627
1. Elementary Martingale Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
2. Coparabolic Polynomials and Martingale Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
3. Superharmonic and Harmonic Functions on IR N and Supermartingales and
Martingales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
4. Hitting of an F;, Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
5. The Hitting of a Set by Brownian Motion :......... 636
6. Superharmonic Functions, Excessive for Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
7. Preliminary Treatment of the Composition of a Superharmonic Function
with Brownian Motion; A Probabilistic Fatou Boundary Limit Theorem. 641
8. Excessive and Invariant Functions for Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
9. Application to Hitting Probabilities and to Parabolicity of Transition
Densities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
10. (N = 2). The Hitting of Nonpolar Sets by Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . 648
II. Continuity of the Composition of a Function with Brownian Motion. . . . 649
12. Continuity of Superharmonic Functions on Brownian Motion.......... 650
13. Preliminary Probabilistic Solution of the Classical Dirichlet Problem .... 651
14. Probabilistic Evaluation of Reductions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
15. Probabilistic Description of the Fine Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
16. a-Excessive Functions for Brownian Motion and Their Composition with
Brownian Motions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
17. Brownian Motion Transition Functions as Green Functions; The Corre-
sponding Backward and Forward Parabolic Equations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
18. Excessive Measures for Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
19. Nearly Borel Sets for Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
20. Brownian Motion into a Set from an Irregular Boundary Point . . . . . . . . . 666
Contents XVll
Chapter X
Conditional Brownian Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
I. Definition....................................................... 668
2. h-Brownian Motion in Terms of Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
3. Contexts for (2.1) ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
4. Asymptotic Character of h-Brownian Paths at Their Lifetimes. . . . . . . . . . 677
5. h-Brownian Motion from an Infinity of h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
6. Brownian Motion under Time Reversal 682
7. Preliminary Probabilistic Solution of the Dirichlet Problem for h-Harmonic
Functions; h-Brownian Motion Hitting Probabilities and the
Corresponding Generalized Reductions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
8. Probabilistic Boundary Limit and Internal Limit Theorems for Ratios of
Strictly Positive Superharmonic Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
9. Conditional Brownian Motion in a Ball. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
10. Conditional Brownian Motion Last Hitting Distributions; The Capacitary
Distribution of a Set in Terms of a Last Hitting Distribution 693
11. The Tail (J Algebra of a Conditional Brownian Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
12. Conditional Space-Time Brownian Motion 699
13. [Space-Time] Brownian Motion in [IRN ] IR N with Parameter Set IR. . . . . . . 700
Part 3
Chapter I
Lattices in Classical Potential Theory and Martingale Theory. . . . . . . 705
I. Correspondence between Classical Potential Theory and Martingale
Theory............... 705
2. Relations between Decomposition Components of S in Potential Theory
and Martingale Theory 706
3. The Classes LP and D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
4. PWB-Related Conditions on h-Harmonic Functions and on Martingales. 707
5. Class D Property versus Quasi-Boundedness 708
6. A Condition for Quasi-Boundedness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
7. Singularity of an Element ofS~ 710
8. The Singular Component of an Element of S+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
9. The Class Spqb .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • . . . . . . • . • . . . . . 712
10. The Class Sps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
II. Lattice Theoretic Analysis of the Composition of an h-Superharmonic
Function with an h-Brownian Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
12. A Decomposition ofS~s (Potential Theory Context). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
13. Continuation of Section II 717
Chapter II
Brownian Motion and the PWB Method. . . . ... . . .. . .... . .. ... .. 719
I. Context of the Problem .................................... 719
2. Probabilistic Analysis of the PWB Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
xviii Contents
Chapter III
Brownian Motion on the Martin Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
I. The Structure of Brownian Motion on the Martin Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
2. Brownian Motions from Martin Boundary Points (Notation of Section I) 728
3. The Zero-One Law at a Minimal Martin Boundary Point and the
Probabilistic Formulation of the Minimal-Fine Topology (Notation of
Section 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
4. The Probabilistic Fatou Theorem on the Martin Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
5. Probabilistic Approach to Theorem I.XI.4(c) and Its Boundary
Counterparts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
6. Martin Representation of Harmonic Functions in the Parabolic Context. 735
Appendixes
Appendix I
Analytic Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
I. Pavings and Algebras of Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
2. Suslin Schemes 741
3. Sets Analytic over a Product Paving 742
4. Analytic Extensions versus (J Algebra Extensions of Pavings. . . . . . . . . . . . 743
5. Projection Characterization .9I(iJ!!) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
6. The Operation .91(.91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
7. Projections of Sets in Product Pavings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
8. Extension of a Measurability Concept to the Analytic Operation Context. 745
9. The G6 Sets of a Complete Metric Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
10. Polish Spaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
11. The Baire Null Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
12. Analytic Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
13. Analytic Subsets of Polish Spaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Appendix II
Capacity Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 750
I. Choquet Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
2. Sierpinski Lemma. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
3. Choquet Capacity Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
4. Lusin's Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
5. A Fundamental Example of a Choquet Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
6. Strongly Subadditive Set Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
7. Generation of a Choquet Capacity by a Positive Strongly Subadditive Set
Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
8. Topological Precapacities 755
9. Universally Measurable Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Contents xix
Appendix III
Lattice Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
I. Introduction..................................................... 758
2. Lattice Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
3. Cones.......................................................... 758
4. The Specific Order Generated by a Cone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
5. Vector Lattices 760
6. Decomposition Property of a Vector Lattice 762
7. Orthogonality in a Vector Lattice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
8. Bands in a Vector Lattice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
9. Projections on Bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
10. The Orthogonal Complement of a Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
II. The Band Generated by a Single Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
12. Order Convergence ,... 765
13. Order Convergence on a Linearly Ordered Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 766
Appendix IV
Lattice Theoretic Concepts in Measure Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
I. Lattices of Set Algebras. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
2. Measurable Spaces and Measurable Functions 767
3. Composition of Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
4. The Measure Lattice of a Measurable Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
5. The (J Finite Measure Lattice of a Measurable Space (Notation ofSection 4) 771
6. The Hahn and Jordan Decompositions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
7. The Vector Lattice .Ita . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
8. Absolute Continuity and Singularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
9. Lattices of Measurable Functions on a Measure Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
10. Order Convergence of Families of Measurable Functions 775
II. Measures on Polish Spaces .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
12. Derivates of Measures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Appendix V
Uniform Integrability 779
Appendix VI
Kernels and Transition Functions .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
l.Kernels......................................................... 781
2. Universally Measurable Extension of a Kernel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
3. Transition Functions ................ 782
Appendix VII
Integral Limit Theorems .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
l. An Elementary Limit Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
2. Ratio Integral Limit Theorems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
3. A One-Dimensional Ratio Integral Limit Theorem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
4. A Ratio Integral Limit Theorem Involving Convex Variational Derivates. 788
xx Contents
Appendix VIII
Lower Semicontinuous Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 791
1. The Lower Semicontinuous Smoothing of a Function 791
2. Suprema of Families of Lower Semicontinuous Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
3. Choquet Topological Lemma...................................... 792
Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
Notation Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
Index ,. . . .. 829
Introduction
cesses in N space, with a common initial point and variance parameter, have
the same probability of hitting an analytic set. This fact is not trivial and
such questions are treated.
There is nothing very novel in this book. Potential theorists may find the
treatment of reductions on boundary sets of interest, as well as the use of
iterated reductions to obtain limit theorems. Correspondingly, probabilists
may find the new supermartingale crossing inequalities and the technique
of iterated reductions of supermartingales of interest. A new domination
principle for supermartingales illustrates the fact that classical potential
theory still suggests interesting probability results.
The author thanks Bruce Hajek, Naresh Jain and John Taylor for helpful
comments on various chapters and, finally, thanks his typist: usually faith-
ful, sometimes accurate.
Notation and Conventions
(1.1)
i B
(u ~v - v ~u) diN = J
DB
(uDnv - vDnu) diN-I' (1.2)
(1.3)
The right side of (1.3) is the flux of the vector field grad u out through oB.
2. Function Averages
The unweighted averages of a function u over oB(~, b) and over B(~, b) will
be denoted by L(u,~, b) and A(u,~, b), respectively; that is
(2.2)
Define
(2.3)
choosing CN so that 1tN J'ti r N- 1 YN(r)/ 1 (dr) = 1, and under the preceding hy-
potheses on u, define A.su for 15 > by °
A.su(~) = b- NLN YN('~ ~ tl')U(tl)/N(dtl)
(2.4)
= 1tNIOO rN-IYN(r)L(u,~, br)/1 (dr) (I~ - oDI > b).
The function A.su is infinitely differentiable, A.s I == I, and if u is continuous
lim~o A.su = u locally uniformly on D.
3. Harmonic Functions
A harmonic function is defined as a (finite-valued) continuous function u,
defined on a nonempty open subset of IR N , satisfying
i B(~.cl)
liudlN = 1tN <5 N - 1 ~L(u,~,<5). (3.3)
(c) ffu has a continuous extension to D u aD, the supremum and infimum
of the extension are attained on aD.
if N = 2,
(5.2)
if N > 2,
so that SN-l d/ds L(u, e,s) does not depend on s and since
-IOgr if N = 2
L(G(",,),e,r) = { 2 N (Ie - ,,1 < r). (5.4)
r - if N > 2
6. Gauss Integral Theorem 7
(The fact that this evaluation is valid when I~ - ,.,1 = r follows from an
easy continuity argument.)
If p. is a measure of Borel subsets of ~N the function Gp. defined by
(5.6)
is the potential of p.. We shall discuss the convergence of this integral later.
It is clear however that if p.(IR N) < + 00, the integral converges absolutely
at every point not in the closed support A of p. and thereby defines a con-
tinuous function on ~N - A. The function is harmonic on this domain
because it has the harmonic function average property there.
(6.1)
where
21t if N = 2,
(6.2)
1t~ {
= (N _ 2)1t N if N > 2.
(6.3)
aew,,) 1<
- NIJ'~ - nl
l aG(e~ l- N
Of ,
N;:::2.
(7.1)
(7.2)
o <p ~ I, (e,,,)ED x D,
then ul D is in class C I2l (D), satisfies the Poisson equation liu = -1t~f, and
(7.3)
Here (jij is the usual Kronecker symbol; that is, «(jij) is the identity matrix.
Proof of (a). Since G(e,·) is locally IN integrable, the integral for Gp.converges
absolutely under the hypotheses of (a). Define Glkl as G /\ logk when N = 2
and as G /\ k N - 2 when N > 2. Then Glklp. is continuous and
logk.
consty If N = 2,
IGp. - Glklp.1 ~
1 const
k2
'fN
I >.
2
Hence limk _ oo Glklp. = Gp. uniformly on ~N, and we conclude that u = Gp.
is continuous. In view of (7.1) the integral in (7.2) is absolutely convergent.
7. The Smoothness of Potentials; The Poisson Equation 9
and define
and denote the four terms on the right by I, II, III, IV, respectively. Observe
that each integrand vanishes for '1 outside B(~, lX).
10 1.1. Introduction to the Mathematical Background of Classical Potential Theory
The difference between I and the integral on the right side of (7.3) is at
most const So rrll l (dr) for a < Ie - aDI; so when a -+ 0, the term I has the
integral on the right side of (7.3) as a limit uniformly on compact subsets
of D.
If i i= j in II, the integral over B(e, a) vanishes because the integrand is
odd in e(i) - 17(i). If i = j in II, the integral becomes
(7.4)
The integral is the same for all i, and it is equal to the average of its values
for i = 1, ... , N. Hence
IV =
Under the hypotheses of (b) the flux evaluation (1.3) yields, whenever B
is a smooth domain with closure in D,
ioB(~.cl)
G(~, '1)Dn~uIN-l (d'1) - f
oB(~.cl)
u('1)Dn~G(~, ·)IN-l (d'1)
= r [G(~,'1)Dn~u - u('1)Dn~G(~")]IN-l(d'1)
JOD
(8.1)
- JD-B(~.cl)
r _ G(~, '1) ~u('1)IN(d'1).
Since Dnu is bounded, the first integral on the left is majorized in absolute
value by const b Ilog b I if N = 2 and by const b 2 if N > 2; so this integral
tends to 0 when b ~ O. The second integral on the left is equal to -1t~L(u, ~,b)
for N ~ 2 and therefore has limit -1t~u(~) when b ~ O. Thus when b -+ 0
in (8.1), we find
u(~) = ~
1tN
i [G(~,
oD
'1)Dn u - u('7)Dn G(~, ')]IN-t (d'7)
~ ~
(8.2)
- ~ r G(~, '7) ~u('7)IN(tbT)
1tN JD
12 1.1. Introduction to the Mathematical Background of Classical Potential Theory
u(e) = -~
7tN
i
iJD"
u('7)Dn GD(e, ·)IN-l (m,) - ~
7tN
f D
GD(e, '7) !J.u('7)IN(d'7).
(8.3)
In particular
(8.4)
8. Harmonic Measure and the Riesz Decomposition 13
(8.5)
u(e) = i
iJD
u(r()J1.D(e,dr() + GDv(e), (8.6)
u(e) = r u(r()J1.D(e,dr().
JiJD
(8.7)
°
the defining average property of harmonic functions.
More generally, if /1u ~ and u> 0, (8.6) exhibits u as the sum of a
positive harmonic function and the Green potential of a positive measure.
One of the principal aims of the general theory is to generalize this result
(the Riesz decomposition, Section IV.8) by dropping the smoothness con-
ditions on u, D, and GD •
Chapter II
(= 10gl~1 e=0)
if
with the understanding that GB(c;, c;) = + 00, satisfies items (i')-(iv') of
Section 1.8, so that harmonic measure for B is given by
(1.3)
The function K(", 0) is harmonic on IR N - {,,} because GB(o,,,) is, and K(Yf, 0)
is normalized to be I at the origin. The function GB is symmetric, positive
(= + 00 when the arguments are equal), and increases with <5. Moreover
I. The Green Function of a Ball; The Poisson Integral 15
+ if N = 2,
lim GB(~' rt) = { 00 (1.5)
~-+<x> G(~, rt) if N> 2.
Since GB(·, rt) is harmonic on B - {rt}, all the partial derivatives of this
function are also harmonic there so that in particular the harmonic measure
density in (1.2) defines a harmonic function of ~ on B. It follows that if jJ.
is a finite measure of Borel subsets of oB, the Poisson integral (PI)
«(eoB). (1.7)
Combining (1.7) with the corresponding inequality for inferior limits, it follows
that u has limit f( 0 at ( iff is continuous at (.
this boundary limit property because the difference between two such func-
tions is harmonic on B with limit 0 at every boundary point and therefore
vanishes identically in view of the harmonic function maximum minimum
theorem. The function u is thus the unique solution of the classical first
boundary (Dirichlet) problem for hannonic functions on B. A generalized
form of this problem for the relevant class of open subsets of!R N is treated
in Chapter VIII.
If u is a finite-valued function defined and continuous on the closure of
a ball Band hannonic on B, u = PI(B, u) on B because u is the unique
solution of the Dirichlet problem for the boundary function ul oB ' This result
weakens the conditions under which (1.3) was derived using the general
theory in Section 1.8.
If u is any Borel measurable function on an open subset D of !R N , if B
is a ball with closure in D, and ifthe restriction of u to oB is IN-I integrable,
we define
rBu = {PI(B, u) on B,
(1.8)
u on D-B.
2. Harnack's Inequality
Let A be a compact subset of the open connected subset D of !R N • There is a
function (A, D) 1-+ c(A, D) such that if u is harmonic and strictly positive on D,
Thus
(2.3)
Let D be a nonempty open subset of lR N , and let ~(D) be the class of Borel
subsets of D. Let{up,peI} be a family of superharmonic functions on D,
indexed by a set I. If (I, fF, A) is a finite measure space and if the function
(~,P)f-+Up(~) is measurable from (D x I,~(D) x fF) into (lR,~(~)), then
the function u' = II up A(dP) satisfies the superharmonic function average
inequality,
valid, and then if B = B(~, <», the inequality 'tBU(~):S; u(~) is condition
Section 4(c).
(d) In the definition ofa superharmonic function in Section 4 condition (c)
[or equivalently (c /)] there need be supposed true only for sufficiently small
<>, depending on~, because the reasoning leading to (a) of the present section
used only this weakened condition, and (a) implies Section 4(c) when
B = B(~,<».
(e) In (a) the function 'tBU is superharmonic on D because according to
Section 1 this function is lower semicontinuous, and it is trivial that for
~ in D the inequality 'tBU(~) 2:: L('tBU,~, <» is valid for sufficiently small <>.
More generally, if B is a ball with closure in D, if u is superharmonic on D,
and if v is a function defined and superharmonic on B, with v 2:: 'tBU on B,
then the function v' (equal on B to v /\ u and on D - B to u) lies between
u and 'tBU from which it follows easily that v'is superharmonic on D.
(f) If u is superharmonic on D and if ~ E D, the functions <> f-+ L(u, ~, <»,
<>f-+A(u,~,<»,and<>f-+A"u(~)aremonotonedecreasingforO < <> < I~ - aDI,
with limit u(~) when <> -+ O. To prove the monotoneity of L(u,~,·) observe
that if Bi = B(~'<>i) with <>1 < <>2 < I~ - aDI, then the inequality 'tB 2 'tB,U:S;
'tB U reduces at ~ to L(u,~, <>2) :s; L(u,~, <>1)' Next apply the lower semicon-
1
tinuity of u and Fatou's lemma to derive the inequality
and thereby complete the proof of (f) for L(u,~,·). The corresponding
results for A(u,~,·) and A.u(~) follow from 1(2.2) and 1(2.4). The latter
results imply that the relation u 2:: v or u = v, if satisifed IN almost every-
where on their domain of definition D by superharmonic functions u and v,
is satisfied everywhere on D.
The preceding results imply the truth of a slight strengthening of the
lower semicontinuity property of a superharmonic function u, namely,
when B(~, 0) c D. Now suppose that 00 > 0 and that </>~ is defined and
satisfies the conditions imposed on </>~ above, for 0 < 0 < 00 , Then if u is a
function on the open set D, satisfying the superharmonic function defining
conditions (a) and (b) of Section 4, together with (6.2) for sufficiently small
0, depending on ~, the function is superharmonic. This assertion has already
been proved for </>~(,) = NO-N,N-l, in which case the right-hand side of(6.2)
reduces to A (u, ~, 0), and the proof needs no change in the general case.
EXAMPLE (The Fundamental Kernel and the Green Function ofa Ball). If the
fundamental kernel G is defined on ~N x ~N, by 1(5.2) the function G(~,·) is
for each point ~ harmonic on ~N - {~} and is superharmonic on ~N. In fact
we have noted in Section 1.5 that this function is harmonic on ~N - {e}.
Moreover this function is continuous on ~N, and in view of the local nature of
superharmonicity proved in (d) above we need only observe, to prove that
the function is superharmonic on ~N, that the superharmonic function
average inequality is trivially satisfied at ~. Similarly, if B is a ball, the Green
function GB is defined on B x B by (l.l), and for each point ~ of B, GB(~'·)
is harmonic on B - {e} and superharmonic on D.
(8.2)
Proof of (b). We prove (b) for u superharmonic; the proof for u harmonic
is easier and is left to the reader. Since u is locally lower bounded we can
assume in the proof of (b), at the expense of increasing a and decreasing b,
that u is lower bounded on D. In addition suppose first that u is bounded
on D. Since a space rotation around the origin preserves superharmonicity,
integrating over all rotations (see the remark in Section 4 on positive integral
operations on superharmonic functions) yields the fact that the function
~ ~ L(u, 0, I~I) is superharmonic on D, as asserted in (b). If u is not bounded
and n E 7r, the function u 1\ n is a bounded superharmonic function on D;
so the function ~ ~ L(u 1\ n, 0, I~I) is superharmonic on D and when n -+ 00,
we find that the function ~ ~ L(u, 0, I~I) is either superharmonic or identically
+ 00. The latter case is excluded because u is locally IN integrable so (by
Fubini's theorem) L(u, 0, b) < + 00 for II almost every b in ]a, bE. 0
II. Examples 25
11. Examples
(a) Suppose that N = 2 and let I be a not identically vanishing analytic
function on the connected open set D. The real and imaginary parts of I
are harmonic because they satisfy Laplace's equation, alternatively because
the Cauchy integral formula applied to a ball yields the harmonic function
average property for f Taking absolute values in this average relation we
conclude that III is subharmonic and therefore (Section 9) that I/lp is
subharmonic whenp ~ l. Actually I/lp is subharmonic whenp > 0 because
I/lp = IPI is the absolute value of an analytic function in a neighborhood
of a nonzero of f, and it is trivial that the subharmonic function average
property is satisfied at a zero off Similar reasoning shows that log III =
Re (log/) is subharmonic when defined as - 00 at a zero ofI and is harmonic
on the nonzero set off Since /IIP for p > 0 is a monotone increasing convex
function of log III, we have again that I/lp is subharmonic.
(b) If N = 2 and if/is analytic on B(O, (5) and does not vanish identically,
and if p > 0, the function I/IP is subharmonic so
and Au;S; O. When <5 -+ + 00, this equation becomes impossible unless
Au == 0; so u must be harmonic and, according to Section 2, must therefore
be identically constant. [Alternatively, the fact that u must be harmonic
e,
follows from the fact that (Section 10) the function <51-+ L(u, (5) is a positive
concave decreasing function of log <5 for 0 < <5 < + 00 and so must be
identically constant.]
Application. Liouville's classical theorem that a bounded holomorphic
function f on the complex plane is identically constant is a special case of
the fact that the plane is not Greenian. We need only observe that the real
and imaginary parts of the function f are bounded harmonic functions and
therefore can be made positive by addition of suitable constants.
Observe that the trace on IRN of the image of a Greenian subset of IR N
under inversion in a sphere is Greenian.
(14.1)
Observe that lui in (a3) and <1'(lul) in (b2) are subharmonic functions; so
L(lul, 0,') and L(<1'(lul), 0,') are monotone increasing functions on ]0,15[.
In (a) the signed measure Mu is the zero measure if and only if u = 0, and
Mu ~ 0 if and only if u ~ O. In (b) the functionfu vanishes IN-I almost every-
where if and only if u = 0, and fu ~ 0 IN-I almost everywhere if arid only
if u ~ O. The functionfu will be identified in Section 15 as the nontangential
boundary limit function of u.
whenever fis continuous on oB. Using the fact that I" - r~/lJl = I~ - r,,/lJl
for ~ and" on oB, an interchange of orders of integration yields
(14.3)
J
By Theorem I the right-hand side has limit oBfdJ1. when r -+ lJ, as was to
be proved.
The relation between L 1(J1.B_) harmonic functions on B and signed mea-
sures on oB is obviously linear and positivity preserving. If the space ofsigned
measures on oB is ordered by setting J1.1 ~ J1.2 when the difference J1.1 - J1.2 is
positive, the relation u ¢> M u is order preserving. Since the space of signed
measures on oB is a conditionally complete vector lattice (Appendix IV.7),
30 I.II. Basic Properties of Harmonic, Subharmonic, and Superharmonic Functions
so (b3) is true.
(b3) = (bl) Since (b3) is stronger than (a4), u = PI(B, MJ, and we have
proved above that the signed measure IJ., tends to My (vague convergence)
when r ..... (j. Now the uniform integrability described in (b3) is equivalent to
uniform integrability of the family {,p-"" u(r'1I(j), ! < r < (j} offunctions on
oB relative to the measure IN-I' Hence (Appendix V) there is a strictly
monotone increasing sequence r. with limit (j for which the sequence
(14.5)
is an increasing sequence (up to IN-t null sets) with limit some function f,
and the equation Un = PI(B,fu) becomes in the limit U = PI(B,f).
Observation. If U E D(jlD-) in the theorem, we have proved that limr....cJJlr =
M u (vague convergence of signed measures on oB), where Jlr is the signed
measure defined by (14.2). This convergence, or alternatively, a slight varia-
tion of the convergence proof, shows that if Vr is the signed measure on Ii
supported by oB(O, r) and defined by
whenever both the indicated derivate and the symmetric derivate dl~/dMh(O
exist.
32 1.11. Basic Properties of Harmonic, Subharmonic, and Superharmonic Functions
(15.2)
16. Minimal Harmonic Functions 33
so that
(15.3)
(a> 0),
(15.4)
. lJ N - 1
11m
0-+0 (Xh
(lJ) < + 00. (15.5)
with U 1 and U 2 distinct elements ofr. But thenpu 1 and qU2 must be multiples
of u with values p and q, respectively, at ~o, so u = U 1 = u 2 , contrary to
hypothesis. Conversely, if u is an extremal element of r and if v is harmonic
on D with 0 ::; v ::; u, then either (a) v vanishes at ~o and so vanishes iden-
tically or (b) u - v vanishes at ~o and so vanishes identically or
The two functions in the braces are in r and so must be identical. Thus v
is a constant multiple of u in all three cases.
34 1.11. Basic Properties of Harmonic, Subharmonic, and Superharmonic Functions
EXAMPLE. Let D = B(O, (5) and let K be the normalized Poisson kernel density
function,
2. Generalization of Theorem 1
Theorem I is included in the following theorem but was proved separately
because of the importance of its constructive proof.
In the following theorem the trivial inequality '1- .::;; u is stated for complete-
ness and to facilitate reference.
(3.2)
and
(a) u is superharmonic.
+
(b) u+ = u on each open set on which u is superharmonic.
(c) u+ = U IN almost everywhere.
(d) There is a countable subset of r whose lower envelope has the same
lower semicontinuous smoothing u.+
so that u(e) is at least equal to the last term on the right, and therefore
(3.1) implies (3.2). Since Un is superharmonic,
(3.3)
so that
Application to GMDr
set D is part of the context but is omitted from the notation. In most ap-
plications A cD. According to the Fundamental Convergence Theorem
in the preceding section, the lower semicontinuous smoothed reduction
R+vA is majorized by R:, is superharmonic, and coincides IN almost everywhere
on D with R:. (According to the more refined version of this theorem in
Section VI.1, the set {R: > R A
+v
} is not only IN null but polar, a more re-
lJ:
strictive characterization to be defined in Section V.I, and it will be proved
in Section VIA that R: = on D - A.) The notation ~V~A will sometimes
be used instead of R+vA •
Obviously R: and R+vA increase when A or. v increases. Moreover the
reduction operation is subadditive in the sense that
(4.1)
EXAMPLE (c). Let D be a ball with center the origin, and let v be a positive
harmonic function on D with Riesz-Herglotz representation (Section 11.14)
v= r K(", ·)Mv(d,,).
JaD
(4.2)
(4.3)
for every Borel boundary subset A. The first equality in (4.3) is trivial
because R~ is harmonic. Denote the integral on the right by VA' If u is a
positive superharmonic function on D that majorizes v near A and if A o
is a closed subset of A, the difference u - VA o is superharmonic on D and
positive near A o . Moreover the fact that lim~~,K(·,~) = 0 uniformly on
A o when (e oD - A o implies that VA o has boundary limit 0 on oD - A o .
Hence u - VA o has a positive inferior limit at every boundary point of D,
and the superharmonic function minimum theorem implies that u - VA o ~ 0;
so R~ ~ VAo' If Al is an open boundary superset of A, then lim~~,K(·,~) = 0
uniformly on oD - Al when (eA; so V - VA I has boundary limit 0 at every
point of A. Hence, if e> 0 the function VA I + e majorizes V near A, and
it follows that VA 1 ~ R~. Thus VA 0 :s; R~ :s; VA 1 , and this inequality implies
the desired equality (4.3).
EXAMPLE (d). Let D be a Greenian subset of IR N , let B be an open relatively
compact subset of D, and let V be a positive superharmonic function on D,
finite and continuous at each point of oB. Then R~-B = GMBv on B. In fact,
on the one hand, R~-B is harmonic on B and is majorized by V on B; so
R~-B :s; GMBv on B. On the other hand, if u is a positive superharmonic
function on D, with u ~ V on D - B, and if Vo is a harmonic function on
B and is majorized by V on B, then u - Vo is superharmonic on B and has
a positive inferior limit at every point of oB and so is positive on B, and it
follows that R~-B ~ GMBv on B.
5. Reduction Properties 41
5. Reduction Properties
To prove (5.lsm), observe that in view of(5.1) and the Fundamental Con-
vergence Theorem the right sides are superharmonic functions majorized
by R~ and therefore by R+vA , and the reverse inequalities are trivial.
If A n aD is compact, the sets B in (5.1) and (5.lsm) need only run through
a decreasing sequence of relatively compact open neighborhoods of A noD
with that set as intersection.
(b) If p is a positive superharmonic function on D with GMvp = 0, if
A c aD, and if v is a positive superharmonic function on D, then R~+p = R~.
In particular, R: = O. This property follows from the inequality
(5.2)
and also prove the corresponding inequality (5.2sm) for smoothed reduc-
tions. In particular, if GMDv = 0 then R: = R:C\D and R+vA = RAC\D.
+v
In fact,
if VI is a positive superharmonic function on D, majorizing v near A (') aD
and if V2 ij. a positive superharmonic function on D, majorizing v' on A (') D,
then VI + V2 ~ R:, and therefore
(5.3)
(5.4)
and this inequality combines with (5.3) to yield (5.2). Equality (5.2) implies
that the corresponding equality for smoothed reductions, an equality be-
tween two superharmonic functions, is true IN almost everywhere on D
and therefore is true everywhere on D.
(d) R: = R A whenever A (') D is open. If A is open, this property was
pointed out in +Section 4, and the more general property follows from (5.2)
and (5.2sm).
(e) If v is finite valued and continuous at each point of A (') D, then
u= u~ + u;. (7.1)
(7.2)
(7.3)
(l.l)
clear that GD J1. is superharmonic if J1. has compact support in D because this
potential is fmite off that support. More generally GD J1. is superharmonic if
J1.(D) < + 00 because if J1.1 is the projection of J1. on a ball B with closure in
D and if J1.2 is the projection of J1. on D - B, then GD J1. = GDJ1.1 + GD J1.2'
GDJ1.1 is superharmonic because J1.1 has compact support in D, and GD J1.2 is
superharmonic because this potential is finite on B. Moreover, if GD J1. is
superharmonic and if Do is an open J1. null subset of D, the potential GD J1.
is harmonic on Do because this potential is Borel measurable and satisfies
the harmonic function average property on Do.
If J1. has compact support in the special open set D, the Lebesgue dominated
°
convergence theorem when applied in (1.1) yields the fact that the potential
GDJ1. has limit at every boundary point of D, because the function GD(-, 11)
has this property and is uniformly bounded in a neighborhood of when oD
11 is restricted to a compact subset of D. More generally, if D is a Greenian
subset of ~N and if J1. is a measure on D with GD J1. superharmonic, it will be
shown that in various senses the potential GD J1., in particular GD (',l1) for
fixed 11 in D, has boundary limit function 0. See, for example, Section VilA,
VIII.11, XII.l9, XII.23, and 2X.8.
°
then not a positive function. Observe first that for an arbitrary measure J1.
on ~2 and m > the integrand in
Um(e) = i
B(O.m)
G(e,l1)J1.(dl1)= r
JB(o.m)
logle-111- 1J1.(dl1), (1.2)
Um(e) = r
JB(o.m)
log(nle -111- 1 )J1.(dl1) - J1.(B(O,m))logn, n > m > 0,
(1.3)
the integrand is positive for e in B(O, n - m). The reasoning used above in
discussing potentials of measures on balls and on ~N when N > 2 when
applied to the function defined by the integral in (1.3) shows that Um is a
superharmonic function on B(O, n - m) and is harmonic on each J1. null open
subset of B(O, n - m). Since n can be chosen arbitrarily large, the function
U m is a superharmonic function on ~2 and is harmonic on ~2 - B(O, m)
and on each open J1. null subset of B(O, m). In particular, if J1. has compact
support and if m is so large that B(O, m) contains this support, it follows
that GJ1. is superharmonic and is harmonic on the complement of the
2. Examples 47
the condition p.(1R 2 ) < + <Xl is necessary but not sufficient for (1.4). See
Section 9 for a further analysis of superhannonic functions on 1R 2 .
2. Examples
on B(O,<5),
on IR N - B(O, (5) (N) 2), (2.1)
GB(O.D)P. = Gp. - N
a- + 2
on B(O, a) if a> <5.
In fact the potential Gp. must be a function of the distance 1111 from the origin,
must be superharmonic, and must be hannonic on IR N - oB(O, (5), and there-
fore (according to Section 11.10) must be a concave function of 111I- N + 2 , and
48 l.IV. Potentials on Special Open Sets
l"r
°
N 2
must be a linear function of + on each open component of ~N -
oB(O, b). Finally, this potential is b- N + 2 at the origin and has limit at 00.
Hence the first two lines of (2.1) are correct. If a> b, the difference GJ.l.-
GB(O.a)J.l. is a function of 1,,1, defined and harmonic on B(O, a), with limit
GJ.l. = a- N + 2 at the boundary. Hence (maximum-minimum theorem for har-
monic functions) this difference is identically a- N + 2 ; so the third line of(2.1)
is correct.
Similarly
on B(O,b),
on ~2 - B(O, b) (N = 2), (2.2)
on B(O, a) if a> b.
(2.3)
and it follows from (2.1) and (2.2) that for N ~ 2 the function of (~,,,)
defined by (2.3) is continuous on jRN x ~N. If a> b and if ~ E B(O, a - b), the
difference GJ.l.~lJ - GB(O.lJ)J.l.~lJ = h is harmonic on B(O, a); so
(2.4)
We defer the prooffor Greenian sets and suppose that D is special. Since
sUPn Jl.iA) < + 00, the function u = limn.... co GDJl.n is finite on D - A and is
therefore superharmonic on D. Apply Fubini's theorem and the fact that
(~, 11)1-+ L(GD (11, .),~, r) is continuous (Section 2) to deduce
5. Smoothing of a Potential
(5.1)
The proof will be given for D = [RN and requires only trivial changes for
D a ball but the remarks validating the proof for a general Greenian set are
deferred to Section VII.8. It is sufficient to prove the result for A relatively
compact in [RN, and therefore it can be supposed, replacing J.l and v by their
projections on a ball containing A if necessary, that J.l and v have compact
supports. According to Section 5, the functions Aa(GJ.l), AiGv) are infi-
nitely differentiable potentials of measures J.la, Va with respective densities
-t:!Aa(GJ.l)/n~, -t:!Aa(Gv)/n~ relative to IN' Since these densities are equal
on the set {¢ E A: I¢ - i)A I > (l(}, the projections of J.la and Va on this set are
identical, and since J.la and Va have vague limits J.l and v when (l( -+ 0, the
projections of J.l and v on A are identical, as was to be proved.
(7.1)
onD.
(7.2)
52 l.IV. Potentials on Special Open Sets
on D, where J1.a. is the measure on D with density - /)'Aa.u/1t~ relative to IN' The
value of J1.a.(D) can be found by applying the Gauss integral theorem (inte-
grate over aD), and since Aa.u = Uon D, J1.iD) does not depend on a. Thus as
a ~ 0 along a suitable sequence J1.a. has a vague limit measure J1.o supported by
A. Applying Theorem 4, we find that if J1.A is the projection of J1.o on A, then
U = {GBJ1.0 + PI(D, u) on D,
(7.3)
GJ1.A +hA on A,
where hA is harmonic on A, and we have used the fact that GBJ1.A and GJ1.A
differ on A by a harmonic function.
Observation. It follows from Theorem 6 that the map U1-+ J1. from super-
harmonic functions into their associated measures is additive (u11-+ J1.1 and
U21-+J1.2 imply that U1 + U21-+J1.1 + J1.2) and positive homogeneous (UI-+J1.
implies that cu 1-+ CJ1. for c a positive constant).
°
(d) The smoothed reduction RA.
+u
is a potential if A is a relatively compact
subset of D (because GMDRA.
+u
= according to Theorem 111.6).
~ L(u,~,fJ)-L(u,~,I)= ( J:~)
U 1-+ I ~ m u, .. , u
- ogu
100
Proof (a) Ifu is harmonic on 1R 2 the function m(u, 0, (5) vanishes identically;
so m(u) = 0. Conversely, if u is superharmonic on 1R 2 and m(u) = 0, then
e,
since m(u, 0) is a positive increasing function on the interval] I, + 00[, it
follows that this function vanishes on the interval; that is, L(u, 0) is a e,
e,
constant function there. Since L(u, 0) is a decreasing concave function of
e,
10g<5 for <5 > 0, it follows that L(u, 0) is identically constant; that is, u
satisfies the harmonic function average equality and so is harmonic.
(b) and (c) The condition (9.1) that GJi be superharmonic was derived
in Section I [see (1.4)] in a trivially different form. If (9.1) is satisfied, the
evaluation of L(G(e, 0), 0, 0) in Section 2 or Section I.5 yields
(9.5)
= -g(<5) log <5 - [ logsdg(s).
JJ<l,+oo[
(9.7)
Now (9.5) with Ji replaced by Jio yields the equality L(GJio' 0, (5) =
-g(<5-)log<5. Furthermore the function n--+L(ho,O,r) is continuous and
equal to hiO) for r < <5; so L(h6 , 0, (5) = hiO). Hence
For fixed '1 the function <5 f--+ GJii'1) is monotone decreasing on the interval
]1 + 1'11, +00[, so the function <5f--+ho('1) is increasing on this interval.
Hence (Harnack convergence theorem) either limo_ oo ho = + 00 on 1R 2 or
limo_ oo ho = h is a harmonic function on 1R 2 . In view of (9.8) the first case
is excluded by (9.3). Hence in the limit (9.7) yields the fact that GJi is super-
harmonic and u = GJi + h. Moreover from (9.8)
10. An Approximation Theorem 55
and as noted in the proof of (c), the value g(b) can be replaced by Jl(1R 2 )
in this limit relation. Thus (9.4) is true for ~ = 0 and therefore for all ~
since ~ rather than the origin can be chosen as the reference point in this
discussion. 0
no
subset A of D, then Un = u outside a compact neighborhood An of A with
A n+! C An and An = A.
and define Un by
A v on DZn + 1 '
Un = "n+n (10.2)
{ on DZk+l - DZk - 1 for k > n.
A"k V+n
1. Definition
A polar subset of IR N is a set to each point of which corresponds an open
neighborhood of the point that carries a superharmonic function equal to
+ 00 at each point of the set in the neighborhood. An inner polar set is a
set whose compact subsets are polar. It will be shown in Section VI.2 that
an analytic inner polar set is polar. If a set is (inner) polar its Kelvin trans-
forms are also.
In particular, the set of infinities of a superharmonic function is a polar
subset of its domain. Conversely, it will be shown (Theorem 2) that a polar
set is always a subset of the set of infinities ofa single superharmonic function
defined on IR N .
The polar sets are the negligible sets of classical potential theory. An
assumption about points of IR N true except for the points of an [inner]
polar set is said to be true [inner] quasi everywhere. A subset of an [inner]
polar set is [inner] polar. A singleton g} is polar because G(e, 0) is super-
harmonic on IR N and equal to + 00 at e. Although the point 00 is not in
IR N , that point is considered a Euclidean boundary point of every unbounded
set. In a context allowing 00 in the domain of harmonic and superharmonic
functions, this point is polar for N = 2 but not for N > 2.
Since a superharmonic function on an open subset of IR N is IN integrable
on every closed ball in its domain, and since every polar set A can be covered
by a countable number of open sets, each carrying a positive superharmonic
function with value + 00 on the part of A in its domain, a polar set has
IN measure O. It follows that an IN measurable inner polar set also has IN
measure O.
If u and v are superharmonic functions on an open subset of IRN and
if u = v inner quasi everywhere, or if u ~ v inner quasi everywhere, then
the same relation holds IN almost everywhere and therefore [Section 11.6(0]
everywhere.
58 l.V. Polar Sets and Their Applications
e
To prove the theorem suppose that E IR N - A and apply the LindelOf
covering theorem to cover A by balls Bo , B 1 , .•• so small that is not in e
any ball closure and that to each ball Bk corresponds a function Uk defined
and superharmonic on an open neighborhood of lik and identically + 00
on Bk n A. Let J1.k be the projection on Bk of the Riesz measure associated
with Uk; choose a strictly positive constant Ck so small that CkJ1.k(Bk) < r k,
that CkIGJ1.k(e)1 < r\ and if N = 2, that Ck Ie:' log 1'71 J1.k(d'7) < r k. The super-
harmonic potential G:EO' CkJ1.k is + 00 on A and finite at e.
Observation (a). Since the set of infinities of a superharmonic function
v is the GlJ setnO'{v > n}, every polar set is a subset of a GlJ polar set.
Observation (b). Since a superharmonic function is IN-l integrable on
every ball boundary in its domain, a polar set meets a ball boundary in
an IN-l null set.
Observation (c). The complement of a closed polar subset A of IR N is
connected. To see this, let B be an open connected component of IR N - A,
let u be a superharmonic function on IR N , identically + 00 on A, and define
v = + 00 on B and v = u on IR N - B. The function v satisfies the conditions
for a function to be superharmonic on IR N except for the finiteness condition.
Hence v is either identically + 00 or superharmonic. Both alternatives are
impossible unless IR N - A is connected.
Observation (d). If D is an open subset of IR N , the set IR N - D is polar
if and only if the finite part 0°D = ~ n oD of the boundary is polar, and
then 0° D = IR N - D. In fact, if 0° D is polar, its complement is connected
and everywhere dense and so is equal to D, and therefore IR N - D = 0° D
is polar. Conversely, if IR N - D is polar, the set D is everywhere dense; so
0°D = IR N - D is polar.
Extension. If D is a Greenian subset of IR N and if A is a polar subset of D,
then there is a positive function superharmonic on D and identically + 00 on A.
This function can be chosen to be the potential GD J1. ofa measure J1. with J1.(D)
finite and to be finite at any preassigned point of D - A.
If D is special, the proof of Theorem 2 for N > 2 with IR N replaced by
D and G replaced by GD is valid in the present context. This same proof
will be valid in the case of general Greenian D once (Section VII. 1) G D
has been defined.
4. Properties of Polar Sets 59
e
In fact, if A o , At, ... are polar, if E IR N - U~ A k, and if Ilk is a measure
on IR N with IGllk(e) I + Ilk(IR N ) < r k, with Gllk = + 00 on A k and (if N = 2)
with ff log 1'1 IIlk(d,O < rk, then the superharmonic potential G(I:~ Ilk) is
+00 on U~ A k •
Since singletons are polar, this theorem implies that countable sets are
polar. For example, suppose that A is a countable dense subset of IR N , and
let u be a superharmonic function on IR N , equal to + 00 on A. The set of
infinities of u is a polar dense G" set and therefore is not countable.
It will be shown in Section VI.2 that an analytic inner polar set is polar.
According to Theorem 3, if u and v are superharmonic functions on an
open subset of IR N and if v :5 u inner quasi everywhere on an Fa set A, then
this inequality must hold quasi everywhere on A because the set
Proof (a) => (b) Has already been proved for D = IR N • The proof for a
ball is similar.
(b) => (c) Let u be a positive superharmonic function on D, identically
+ 00 on A. Then (for n ~ 1) u/n ~ u on A; so R~ :5 u/n, and therefore
R~ = 0 at every point where u is finite. Hence the positive superharmonic
60 I. V. Polar Sets and Their Applications
function R+uA has a zero and accordingly must vanish identically (super-
harmonic function minimum theorem).
A
(c) => (d) The result follows because R
+u
= R: IN almost everywhere.
(d) => (a) The result follows because if R:(~) = 0, there is a function
Vn positive superharmonic on D, ~ u on A, ~ Tn at ~, so that I:O'vn is
superharmonic on D, identically + 00 on A. 0
Special Case
· 'f
Iog I,., - ..1'1>
IlmIn u(rf) 'fN 2
~-+{ -
-00 1 =, (5.4)
lim infu(,.,) I,., - ~IN-2 > -00 if N> 2.
~-+{
Then Theorem 5 implies that there is a constant C such that the function
u + clog I· - ~1 if N = 2,
u- cl· - ~12-N if N > 2
with the extension must be supported by g}, there is a constant c such that
the function U + c log I· - ~ I has a superharmonic extension u' to B u {~}
and that the Riesz measure associated with u' vanishes identically. Hence
u' is harmonic. Observe that by way of inversion in a sphere of center ~ the
result just obtained implies that if v is a function defined and harmonic on
a deleted open neighborhood of the point 00 of ~N and if
v - clog 1·1 if N = 2,
(v - c)I·I N
-
2
if N > 2
A= 0 {(EoD:I(I::;n,liminfU(tT)::;C-!},
n=l ~-{ n
the set A is polar if it is inner polar. Thus Theorem 7 is true if "quasi every"
is replaced by "inner quasi every."
To prove the theorem, observe that according to Theorem 2 if N> 2
there is a positive superharmonic function v on IR N, identically + 00 on A;
if N = 2 and D is bounded, there is a positive superharmonic function v on
a ball containing 15, identically + 00 on A. In either case if e > 0 the function
(u + ev)ID is superharmonic on D with inferior limit ~ c at every point of
oD, including 00 if N > 2 and D is unbounded. Hence u + ev ~ c on D by
the superharmonic function minimum theorem of Section 11.5, and therefore
u ~ c quasi everywhere on D and so everywhere on D. If N = 2 and D is
unbounded, we can suppose that lim inf~_<x> u(l'f) ~ c because the plane can
be inverted in a circle with center a finite boundary point of D not in A,
so that the transformed superharmonic function on the image of D has this
property. Thus if c' < c, there is a disk B so large that u ~ c' on D - B. The
part of the theorem already proved yields the inequality u ~ c' on D n B
from which it follows that u ~ c on D, as was to be proved.
8. Evans-Vasilesco Theorem
(8.2)
Now rEB(e,<5)nA when 'EB(e,<5/2) because Ie - 'I < <5/2; so the right
side of (8.3) has limit 0 when <5 ~ 0, by (8.1). That is, GJ1. is continuous at e,
as was to be proved. When N = 2, the only change needed in the preceding
argument is that in (8.3) it should be supposed that <5 < ! to ensure positivity
of the potentials involved, and the last term in (8.3) should be replaced by
then necessarily bounded because this potential has limit 0 at every boundary
point of D. For arbitrary Greenian D the boundedness of a continuous
finite-valued potential GDJ1. for J1. of compact support in D follows from the
boundedness properties of GD to be proved in Section VII.5.
Recall our convention that "supported by A" means that A is J1. measur-
able and that the complement of A is J1. null. The generality of the statement
of the theorem is convenient for reference, but there is no loss of generality
in supposing that A is a Borel set because there is always a Borel support
of J1. that is a subset of A. Apply Lusin's theorem to find a sequence A. of
disjoint compact subsets of A with the property that J-l(A - U~=o An) = 0
and that (G DJ1.)IA n is bounded and continuous. If J1.n is the projection of J1.
on An, the continuous function (G DJ1.)IA n is the sum of the restrictions to An
of the lower semicontinuous functions GDJ1.n and GD(J-l - J-ln)' Hence these
restrictions are continuous, and therefore (by the observation in Section 8)
GDJ1.n is bounded and continuous on D unless D = 1R 2 , in which case
GDJ1.n = GJ1.n is at least finite valued and continuous.
Theorem. Let D be a Greenian subset oflR N , let Jl. be a measure on D, and let
v be a positive superharmonic function of D. Then each of the following three
conditions implies that GDJl. :s; v:
(a) GDJl. < + 00 Jl. almost everywhere and GDJl. :s; v inner quasi everywhere
on some Borel support ofJl..
(b) The inequalities GDJl. < + 00 and GDJ.l :s; v are true J.l almost every-
where.
(c) Polar sets are Jl. null and GDJ.l :s; v J.l almost everywhere.
It is not obvious that conditions (a)-(c) are equivalent, and we shall not
need this equivalence in the proof of Theorem 10, but according to Theorem
11, both conditions (a) and (b) imply that polar sets are Jl. null and thereby
that (a)-(c) are equivalent. It is a defect of Theorem 10 that polar sets must
be Jl. null, but it will be shown in Section XI.23 that GDJl. :s; v if
e.
for Jl. almost every In fact the condition in Theorem XI.23 is considerably
weaker than (10.1). If J.l is a probability measure supported by a singleton
{eo}, so that GDJl. = GD(eo, .), and if v = 2GD(eo, .), the condition (10.1) but
not Theorem 10 is applicable to show that GDJ.l :s; v.
It is sufficient to show that GDJl. :s; v when condition (a) is satisfied. In
fact, if Bisan arbitrary Borel support ofJ.l, the set B n {GDJ.l < + 00, GDJ.l :s; v}
is, under either (b) or (c), a support of Jl. on which GDJl. < + 00 and GDJ.l :s; v;
so condition (a) is satisfied. To prove that condition (a) implies that GDJ.l :s; v
we assume that D is special, deferring to Section VII.8 the explanation of
why this specialization is trivial. Let A be a Borel support of Jl. on which
GDJ.l < + 00 and GDJl. :s; v inner quasi everywhere. Since (by Theorem 9) the
function u = GDJ.l is the limit of an increasing sequence of bounded con-
tinuous potentials of measures supported by compact subsets of A, we can
suppose that A is compact and that u is bounded and continuous. If E A e
and if u(e) :s; v(e), then
Special Hypotheses on v
cally + 00 on A, with v(D) < + 00. Apply Fubini's theorem and the symmetry
of GD to derive
and
(a) u+ is superharmonic.
(b) u = u on each open set on which u is superharmonic.
+
(c) ~ = u quasi everywhere.
(d) There is a countable subset ofr whose lower envelope has the same
lower semicontinuous smoothing u.
+
Conversely, if A is a polar subset of a Greenian subset D of ~N, there is a
decreasing sequence v. ofpositive superharmonic functions on D with limit v
such that v > ~ on A.
The direct part of the present theorem is identical with Theorem 111.3
except that Theorem III.3(c) allows a larger exceptional set than Theorem
1(c). Thus there remains only the proof of Theorem 1(c) and of the converse
part of Theorem 1. Since Theorem 1(c) is a local assertion it can be assumed
in its proof that the functions are defined on a ball D, and in view of the
discussion in Section 11I.3 it can be assumed that r is a decreasing sequence
of positive superharmonic functions on D. The limit function need only be
analyzed on a strictly smaller concentric ball D, with Un replaced by R:n
(reduction relative to D). This reduction, equal to its lower semicontinuous
smoothing because D is open, is a superharmonic potential GnJl.n (Section
IV.8) and is equal to Un on D, so the replacement is legitimate. The measure
Jl.n is supported by Ii. On D - ii the sequence u. is a locally uniformly con-
vergent sequence of harmonic functions; so the sequences of partial deriva-
tives are also locally uniformly convergent on D - ii (Theorem 11.3).
2. Inner Polar versus Polar Sets 71
so that u ;;:: GDfJ.. Let v be a measure having compact support in D, with GDv
finite valued and continuous. Then
combined with the inequality u ;;:: GDfJ., implies that u = GDfJ. at valmost every
point of D. Since u+ is the maximal lower semicontinuous minorant of u, it
follows that u ;;:: u+ ;;:: GDfJ. with equality v almost everywhere. Thus, if A =
{u > !t}, it has now been shown that v(A) = 0 whenever GDv is finite valued
and continuous. In view of Corollary V.9 this fact means that every compact
subset of A is polar; that is, the set A is a Borel inner polar set. Theorem I (c)
follows from the next theorem, whose proof uses the partial result just
obtained.
Conversely, suppose that A is a polar subset of the Greenian subset D of
IR N , and let r be the class of positive superharmonic functions on D equal at
least to I on A. The infimum of the class is (reduction relative to D) R1,
and (Theorem VIA) R+1A == O. According to Theorem I (d), there is a sequence
in r whose lower semicontinuous smoothed infimum vanishes identically. If
Vn is the minimum of the first n members of this sequence, v. has the properties
stated in the converse of Theorem I.
is inner polar. Since each set in the union is compact, the union is polar.
(b) If v is a finite-valued positive superharmonic function on D and if
e e)
ED, the set functions R~( and R· (e) are strongly subadditive on the class
of compact subsets of D. To pro:; this, consider the strong subadditivity
inequality
(2.1)
and the corresponding equation (2.2sm) for smoothed reductions is also true.
A
Under these hypotheses lim"...."" R " = v quasi everywhere on A because
+v
R+v " = v quasi everywhere on A", and the two superharmonic potentials
A
lim"...."" R+vA " and R+vA are therefore equal quasi everywhere on the common
support A of their associated Riesz measures. It follows from the domination
principle that these potentials are identical. The functions lim"...."" R:"
and
R: are trivially equal on A and are equal on D - A (on which they are
harmonic and equal to their smoothings) because (2.2sm) is true.
(d) If v is a finite-valued positive continuous superharmonic function on D
2. Inner Polar versus Polar Sets 73
To prove (e) we show that I(~, A) = R~(~) for every subset A of D. Let F.o
be an increasing sequence of relatively compact open subsets of the open
subset B of D, with union B, and define F,. = £"0. Then R~~ = RF~, and 1(·, B)
° +v
= limn...", RFn
+v
is a positive superharmonic function, identically v on B. Hence
1(·, B) ~ R:, and since the reverse inequality is trivial, it follows that 1(·, B)
= R: when B is open. Since both R~(~) and I(~,·) satisfy (2.4), the set
functions R~(~) and I(~,·) are identical.
(f) Proof of the theorem. Let v be any finite-valued strictly positive
continuous superharmonic function on D, say v == I. Suppose that A is an
inner polar analytic subset of D and choose ~ in D - A. The set A is capacit-
able for the Choquet capacity R~(~); that is,
According to Theorem V.4, the right side of (2.5) is 0, and the consequent
vanishing of the left side implies that A is polar. 0
there; ~:(e) = lim inf"... ~ R:(,,). [See also Chapter 11I(5.1), (5.1sm),
(5.2).]
(b) R+vA ::s; R: on D, with equality on D - A and quasi everywhere on
AnD.
(c) If At and A 2 differ by a polar subset of D, then
D - (At u A 2 ) and R A
, = R , on D.
A
=R:' R:'on
+v +v
(d) ~: = inf {R:o : A - Ao a polar subset of D} = inf {u: u ~ 0, u super-
harmonic on D, u ~ v near A n fJD and quasi everywhere on
AnD}.
(e) If A. is an increasing sequence of subsets of D with union A and if
v. is an increasing sequence of positive superharmonic functions on
D with superharmonic limit v, then
(3.1)
Observation. The following example shows that the last assertion of (e) is
false without the hypothesis that Vn = v for all n. Let D be a ball, let u be a
minimal harmonic function on D corresponding to some boundary point (,
that is, v is a strictly positive multiple of the Poisson kernel for the boundary
3. Properties of the Reduction Operation 75
(f) If v = Lg'
Vn is a sum of positive superharmonic functions on D and
is superharmonic, then
(3.2)
(3.3)
(3.4)
B
R+vA = [inf {R
+v
: A c B, B open}] + . (3.7)
76 l.VI. The Fundamental Convergence Theorem and the Reduction Operation
sup IR~
D
- R~I ~ sup
D
lu - vi, (3.8)
and
h < V A (bh)
AB - b '
so
(bh)
hAB + hABAB + ... .
V A
~ (3.12)
b-a
Furthermore
h < V A (ah)
BA - b '
so
V A (ah)
hBA. + hBABA + ... ~ b
-a
. (3.14)
Observation. Since h's ~ h', it is trivial that (3.9) is true with the left side
replaced by h'sA + h'sABA + .... We shall see in Section XI.4 that the inequal-
ities under (0) yield limit properties of superharmonic functions and of ratios
of superharmonic functions. See Sections 2.111.12 and 2.111.22 for the
probability counterparts of these inequalities.
4. Proofs of the Reduction Properties 77
Proof of (d). The first line of (d) and the equality of the two infima are
immediate consequences of (b) and (c). 0
Proof of (e). Under the hypotheses of (e) the reduction R:" increases with
"
n. Define u = lim,,~<Xl R A ", and observe that u is superharmonic and that
+v"
u = v quasi everywhere on A because u" = v" quasi everywhere on A". It
follows from (d) that u ~ R+vA , and since the reverse inequality is trivial,
(3.1sm) is true. Equality (3.1) is trivial on A and is also true on D - A
= RVA and R: = R+vA according to (b). In proving the
because on that set R:" +
n
second assertion of (e) we shall suppose that D is connected to avoid irr-
evant notational complexity. Assume then that v" = v for all n, choose a
point ~ in D, and let u" be a positive superharmonic function on D, majorizing
v near A" (\ aD, with
The function
<Xl
v~ = U + L (u" -
,,=k
R:"na~, k~O, (4.1)
78 I. VI. The Fundamental Convergence Theorem and the Reduction Operation
Proof of (f). Suppose first that there are only two summands in (3.2); so
the equalities
(4.2)
(4.3)
still an open subset of D and if VI and Vz are supposed finite valued and
continuous, equation 111(5.5) gives the value of a reduction on an arbitrary
set in terms of reductions on open supersets, and it follows from (4.2sm)
[the same as (4.2) for open sets] that (4.2) is true for an arbitrary subset A
of D. Since a positive superharmonic function on D is the limit of an increas-
ing sequence of finite-valued positive continuous superharmonic functions,
(e) implies that (4.2) is true for an arbitrary subset A of D with no restriction
on VI' vz , and then (4.2sm) must also be true with this generality because the
two sides of (4.2sm) are superharmonic functions and are equal quasi every-
where on D. The evaluations in Section IlLS of reductions and their smooth-
ings in terms of reductions and their smoothings on subsets of D show that
(4.2) and (4.2sm) are true with no restrictions on the sets or functions. Thus
(3.2) and (3.2sm) are true for two and therefore any finite number of sum-
mands. If there are infinitely many summands, write r" for L~I R A • Then
+Vk
4. Proofs of the Reduction Properties 79
and since R+rA ~ L~I vk , it follows that (3.2sm) is true quasi everywhere and
n
therefore everywhere on D. Equation (3.2) is then true on D - A, and this
equation is trivial on AnD. 0
Proof of (g). Define h = GMDv+ and define u = limn_ex> R:n , a positive har-
monic function. Obviously
Proof of (h). In view of the trivial fact that the smoothed successive reduc-
tions of von A and B in either order lie between ~~V~A~A and ~V~A, it is
sufficient to prove idempotence, that is, to prove that ~ MA ~A = ~V~A. The
proof will be carried through in several steps.
(hI) If A cD, the desired idempotence is a consequence of (d) because
the condition on u in (d) is unchanged if v is replaced by MA.
(h 2 ) If A coD, the following argument yields idempotence. Use
Choquet's topological lemma to find a decreasing sequence v. of
positive superharmonic functions on D, each majorizing v near A,
with sequence limit ~V~A. Replacing Vn by Vn /\ v if necessary, it can be
supposed that V n = v near A so that ~vn~A = ~V~A. It now follows
from (g) that
(4.4)
(h 3 ) For arbitrary A,
(4.5)
Finally, to prove (h), apply 11I(5.2) and (f) to write ~ ~V~A ~ A in the form
and then apply (h 3 ) and III(5.2) to show that the right-hand side is ~V~A. 0
so that
(4.7)
Thus (3.4sm) is true, so (3.4) is true otT A u B, and the latter equation is
trivial on (A u B) n D. 0
(4.8)
Proof of (k). (This proof involves the domination principle and thereby
the Green function, so at this stage the arguments are relevant only for
special open sets D, but the extension of the domination principle to all
Greenian sets will be seen to be trivial once GD has been defined for every
Greenian set D in Chapter VII.) We shall not use in the following proof
the partial result derived in the course of proving Theorem 2 that if v is
continuous as well as finite valued, R;(e) is a Choquet capacity on D relative
to the class of compact subsets of D. To prove (k) in the present context
observe that all the capacity properties have been verified for R;(e) except
the property that
limR:" = R: (4.9)
"-00
4. Proofs of the Reduction Properties 81
Hence
and as B shrinks to A n cD, the left side becomes R:r.D + R:r.oD in view of
111(5.1). The second reduction vanishes identically because v is a potential,
so we find that
Proof of (I). Case 1. If v is finite valued, (3.5) follows from (k) since analytic
subsets of D u cD are capacitable for the Choquet capacity R~(e).
Case 2. If A cD but if v is not necessarily finite valued, apply Section 3(e)
to derive
82 I. VI. The Fundamental Convergence Theorem and the Reduction Operation
F
Rv = VF -
RFnD
V-VF = VF -
RFnD
v
+ RFnD
VF . (4.12)
From now on Fis to be a compact subset of A. The class of these sets ordered
by inclusion is directed so each term on the right in (4.12) defines a directed
set whose limit we now evaluate. Let h be the harmonic component of the
Riesz decomposition of v. According to Section 111.5, VF = Rfni1D; so by
Case I above
Since the class of sets F includes the compact subsets of AnD, Case 2 above
shows that limFt R~nD = R~nD. The same argument shows that if F' is a
compact subset of A, then
(4.13)
Proof of (m). Assertion (i) has already been proved in Section III (e). To
prove (ii) observe that if v is finite valued on D, then in view of the properties
(j) and (k) the restriction of the set function R~(~) to the class of compact
subsets of D U oD is a topological precapacity. This topological precapacity
4. Proofs of the Reduction Properties 83
Proof of (0 2), To prove (3.11) and (3.12), observe first that hAB :s; hB :s; v/b
and that VA :s; ahA' Hence
(4.16)
from which it follows that hABAB :s; (a/b)hAB . Iterate and sum to derive (3.11)
and (3.12) with v instead of v /\ (bh). Relations (3.11) and (3.12) are true as
written because if v is replaced by v /\ (bh), the sets A and B are unchanged.
To prove (3.13) and (3.14), observe that the inequality between the second
and fourth terms in (4.16) implies
84 I. VI. The Fundamental Convergence Theorem and the Reduction Operation
Iterate and sum to show that the left side of (3.14) is at most bhBAI(b - a).
Since (4.16) implies that bhBA ::; v and bhBA ::; ah, (3.13) and (3.14) are true.
The reader is invited to derive (3.12) and (3.14) from (0 1), 0
e
Let D be a ball of radius I, let be the center of D, for n > 1, let An be a
closed concentric ball of radius lin, and define v = GD(e, 0). Then A is a o
K(e)
+v
Is Not a Choquet Capacity on D Relative to the Class r o of
Compact Subsets of D
neighborhoods of A with intersection A, then RAn(e) = v(e) > RA(e) for all
+v +v
n, and therefore even if v is finite valued and continuous, the set function
RO(e)
+v
is not a topological precapacity on r o and K(e)
+v
is not a Choquet
capacity on D relative to roo
Chapter VII
Green Functions
(1.1)
on Do
onD-Do _
86 J. VII. Green Functions
(1.2)
(l.5)
Thus the Green function of a smooth open set as defined in Section 1.8 and
evaluated for a ball in Section 11.1 is the Green function in the present sense,
and GD = G when N> 2 and D = JRN. We shall discuss the solution of the
first boundary value problem for harmonic functions on Greenian subsets
of IR N in Chapter VIII. Let u(e, .) be the solution in the generalized sense of
Chapter VIII, that is, the "PWB" (Perron-Wiener- Brelot) solution, of this
first boundary value problem on a Greenian set D for the boundary function
2. Extremal Property of GD 87
2. Extremal Property of GD
Theorem. Let D be an open subset oflR N and let ¢ be a point of D. IfGDexists,
then
In the following proof we denote the jth class on the right in (2.1) by r j .
These classes are not empty if GD exists, but if GD does not exist, these classes
are empty because they all involve the existence of positive nonconstant
superharmonic functions on D, and we shall see in Section 7 that GD exists
if and only if D is Greenian.
3. Boundedness Properties of GD
Theorem. Let D be an open subset of IR N with a Green function GD, and let ~
be a point of D.
(a) If B is an open neighborhood of ~ in D, relatively compact in D, and if
v is a positive superhamlOnic function defined on an open superset
of D - B, with v ~ GD(~'·) on a neighborhood ofoB, then v ~ GD(~'·)
onD- B.
(b) R~ (~ .)
D'
= R+GD(~")
B
= GD(~'·) (reductions relative to D) whenever B is
a neighborhood of~.
(c) If v is a strictly positive superharmonic function on D, then outside
each neighborhood of ~, GD(~'·) ~ constv. In particular (v == I),
GD(~'·) is bounded outside each neighborhood of~, and if ~ 1 is a point
in the same open connected component of D as ~, then outside each
neighborhood of~, GD(~'·) ~ const GD(~ l ' .).
(d) Let B l be a compact subset of D and let B 1 be D less a neighborhood
of B l · Then GD is bounded on B l x B 1 •
Proof of (a). Define
{ GD(~'·) /\
GD(~'.) onB,
l
v = V on D - B.
Proof of (c) and (d). In (c) we can suppose that the neighborhood in
question is open and relatively compact in D. Then if v is a strictly positive
superharmonic function on D, the function cv majorizes GD(~'·) on a
neighborhood of oB for sufficiently large c; so (a) can be applied to yield
(c). The particular cases of (c) follow trivially, and (d) follows from the first
of these cases by an application of the Heine-Borel theorem. 0
(Note: ~ is fixed throughout the discussion.) If (X > 0, the set D" is an open
subset of D containing ~. No open connected component of Da not containing
3. Boundedness Properties of GD 89
(3.1)
(3.2)
are bounded outside any neighborhood of ~l and ~2' outside any neigh-
borhood of ~l' respectively. These facts imply that if", is a finite boundary
point of D, the minorants in (3.1) are bounded on the trace on D of a compact
neighborhood of", in 1R 2 , a fact needed later.
Since G(~l") - G(~2") is bounded outside any neighborhood of ~l and
~2 and since GD(~i") is bounded outside any neighborhood of ~;, the dif-
ference U(~l") - U(~2") is bounded outside any neighborhood A of ~l
and ~2' Choose a compact neighborhood A of these two points, so that
IU(~I") - U(~2' ')1 :s; bon D - A, where b depends on A, ~l' and ~2' This
inequality must hold on all of D in view of the maximum theorem for sub-
harmonic functions. Then
so the first minorant in (3.1) exists. The harmonic function U(~l") is bounded
above by C1 = sUP(JDG(~lo') < + 00; so
so the second minorant in (3.1) exists. Finally, the first difference in (3.2)
is at most
(3.5)
e
and similarly the second is at most GD( l' .) + const; so these differences
e
are bounded outside each neighborhood of el' 2 or each neighborhood
of el' respectively.
4. Further Properties of GD
As already remarked we shall prove in Section 7 that the open sets with
Green functions are the Greenian sets. In the following theorem the boundary
involved is the Euclidean boundary.
Proof of (a). We have seen in Section III.l that if GD exists, then u(~, 0) =
GMDG(~, 0) can be obtained as follows. A sequence B o of balls is chosen
with closures in D and with the property that each point of D has a neigh-
borhood which lies in Bn for infinitely many values of n. If t B. is the operator
11(1.8) but applied here to functions on ~N, and if for ~ E D ~e define
then {u~(~, 0), nE Z+} and {un(~, 0), n E Z+} are decreasing sequences of super-
harmonic functions on ~N and D, respectively. The limit of the second
sequence is u(~, 0). We shall deal with the first sequence later. Since G is
continuous on D x D, the functions uo, U 1 , ••• are successively continuous,
so U is upper semicontinuous. Let ~o be any point of D and choose Bft in
such a way that ~o E Bo and that there is an open neighborhood B c Bo
of ~o which is a subset either of Bnor of D - lin for each n. A glance at the
formula for tBo G(~, 0) shows that for each point '1 of D the function uo(o, '1)
is harmonic on B, and the same reasoning shows that Ul (0, '1), U2(o, '1), ...
are harmonic on B. It follows that u(o, '1) is harmonic on B, and since U
is independent of the choice of B0' the function u( 0, '1) is harmonic on D,
a minorant of G(o, 1]). By definition of u it follows that u(o, '1) :::;; u('1, 0), and
reversing arguments in this inequality yields the symmetry of u on D x D.
Hence GD is symmetric on D x D.
To prove continuity of GD , we prove that u is continuous. Let U and
U' be balls with closures in D, and express u on U x B" using the Poisson
integral on the boundary of each ball. If d.e balls either are the same or
have disjoint closures, this representation of u shows that u is continuous
on U x U'. Thus u is continuous on D x D. 0
Proof of (b) and (c). The sequence {u~(~, 0), n E Z+} is a decreasing sequence
of superharmonic functions on ~N, all equal to G(~, 0) on ~N - D. Moreover
the sequence is locally uniformly bounded below on ~N - fJD . . In fact
u~(~, 0) ~ u(~, 0) on D, and u~(~, 0) = G(~, 0) on ~N - 15. We now show that
this sequence is uniformly bounded below on a neighborhood of each
finite boundary point of D. This fact is trivial if N > 2 because u~ is then
positive and is trivial if N = 2 and D is bounded because a lower bound of
G(~, 0) on a neighborhood of 15 is also a lower bound of Uft(~, 0) on the
neighborhood. If N = 2 and D is unbounded, the function GD(~' 0) is bounded
on D in a neighborhood of fJD (Theorem 3), say GD(~' 0) ~ c there; so
u(e,') = GMDG(e,') on D,
t{(e,·) = G(e,.) on IR N - jj and at quasi every finite
1 point of oD.
(4.2)
(5.1)
The following facts have been derived for D special but are true in general,
and the proofs for special D are applicable. A potential GDJ1. is either super-
5. The Potential GDII of a Measure II 93
(5.2)
Since all open nonempty subsets of ~N for N > 2 and all bounded non-
empty open or not connected open subsets of ~z are both Greenian and
have Green functions, only unbounded open connected subsets of ~2 re-
9. Approximation Lemma 95
(7.1)
Many theorems have been stated for Greenian sets D but proved only for
special sets. The justification for this awkward procedure is that the pro-
perties of G D make the proofs already given for special D valid whenever
D is Greenian, that is, whenever G D exists. Some of these extensions to
Greenian D have already been checked in Sections 4 and 5. The rest are
equally easy to check.
9. Approximation Lemma
Lemma. If D is a Greenian subset of IR N , if 4J is a finite-valued continuous
function on D, with compact support B, and if B 1 is a compact neighborhood
of Bin D, there is a sequence u. - v. of differences offinite-valued continuous
potentials whose associated Riesz measures are supported by B 1 , with un =
Vn on D - B 1 and lim n_ oo (un - vn) = 4J uniformly on D.
Suppose that Jl and v are finite measures on a Greenian set D, with the
property that whenever u and v are finite-valued positive continuous super-
harmonic functions on D, with u ~ v, then
96 l.VII. Green Functions
We now show that it follows that f..l :::;; v. It is sufficient to show that if </>
is a positive continuous function on D with compact support then
(9.2)
(10.1)
(10.2)
To prove this, observe that according to (10.1) the limit inferior IX in question
is at least v({(}). If there is strict inequality and if IX > p > v({(}), then
v > pGD (·, 0 on a deleted neighborhood of' and therefore (Theorem 3) on D;
so the infimum in (10.1) is ~{3. Hence v( {O) ~ {3, contrary to hypothesis.
We shall prove (Theorem XI.4) that the limit inferior in (10.2) is a limit
in the context of the fine topology discussed in Chapter XI.
Generalization. If , is a point of a compact polar subset A of D and if
now Do is D - A, then a trivial modification of the preceding discussion
shows that the restriction of GD (', 0 to D - A is a minimal harmonic function
for Do and that (10.1) and (10.2) are true, with the understanding that the
infimum in (10.1) may be taken over either Do or D - {O and that ~ in
(10.2) may tend to' on either Do or D.
Chapter VIII
(1.1)
(1.2)
(1.3)
at each boundary point ,. (In the usual formulation of such a problem the
boundary function f is supposed finite valued and continuous.) Since a
function on aD that is the boundary limit of a function on D is continuous,
this Dirichlet problem cannot have a solution unlessfis continuous. On the
other hand, the following example shows that boundary function finiteness
and continuity may not be enough to ensure the existence of a solution.
EXAMPLE (a). Let D be a ball less the center, let h == 1, and let aD be the
Euclidean boundary. Let / = 0 at the ball center and / = 1 on the rest of
the boundary. Then / is continuous on aD. The Dirichlet problem on D
for this boundary function has no solution because if U were a solution,
then 0 ~ U ~ 1, and (Section V.S) u would be harmonic on the ball if defined
as 0 at the center. But then u would attain its infimum 0 at the center and
therefore would vanish identically, contrary to the hypothesis of limit 1 at
the ball boundary.
EXAMPLE (b). Dirichlet problem for a ball. Let D be a ball, and let aD be
the Euclidean boundary. According to Theorem ILl, the Poisson integral
PI(D,f) solves the Dirichlet problem with h == 1 for any finite-valued con-
tinuous boundary function! If h is minimal harmonic however, that is
(Section 11.16), if h is a multiple of K(,,·) for some boundary point " the
Dirichlet problem for h-harmonic functions with a specified bounded func-
tion / cannot have a solution unless / is identically constant. In fact a solu-
tion would be an h-harmonic function bounded by the bound of/and so
would be identically constant because h is minimal harmonic.
The PWB method starts with a Greenian set D provided with a boundary
aD by a metric compactification and assigns to each extended real-valued
function f on aD an upper and a lower PWBh class of function on D. A
function v on aD is in the upper [lower] PWBh class if on each open con-
nected component of D this function is either identically + 00 [ - 00] or
h-superharmonic [h-subharmonic], is bounded below [above], and satisfies
the inequality
~ ,
[lim sup v(rf}
....
~ f(O]
for every boundary point ,. The functions in the upper PWBh class forfare
the negatives of the functions in the lower PWBh class for -fAn application
of the minimum theorem for h-superharmonic functions yields the fact that
every function in the upper PWBh class for fis a majorant of every function
in the lower class. If u and v are in the upper class, then u /\ v is also. Thus
the upper class is directed downward, and dually the lower class is directed
upward. If v is an h-superharmonic function in the upper class and if B
is a ball with jj c D, then t;V is also in the upper class and is a minorant
of v. Thus the infimum ilJ of the upper class is, in each such ball B, the
limit of a downward-directed family of h-harmonic functions unless each
member of the upper class is identically + 00 in B. In each open connected
component of D the function ilJ is therefore either the constant function
+ 00, the constant function - 00, or an h-harmonic function. The supremum
lfJ of the lower class must also have this property, and lfJ ~ ilJ. The
function lfJ [ilJJ is called the lower [upper] PWBh solution for f It is
immediate that Ht = Rt/h = hR1 for A a subset of aD. If the upper and
lower solution are identical and h-harmonic, they are denoted by HJ,fwill
be called h-resolutive, or simply resolutive when h == 1, and HJ will be called
the PW~ solution for f A boundary of a Greenian set D will be called
h-resolutive, or simply resolutive when h == 1, ifevery finite-valued continuous
boundary function is h-resolutive, equivalently according to Section 6 below,
if the bounded Borel measurable boundary functions are h-resolutive. If a
boundary is h-resolutive for every h, the boundary will be called universally
resolutive.
The set D has not been supposed connected in the preceding discussion.
If D is not connected, let Do, D 1 , . . . be the open connected components
of D, and let aDj be the boundary of Dj relative to D u aD, where aD has
been determined by a metric compactification of D. Then aD = Uo aDj'
If f is a function on aD let./j be the restriction off to aDj' A function u on
D is in the upper [lower] PWBh class for the boundary function f if and
102 1. VIII. The Dirichlet Problem for Relative Harmonic Functions
(A dual assertion is true for lower PWB" solutions.) To see this, observe
that by definition of upper PWB" classes there is a function uj in the upper
PWB" class on D for/such that (2.1) is satisfied by Uj' On each set Da . define
U = uj and define U = + OC! on each remaining component of D. J
Internal Resolutivity
It is trivial that il~ f = -llJ, that ilJ and llJ increase withf, that iic~ = ciiJ
and llc~ = cllJ when c is a positive constant, and that ilJ+c = iiJ + c and
llJ+c = llJ + c when c is an arbitrary constant. Moreover, if e > 0 and iff
and g are finite-valued boundary functions whose upper and lower solutions
are finite-valued, and if If - gl ~ e, then liiJ - ii:1 ~ e and IllJ - ll:1 ~e
because
and the same inequalities are valid for the lower solutions. It follows that if
in additionfis h-resolutive,
This set is an Fa set, that is, a countable union of compact boundary subsets.
In fact for an arbitrary function </J from D into iR the boundary function
(f-+ lim sUP~_~EaD </J(e) is upper semicontinuous, so iffis a bounded boundary
function, the boundary set
3. Examples
(3.1)
for sufficiently large c. The assertions (b)(i) and (b)(ii) are therefore appli-
cable to polynomial boundary functions when D is bounded.
Special case (b"). According to Section VII.3, the hypotheses of (b)(i) and
ej
(b)(ii) are satisfied by Uj = G(ei'·) 1\ cilD for in D and - 00 < Ci :5 + 00.
Special case (b"/). If N > 2 or if N = 2 and D is bounded, the hypotheses
of (b)(i) and (b)(ii) are satisfied by u, = G(e, ·)ID, U 2 == 0, for each point e
in D.
106 I. VIII. The Dirichlet Problem for Relative Harmonic Functions
This theorem, together with the fact that the PWB method yields the
classical solution whenever there is one, justifies this method. In the follow-
ing, C(oD) denotes the class of finite-valued continuous functions on oD,
metrized by the supremum norm. In view of the fact (Section 2) that the
limit f of a uniformly convergent sequence f. of finite-valued resolutive
boundary functions is resolutive and that HI. is uniformly convergent to
Hf on D, it is sufficient to prove that there is a countable dense subset
r: {ga, IXE I} of C(oD) with the property that for each index value IX, the
function ga is resolutive, and Hga has limit ga(O at quasi every finite boundary
point (, as well as at ( = 00 when N > 2 and D is unbounded. In fact the
Euclidean boundary is then resolutive, and if A a is the exceptional polar
boundary subset for ga' the finite boundary points not in UaelAa are
regular.
In view of Section 3, Example (b /), when D is bounded r can be taken
as any countable dense subset of C(oD) consisting of restrictions to oD of
polynomials. The following proof is applicable to both unbounded and
bounded sets D.
If N > 2, let r 1 be the class of positive superharmonic functions on IR N
which are finite valued and continuous with finite limit at 00. Define u( 00)
for u in r 1 as the limit of u at 00. Then r 1 contains the positive constant
functions and u 1\ v, and au + bv are in r 1 if u and v are and if a and bare
positive constants. Let r 2 be the class of differences U 1 - U 2 with Ui in r 1 ,
so that r 2 is a vector lattice in the order determined by pointwise inequality.
The set r 3 of restrictions to oD of the members of r 2 is a vector lattice of
finite continuous boundary functions, which contains the constant functions
and separates oD because C 1\ G(e, ·)laD (defined as 0 at 00) is in r 3 for an
e.
arbitrary positive constant c and an arbitrary point The set r 3 is dense
in C(oD) (Stone-Weierstrass theorem), and in view of Section 3, Example
(b) any countable subset ofr3 dense in C(oD) can serve as the desired set r.
If N = 2, let eo be a point of 1R 2 and define r 1 as the class of functions u
satisfying the following two conditions:
(a) u is a finite-valued continuous superharmonic function on 1R 2 •
(b) There is a strictly positive constant IX and a constant P, both depend-
ing onu, such thatu is identically IXG(eo,·) + poutside some bounded
set which may depend on u.
4. Continuous Boundary Functions on the Euclidean Boundary (h == I) 107
function I... , and Ht. = 0 because H~",<¢) ~ v(¢) < e for all}.
(b) A boundary subset A is h-harmonic measure null if and only if there
is a positive h-superharmonic function u on D with limit + 00 at every point
of A.
If A is h-harmonic measure null, define An = A and observe that then the
positive h-superharmonic function v in (a) has limit + 00 at every point of A.
Conversely, if a function u as described in (b) exists, then for every e> 0
the function eu is in the upper PWBh class for the boundary function I... ;
so H~... = 0 except possibly on the polar set of infinities of u, and so H~... = 0
onD.
(c) If / is a positive boundary function and if HJ = 0, then the set
{J> O} is h-harmonic measure null.
If n ;;:: I and if J" is the indicator function on oD of the set {J> lin},
then
so the set {I> lin} is h-harmonic measure null. Hence U~=l {I> lin} =
{J> O} is h-harmonic measure null.
(d) If / is a boundary function for which iiJ < + 00, then the set
A = {J = + oo} is h-harmonic measure null.
Choose (Section 2) an h-superharmonic function u on D in the upper
PWBh class for the boundary function! The function u is positive and has
limit + 00 at every point of A so A is h-harmonic measure null according
to (b).
(e) Euclidean boundary, h == I. A polar subset A of oD is a harmonic
measure null set.
If N > 2, let u be a positive superharmonic function on ~N, identically
+ 00 on A. Then v = UID has limit + 00 at every point of A ; so according to
5. h-Harmonic Measure Null Sets 109
(b), the set A is h-harmonic measure null. If N = 2 and if' is a finite boundary
point of D, choose a ball B of center' so small that 1R 2 - (D u B) is not
polar, that is, so that D' = DuB is Greenian. Then if A ("\ B is not empty,
there is a positive superharmonic function u on D', identically + <X) on
A ("\ B; so UID has limit + <X) at every point of A ("\ B. Thus according to (b),
A is locally harmonic measure null, and it follows that A is a countable
union of harmonic measure null sets and is therefore itself harmonic measure
null.
The converse of (e) is false: a harmonic measure null subset ofa Euclidean
boundary aD need not be polar. For example, if D is a ball in IR Nit will be
seen in Section 9 that the harmonic measure null subsets of the Euclidean
boundary are the 'N-l null boundary subsets, and it is not difficult to find
examples of 'N-l null subsets of a sphere which are not polar. The following
is however a near converse to (e).
(f) Let D be an arbitrary nonempty open subset of IR N , and let A be a
nonpolar proper subset of D, closed relative to D. Provide D with a boundary
by a metric compactification, and let a(D - A) be the boundary of the
Greenian set D - A in this compactification. Then the set A ("\ a(D - A) is
not harmonic measure null relative to D - A. In fact, if A ("\ a(D - A) is
harmonic measure null, then by (b) there is a positive superharmonic
function U on D - A with limit + <X) at each point of A ("\ a(D - A). If U is
extended to D by defining U = + <X) on A, the resulting function is super-
harmonic on D with value + <X) on A; so A is polar, contrary to hypothesis.
We use here the notation of the discussion in Section 2 of the PWB method
and the Kelvin transformation. It is clear from that discussion that an
h-harmonic measure null subset of aD is transformed under an inversion
into an hl-harmonic measure null subset of aD'. We shall use the following
=
additional fact when h I. If aD and aD' are Euclidean boundaries and if
A is a harmonic measure null subset of aD, then <jJ(A) is a harmonic measure
null subset of aD', under the additional hypothesis when N> 2 that all
points of <jJ(A) are finite. This fact follows from the criterion for h-harmonic
measure null sets in (b) because if v is a positive superharmonic function
on D with limit + <X) at every point of A, then the Kelvin transform of v
is a positive superharmonic function on D' with limit + <X) at every finite
point of <jJ(A), every point of <jJ(A) if N = 2.
and we have just seen that such a transformation of the plane preserves the
harmonic measure null property. If N > 2, the singleton {oo} may not be
a harmonic measure null set for an unbounded Greenian set. For example,
if D = IR N and if u is in the upper PWB class on IR N for the boundary function
l{oo}' that is, if u is superharmonic and lower bounded on IR N , with inferior
limit;;::: I at 00, then u ;;::: 1 by the superharmonic function minimum theorem.
Since the proofs do not depend on the choice of h they will be given for
h == 1 to simplify notation. The point is that the assertions in Section 6 are
valid for the PWB method in a very general context.
and if U [v] is in the upper PWB class for f [g], the function u + v is in
the upper PWB class for f + g; so iif +9 :s; U + v and (c) follows. 0
Proofof(d). The fact that the class of resolutive boundary functions contains
the finite constant functions, that the class is linear, and that the map f f-+ Hf
is linear on this class follows from the PWB properties listed in Section 2
together with (c) and its dual for lower solutions. We need not discuss the
resolutivity of both f v g and f 1\ g because f 1\ g = - [( - f) v (- g)].
Moreover in treatingf v g we can choose g = 0 because
fv g = [(f - g) v 0] + g.
We assume therefore that f is resolutive and prove that f v 0 is resolutive,
e
with H fvO = LMD(Hf v 0). Choose a point j in each open connected
component of D, and choose v" in the upper PWB class for fwith
+ L(v"
00
LMD(Hf v 0) - Hf )
k
is a majorant of Um for m > n, and Vn is therefore in the upper PWB class for
f, with
Thus the first assertion of (e) is true at each point ek and therefore everywhere
on D in view of the trivial inequality Hf ;::: limn.... oo Hfn . Under the hypotheses
of the second assertion,
Proof of (h). Since 11lA = I - H 1oD _ A' only the first equality in (6.1) need
be proved. A function v on D is in the upper PWB class for IA if and only if
on each open connected component of D the function v is either identically
114 l.VIII. The Dirichlet Problem for Relative Harmonic Functions
+ 00 or positive superharmonic with lim inf~ ...., v('1) ~ 1 when' EA. For such
a function v, 0 < rx < 1 implies that lim inf~ ...., v('1) > rx for' in some neighbor-
hood B of A relative to aD, so that v/rx is in the upper PWB class for I B ,
and HI B ~ v/rx. Since
_ (X can be chosen arbitrarily close to 1, the infimum in
(6.1) is at most_ HI A . The inequality in the other direction is trivial. The set
e
function --+ HI A (e) = Rt(e) is a Choquet capacity of boundary subsets
relative to the class of compact boundary subsets according to Section
VI.3(k). [In the present context we have already proved all the desired
properties of this set function except that if A. is a decreasing sequence of
compact boundary subsets with intersection A, then limn....'" HI = HI , and
An A
this fact is elementary in view of the first equation in (6.1).] 0
8. h-Harmonic Measure
and (Section 11.3) on each open connected component of D the limit is either
identically + 00 or is h-harmonic. If this limit is h-harmonic on D, the
function f will be called JJ.'D integrable; the class of such functions f will be
denoted by L 1 (JJ.'D). Then f ELl (JJ.'D) if and only iff v 0 and f /\ 0 are in this
class and, if so,
Let Do, D 1 , ••• be the open connected components of D, and let aDk be
the boundary of Dk relative to D v aD. Let h be a strictly positive super-
harmonic function on D, and denote by hk the restriction of h to Dk • Letf
be a function on aD, and denote by.h the restriction off to aDk • Then f is
an h-resolutive boundary function for D if and only if.h is h-resolutive for
Dk for all k; f is JJ.'D measurable if and only if.h is JJ.t~ measurable for all k;
fEL1(JJ.'D) if and only if .hEL1(JJ.':J) for all k. When A is a JJ.'D measurable
subset of aD, the function JJ.':J/, A (\ aDk ) is the restriction of JJ.M·, A) to Dk •
(8.1)
limJ1.~(e, A) = I
~-~
EXAMPLE (a) (Relation between J1.B and J1.; for B Relatively Compact in D).
If Dis Greenian, if h is strictly positive and harmonic on D, and if B is an
open relatively compact subset of D, it was shown in Section 4 that aB is
h-resolutive with HJ = HJh/h. It follows that
(8.2)
In view of Example (b) and Section 6(h) it is sufficient to prove that for A
a compact subset of aD the function I At"'> iJB on aB is an h-resolutive boundary
function for B and that (8.3) is true. Observe that if V2 [U2] is in the upper
[lower] PWB h class on D for the boundary function I A on aD and if VI [UI]
is in the lower [upper] PWBh class on B for the boundary function defined as
Jl~(" A) on D (1 aB and as 0 elsewhere on aB, the difference V2 - VI [u 2 - u t ]
on B is in the upper [lower] PWB h class for the boundary function IAt"'>iJB
on aB. It follows that IAt"'>iJB is an h-resolutive boundary function on aB and
that (8.3) is true.
See Section 3.II.3(d) for the simple (after the necessary foundations have
been laid) probabilistic derivation of (8.3).
u ~ Jl.~(-,J). (8.4)
u >
- H"
fAn = r
,,"D(-' 11\ n)
(8.5)
GD(e, .) - 1:(1 + w)
GD,(e, -)
9. h-Resolutive Boundaries
Application to Balls
(9.1)
for every Borel boundary subset A. Hence the set function in Theorem 9 is
additive; so the Euclidean ball boundary is universally resolutive. Moreover
equation (9.1) implies that
(9.2)
PI(B,f). The class of PWB solutions Hf is thus [Theorem 1I.14(b)] the class
D(J-lB-) which includes all bounded harmonic functions on B. Hence the
Euclidean ball boundary is internally resolutive. The generalization of
Theorem 11.14 to h-harmonic functions in Section IX.12 will make this
reasoning applicable to show that the Euclidean ball boundary is universally
internally resolutive. The following example exhibits h-resolutivity and
internal h-resolutivity in an extreme case. If' is a Euclidean ball boundary
point and if h = K«(, .), then (9.2) implies that J-l~(" gn
== 1. In this case
every boundary function f finite at , is h-resolutive, and HJ = f(O; the
class of PWB h solutions is the class of finite constant functions. Since h is
minimal (Section 11.16), a bounded h-harmonic function is necessarily a
constant function; so we have proved that the Euclidean boundary is
h-resolutive and internally h-resolutive for this special choice of h.
Application to Half-spaces
if N= 2
(9.3)
if N> 2
In fact this evaluation of J-lD is correct because it is easily checked that iff
is a finite continuous function on aD, the function J-lD(',f), as defined using
(9.4), is harmonic on D with boundary limit function! The function J-lD(',f)
is called the Poisson integral off, just as in the ball case. Just as in the ball
case, to each boundary point" of D corresponds a minimal positive harmonic
function K(",·) on D, a constant multiple of the harmonic measure density
in (9.4) for that value of", with a special provision for" = 00. More specif-
9. h-Resolutive Boundaries 121
The proof follows that in the ball case and is omitted. Just as in the ball
case, it is shown that the Euclidean boundary is universally resolutive and
that (9.2) is true in the present context.
Some of these results are easily reduced to the ball case by means of an
inversion in a sphere taking D into a ball. It will be shown in Chapter XII
that if D is an arbitrary Greenian subset of IR N , there is a universally resolu-
tive and universally internally resolutive boundary aMD, the Martin bound-
ary, and a function K on aM D x D, such that K(", 0) is a minimal positive
harmonic function on D when" is in a certain subset a~ D of aMD, and that
to each positive harmonic function u on D corresponds a unique measure
on aMD, supported by a~ D, for which the counterparts of the Riesz-
Herglotz-type representation (9.6) (known as the Martin representation in
this general context) and of (9.2) are valid. The Martin boundary reduces
to the Euclidean boundary if D is a ball or half-space, in which cases a~ D =
aMD.
(10.2)
to the fact that the function n--+ L(u,~, r) is a decreasing function for
0< r < I~ - aDI·
GM~u = n-oo"'"
lim t~ u = lim J.L~ (., u)
"-00 un
(11.1)
(11.2)
and we have just proved that the limit (n ~ (0) on the left is GMD~U~A; so in
(11.2) the left side is at least equal to the right side. In the other direction,
124 I. VIII. The Dirichlet Problem for Relative Harmonic Functions
A Local Property of .h
If u is an h-subharmonic or h-superharmonic function and if B. is a decreasing
sequence of open relatively compact subsets of D with intersection ~, then
limn_c:o .~u(~) = u(~). In fact the proof for h == I and B. a sequence of balls
of center ~ [see Section II.6(f) for this result in a slightly different context]
is applicable in the general case.
12. Barriers
Let D be a Greenian subset of IR N , coupled with a boundary aD provided
by a metric compactification, let h be a strictly positive harmonic function
on D, and let' be a point of aD. Usable conditions that' be h-regular are
most easily formulated in terms of "h-barriers" (see Section 13). A strictly
positive h-superharmonic function u on D will be called an h-barrier for D
at , if lim~-+< U(11) = 0 and if (*) infD-B u > 0 whenever B is a neighborhood
of ,. If the condition (*) is omitted, u will be called a weak h-barrier for D
at ,. By an easy application of the h-superharmonic function minimum
theorem, (*) is true if and only if lim inf~_~ U(11) > 0 for ~ in aD - {n.
As usual, h will be omitted from the notation and the nomenclature when
h==1.
If N > 2 every unbounded open subset D of IRN has a barrier at the point
00, namely, the restriction of the function G(O, .) to D. An unbounded open
subset D of 1R 2 has a [ weak] barrier at the point 00 if and only if the image
of D under an inversion in a circle has a [weak] barrier at the circle center.
Hence we can assume in the following proof that the boundary point ( in
question is finite. In view of the fact that the existence of a barrier at ( is
a local property of D, it is sufficient to show that there is a barrier on the
trace on D of an open neighborhood of C so that D can be supposed bounded.
Suppose then that D has diameter J < + 00 and that u is a weak barrier for
D at the boundary point (. Define 4J(Y/) = IY/ - (I andf = 4J1DD' The function
4J is subharmonic, and 4J1D is in the lower PWB class on D for f Hence
°
Hi ;::: 4J on D, and it will be shown that Hi is a barrier for D at ( by showing
that Hi has limit at (. Fix r > 0, let B = B(C r), let A be a compact subset
of D (\ oB, and let ljJ be the indicator function of (oB - A) (\ D on oB,
so that PI(B, ljJ) is harmonic on B with limit I at every point of oB - A.
If U o is in the lower PWB class on D for f, the function U o on B (\ D is at most
r if oB does not meet D and (by the maximum theorem for subharmonic
functions on B (\ D) is at most r + Ju/infA u + JPI(B, ljJ) if oB does meet D.
Thus in both cases
Ju
Hf :::; r + -=--f + JPI(B, ljJ) (12.1 )
lOU
A
on B (\ D. The sum on the right has limit r + JPI(B, ljJ)(O at C and this
°
limit is at most 2r if A is sufficiently large. Since r is arbitrary, the function
Hi has limit at (, as was to be proved.
other point the restriction to D of the function G(e, 0 - G(e, .), with ethe
ball center, is a barrier for D at (.
(13.1)
(13.2)
The second assertion follows from the first applied to f and - f To prove
the first assertion, let u be an h-barrier at C. Let b be any number strictly
larger than the right side of (13.1), let B be a neighborhood of Cso small
thatf:::; b in the neighborhood, and let () be the infimum of u outside D (') B.
Choose n so large that b + n{) exceeds the supremum of f The function
b + nu is in the upper PWBh class on D for f and has limit b at C. Hence the
left side of (13.1) is at most b; so the theorem is true.
Extension. Since a change of f on a set of h-harmonic measure 0 does
not change llJ or ilJ, the point" can tend to Con the right side of (13.1)
on the complement of such a boundary set, and f(O can be omitted on the
right hand side if {C} is h-harmonic null, as is true when h == 1 and aD is
the Euclidean boundary, unless N > 2 and C= 00. This extension ofTheorem
13 reduces to Theorem ILl when D is a ball, h == 1, and aD is the Euclidean
boundary.
14. Barriers and Euclidean Boundary Point Regularity 127
Most of the open sets used in classical analysis have regular boundaries
because there are Poincare-Zaremba barriers at their boundary points. On
the other hand, if the excluded cone is sharpened into a cusp that is suffic-
iently sharp, a barrier may no longer exist at the vertex. For example,
suppose that N = 3, denote a point e of 1R 3 by its coordinates e(l), e (2 ), e (3 ),
let A be the closed line segment with endpoints the origin and the point
(1,0,0), and let Ji. be the measure supported by A and determined by Ji.(de) =
e(l)ll (dell). The potential GJi. has value I at the origin, value + 00 elsewhere
on A, and limit 1 at the origin along the negative e(l) axis. The set D =
g¥-O: GJi.(e) < 2} is a solid of revolution about the e(l) axis, includes the
negative e(l) axis except for the origin, and has an exponential cusp at the
origin; D is the Lebesgue spine. We now show that the origin is an irregular
boundary point of D. Iff is the boundary function equal to 2 at the finite
boundary points of D and equal to 0 at 00, thenfis resolutive because the
Euclidean boundary is always resolutive. Moreover Hf is the restriction of
GJi. to D because this restriction is a bounded harmonic function that has
the prescribed limit at every boundary point with the exception of the origin
and {O} is a harmonic measure null set. The origin is not a regular boundary
point of D because Hf has limit 1 at the origin along the negative ell) axis.
(17.1)
(17.2)
If u is in the upper PWBh class on D for fjoD and is bounded, extend u to u'
on D u aD by setting u'(O = lim inf~_~ u(rt) for' E aD. Then if e> 0, the
function u' + e - fis lower semicontinuous on D u aD, strictly positive on
aD, and therefore also strictly positive on aDn for sufficiently large n. Hence
for sufficiently large n the restriction to D n of u + e is in the upper PWBh
class on Dn for the boundary function fjoD; so JLin(·,f) ::; u + e on Dn. It
follows that lim SUPn_oo JL~n (.,f) ::; JL~(.,f), and this inequality together with
the corresponding inequality for - fyields (17.2).
Application. In Theorem 17 suppose that h == I and that aD is the Eucli-
dean boundary. Let D: be an increasing sequence of subsets of D u aD, open
relative to D u aD, define Dn = D 11 D~, and suppose that UO'Dn = D.
Suppose that At is a subset of D u aD, open relative to D u aD, and that
At c D~ for sufficiently large n. Then if A is a Borel subset of At 11 aD and
ifeED,
132 I. VIII. The Dirichlet Problem for Relative Harmonic Functions
lim J.lD
n-OQ "
(~,A) = J.lD(~,A). (17.5)
To see this, define A 2 = A 1 (') aD, and observe that if n is so large that ~ E D n
and A l C D~, then J.lDn (~,Al) = J.lDn (~,A2) and J.lD(~,Al) = J.lD(~,A2)' In view
of the vague convergence in Theorem 17(b),
for A C A 2 , and since the sum of these two inequalities yields an equality,
there must be equality in each; that is, (17.5) is true.
Theorem. (a) For each '1 in B the function G;('1, ')laD, defined as 0 at 00
if D is unbounded, is a resolutive boundary function.
(b) If~ED,then
(18.2)
18. The Extension Gj; of GD and the Harmonic Average JlD (e, G8 (1/, ,» When DeB 133
that is,
(18.2')
(18.3)
Note that we can take B = IR N here when N> 2. With this specialization
(18.4) was derived in Section 3, application of Example (a). It will be shown
in Section 19 that (18.4) and (18.5) are true when N = 2 and B = 1R 2 if and
only if 1R 2 - D is not too sparse near 00, more precisely, if and only if Dis
bounded or if unbounded D has 00 as a regular boundary point.
Observation (2). If we write IlD(e,')IB for the restriction of the measure
IlD(e,,) to the class of Borel subsets of B, then according to Theorem 18,
e
so for fixed in D the potential GB[IlD(e, ')IB] is a finite-valued superharmonic
function on B. Thus Theorem 18(b) implies that the measure on IRN - {e}
associated with the superharmonic function -G~(e,·) on this set is the
restriction of the harmonic measure IlD(e,,) to the class of Borel subsets
of IRN - {e}.
function GMDGB (",.) is in the lower PWB class on D for /" when/" is in-
creased to + 00 on the polar set of irregular boundary points of D. Since a
change of boundary function on a polar set does not change PWB solutions,
and since the middle term in (18.7) is harmonic, the last term can be replaced
by GMDGB (",.) to yield the equality
(eeD),
(18.10)
(18.11)
Now in view of the symmetry of the left side of (18.10), proved above, and
of the special lower semicontinuity property 11(6.1) of superharmonic func-
tions,
18. The Extension G; of GD and the Harmonic Average JlD (~, G;(",·» When DeB 135
(18.13)
Define v = GDv. We can assume that uS; c + I, that is, v S; (c + l)h, be-
cause Dc is unaltered if we replace u by u 1\ (c + 1). The measure v vanishes
on polar sets because v is finite valued; so (Theorem 18)
(18.14)
136 I. VIII. The Dirichlet Problem for Relative Harmonic Functions
Now on the one hand (GM Dv)jh = hGM Dvon De and on the other hand
(Section lO(a» the evaluation ~~e (., ul D) = P.De (., vlD)h combined with (18.14)
yields
(18.15)
The left side of (18.15) is a majorant of the constant function c and u:s; c
on D n oDe by lower semicontinuity of h-potentials, so (18.15) implies that
c :s; CJl~{-, D n oDe) and we conclude that there is equality here and therefore
that Jl~e(., aD noDe) == 0, as asserted.
(19.1)
(19.2)
According to Section 18, Observation (I), both these relations are true when
N> 2 with no restriction on the nonempty open subset D of IR N . Equation
(19.4) is a natural approach to finding the Green function GD , and Theorem
19 exhibits the conditions under which it is valid, that is, under which
GMDG(e,o) = JlD(e, G(", 0» when N = 2. If there is no restriction on D, the
difference between left and right sides of(l9.5) is <PD(e) - <PD(")'
Observation (2). If , is a finite regular boundary point of D or is an
inner point of 1R 2 - D, equation (19.1) yields
(19.6)
(19.7)
if"ElR 2 - aD,
if"EaD, D bounded.
(19.8)
138 I. VIII. The Dirichlet Problem for Relative Harmonic Functions
0»
The function '1'--+ JlD(~' G(rr, = JlD(~'f,,) is the potential for the kernel G
of the measure J1.D(~' 0) and is superharmonic because it is finite on 1R 2 - aD.
Proof of (19.1) when D is bounded. If D is bounded and if B = B(O, b)
contains fl, then
(19.9)
(19.10)
and so (bl) is true. The function <PD is bounded on bounded sets, that is,
(b2) is true, because in (19.1) for fixed rr in D the function G(rr, 0) is bounded
above on aD and bounded below on bounded sets, and GD(o, rT) is bounded
outside each neighborhood of '1. Finally we have already proved (19.1) with
<PB = 0 when D is bounded; that is, (b3) is true. 0
20. Interpretation of <PD as a Green Function with Pole 00 (N = 2) 139
(19.13)
(19.14)
(20.2)
It is natural to write the limit on the left as GD(e, 00) and to think of GD(', 00)
as the Green function of D with pole 00. See Section XIII.18 for further
remarks on this Green function.
140 I. VIII. The Dirichlet Problem for Relative Harmonic Functions
1. Introduction
In this chapter certain function classes that arise naturally in potential
theory will be discussed. These classes, the corresponding identically named
classes in parabolic potential theory (Section XVIII.l9) and in stochastic
process theory (Chapter V of Part 2), are discussed together in Chapter I
of Part 3.
Throughout this chapter D is a .Greenian subset of RN , N ~ 2, and h is
a strictly positive harmonic function on D. Both D and h are held fast
throughout the chapter.
LM~u = sup {Jli(·, u): B open relatively compact subset of D}, (2.1)
or else the supremum in (2.1) is identically + 00. [We adopt the convention
here and in similar contexts below that the domain of Jli(·, u) is B and that
the supremum of a set of functions at a point is the supremum at the point
of the values of those functions defined there.] Observe that the supremum
(directed limit) in question is unchanged if the sets B are all supposed to
contain a specified compact subset of D; that is, the analysis relates to the
properties of u near (any choice of) the boundary of D.
142 I. IX. Lattices and Related Classes of Functions
sup {J.l~(~, <I>(u»: B open relatively compact subset of D} < + 00. (2.3)
Then the class (2.2) is L 1 bounded; so LM~u exists, and since <I>(u) is a
positive h-subharmonic function, the supremum in (2.3) is LM~<I>(u)(~).
Thus in this case LM~<I>(u) exists, and the supremum in (2.3) is finite for
all ~; that is, the class (2.2) is uniformly integrable for each point ~ in D.
Furthermore the h-harmonic function LM~u satisfies the same uniform
integrability condition as u, with the same test function <1>; (2.3) is true with
u replaced by LM~u. In fact we now show, under the hypothesis that (2.3)
is true as written, that
To see this, let Band B' be open relatively compact subsets of D. Then as B'
varies,
J.l~(~, <I>[LM~u]) = J.l~ (e, <I> [s~'p J.l~'(" U)]) :5 J.l~ (~, s~,P J.l~'(', <I>(U»)
(2.5)
= J.l~(e, LM~<I>(u» = LM~<I>(u)(~) < + 00.
Take the supremum as B varies to find that the first two terms in (2.4) are
majorized by the third. The reverse inequality is trivial.
(See the corresponding stochastic process class in Section 2.11.11. This class
is the linear class of real-valued Borel measurable functions u on D for which
if c; is in D and if B. is an increasing sequence of open relatively compact
subsets of D with union D, then the sequence
(3.1)
3. The Class D (J.li-) 143
(3.3)
and each function U i in (e) can be chosen so that the h-subharmonic function
eIl(ui ) has an h-harmonic majorant.
144 I. IX. Lattices and Related Classes of Functions
u = LMtlul- (LMtlul- u)
is the desired representation; with this choice of Uj, equality (3.3 shows that
<I>(u j ) has LMh<l>(lul) as an h-harmonic majorant. Conversely, if u = Ut - U2
with Uj positive h-harmonic and in D<Jlt-), then lui:::;; U t + U2; so uED<Jlt-).
It will be shown in Section 3.1.9 that an h-harmonic function on a Greenian
subset D of IR N is in D<Jlt-) if and only if the function is quasi bounded (a
property defined in Section 9). More detailed results on the class of harmonic
functions in D<JlD-) for D a ball were obtained in Section 11.14, and these
results will be extended to h-harmonic functions on a ball in Section 12, to
h-harmonic functions on a Greenian set in Section XII.9.
This class is the linear class of extended real-valued Borel measurable func-
tions u on D for which if ~ is in D and if B. is an increasing sequence of open
relatively compact subsets of Dwith union D, then sUPn:o<oJl~(~, lul p ) < + 00.
It follows for p > I that LP<Jlt-) c D(Jlt-), because the function sr--.s P is
a uniform integrability test function. A Borel measurable function u on D
is in LP(Jlt-) if and only if, for each point ~ in D and each open relatively
compact subset B of D with ~ in B, Jli(~, lul p ) < + 00 and there is a compact
subset A = A~ of D for which
(4.2)
The proof of this theorem is left to the reader because the theorem follows
easily from the discussion in Section 2. Observe that part (e) of the present
theorem is slightly stronger than Theorem 3(e). In fact, in Theorem 3(e)
it is not asserted that ifu = U1 - U2 and ifcI>(u 1) and cI>(U2) have h-harmonic
majorants, then cI>(lul) has an h harmonic majorant, although the counter-
part of this assertion is contained in Theorem 4(e) with cI>(s) = sp. How-
ever, for cI>(s) = sP and p ~ I this assertion is true because then (u 1 + U2)P :::;
2P-l(uf + uD.
In Theorem 4, as in Theorem 3, the condition (b) involves a set Bin (2.2)
increasing to D, but as in Theorem 3, it is sufficient if the set B runs through
a nested sequence with union D as described in Section 2. If D is a ball, it
is natural to choose B to increase through balls concentric with B so that if
D = B(O, b), the subharmonic function lui on D is in LP(Jl~-) if and only if
sUPrL(lulp, 0, r) = limrt~L(lulp, 0, r) < + 00. The class of harmonic functions
on B(O, b) in the class V(JlB(O.~)-) was discussed in Section 11.14.
EXAMPLE. Let u be a harmonic function on the Greenian set D. Then the func-
tion u 2 is subharmonic with associated Riesz measure dA = (lJ..u2/1t~)dIN'
so that A(D) is a multiple of the Dirichlet integral of u,
We now prove that uEL 2(J.lD_) if and only if GDA is superharmonic. In the
one direction ifuE L 2(JlD_)' that is, ifLM Du 2 = v exists, then GMD(v - u2) =
0; so v - u2 is a potential and necessarily v - u2 = GDA by direct calculation
of lJ..u 2. Conversely, if GDA is superharmonic, the function u 2 + GDA is a
majorant of u2 and is harmonic because lJ..(u 2 + GDA) = 0; so uEL 2(JlD_)'
In particular, if the Dirichlet integral of u is finite, that is, if A(D) < + 00,
then GDA is superharmonic; so uEL 2(J.lD_)'
Theorem. (a) The space (S, ::$) is a conditionally complete vector lattice.
In (b)-(d) let r be a subset ofS with a specific order majorant.
(b) yr is the specific order supremum ofa countable subset ofr.
(c) If r' is the class ofspecific order majorants of r, then V r ::$ r'.
(d) Ifr is directed upward in the specific order, then Yr = V r.
+ 00 ifu'(~) = + 00,
4>(~) = .
{ (u' - "r')(o If u'(~) < + 00.
(6.1)
Now let u be a member of r. Since u' and Ar' are in r', there are members
V2and V3 ofS+ such that
(6.2)
(6.3)
Proof of (a). The fact that vr = Ar' exists shows that (S+,:s) is a condi-
tionally complete lattice and therefore that (S, -<) is a conditionally complete
vector lattice. 0
148 !.Ix. Lattices and Related Classes of Functions
Proofof (b) and (d). In proving (b) and (d) we can assume that r is directed
upward in the specific order, at the possible expense of replacing r by the
set of specific order suprema of fmite subsets of r. We can then also assume
that reS +, at the possible expense of choosing some member Uo of rand
then replacing r by {u - Uo: u E r, U >- uo}. Under these hypotheses r is also
directed upward and bounded in the essential order so that Vr = u' exists
(Section 5) and is the pointwise supremum of r and in fact is the pointwise
supremum of a sequence u. in r. Choose any member u of r and choose
v o , VI' ••. successively in r to satisfy Vo=U, vn+I::::(vn Yu n) for u~O.
The sequence V. is a specific order increasing sequence with pointwise limit
u'. There is a member Wni of S+ such that u + Wni = Vn , and if V' E r', there
is a member Wn2 ofS+ such that Vnl + Wn2 = v'. Hence
so r :::s u' -< r', and we conclude that u' = Y r = Yo Un' Thus Theorem 6(b)
and (d) are true. 0
vr=LMtr, Ar=GMtr
in the sense that if one side of an equation exists, the other side exists and
there is equality.
If D is a ball, it was shown in Section 11.14 by means of the Riesz-Herglotz
representation theorem that Sm is lattice isomorphic to the conditionally
complete vector lattice of finite signed measures on iJD. For Greenian D a
corresponding result will be proved in Section XII.9 by means of the Martin
boundary and the Martin representation theorem.
According to Section 4, an h-hannonic function is in Sm if and only if the
function is in V(,u~-).
0= u AGMtu = GMtu;
that is, ueS;. It follows that S; eSp, and so there is equality, as was to be
proved.
Thus if U e 8 and if Umqb, ••• are the respective projections of U on the bands
8 mqb , ••• , we have derived a unique decomposition
in which all functions on the right are positive in the specific order if U is a
positive h-superharmonic function.
The proof follows that of Theorem 11.14 and is omitted. Parts of the
theorem merely repeat results already discussed at the beginning of this
section as implications of Theorem 11.14.
Universal Internal Resolutivity of oB. We have already shown in Section
VIII.9 that oB is universally resolutive and that the class of PWBh solutions
is the class of h-harmonic functions given by (b1) above, which is the class
of D(Jl~_) h-harmonic functions. Since this class includes the bounded
h-harmonic functions [criterion (b2) above], it follows that oB is universally
internally resolutive.
The Class LP(Jl~-)for p > 1. We now show that uESmnLP(Jl~_)if and
only if u = PI(B, </JdMh)jh for some function </J in U(oB, M h). Observe
first that if u has this form, then
(12.3)
Since this inequality is true for continuous f, it is true for f bounded and
Borel measurable. Substitute in (12.3) the choice f = 1f.,IP-I sgnf." where
If., I < nand f = 0 elsewhere to find
r 1f.,IPdMh~VI(O),
JO!vl<n}
f oB
j
u(r,,)/PIN-I(d,,)<u
5:
u
5:N-I -
1CNU
1
(0) , (12.5)
and therefore Fatou's lemma yields the desired IN-l integrability of the
IN-I almost everywhere limit limr _ o lu(r,,/b)iP. This application of Fatou's
lemma depends on the fact that when h == I, the h-harmonic average
J.li(o,rj(O, lul ) can be written as an integral average over a measure space
p
that does not depend on r. It will be seen that such a representation of this
harmonic average is possible in a probabilistic approach (Section 2.IX.13)
even without the hypothesis that B is a ball.
Chapter X
(I.l)
(Sl) v is supported by A.
(S2) GDv = GDJ.l quasi everywhere on A.
In the following we shall write G~(~, 11) for ~GD(~' .)~A(11). It will be shown
in Section 3 that Gt is symmetric. The proof that c5t(·, B) is Borel measurable
2. Relation between Harmonic Measure and the Sweeping Kernel 157
when B is a Borel set, so that <5t is a kernel, and the proof that Gt is Borel
measurable on D x D will be given in Section 4 and so cannot be used at
the present stage. If B is open and relatively compact in D and if v = ~ 1 ~B
then v is a potential, say v = GDv, and integration with respect to v(drf)
in (1.2) yields 1 ~ <5t(·, v) ~ <5t(·, B). It follows that <5t(·, D) S; 1. It will
be seen in Section 5 [see (5.1')] that <5t(·,D) = P~A for every set A. Ac-
cording to property (f) above, if ~ is not an interior point of A, the swept
measure <5t(~,·) is supported by D n oA. On the other hand, if ~ is an interior
point of A then Gt(~,·) = GD(~") according to Section VII.3(b), and there-
fore <5t(~,·) = <5D(~' .); that is, <5t(~, {~}) = 1.
According to (1.2) and the relation between reductions and PWB solutions
derived in Section VIII.lO,
[(~,'1)ED x (D - An (2.1)
[(~,'1)E(D - A) x (D - An (2.2)
(~ED) (2.3)
(3.1)
that is Gt is symmetric on D x D.
4. Kernel Property of bt
Lemma. (j~ is a kernel.
r
the functional/f-+ L~U) = IA(e) is linear on r. Let .!?e the class of uniform
limits of sequences in r, so that (by Lemma VII.9) r includes the class of
r
continuous functions on D with compact support. IfI e with approximating
sequence!. in r, then [from Section VI.3(n)]
(4.1)
(4.2)
IL.U)I = n-+oo
lim jL.(/")1 = lim l~un~A -
n-+oo
~vn~A I ~ lim sup 1/,,1
"-+00 D
= sup
D
III; (4.3)
that is, the linear functional L{ has bound I. Thus (Riesz representation
theorem) there is a measure bDA(e,,) on D with <>DA(e, D) ~ I for which
L~U) = bDA (e,f) whenever I is continuous on D and has compact support.
Since this equation shows that bDA(',f) is Borel measurable, bDA is a kernel.
Now suppose that U = GDJl is the potential of a measure Jl with compact
support S, and let D. be an increasing sequence of open relatively compact
subsets of D with union D, for which S c Do and 15n c Dn + 1 • According to
Theorem IV. to, there is an increasing sequence u. of continuous potentials
with limit U for which Un = U on D - Do, and there is an increasing sequence
Un. of continuous potentials with limit "Dnu for which Unk = "DnU = U on
D - Dn+ 1. Then Un - Unn is in r; so
(4.4)
(4.5)
(4.6)
160 l.X. The Sweeping Operation
(5.1)
(5,1')
In the course of proving Lemma 4 we proved (4.6); that is, the first and
fourth terms of(5.1) are equal if JL has compact support. Since every positive
superharmonic function is the limit of an increasing sequence of potentials
of measures with compact supports (Section IV.lO), the first and fourth
terms of (5.1) are equal, and (5.1') is true. The first term is (5.1) is equal to
the second by definition of ~JL~A. The third term is equal to the fourth
because
and the iterated integral becomes G~JL on reversal of the order of integration.
Equation (5.2) follows immediately from (5.1); (5.3) and (5.3') follow from
(5.1), (5.1'), (5.2), and the fact that ~ ~V~A~A = ~V~A.
Generalization of ~JL~A
(5.5)
A comparison between (5.4) and (5.5) shows that h' = h and A. = ~VA~A = VA'
so that the second and third equation in (5.4) are true.
(6.1)
(6.3)
and the second term on the right is 0 because the measure b~2-Bo(e,·) is
supported by the closure of B2 - B1 • Next observe that since ~V~A B =
~ ~V~A ~A"B, it follows that
and since the measure bJ(tI,,) vanishes on polar sets not containing tI,
equation (6.4) reduces to
(6.5)
e
The last term on the right is 0 by hypothesis when" = and vanishes at all
other points" because according to (b) above, the measure (jt('1,') vanishes
on polar sets not containing".
implies that the reduction operations performed on the left have not de-
creased hI or h - hI, so hI = ~hl~{'l.
(8.1)
Reductions below not otherwise described are relative to Do. If Fis an open
relatively compact subset of D containing A, the set Do - F is a deleted
neighborhood of tX relative to Do v oDo, ~hO~Do-F is a minorant of ho and is
harmonic and bounded on F, and ~hO~Do-F/ho is in the upper PWBho class
on Do for the boundary function l{aJ' Moreover (by Theorem V.S) the
function ~hO~Do-F has an extension to D, harmonic on F and majorized by
h. When F increases, tending to D, this extension decreases, tending to a
harmonic minorant of the potential h, that is, tending to the zero function.
Thus {tX} is an ho-harmonic measure null set. Next we prove that the
evaluation
(8.2)
Now [by Theorem VII.3(b)] when '1 is in C, the integrand is equal to GD(e, ,,),
and on the other hand [Section VI.3(m)], when '1 is in A-C and B shrinks
to C, the integrand tends to ~GD(·,'1)~e(e), which vanishes because Cis
polar. Thus (8.2) is true, and since ~ho~e/ho is the upper PWBho solution on
Do for the boundary function Ie, we have proved that this upper solution
is an additive function of C. Since we can ignore the ho-harmonic measure
null singleton {l:l}, it follows from Theorem VIII.9 that Do is ho resolutive.
Finally (8.1) is now equivalent to (8.2).
Chapter XI
e,
where B is a ball containing Uj is a bounded superharmonic function on
a neighborhood of ii, vanishing at ~, and C is a strictly positive constant.
The neighborhood (1.2) is fine closed and is Euclidean topology compact. It
e e
follows that a point is a fine limit point of a set A if and only if is a fine
limit point of every open superset of A.
A point ~ of ~N is a fine limit point of a set A if and only if eis a Euclidean
limit point of A and if each superharmonic function U defined on an open
e
neighborhood D of ~ has u(e) as a cluster value at along A. For example,
according to 11(6.1), the complement of an IN null set is fine everywhere
dense.
e
A subset A of ~N is said to be thin at a finite point if ~ is not a fine
limit point of A, that is, if ~ is not in AI. According to the above remarks
e,
on fine neighborhoods, if A is thin at there is an open superset of A which
e.
is also thin at The corresponding remarks for ~ = 00 are left to the reader.
B:
is a nonempty fine-open set there is a sequence of compact sets with non-
empty fine interiors such that EO c Bo n B and that B~+l is a subset of the
fine interior of B~ n Bn for all n. Then
ao ao
o =1= nB~ c nBnnB
o 0
so n~ Bn is fine dense.
2. A Thinness Criterion
Theorem. If a set A has finite limit point ~, then A is thin at ~ if and only if
there is a superharmonic function u defined on an open neighborhood of ~
such that
U > c + (n - I) min Uj
j$n
on (A - g}) n B; so
To prove the second assertion of the theorem, let u satisfy (2.1), and suppose
first that jj is bounded and contained in the domain of u. Then u is bounded
below and can be made positive on D by addition of a suitable constant
without affecting (2.1). Let Br be the ball ofcenter ~ and radius r < I~ - aDI
and let J.lr be the projection on Br of the measure associated with u. Then
GDJ.lr(~) ;:5; u(~) < + 00 and u differs from GDJ.lr by a function harmonic on
Br ; so if b (;:5; + (0) is the strictly positive difference between the left and
right sides of (2.1),
3. Conditions That ~E AI 169
A polar set A o has no fine limit points because according to Theorem V.2,
e
if A o is polar and if E Af>, there is a superharmonic function defined on an
e, e,
open neighborhood of finite at and identically + <X) on the part of A o
in a deleted neighborhood of e;
so (2.1) is satisfied, contradicting the
e
hypothesis that E At;. (In the fine topology of ~N u { <X)} as defined in
Section 5 a polar set cannot have <X) as a fine limit point; this assertion is
reduced by an inversion in a sphere to the one just treated.) The converse
result that A& = 0 implies that A o is polar will be proved in Section 6. The
fact that a polar set has no fine limit point implies that if A is an arbitrary
subset of a Greenian set D, then (reduction relative to D) ~V~A = von AI n D.
In fact this equality is true quasi everywhere on A, that is, everywhere on
A - A o for some polar set A o ; so the fine continuity of superharmonic
functions implies that v = ~V~A on (A - A£) = AI.
e,
Observation ( 1). The fact that when B is a neighborhood of the relations
eeAf and ee(A II B)f are equivalent implies that properties (c) and (c') are
true under the stated conditions if A is replaced by A II B, and B need not
appear in (a). Property (a) was phrased using B to contrast with (a'), in
which B is essential.
Observation (2). We have already noted in Section X.6 the fact that the
only possible values of <5~(~, {en are 0 and 1. We now see that the value is
o if and only if A is thin at ~.
Proof (a)-(c) Suppose that eeAf. Then ee(A II B)~ and as pointed out
in Section 2, it follows that ~v~AnB(O = v(~); so (a) is true, and in particular,
Gt(·, e) = GD(',~) on D; that is (sweeping symmetry), (c) is true. Finally,
(c) <=>(b) by definition of <5~.
e e
(a')-(c') Suppose that e D - AI. We can suppose that is a (Euclidean
topology) limit point of A, adjoining a countable set with limit point to e
A if necessary to achieve this. The adjunction does not change smoothed
reductions on A and does not change <5~. Then (by Theorem 2) there is a
e
positive superharmonic function u on D, finite at but with limit + 00 at e
alongA. If t: > 0 and if B is so small that u > lit: on A II (B - {e}), it follows
that
Hence limB.j.~ <5~nB(e, {e}) = 0, and it follows from Section X.6(c) that
<5~(e, {e}) = 0, as asserted in Theorem 3(b'). Theorem 3(a') now also follows
from Section X.6(c), and Theorem 3(c') follows from the definition of <5~.
o
4. An Internal Limit Theorem 171
r IN-l (A r ) 0 (3.2)
r~llJ ,N-l = .
In the second place the rth smoothed reduction on the left obviously major-
izes the smoothed reduction at e relative to B(e, r) of the function 1 onto
the boundary set A r ; the value of the latter smoothed reduction is IN-l (A r )/
'TtN,N-l according to 111(4.3).
This application of Theorem 3 implies that a solid cone of revolution in
IRN is not thin at its vertex. According to the criterion of Theorem 12 for
Dirichlet problem regularity of a boundary point in terms of the fine topol-
ogy, the nonthinness of a solid cone of revolution at its vertex is equivalent
to the Poincare-Zaremba criterion for Dirichlet problem regularity of a
boundary point (Section VIII. 15).
Strengthening of (a'). The following slight strengthening of (a') will be
needed below: if eeA f and ifv(e) < +00, then
(a")
To see this, observe that this limit is limB.j.~bt(e, M~, that according to the
remarks at the beginning of this section, limB.j.~ ~V~B = 0 on D - {e}, and
that according to (b'), bt(e, {en = o.
Theorem. (a) The function u has a fine limit u*(O at quasi every and Vv + Vh
a/most every point ( of D. Moreover u* < + 00 quasi everywhere and Vh
a/most everywhere on D, and u* = + 00 v~ almost everywhere on {e: v(e) =
+oo}.
(b) At Vh almost ever.y point ( of the set {e: h(e) = + oo}, equivalently, at
Vh almost every point ( ofan arbitrary polar subset of D,
(4.2)
(4.3)
Proof of (c). The special result (4.2), in which h = GD(·,O and so Vh is the
unit measure supported by {(}, is so much easier to prove than the more
general case (4.1) that we prove (4.2) separately, as follows. We have already
seen (Section VII.IO) that the last two terms in (4.2) are equal. In proving
(4.2) it can be supposed, replacing v by v - vv ( {(} )GDh 0 if necessary, that
these two terms vanish; under this hypothesis, unless (4.2) is true, there is a
strictly positive number b such that the set B = {"I: v('1) > bGD ('1, O} i~ not
thin at (. Apply Theorem 3(c) to find that
contrary to the hypothesis that v/GD (·, 0 has infimum O. Hence (4.2) is true.
D
4. An Internal Limit Theorem 173
V /\ bh
hAB + hABAB + ... S; -b--. (4.5)
-0
Now
e
Since bg(e, {e}) = I when eBI, we can continue this inequality to find that
if v~ is the projection of Vh on Bf (I F, then v ;=:: bGD v~. Now GD - F is the
restriction to (D - F) x (D - F) of GD, and the restriction to D - F of
bGD v~ is harmonic and is majorized by a potential, the restriction to D - F
ofv. HenceGDv~ == OonD - F; SOGDV~ == OonD,and thereforevh(BI (I F) =
e
0; that is, flim sup,,_, u('1) :s; b for Vh almost every point of F for allb>O.
Hence u* = 0 Vh almost everywhere on F, as asserted. If this result is applied
to h/v with F the trace of a Vh null support for v~ on the set of infinities of v,
we find that u* = + 00 ~ almost everywhere on F, as asserted in (a).
There remains the proof of (4.1). Let 4J be the Radon-Nikodym deriva-
tive in (4.1). It is sufficient to show that if F is a v~ null Borel polar subset
of D, then u* = 4J Vh almost everywhere on F. By what we have just proved,
if Vh is the projection of Vh on F,
va(e) = i
Fa
GD(e, '1)4J('1)vh(d'1).
lim u('1) =
A,,,-+etJ
+ 00 (N) 2). (5.2)
Proof of (a) and (b). (For N> 2). To avoid trivialities we assume that A is
unbounded. Let </J be an inversion in oB«(, 15). Then </J(A) has limit point (,
and we prove first that if </J(A) is thin at (, there is a positive superharmonic
function u on [RN satisfying (5.2). In fact by Theorem 4(b) there is a positive
superharmonic function v on D = [RN such that (4.1) is true, and therefore
the function
has limit + 00 at the point 00 along A. The function on the right is a positive
superharmonic function on [RN - {n
and in fact is a multiple of the Kelvin
transform of v. This function has a positive superharmonic extension u to
[RN (Theorem V.5), and u is the desired function. Conversely, if there is a
positive superharmonic function u on some open deleted neighborhood of
the point 00 satisfying (5.2) and if </J is an inversion in oB«(,c5), we prove
that </J(A) is thin at (. The Kelvin transform v of u is a multiple of u(</J)G«(, '),
defined positive and superharmonic on a deleted open neighborhood B of (,
and v/G«(,') has limit + 00 at ( along </J(A); so [by Theorem 4(b)] the set
A is thin at (, as was to be proved. Thus (a) and (b) of the theorem are true
for N > 2. 0
Proof of (c). (For N ~ 2). Under the hypothesis of (c), the set A is thin at
( if and only if (Theorem 2) there is a superharmonic function u defined on
176 I.XI. The Fine Topology
The proof of Theorem 5(a) and (b) for N = 2 follows the proof for N > 2
and is left to the reader.
Extension ofthe Fine Topology to IR N u { 00 }. We make the definition that
a subset A 1 of IR N u {oo} does not have fine limit point 00, and we describe
Al as thin at 00 if A = Al n IR N is subsumed under case (al) of Theorem 5.
The fine topology is thereby extended to IR N u { 00 }, and according to
Theorem 5, an inversion is a fine topology homeomorphism of IR N u { 00 }
onto itself.
The Limit Relation (4.1) at the Point 00. Let v be a positive superharmonic
function defined on a deleted neighborhood of a finite point (. Then (by
Theorem V.5) if v(O is defined as lim inf"...{v(,,), the extended function v is
positive and superharmonic on a neighborhood of (, and v satisfies the fine
limit relation (4.1). Trivially, v also satisfies the fine continuity relation
flimv(,,) = liminfv(,,).
"...{ "...{
If u is a positive superharmonic function defined on a deleted neighborhood
of the point 00, then inversion of IR N in a sphere yields a context to which
(4.1) and (5.3) can be applied to yield the following.
U geB
00
j : ~ I~A"Bj(e) $; t}
j=O
is D - AI. Since each set in this union meets A in a polar set, the set D - AI
is an F;, set meeting A in a polar set. In particular, A is polar if AI = 0.
e
The set AI is trivially fine closed, and is fine perfect because if were a fine
isolated point of AI, that is, if some deleted fine neighborhood B of e
contained no point of AI, then the set B n A would contain none of its
e
fine limit points and thus would be polar, and could not be in AI, contrary
to hypothesis.
(7.1)
In fact the first two terms are equal because, on the one hand, A c A U
(AI n D) and, on the other hand, a superharmonic function on D majorizing
von A necessarily majorizes v on AI n D. The first term is equal to the third
because A differs from A n AI by a polar set. The fourth term is equal to
the others because A n AI c AI c A u AI.
It can be assumed that ~ is finite. Define D(D) = D(~, D). Suppose that
each set A k is a deleted fine neighborhood of ~, and define Fk = D(I)-
(A k u g}). The set Fk is thin at ~, and to show one part of the lemma, it
is sufficient to show that there is a set F, thin at ~, with the property that
for each k the part of Fk in a sufficiently small neighborhood of ~ is a subset
of F. If for all but a finite number of values of k the point ~ is not a limit
point of Fk, we can take F as the union of those sets Fk for which ~ is a limit
point of Fk. Otherwise, it is no restriction to assume that ~ is a limit point
of Fk for all k, and we can apply Theorem 2 to find a positive superharmonic
r
function Uk on D(l) with Uk(~) < k and with limit + 00 at ~ along Fk. The
function u = Lg'Uk is positive and superharmonic on D(l) with u(~) < 2 and
with limit + 00 at ~ along each set Fk. Choose rk so that I = ro > r 1 > ... ,
limk _ oo rk = 0, and so that u ~ k on Fk n D(rk ). If F = Ug'(Fk n D(rk )), the
function u has limit + 00 at ~ along F; so F is thin at ~, and Fk n D(rk) c F
as desired. To prove the second assertion of the lemma, observe that if each
set A k has ~ as fine limit point, then
9. Fine Topology Limits and Euclidean Topology Limits (Continued) 179
»
so that A k n (B(rk ) - B(rHI c: A. Then ~ I ~AnB('k)(~) ~!. If follows (by
Theorem 3) that A is not thin at ~, and since An B(rk ) c: A k , the proof is
complete.
(10.2)
We have already proved that ~fJ.~A has these two properties. Conversely,
if a measure V on D has these properties, then V = ~V~A by Theorem 14;
so since <5t(~,·) is supported by AI n D,
184 I. XI. The Fine Topology
(16.1)
(16.2)
~v~{V"c} = V 1\ c, (17.1)
so that
Now A c {v::s; c}f, and therefore [by Theorem 3(b)] the integrand in (17.2)
e
is 1 when E A; so u(A) = 0, as was to be proved.
Proof of (a). The first assertion of (a) is Theorem 3(b). To prove the second
e
assertion, let be a point of D - AI, and observe that the restriction v to
D - g} of the function Gt(e, -) - GD(e, -) is superharmonic with associated
Riesz measure the restriction of bt(e, -) to the class of bt(e, -) measurable sub-
sets of D - {e}. The set {v = O} is a Borel superset of the set AI n (D - {e}),
and it follows from Corollary 17 that the fine interior of this superset is
bt(e, -) null. Since it is already known (Theorem 14) that bt(e, -) is supported
by D n AI, it follows that this measure is supported by D n al AI, as was
to be proved. 0
(19.1)
(19.2)
(19.3)
{1Jf = + 00 } u n {f
,>0
5; 1Jf 5; I + e < + 00 }'.
(b) IfI is fine upper semicontinuous, the measure Ilf is supported by the
set {1Jf = IV.
This theorem generalizes Theorem 18(b). In fact, suppose that A is a
subset of D, nonpolar in each open connected component of D to avoid
trivialities, and suppose that v is a strictly positive superharmonic function
on D. Define I = IA v; so R+f = R+vA , and suppose first that A is fine closed in
D. Then/is fine upper semicontinuous, and according to the present theorem,
Ilf is supported by the set {1Jf = IV and so is supported by {1Jf = I} because
this set is fine closed in D and so is supported by Af because 1Jf > I = on °
D - A. If A is not fine closed in D, we can replace A here by the set AI n D,
fine closed in D, because by fine continuity of superharmonic functions any
superharmonic function majorizing v on A majorizes v on Af n D; so R
+f
and R+vA are not changed by this set change. The result for fine-closed sets
shows that Ilf is supported by Af n D as stated in Theorem 18(b).
up to a polar set; so
{f~~r C{!!/~~rc{!!/~~}'
and when b -+ 0, the set on the right decreases to {l}1 = + 00 }. Thus Theorem
20(a) has now been proved for f~ O.
To reduce the general case to the case of positive f, observe that if B is
a compact subset of D and if Do is an open neighborhood of B, relatively
compact in D, then the restriction of l}1 to Do is the smoothed infimum
of the class of superharmonic functions majorizing R on Do - Band
+1
majorizing f on B. Without loss of generality in the discussion of J1.1 we
can suppose, adding a constant to f if necessary, that the restriction to Do
of f is positive. It now follows from what we have already proved that for
every B the projection of J1.1 on B is supported by A~ (') Do for all strictly
positive e and b; so J1.1 is supported by A~tl for all strictly positive e and b,
and the rest of (a) follows as in the positive case.
(b) Iff is fine upper semicontinuous, the set
and part (a) of the theorem implies, when e -+ 0, that the measure J1.1 is
supported by the union of {!!1 = f} and the polar set {!!/ < j}. Since (by
Theorem V.H) !!I = +00 at J1.1 almost every point of a polar set, the set
{!!1 < f} must be J1.1 null; so part (b) of the theorem is true. 0
Special Positivity Case
Proof If N > 2, the point ( must be finite because (by Theorem VIllA)
00 is a regular boundary point of every unbounded open set. If N = 2 and
if ( = 00, an inversion of the plane in a finite boundary point reduces the
theorem to one with (finite. Thus we can assume that ( is finite and therefore
also that D is bounded. If (is an isolated boundary point of D, u has a super-
harmonic extension to D u {(} and so has a fine limit at (, the value at (
of the extension, namely, liminf~ ....{u(~). If ( is not an isolated boundary
point of D, the fact that ( is irregular implies that ~N - D is thin at ( and
therefore (by Theorem 2) that there is a positive superharmonic function v
on an open neighborhood of 15, finite at (, with limit + 00 at ( along ~N - D.
Define c = lim inf~ ....{(u + VID)(~)' If c = + 00, then u has fine limit + 00 at
(because v has the finite fine limit v(O at (along D. If c < + 00, the function
U 1 = (u + VID) 1\ (c + l) is superharmonic on D, is majorized by c + I, and
has limit c + I at every boundary point of D in some open neighborhood
B of ( except at ( itself. Extend u 1 to D u (B - {(}) by setting u 1 = C + I
on B - (D u {(}). Then U 1 is superharmonic and lower bounded on a deleted
neighborhood of (, and as noted above, such a function has a fine limit at"
necessarily the inferior limit of the function at (. Thus
f1imu 1(O
~ ....{
= liminfu1(O
~....{
= c.
Hence U + VID has fine limit c at (; so u has fine limit c - v(O at (. 0
Modifications of Theorem 21
Since this equality is true for positive continuous f on aD, it is true for
arbitrary one-side-bounded Borel measurable f on aD, and therefore (22.1)
is true.
(b) If A is a harmonic measure null subset of aD, then f J1D ((, A) = O.
We prove this in two steps, first proving it when ( is not in A by proving
it for A compact and not containing" This result is implied by (22.1) if D
is so small that A n aD = 0. Second, we prove that f J1D ((, {(}) = O. To
prove this, we use the fact that IR N - D is thin at ( to find a positive super-
harmonic function von the union of D with an open neighborhood of (,
with v(O < + 00 and with v having limit + 00 at ( along IR N - D. Define the
lower semicontinuous function v' on aD be setting v'(rt) = liminfD3~"""v(~),
and define v" as v' on aD - {(} but v"(O = + 00. Then v" is also lower
semicontinuous. If e > 0,
22. The Limit Harmonic Measure f/l D 193
Here we have used the fact that v" = v' off the harmonic measure null set
{n and that v is in the upper PWB class on D for the boundary function ev'.
Inequality (22.6) implies that fJ.l.D«(' {n) = 0, as asserted.
From now on when u is a function in D, and BE r, the averages J.l.B(e, u)
and fJ.l.B«(, u) will be used under the convention that in these averages u(r,)
is to be taken as liminfB3~_"u(e) when "1EoBnoD. Ifu is superharmonic,
this convention means that the function to be integrated on oB is lower
semicontinuous.
(c) If u is a lower-bounded superharmonic function on D and if Bl and
B2 are in r with Bl C B2 , then
(22.7)
(22.8)
and VIII(l8.2) implies that fGD «(,') is harmonic on D, as is also easily proved
directly. When D is connected, the superior limit in (22.8) must be strictly
positive; that is, fGD «(,') must be strictly positive, in view of the criterion
[Section VIII.l4, Application (c)] in terms of GD that a boundary point of
D be irregular.
so v ~ h.
Chapter XII
1. Motivation
Let D be an open subset of IRN . If D is a ball, its Euclidean boundary is so
well adapted to it from a potential theoretic point of view that the following
statements are true.
(a) The class of minimal harmonic functions on D is in a one-to-one
correspondence with the Euclidean boundary points, ,,<:> K(",,) (see Section
11.16), and every positive harmonic function u on D is representable as an
integral JaDK(", ·)Mu(d,,) with M u a uniquely defined measure on the ball
boundary. The lattices of positive harmonic functions on D and of measures
on aD are thereby in a one-to-one order-preserving correspondence, and
the vector lattices of differences between positive harmonic functions on
the ball and signed measures on the ball boundary are linearly and order
isomorphic.
(b) The Euclidean boundary of the ball is universally resolutive and
universally internally resolutive (Section IX.12).
(c) Every boundary point is regular, so that GD(~") has limit 0 at
every boundary point. Moreover (up to a multiplicative constant) the normal
derivative of GD(~") at the boundary is the density relative to IN-l of har-
monic measure.
(d) The Fatou theorem and its generalizations (Section 11.15) assign
to each positive h-harmonic function, and therefore to each h-harmonic
function in Ll(Jl~_) on the ball, a boundary function. In particular, the
Fatou boundary function of a PWBh solution H; is equal M h almost every-
where to!
The Martin boundary of a Greenian subset D of IRN is defined in such
a way that it has some of these properties. Observe, however, that other
compactifications may be better adapted to other properties. For example,
the Kuramochi boundary is specially well adapted to the second boundary
value problem.
The only restriction to be imposed on D is that it be Greenian and con-
nected. It will be necessary to generalize two concepts playing a central
role in the ball case: special approach to the boundary (radial or non-
196 I. XII. The Martin Boundary
tangential) and the normal derivative of the Green function at the boundary.
The fine topology will be extended to the Martin boundary, and approach
to a Martin boundary point in this topology will replace both radial and
nontangential approach to the boundary in the ball case. If D = B(O, r)
and if ~ E D, then GD(~,") '" const. (r -1,,1) when 1,,1 ~ r so that if v is a
measure on D with compact support, GDv(,,) '" const. (r -1,,1) near the
boundary. This fact suggests that the normal derivative of GD(~' 0) at the
boundary point' should be replaced by
when' is a Martin boundary point, if this limit exists, for some convenient
measure v. It was Martin's idea to define a boundary in such a way that this
limit does exist and in fact to use the existence of this limit to define a
boundary.
Topological Conventions
Recall that throughout this book in dealing with IRN and its subsets, if no
topology is specified, the topology of IRN is to be understood as the usual
topology, sometimes identified as the Euclidean topology, compactified by
a point at infinity when boundaries of unbounded sets are in question.
(2.1)
for" and ~ in D except that K.(~,~) is left undefined when GDV(~) = + 00.
The function K. will be called the Martin function based on v, and K will
sometimes be written for K. when the choice of v is irrelevant. If v is the
probability measure supported by a singleton go}, so that K.(",~) =
GD(", ~)IGD('" ~o), the Martin function will be said to be based on ~o'
For" a point of finiteness of GD v the function K.(", 0) is a strictly positive
harmonicfunction on D - {,,}, and for ~ in D the function K.h~) is con-
tinuous on D - (T•• In view of the properties of GD listed in Section VII.3,
if A is a compact subset of D and if A t is a neighborhood of A U (TV' the
functions K. and 11K. are bounded on (D - At) x A. Moreover
3. The Martin Space 197
(2.2)
(3.1)
Hence for 'I in D - (0'" U O'J the function Ki'1,') associated with the point
'I and the Martin function K" is a constant multiple of the function Kv ('1,')
198 I.XII. The Martin Boundary
associated with '1 and Kv • The choice of reference measure for a Martin
function is a matter of convenience, although the most common choice
is one with (Tv a singleton, that is, with Kv based on a reference point.
Proof of theorem. Let Kv be a Martin function, and suppose that v has been
chosen to make GDv finite valued and continuous. Letfbe a strictly positive
continuous function on D, IN integrable over D, and define
EXAMPLE (Balls and Half-Spaces). Let D = B(O, <», and let v be a unit mea-
sure supported by the origin. Then Kv (11, 0) = I for 11 #: 0 and
4. Preliminary Representations of Positive Harmonic Functions and Their Reductions 199
if N= 2
if N> 2
(4.1)
(4.2)
(4.3)
(4.4)
(4.5)
(4.6)
~u~{~} = u and that then ( is also a pole of every positive harmonic minorant
ofu.
(5.1)
6. Extension of Lemma 4
Lemma. (Context of Lemma 4). If F is a compact subset of OM D, there is a
measure AuF supported by F such that
202 1. XII. The Martin Boundary
i
~ ~U~F ~Fn = (j~n(., ~U~F) = (j~n(., K.«(, ·»A.uF(dO
= i ~K.«(,·) ~FnA.uF(dO,
which yields the second equation in (6.1) when n -+ 00 in view of the idem-
potency of the smoothed reduction operation.
Application. A Martin boundary point ( is nonminimal if and only if
~K.(C·) ~{{}== O. In fact, according to Lemma 6 with u = K.(C·) and F = g},
«( eA). (7.1)
shows that ~h~A == 0; that is, A is h-harmonic measure null. The application
in Section 6 implies that the points of B' rl B are not minimal and that when
B runs through the open sets of a countable topological base of D M , the
class of F" h-harmonic measure null sets B' rl B covers the set of nonminimal
Martin boundary points. The theorem follows.
It is sufficient to show that the first and third terms in (8.1) are equal
because the second term lies between them. There is [from Section VIII.5(b)]
a positive h-superharmonic function u on D that has limit + 00 at every point
of the h-harmonic measure null set of nonminimal Martin boundary points.
Define
The set An is a compact set of minimal boundary points, and since [from
Section VI.3(e)] limn...", ~h~An = ~h~A', it will suffice to prove that ~h~A' = h.
Since u has limit + 00 at every point of the set B = OM D - A', the set B is
h-harmonic measure null [Section VIII.5(b)]; so ~h~B = 0, and by sub-
additivity of the set function ~hr,
v=
ioMD
dM
K«(,·) dMV(OMh(dO.
h
(9.2)
See Section IO for the relation between Martin representing signed mea-
sures and harmonic measures.
(9.4)
Proofof (b). The uniqueness property has already been proved. The relation
v/h +-+ Mv is obviously linear and is specific order preserving because v ~ 0 if
and only if M v ~ O. The vector lattices in question are therefore isomorphic.
o
Proofof (c). The assertions of(c) follow from the vector lattice isomorphism
just derived. On the one hand, hSmqb is the subband of~m generated by the
function I, and hS ms is the orthogonal complement of hSmqb in ~m; that is,
hS ms is the subband of hSm orthogonal to the function I. Equivalently, hSmqb
206 I. XII. The Martin Boundary
is the subband of hSm consisting of the class of functions v/h with v in the
subband of ISm generated by h, and ~ms is the subband of ~m consisting of
the class of functions v/h with v in the subband of ISm orthogonal to h. On
the other hand, it then follows from (b) that v/h is a quasi-bounded h-har-
monic function if and only if M p is in the band generated by M h of signed
or
measures (charges) on OM D supported by D, that is, if and only if Mp is
absolutely continuous relative to Mh . Furthermore v/h is a singular h-har-
monic function if and only if M p 1. M h , that is, if and only if M p is singular
relative to M h • 0
1 = c(e) Ludv.
Hence c(') is a constant function on the support of Au, K(e,,) is the same
e
function for all in this support, and therefore Au is supported by a singleton
{'1}. The point '1 is minimal and therefore (Theorem 9) uniquely determined
by u. In particular, if u = K('1''') for some minimal boundary point '1',
it follows that the point '1 must bert'.
The Notation Mp
(10.1)
The function A 1-+ jj~ is therefore additive and (Section VIII.9) h-resolutivity
A
of OM D follows, and also the evaluation Jl~(-, dO = K(', ·)Mh(dO/h. Ac-
cording to Section IX.9, every PWBh solution is quasi bounded. Conversely,
if u = vJh is a quasi-bounded h-harmonic function, equivalently (Theorem
9), if M v is absolutely continuous relative to M h, and iff= dMvJdMh,
(10.3)
so that u is the PWBh solution for the boundary function f; that is, (10.1)
is true. Thus the Martin boundary is universally internally resolutive as
well as universally resolutive, and the proof of the theorem is complete.
Intrinsic Definition ofh-Harmonic Measure. Ifu = vJh is h-harmonic on D,
if
The set A is said to be minimal thin at ( if the conditions (b) are satisfied.
The last assertion of the theorem is trivial, and the proofs will be phrased
accordingly. Observe that in view of the application in Section 6 if ( is a
nonminimal Martin boundary point, condition (b2) is satisfied because
. d'Icated'10fiImum IS
the 10 . R{~)
K(~,.)'
The proof of the theorem will be carried through in several steps, num-
bered for convenience in reference.
A
Proof Step 1. Proof that R+K«,·)
is either K«(,') or a potential. Since K«(,·)
is minimal, the Riesz decomposition of R+ KA«..) must have the form
11. Minimal Thinness at a Martin Boundary Point 209
R A
+K(V)
= V + cK(Y,>, .) , (11.1)
(11.2)
and since a function majorizes its smoothed reduction, it follows that the
terms on the right in (ll.l) and (11.2) are pairwise equal. Hence either
c = 0 and 1J:({,.) is a potential or c > 0 and 1J:({,) = K((, '), in which case
c = 1 and v = O.
Step 2. Proof of (c2). Without loss of generality we can assume that B
is so small that the compact support of the measure on which K is based
does not meet ii. According to Lemma 4, there is a measure A on D M , sup-
ported by oeD - B) (boundary relative to D M), such that
If there were equality in (c2), the integral would define a harmonic function
on D; so the measure A would be supported by oMD. However, according
to Section 9, such an integral representation of a minimal harmonic function
K((,') is possible only if A is supported by {n, contrary to the definition
of B. Hence there cannot be equality in (c2).
Step 3. Proof that (aI) <:> (a2). The implication (a2) = (aI) is trivial. To
prove the reverse implication observe that if (al) is true and (a2) is false,
AnB
then R+K({,") is a potential for sufficiently small B by Step 1, and R+KA({,.)
-
B
is a
potential according to Step 2, because this smoothed reduction is a positive
superharmonic function majorized by the potential 1J%(~,~). Hence by set
A
subadditivity of reductions R+K({,') is a potential, contrary to hypothesis.
Step 4. Proof of (el). Assertion (el) is trivially true when B = D and
therefore true for arbitrary B by (a), which we have just proved. Alternatively
(cl) is true because [by Theorem Sea)] (is a pole of K((, .).
Step 5. Proof_that (bI) = (b2). The function R~~~) is harmonic and
positive on D - B. Let B shrink to (, say along a sequence of balls of center
( and radii tending to 0 (in terms of some Martin space metric). Then the
limit of the corresponding sequence of reductions in (b2) is the indicated
A
infimum and is a positive harmonic function, majorized by R+K({,') • Since
The proof of the theorem is now complete, and we turn to the definition
of the minimal-fine topology of D M .
(P4) Every set in MT(O has an open superset in MT(O, because ac-
cording to Section III.5(e),
(Section 11.16), and D - B is the locus of the inequality K(,,·) ~ c for some
strictly positive constant c. Since we shall prove [equation (12.3)] that the
minimal-fine limit of K(,,·) at , is + 00, the set D - B is minimal thin at ,.
The set D - B is not thin at , because it contains the trace on a neighborhood
of' ofan open cone with vertex' (see Section XI. 3). We shall use the notation
"mf lim" for minimal-fine limits.
EXAMPLE (b). Denote by d~ the Nth coordinate of the point ~ of ~N, and
define D = {~: d~ > O}. Then (from Section 3) D M is the closure of D in
the one-point compactification of ~N; so the Martin boundary is the
Euclidean boundary. If u is a positive superharmonic function on D, if
e > 0, if Uc = u( ~/e), if A is a subset of D, and if eA has the obvious meaning,
then RA(~)
+u
= RCA(e~).
+u c
In particular, ifu(~) = I~I-Nd" that is, ifu is a minimal
~
A
If A is relatively compact in D and not polar, then R +u
is a nonzero potential,
and the evaluation of GD in Section VIII.9 shows that RA(e~) +u
'" eN-l4J(~)
when e -+ 0, with 4J a strictly positive finite-valued function. It follows that
if e. is an arbitrary sequence of strictly positive numbers with limit 0 and if
B is the intersection of U~ (ellA) = A' with a Euclidean neighborhood of
the origin, then
for sufficiently large n. Hence A' is not minimal thin at the origin.
v
mflim ~ = i n f -- = Mi{(}). (13.1 )
~-~ K«(, r,) D K«(,·)
We shall see (in Section 19) that Theorem 13(a) is a special case of the
Fatou boundary limit theorem for a Martin space.
To prove Theorem 13, translate the proof of Theorem XI.4(c), (d) into
the present context, replacing GD «(,·) in that proof by K«(,·) and "thin"
by "minimal thin." See Example (a) in Section 12 for a discussion of the
relation between theorems on limits at a minimal Martin boundary point and
limits at a point of D.
Application. If v is a potential in (a), we find that the minimal-fine limit
=
is O. If v I in (a), we find that
Observe that (14.1) is trivial if the indicated inferior limit is + 00. We can
therefore ignore this case and prove the equality in (14.1) by showing that
214 1. XII. The Martin Boundary
whenever c is a finite number strictly larger than the inferior limit in (14.1),
it follows that the set A = {'7: v('7) ~ CGD(~''7)} is minimal thin at ,. Let K
be a Martin function for D based on the point ~. By definition ofthe smoothed
reduction on A the inequality v ~ C~GD(~' .)~A is valid on D; so in view of
sweeping symmetry, if'7ED - g},
and therefore since ~K('7,·) ~A(~) = b~(~, K('7, .», Fatou's lemma is appli-
cable when '7 - , in (14.2) and yields
Hence ~K(" .)~A(~) < 1 = K(',~); so (from Section 11) the set A is minimal
thin at " as was to be shown in proving the equality in (14.1). To show that
the minimal-fine limit in (14.1) is strictly positive, it can be assumed that v
is a strictly positive potential GD v, after replacing v if necessary by its re-
duction on a ball relatively compact in D. Under this hypothesis,
as was to be proved.
Special case: v == 1. If GD(e,·) has minimal-fine limit 0 at " as we shall
prove (Section 18) is true at J1.D almost every minimal Martin boundary
point" it follows from Theorem 14 that GD(e,·) has limit 0 at' on approach
to , in the Martin topology. [Incidentally, this application of Theorem 14
to the function l/GD (e,·) exhibits the fact that the minimal-fine limit + 00
cannot be excluded in (14.1).] This vanishing of the Green function GD(e,·) at
the Martin boundary (to be extended by relativization in Section 18) is
one indication that the Martin boundary is well adapted to classical potential
theory.
Lemma_ Let A_ be a decreasing sequence ofsubsets ofD, and suppose that each
set A k is a deleted minimal-fine neighborhood of' [has minimal-fine limit point
,]. Then there is a subset A of D with the property that for each k the part of
A in a sufficiently small Martin topology neighborhood of' is in A k and that A
is a deleted minimal-fine neighborhood of' [has minimal-fine limit point n.
The proof is similar to that of Lemma XI. 8 ; so only the unbracketed
assertion will be proved. Suppose that each set A k is a deleted minimal-fine
neighborhood of (, and define Fie = D - A k . The set Fie is minimal thin at (,
and it is sufficient to show that there is a set F, minimal thin at (, with the
property that for each k the part of Fie in a sufficiently small neighborhood of
, is a subset of F. If for all but a finite number of values of k the point'
is not a limit point of Fie, we can take F as the union of those sets Fie for
which' is not a limit point of Fie. Otherwise, it is no restriction to assume that
, is a limit point of Fie for all k. Let Br be the intersection with D of a ball
(in terms of some metric on D M ) of center' and radius r. Let eo be a point
of D, and applying Theorem 13, let Uk = vk/K«(, -) for kEZ+ be a positive
K«(, -)-superharmonic function on D with u(e r
o) <
k
and with limit + 00
at , on approach along Fie. The function u = 1:~ Uk is positive and K(', -)-
216 I.XII. The Martin Boundary
Proof of (a). According to Theorem XI.6, the set AmI n D is a Euclidean G"
set, and this set is therefore a G" set in the Martin topology. To prove that
AmI noMD is a G" set, let K be a Martin function for D, and let eo be a point
of D. If B is a subset of D, let B' be the class of Martin boundary points'
satisfying the inequality ~K(', 'HB(eo) ~ K«(, ~o)/2. Since the smoothed re-
duction on the left is b~(~o, K«(, '»,
Fatou's lemma implies that the set B' is
compact. Let B. be the sequence of traces on D of the sets of a countable
topological base for D M . If A is a subset of D, the set U~ (A n Bn )' is an Fa
set, the set of Martin boundary points that are not minimal-fine limit points
of A. 0
{, Eo~D: mflim
~-c
sup u(O ~ c} = n
n=1
{eED: u(e) ~ c + !}mf noMD.
n
(17.1)
o
Proof of (c). According to (b), the boundary set on which u has a minimal-
fine limit is a Borel set if u is extended real valued, because the set in question
is the set on which the minimal-fine superior and inferior limits of u are equal.
Moreover (b) implies that the limit function on this set is Borel measurable.
If the range space S of u is compact metric and if 4J. is a sequence of functions
dense in C(S) in the metric of uniform convergence, then the map e f-+
{4Jn(e)/sups l4Jnl, n E 71+} is a one-to-one bicontinuous map of S onto a com-
pact subset of the compact metric space [0,1] l + ; so an application of (a) and
(b) to each function 4Jn(u) yields (c). 0
Observe that the first equality is trivial and that the second equality asserts
that the function hJ.lt(·, AmI n OMD) is the harmonic component of RA (Riesz
+h
decomposition). To prove this assertion, apply the kernel operator bt to the
Martin representation of h to find
(17.3)
218 1.XII. The Martin Boundary
The first integral after the second equality sign is equal to hfJ.~(·, AmI noMD)
A
according to Section 10. According to Theorem 11, the function R+K(k> is
a potential whenever' is not minimal or is not in AmI, so the last integral
is a potential. Thus (17.3) displays the Riesz decomposition of R+hA and
thereby yields the second equality in (17.2).
then u ~ cfJ.~(·,Bc)' We can suppose in the proof that c > O. If A" = {eeD:
u( e) ~ ex}, then according to the preceding example and the relation (Section
VIII.2) between reductions and h-harmonic measure, if 0 < ex < c,
(18.1 ')
19. The Fatou Boundary Limit Theorem for the Martin Space 219
19. The Fatou Boundary Limit Theorem for the Martin Space
Let D be a connected Greenian subset of !RN • In this section the vector
lattice notation of Chapter IX will be used, as further developed in Section
9 of the present chapter. For example, when h is a strictly positive harmonic
function on D, we denote by hS+ the cone of positive h-superharmonic
functions on D. Let K be a Martin function for D. There is then (from Section
9) an isomorphism v +-+ M v between lSm and the vector lattice of signed
measures on aM D supported by the minimal Martin boundary attD. When
v E lS, it will be convenient to denote by M v the Martin representing signed
measure of the component of v in lSm ; when v E lS+, this signed measure
M v is the Martin representing measure of the harmonic component of v
in its Riesz decomposition. Recall that dMv/dMh under our conventions is
the Radon-Nikodym derivative of the absolutely continuous component
of M v relative to M h and that (Section 10) "Mh almost everywhere" for h
in lS'; is equivalent to "J.I.~ almost everywhere"; both M h and J.I.~ are sup-
ported by attD.
In particular:
(a) This boundary limitfunction vanishes M h almost surely ifuE~p"
(b) If UEhSm , this boundary limit function vanishes M h almost surely
if and only if u E hS m ••
(c) If u is a PWBh solution, that is, if u = J.I.~(.,f) for some h-resolutive
boundary function f, then f = dMv/dMh M h almost everywhere on
aM D; so f is the minimal-fine boundary limit function of u up to an
M h null set.
°
Martin representation theorem, it will be sufficient to prove that if UE
~p U hS m., then u has minimal-fine limit Mh almost everywhere on aM D
and that if u = J.I.~(.,f), then u has minimal-fine limitf(O at M h almost every
point' of aMD. Theorem 18 implies that a function in hS p has minimal-fine
°
limit Mh almost everywhere on aM D and therefore that the same is true
for u in hSm• because according to Section IX.l 0, if u EhS';', then U 1\ 1 E~; .
220 l.XII. The Martin Boundary
Finally, if U = hHr = Itt(o,f), let Ut and U 2 be in the lower and upper PWB h
classes, respectively, on D for f Then (by the application in Section 17) when
e> 0,
(19.3)
at V;, almost every point' of the polar set of infinities of h, and we now show
that this limit result is a consequence of Theorem 19. Let F be a compact
subset of the set of infinities of h. To prove (19.3), it is sufficient to prove
that U has fine limit dvv/dvh at Vh almost every point of F. In view of the Martin
compactification of D less a compact polar set [Section 12, Example (a)],
if v~ and v; are the projections of Vh on F and D - F, respectively, Theorem
19 implies that
20. Boundary Limit Theorems for Relative Superharmonic Functions on a Ball 221
(22.1)
The remainder of the proof assumes that N > 2. The argument is similar
when N = 2. We first prove that there is a constant C 1 depending only on N
224 I. XII. The Martin Boundary
such that Vk :::;; C 1 for all k and choices of A k • To see this, let ~ be a point of
D, and define
shows that the left side decreases when d~ increases, from which it follows
that
(22.2)
Integration by parts, together with the fact that ¢(s):::;; 'TtN_l?-l/(N - I),
yields the majorant 'TtN- 1 SO t/t(S)?-2 ds of the right side of (22.3), and in
view of(22.2) the integral SO t/t(S)?-2 ds is convergent with value Cl indepen-
dent of ~, A, k, A k • If v~ is defined using only finitely many of the intervals
in A k , V~/Cl is the potential of a measure supported by A k and V~/Cl :::;; 1.
Hence (domination principle) v~:::;; CIP~A, and therefore Vk:::;; CIP~A. To
bound Vk from below, observe that when k -+ 00, the integrand in (22.1)
tends to the normal derivative ofGD(~") at the boundary, that is [VIII(9.4)],
to 'Tt~IlD(~' d,,)/IN-l (d,,), uniformly for ~ in any bounded set, so that (22.1)
yields, if An is the set of normal limit points of A on oD,
Thus IlD(', An):::;; c2~I~A for some constant C2. Denote by A' the set of
minimal-fine limit points of A on oD. According to Section 17, GMD~ I ~A =
IlD(', A'), so that IlD(', An) :::;; C2IlD(', A'). Since the harmonic measure of a
Borel measurable boundary set B has minimal-fine boundary limit function
IB up to an IN-l null set, it follows that An c A' up to an IN-l null set, as
was to be proved.
23. Boundary Limit Function of a Potential on a Half-space 225
(23.1)
1. Physical Context
Consider a distribution ofpositive and negative electric charges on 1R 3 and the
electrostatic potential induced by this charge. By definition of a conductor,
if A is a connected conducting body in 1R 3 , the charge on A distributes itself
in such a way that the net effect is that of an all-positive or all-negative
charge, and the distribution on A is in equilibrium in the sense that the
restriction to A of the potential of the charge distribution in 1R 3 is a constant
function.
Let D be an open subset of 1R 3 with a conducting smooth boundary, and
suppose that the boundary is grounded. The significance of grounding is that
if a positive charge J1. is imposed on D, an induced negative charge - J1.*
appears on aD, and the potential G(J1. - J1.*) is identically 0 on aD. Thus, if
J1. is a unit positive charge at ~ in D, the restriction to D of the potential
G(J1. - J1.*) is identified with the Green function GD(~'·)' and J1.* is identified
with the sweeping of J1. onto aD (relative to 1R 3 ); that is, J1.* is identified with
the harmonic measure J1.D(~")' It follows that for any J1. the measure J1.* is
identified with the sweeping of J1. onto aD and that G(J1. - J1.*) = GDJ1. on D.
In view of this physical context the existence of a mathematical version of
the Green function of a reasonable set D was obvious long before there was
a rigorous existence proof, and the sweeping of a measure was a natural
concept to formalize.
Now suppose that a connected conducting body is introduced into D and
given a positive charge J1.. This charge necessarily distributes itself in such a
way that G(J1. - J1.*) = GDJ1. is constant on A. Such a charge J1., that is, such
a measure, is called an equilibrium charge (or measure, or distribution), and
the corresponding potential GDJ1. is called an equilibrium potential for A. Two
equilibrium potentials for A are proportional, as are their potentials, and
if the potential on A of an equilibrium measure has the constant value I the
equilibrium measure [potential] is called the capacitary measure [potential].
In view of this physical context it was clear to Gauss that there must be a
capacitary distribution in a suitable mathematical context for any reasonable
pair A and D. The pair (A, aD) is a condenser in the physical context, and
the capacity of this condenser is defined as
2. Measures and Their Energies 227
If D is a Greenian subset of ~N, the mutual energy [J1., v] ofa pair of measures
on D is defined by
and the energy 11J1.11 2 of a measure J1. on D is defined as [J1., J1.]. The form [.,.]
is symmetric,
The Space G+
EXAMPLE (b). e
Let bea point of D, choose (X> 0, and define B = {GD(e,,) >
(X}, A
° = D n oB (Euclidean boundary), and /1 = ot(e, .). Since GD(e,,) has
limit at quasi every point of oD, oB - A is polar and thus is a /1B(e,,) null
set; that is, /1B(e,A) = l. (This fact is a special case of the application in
Section VIII.l8.) The measure /1 is supported by A, and GD(e,,) = (X on A;
so
11/111 2 = (Xo~(e, A) = (X/1B(e, A) = (x. (2.4)
ifN=2,
(2.5)
if N > 2;
EXAMPLE (c). The general case of the preceding example is the following.
Let D be a Greenian subset of IR N , let B be an open subset of D, let be a e
point of B, and define A = D n oB (Euclidean boundary) and /1 = ot(e, .).
Then
(3.1)
4. Inequalities between Potentials, and the Corresponding Energy Inequalities 229
and the energy of JL is defined as [JL, JL]. To justify this definition, it must be
proved that the mutual energy of a pair of elements in Iff+ is finite (see
Theorem 7), and until this fact is proved, the definition (3.2) will be used
only when the finiteness of the summands is obvious from the context. The
form [.,.] is symmetric (reciprocity law). It will be proved that the energy
of a charge in Iff is positive, and the energy will then be written 11-11 2 . This
notation will be used before positivity is proved whenever positivity is
obvious from the context.
Lemma. (a) The inequalities GDJL' ::s; GDv' and GDJL" ::s; GDv" for potentials
ofmeasures imply that [JL', JL"] ::s; [v', v"].
(b) The inequality GDJL ::s; GDv for potentials of measures implies that
IIJLI1 2::s; IIvll2 and that JL = v if these energies are finite and equal.
(c) Let GDJL. and GDv. be increasing [decreasing] sequences ofpotentials
ofmeasures, with respective [smoothed] limits GDJL and GDv. Then
in the increasing case and, if [JLo , vo] isfinite, also in the decreasing case.
230 I. XIII. Classical Energy and Capacity
[Jl, Jl"] L
= GDJl' dJl" ~ LGDv' dJl" = L
GDJl" dv'
~L
(4.1)
GDv" dv' = [v', v"]. 0
Proof of (b). If Jl' = Jl" = Jl and v' = v" = v in (a), then IIJlII ~ IIvll, and with
this specialization if the energies, that is, the integrals in (4.1), are finite,
equality in (4.1) implies that GDJl = GDv both Jl almost everywhere and v
almost everywhere, so that GDJl = GDv by the domination principle for
potentials of measures of finite energy (Section 2), and therefore Jl = v. 0
Proof of (c). In the increasing case in view of (a) the sequence [Jl., v,] is an
increasing sequence with limit at most [Jl, v]. The limit is [Jl, v] because for
every m,
lim [Jln, vn] ~ lim inf r GDJlm dvn = lim inf r GD ndJlm
V
n-oo n-oo JD n-oo JD
L L
(4.2)
= GDvdJlm = GDJlm dv ,
and the last integral can be made arbitrarily near [Jl, v] by choosing m large.
The decreasing case is treated similarly, with the help of the fact that polar
sets are A. null if A. is a measure of finite energy. 0
(5.1)
(5.2)
where VI is defined in terms of v in the way J.l.I was defined in terms of J.l..
Thus, if all the mutual energies involved are well defined (and according to
Theorem 7, this is true if J.l. and v are in Sz), the map J.l.~ J.l. - J.l.I is a linear
mutual-energy-preserving map from a subset of SI into Sz.
If D is an open subset of IRN and if u and v are functions from D to the extended
reals, define
whenever the integrals are meaningful. The value ~(u) is the Dirichlet
integral of u. If u = GDJ.l. and v = GDv are the potentials of charges in S, on
the Greenian set D, and are in class iC(2)(D), then 1t Ndv = -!1vdIN (Section
I. 7), so that
(6.2)
_ ~(u,v)
[ J.l.,V ] - , , (6.3)
1t N
232 1. XIII. Classical Energy and Capacity
(6.4)
lim
1~1""<Xl
[GA(~) + A(A) log I~I] = 1~1""<Xl
lim f
A
I~I '1
109-I)'IA(dr{)
'" -
=0
and
for large 1~ I. It follows that if J.l and v satisfy the additional condition J.l(~2) =
V(~2) = 0, then the integral defining ~(u, v) converges absolutely, and (6.4)
becomes (6.3) when B increases to ~2.
Returning to the hypotheses of the first paragraph, if u = GDJ.l as described
there but if v is harmonic and has an extension to D in class C(2)(D), then
Green's identity [Section 1(1.2)] becomes
(6.5)
the bilinear form [-, 'J, is a pre-Hilbert space, that is, a space in which all
the Hilbert space axioms except that ofcompleteness are satisfied. It is known
that the space G of charges is not complete but that its subset G + of measures
of finite energy is complete.
(b) Functions. Let u. be a sequence of infinitely differentiable functions on
D for which ~(un) < + 00 and limm n-oo ~(un - um) = O. It is known that
there is then a function u from D into 'IR with the following properties: grad u
exists IN almost everywhere on D, with ~(u) < + 00; limn _ oo ~(u - un) = 0;
u is the quasi everywhere limit of a subsequence of u. ; u is fine continuous
quasi everywhere on D. A function u obtained in this way is called a HBLD"
function (Beppo-Levi-Deny). The space ofBLD functions is the natural space
of functions on which to base the study of orthogonality and related topics
involving the Dirichlet integral. The harmonic BLD functions are the har-
monic functions with finite Dirichlet integrals. If the functions in the approx-
imating sequence u. have compact supports, u is said to be of potential type.
It has been proved that the class of BLD functions of potential type includes
the potentials of charges in $, in particular, the superharmonic potentials of
measures of finite energy. If two BLD functions are identified when the
restriction of their difference to the complement of a polar set is a constant
function, the space of BLD functions coupled with the inner product ~(',.)
is a Hilbert space in which the classes of harmonic BLD functions and of
functions of potential type are orthogonal subspaces with direct sum the
whole space. This fact generalizes our application of(6.5) according to which
if u is a superharmonic potential on D and v is harmonic on D, if D is suffi-
ciently smooth, and if u and v have sufficiently smooth extensions to 15, then
~(u,v) = O.
In view of (6.3) as suitably generalized to the BLD context, the pre-
Hilbert space $ of charges can be immersed in the Hilbert space of BLD
functions by identifying a charge J1. in $ with the function (1t~)-1/2GDJ1.. The
Riesz decomposition of a positive superharmonic function into the sum of a
positive harmonic function and the potential of a measure can be inter-
preted, if the given function is a BLD function, as the sum of its orthogonal
projections on the subspaces of BLD harmonic functions and of functions
of potential type. .
The details of this Hilbert space approach will not be carried out in this
book, and the stated results will not be needed with one exception. We shall
need the fact that the energy of a charge in $ is positive. This fact will be
proved in the next section.
(7.1)
(c) A charge in tf is the zero charge if and only if its energy vanishes.
(d) There is equality in (7.1) if and only if J.l and v are proportional.
Proof Step 1. Proof that (b+) = (a) = (b) and that (b+)(sm) = (a)(sm) =
(b)(sm). The following argument without the smoothness condition is also
applicable in the smooth context. Let J.l: (J.ll,J.l2) and v be in &. Under (b+)
so (b+) = (a). Under (a) the equality in (7.2) implies that [J.ll , J.l2] < +00,
which implies in tum that tf is a linear space and that for CE~,
(7.3)
IfI/vil I I
= 0, inequality (7.3) is impossible unless [J.l, v] = 0; if v > 0, in-
equality (7.3) with c = - [J.l, v] Ilvll- 2 yields (7.1). Hence (a) = (b).
=
Step 2. Proof that (b+)(sm) (a) n (b). According to Section IV.lO a
superharrnonic potential of a measure on D is the limit of an increasing
sequence of infinitely differentiable potentials of measures with compact
supports in D. Thus, if J.l and v are measures in 8+, there are sequences J.l.
and v. of measures in tf+ (sm) for which GDJ.l. and GDv. are increasing se-
quences with respective limits GDJ.l and GDv. Moreover, if(b+) (sm) is true,
and inequality (7.1) now follows from Lemma 4. Hence (b+) is true and
therefore (a) and (b) are true by Step l.
Step 3. Proof that (a) and (b) are true when D is a ball. According to
Step 2, it is sufficient to show that (b+)(sm) is true when D is a ball. When
J.l is in tf(sm) relative to a ball D, the expression H(l.l) for GD shows that
GDJ.l, when defined as 0 on iJD, is infinitely differentiable on D. The context
is therefore that of Section 6, and the evaluation (6.3) of [J.l, v] shows that
the inequality (b+)(sm) follows from Schwarz's inequality.
8. Alternative Proofs of Theorem 7(b+) 235
when B(e, (5) c D. When <5 ~ 0, it follows that GD J1.l = GD J1.z; so J1.l = J1.z,
and J1. must be the zero charge. If the charges in (7.1) are proportional, there
is obviously equality in (7.1). Conversely, if there is equality in (7.1), the
charges are trivially proportional if either has zero energy, that is, if either
is the zero charge; otherwise, equality in (7.1) implies that
The following proofs of the key inequality (7.1 +) are unnecessary but
instructive.
(a) Heat equation potential theoretic-probabilistic proof of (7.1 +). Sup-
pose that there is a positive Borel measurable function (t, e,,,)
~ bD(t, e, to
from ]0, + 00 [ x D x D into IR+ with the property that bD(t,',') is symme-
tric, that
(8.2)
has the desired properties. This function bD will also be identified with the
transition density relative to IN of Brownian motion in D (transition from ~
to Yf in time t). See Chapter XVII for a discussion of GD , Section 2.VII.9
for the Brownian motion transition density bD , and Section 2.IX.17 for the
identification of the potential theory bD with the probability bD •
This method of proving (7.1 +) can be applied without recourse to heat
equation potential theory or probability as follows. Define a function b on
]0, + 00 [ x ~ by
_1~12
b(t,~) = (21tl)-N/2exp~.
Then if N ~ 3, the function b~ defined by bRN(t,~, Yf) = b(t, ~ - Yf) has the
desired properties for D = ~N. Hence (7.1 +) is true for D = !R N , and with
the help of Section 5 it follows that (7.1 +) is true for an arbitrary open
subset of !R N • If N ~ I and D is a half-space, denote by Yf' the reflection in
aD of a point Yf in D. Then the function bDdefined by bD(t,~, Yf) = b(t, ~ - Yf)
- b(t, ~ - Yf') has the desired properties, and with the help of Section 5 it
follows that (7.1 +) is true first for an arbitrary nonempty open subset of a
half-space and then for an arbitrary Greenian subset of !R N •
(b) Proof of (7.1 +) when N ~ 3 by a splitting method. This method
uses the fact that there is a constant CN for which
(8.4)
To verify (8.5), observe that the integral defines a function ofl~ - Yfl. Denote
this function by cjJ, change the integration variable to " = 'I~ - YfI- 1 , and
thereby find that cjJ(l~ - Yfl) = I~ - Yf!-N+2cjJ(I). Hence (8.4) is true with
VN = l/cjJ(I). Apply (8.4) to derive
10. The Classical Capacity Function 237
9. Sharpening of Lemma 4
(It is easy to see that the second limit result implies the first.) If u is the
limit of the sequence of potentials and if v is a measure on D,
(9.2)
(9.3)
and the right side has limit 0 when B increases to D. Hence (Section VIII. I I )
u is a potential, say u = GDJI., and (9.1) follows from Lemma 4.
IIAA/l2= r
JDr.afAf
~1~AdAA=AA(D) (10.1)
Observation. Assertions (a) and (c) together are equivalent to the asser-
tion that the restriction of IIA.II 2 to the class of compact subsets of D is a
topological precapacity and that 11..1..11 2 is the Choquet capacity generated
(Appendix 11.8) by this topological precapacity.
Proof of (a). The set function 11..1..11 2 is obviously an increasing set func-
tion, and if A. is an increasing sequence of sets with union A (c D), then
limn.... oo IIAAnll2= IIAAI1 2 because this limit equation is trivial if the limit is
+ 00 and the limit equation follows from Theorem 9 otherwise. Next let B
be an open relatively compact subset of D, and let A be a compact subset of
B. Then AA is supported by A, GDA A = 1 quasi everywhere on A, GDAB = I
10. The Classical Capacity Function 239
(10.5)
(10.6)
The first equality in (10.2) now follows from Lemma 4(c). What we have
proved implies that the restriction of the capacity IIA.II 2 to the class of
compact subsets of D is a topological precapacity generating IIA.II 2 ; so this
capacity is countably strongly subadditive. 0
°
If A is polar, then Rt = quasi everywhere on D (Theorem V.4); so (l0.4)
implies that 11..1...(11 2 = 0. Conversely, if 11..1...(11 2 = 0, then equality of the first
and third terms in (10.4) implies that ..1...((D) = 0; so R..( +1
vanishes identically,
and therefore (by Theorem V.4) A is polar.
Unique Characterization of . 1. .(
Recall that with this definition C·(A) < + 00 implies that A E r p ; so R..(
+1
is
a potential, GD..1...(, that . 1. .( is supported by alAI and that
On the other hand, there are sets A in r p with ..1...((D) = C·(A) = + 00.
The values C.(A) and C·(A) are called, respectively, the inner and outer
capacities of A (relative to D). Thus C·(A) is the infimum of the inner
capacities of the open supersets of A. The set A is 11..1..11 2 capacitable, that is,
C· capacitable, if and only if C.(A) = C·(A), and then C(A), called the
capacity of A (relative to D), is defined as the common value of the inner
and outer capacities of A.
If A is a subset of D with finite outer capacity and if e > 0, there are an
open superset A; of A and a compact subset A~ of A such that
(12.2)
(d) Side condition: IIAII < + 00; Ais supported by A. Under this side
condition,
(12.4)
and equality implies that A = AA' In fact (12.1) implies that A(A) < + 00
and that
13. Expressions for qA) 243
{I
1
= inf GD )" d)..: ).. supported by A, )"(A) = I}
= inf {In GD)..d)..: GD)" ~ 1 quasi everywhere on A}
= inf {)"(A): ).. supported by A, GDI.. ~ 1 quasi everywhere on A}
These expressions for C(A) are so easily obtained that we shall prove
only the first. If ).. is supported by A and if GD )" ~ 1, then (domination
principle) GD )" ~ GD )... . ; so (by Lemma 4) 11)..11 2 ~ 11)... . 11 2 = C(A); that is, each
integral on the right in the first line of (13.1) is at most C(A). Furthermore
C(A) is the supremum of the capacities of the compact subsets of A; so if
).. =)..F in (13.1), with F a compact subset of A, the integral can be made
arbitrarily near C(A).
Capacity of a Ball
if N > 2.
(13.2)
244 I. XIII. Classical Energy and Capacity
Let rl be the class of positive charges, that is, of measures, in r A, and let
problems (G I +) and (G2+) be, respectively, (G 1) and (G2) with r Areplaced
by rl. We shall treat problems (G 1+) and (G2+) only whenf~ O. We shall
write that a charge solves one of the above problems if the charge minimizes
the relevant integral under the specified side conditions.
(a) A charge fJ. solves problem (G2) ifand only if
[fJ., v] = i
fdV (14.1)
andfor v in rA ,
(14.3)
so fJ. is the only charge solving (G2). Furthermore fJ./tfdfJ. solves problem (G I).
In fact fJ. solves (G2) if and only if whenever c e IR and ve r A' the integral in
14. The Gauss Minimum Problems and Their Relation to Reductions 245
(G2) with V replaced by Jl + cv has its minimum value for fixed v when c = o.
A condition necessary and sufficient for this is (14.1). Equation (14.1)
implies that IIJlll z= LfdJl and implies the evaluations (14.2) and (14.3)
except for the strict inequality in (14.2), which is a consequence of the
evaluation of GDJl in terms of f to be made next. Equation (14.1) with v
replaced by its projection on an arbitrary Borel subset of A yields the in-
equality GDJl = f valmost everywhere on A for every v, and therefore (Section
2) GDJl = f quasi everywhere on A. Conversely, the latter condition implies
(14.1) because (from Section 2) polar sets are Ivi null for charges vof finite
energy. Finally, if VErA and if Lfdv = I, equation (14.1) implies that
IIJlIIII vII :2: 1; so
1HZ :2: IIJlII- z = _Jl_ z,
IfdJl
= -IIJlIl-
z
+ ("JlllfdV -II Jl Il- 1 Y
with equality when v= JlIIJlII- z. Thus the latter charge solves problem (G2),
and the rest of (b) is now trivial.
(a+) Iff:2: 0, a measure Jl solves problem (G2+) if and only if
for every v in r;, equivalently, if and only if GDJl :2:f quasi everywhere on A
with equality Jl almost everywhere on A. If so, (14.2) is true, and for v in r;
ihe identity
shows that Jl is the only measure solving (G2+). Furthermore JlISAfdJl solves
problem (G 1+). In fact, if Jl solves problem (G2+) and if CE IR+, the integral
246 I. XIII. Classical Energy and Capacity
in (G2+) with v replaced by CJ1. has its minimum value when c = I, and the
integral in (G2+) with v replaced by J1. + cv with c in IR+ and v in r; has its
minimum value for fixed v when c = O. These two conditions are satisfied
if and only if(14.1 +) is true. Conversely (14.1 +) implies that J1. solves problem
(G2+) and is thereby uniquely determined because under (14.1 +) in the
identity (14.3+) the right-hand side ~ -11J1.lI z with equality only when v = J1..
Equation (14.1 +) with v replaced by its projection on an arbitrary Borel
subset of A implies that GDJ1. ~f v almost everywhere on A; so GDJ1. ~f
quasi everywhere on A. There is equality J1. almost everywhere on A in
view of the equality in (14.1 +). Conversely, these two conditions on J1. imply
that (14.1 +) is true. Finally, if J1. solves (G2+), then J1./JAf dJ1. solves (G 1+) by
the same proof as that of the corresponding implication in (a).
(b+) Iff~ O,ameasureJ1.solvesproblem(GI+)ifandonlYifllJ1.11 > oand
J1.11J1.II- z solves problem (G2+), equivalently, ifand only ifllJ1.11 > 0 and GD J1. ~
11J1.ll zf quasi everywhere on A with equality J1. almost everywhere on A. There
can be only one such measure. The proof is left to the reader.
(c) Suppose that f~ 0, and define f as 0 on D - A. Then if J1. solves
problem (G2+), GD J1. = R +f . (See Section XI.20 for the reduction involved
here.) Conversely, ifA is fine closed in D, then R +f is the potential ofa measure
J1. solving problem (G2+). In fact, if J1. solves problem (G2+), then GD J1. = f <
+ 00 J1. almost everywhere on A ; so if v is a positive superharmonic function
on D that majorizes f quasi everywhere on D, the domination principle
states that GDJ1. :5 v. Since one choice of v is GDJ1., it follows that GDJ1. = R +f .
Conversely, R+f ~f quasi everywhere on A, and R+f :5 GDA.; so R+f is the
potential of a measure J1. of finite energy (Lemma 4). To prove that J1. solves
problem (G2+), we need only verify that A supports J1., and according to
Section XI.20 (special positivity case), J1. is supported by afAf - D, a subset
of A since A c Af by hypothesis.
(d) Classical balayage. Suppose that A is a Borel subset of D fine closed
in D and thatfis equal quasi everywhere on A to the restriction to A of the
potential GD J1.' of some measure J1.' of finite energy not necessarily supported
by A. We have seen at the beginning of this section that thenfsatisfies the
conditions imposed throughout. In the present context, problem (G I)
becomes the problem of minimizing 1Hz for all charges v of finite energy
supported by A with [J1.', v] = 1, and problem (G2) becomes the problem of
minimizing 1Hz - 2 [J1.' , v] for all charges v of finite energy supported by A.
The measure ~J1.'~A solves (G2) because
quasi everywhere on A and (by Theorem X1.l4) the measure ~J1.'~A is sup-
ported by A.
The linearity properties of (G2) solutions noted in (a) imply that iff is
15. Dependence of C* on D 247
15. Dependence of C· on D
If D1 and D2 are Greenian subsets of IR N with D1 C D2 , we have noted in
Section VII.l that GD, ~ GD2 . If outer capacity relative to D j is denoted by
Cj*, it will now be shown that Ci ~ Ci on subsets of D1 and that to a
compact subset Bof D 1 corresponds a constant IX = IX(B) such that Ci ~ IXCi
on subsets of B. In view of the relations between inner and outer capacities,
the corresponding inequalities are true for inner capacities, and it is sufficient
to prove these inequalities on compact sets, for which Cj* reduces to the
capacity function Cj . If A is a compact subset of D 1 with capacitary measure
AiA relative to Dj , then 1 ~ GD ,A.2A ~ GD ,A 2A on D1 ; so by (13.1)
as was to be proved.
248 I. XIII. Classical Energy and Capacity
(16.1)
Since the last term has limit 0 when f3 ..... 00, it follows that the energy [Jl., Jl.]
of Jl. relative to 1R 2 is positive.
Schwarz's inequality (7.1) in the present context follows easily from
positivity of energy [see (7.3)]. The rest of the proof of Theorem 7 in the
present context follows that of Theorem 7 with one modification. To prove
that [Jl., v] = 0 whenever v is in Iff implies that Jl. is the zero charge, we cannot
choose v as a uniform distribution on a sphere since this distribution is not
in Iff. Instead choose (\ > fJ > 0, and for ~ in 1R 2 let v be the charge supported
by oB(~, fJ) u oB(~, (5 1), equal on the larger sphere to the uniform distribu-
tion of a unit mass and equal on the smaller sphere to the uniform distribution
of a negative unit mass. Define u = GDJl.. The equality [Jl., v] = 0 implies that
L(u,~, fJ) = L(u, ~, fJ 1 ), and the condition E3 implies that lime! 1 -+CXJ L(u,~, fJ 1 )
= O. It follows that L(u,~, fJ) = 0 and therefore (<5 ..... 0) that u == O. Hence Jl.
is the zero charge, as was to be proved.
(17.1)
n
(17.2)
Theorem. The set A is thin at ~ if and only if the following equivalent conditions
(With reductions relative to D) are satisfied:
CXJ
00
(17.3)
Hence conditions (a) and (b) are equivalent. In view of Theorem Xl.3 these
conditions imply that A is thin at ~ because under (b)
00
(17.5)
It follows from the definition of GD and the discussion in Section VII.3 that
liml{_"I_O [GD «(, r,)/GG, r,)] = 1 when ( and r, are restricted to be in a com-
pact subset of D. Hence for ( and r, in a compact subset B of D there is
a constant e" = e"(B) such that GD :::; e"G on B x B. (If N > 2, the stronger
relation GD :::; G is valid on D x D.) In view of this inequality for B = Ak
and (17.2),
Hence for n ~ k,
18. The Robin Constant and Equilibrium Measures Relative to 1R 2 (N = 2) 251
Thus the sum in Theorem 17(b) over the terms with even n converges, as
was to be proved.
Observation. In view of (17.2) the theorem is true, and the proof requires
only trivial modification, if Gin (17.1) is replaced by GD .
outside each neighborhood of 00, and has limit 0 at quasi every finite
(Euclidean) boundary point of D, and the difference GD(oo,·) -logl·1 has
a finite limit r(A) at 00. [If this difference is defined as r(A) at 00, the dif-
ference becomes harmonic on a neighborhood of 00.] The value r(A) is
called the Robin constant of A. Obviously r(A) is invariant under rotation
and translation of ~2. The value e-,(A) is called the logarithmic capacity
of A. Although the logarithmic capacity has the advantage of positivity,
we shall see that the key set function in this context is -r(·).
The domination principle now implies that GA. = GA.A ; so A. = A.A' The mea-
sure A.A is a canonical equilibrium measure for A in the present context.
(18.3)
(18.5)
The set function -r(·) very nearly satisfies the conditions defining a topo-
logical precapacity but is not positive. Let A o be a compact nonpolar subset
of 1R 2 , and consider the set function -r(·) + r(A o) defined on the class of
compact supersets of A o . This set function is a positive strongly subadditive
set function, and it is easy to modify the topological precapacity extension
theorem, using its methods to extend -r(·) + r(A o), and therefore -r(·),
to the class of analytic supersets of Ao. The value - r(A) obtained in this
way does not depend on the choice of the compact nonpolar subset A o of A.
Define -r(A) = - 00 if A is polar. Since (from Section VI.2) every analytic
nonpolar set has a compact nonpolar subset, we have now defined -r(·) on
the class ofanalytic subsets oflR 2 . The set function -r(·) is now an increasing
set function and is regular in the sense that
The logarithmic capacity set function e- r (') is then also regular in this sense
but as already noted is not strongly subadditive, in fact, not even sub-
additive.
1. Introduction
The one-dimensional version of classical potential theory is so special that
its discussion has been deferred to this chapter, and much of this theory is
so elementary that it will be left to the reader to formulate and justify. A
e e,
ball in IR with center is an open interval with midpoint and the averages
e, e,
L(u, (5), A(u, (5), and Aau can play the same role when N = 1 as when
N> 1, but more direct methods are sometimes clearer.
Since an open subset of IR is a countable union of disjoint intervals, it is
usually possible to consider functions defined on intervals.
3. Convergence Theorems
b-~ ~-a
J-tD(~' {a}) = -b- , J-tD(~' {b}) = b _ a' (5.1)
-a
On the other hand, if the interval D has one finite and one infinite endpoint,
the PWB method yields a solution if and only if the specified boundary
258 I. XIV. One-Dimensional Potential Theory
6. Green Functions
When N = I and D is a finite interval ]a, b[, it is natural to define GD as a
function on D x D with the property that GD(e,·) is harmonic on D - g}
and superharmonic on D, with limit 0 at each endpoint of D. These con-
ditions determine GD(e,·) up to a multiplicative positive constant. Let d 1
e.
[d z] be the derivative ofGD(e,·) to the left [right] of If now uECP)(.D),
integration by parts yields
(b - eH" - a)
b-a
GD(e,,,) = (6.2)
!
(b - ,O(e -
b-a
a)
(6.3)
(6.4)
7. Potentials of Measures
If Dis Greenian and if J.l is a measure of Borel subsets of D, then the potential
GDJ.l is superharmonic, that is, concave, on each component interval of D
on which the potential is finite valued, because GD (', '7) is concave for each
'7. We now show that GMDu = 0 when u = GDJ.l is a superharmonic potential.
It will follow from the Riesz decomposition (Section 9) that conversely a
positive superharmonic function u with GMDu = 0 is the potential of a
measure. We can assume in the following that D is an interval ]a, bE. Let B.
be an increasing sequence of subintervals of D with compact closures in D
and union D. Then 'rB.GDJ.l is a decreasing sequence of superharmonic
functions. Moreover, if eEBn, then
r
<Po and <Pb by
e< b,
r
<po(e) = ('7 - a)J.l(d'7), a<
(8.2)
<Pb(e) =- (b - '7)J.l(d'7), a< e< b.
260 I. XIV. One-Dimensional Potential Theory
Here J~ means the integral over ]oe, fJJ. The functions <Pa and <Pb are finite
valued, monotone increasing, and right continuous and satisfy
and
u(~) = (b - ~)<Pa(~) - (~ - a)<pb(~). (8.4)
b-a
(8.5)
r(" - r
first when JI({~}) = 0 and then (right continuity) for all ~. Then for a <
oe<fJ<b
a)JI(dtI) + (b - tI)JI(dtI}
u;(fJ) - u;(oe) =- a b
-a
a = - JI(]oe, fJ]),
(8.6)
r(", -
(8.2), but define <Pb(~) = - JI(]~, + 00 D. Then (8.3), (8.4), (8.5) are replaced
by
9. Riesz Decomposition
Theorem. If u is a positive superharmonic function on an open proper subset
D offR, then
(9.1)
We can assume that D is an interval ]a, b[ with at least one finite end-
point. In fact, however, we shall assume that both endpoints are finite,
leaving the other case to the reader. Equation (8.6) is trivial, and when
(X! a and Pi b, we find that <Pa and <Pb as defined by (8.2) are finite valued,
monotone increasing, and right continuous and satisfy (8.3). Then (8.5)
is true up to an additive constant; so (8.4) is true up to a linear term; that is,
u = GDf.J. + v, where v is linear. Since the GM D operation is linear, just as
in the multidimensional case, and since this operation on a superharmo~ic
potential yields 0, it follows that v = GMDu, and the proof of the theorem is
complete.
~ 1\ '1
K('1,~) = -J:- .
<'0 1\ '1
°
We then find ('1 -+ 0, + (0) that the Martin space can be identified with
jR+ ; the Martin boundary point is associated with the minimal harmonic
function K(O, 0) == 1; the Martin boundary point + 00 is associated with
the minimal harmonic function ~ 1-+ K( + oo,~) = ~go.
Chapter XV
1. Conventions
Parabolic potential theory is based on the pair A, !:i* and is similar in many
respects to classical potential theory, but the fact that both !:i. and !:i* are
involved means that two theories dual to each other must be considered
simultaneously.
A function u from an open subset of ~N into ~, in class C(I) there and
also in class C(2) relative to the space variable, and satisfying the heat equation
Au = 0 will be called parabolic; a solution (satisfying the same smoothness
conditions) of the adjoint equation !:iu * = 0 will be called coparabolic. A
function u is coparabolic if and only if the function (e,S) 1-+ u(e, -s) is
parabolic. If u is a function on an open subset D of ~N, if D = D x ~,
and ifu(~) = u(e) for ~ = (e, s) in D, the function uis parabolic (equivalently,
coparabolic) on D if and only if u is harmonic on D.
u
EXAMPLE (b). If is parabolic on IR N and is of the form (~,s)l--+f(I~I)g(s),
r
the functions f and 9 satisfy the equations (r) + [(N - I )jr]f'(r) = cf(r)
for r ~ 0 and g' = ca 2 gj2 on IR, and we thereby find the parabolic function
u defined on IR N by
3. Coparabolic Polynomials
Define the Hermite polynomial Hm , .. 'mN on IR N by
(3.2)
yields
(3.3)
According to (3.1),
(3.4)
m; = m i - ~ij if mj > 0,
r
JIRN
e-I~12 Hm, .. 'm/1'/)Hn, .. .nN(1'/) IN (d1'/)
= {m 1 ! ... mN !2 m,+'" +mN1t NI2 if m. = n.,
o otherwise.
The tenn written on the last line is the only tenn not involving t. The relation
(3.4) becomes
i IRN
e
-1~12/2a2t' ) •
if m. = n., (3.9)
o otherwise.
if 1> 0,
(4.1)
if 1 ~ O.
Note that the time variable is placed first in this notation, as appropriate
to the probability interpretation to be given later. The parabolic Green
function G of ~N is defined on ~N x ~N (N ~ I) by
(4.2)
In more detail,
(a) The function G(o, ~) is the Green function with pole ~ for the heat
equation. This function is positive, parabolic on ~N - {~}, and
vanishes below ~ and in the limit at the point co.
(a*) The function G(~, 0) is the Green function with pole ~ for the adjoint
equation. This function is positive, coparabolic on ~N - {e}, and
vanishes above ~ and in the limit at the point co.
5. Maximum-Minimum Parabolic Function Theorem 267
This inequality will be proved for k = I. The proof in the general case
involves more notation but no additional ideas. For k = I and s > t
(4.5)
and the right side is majorized by the right side of (4.4) when k = l.
If it is a measure on ~N, the functions Oit and itO defined by
(4.6)
Theorem. Let ( be a point of an open subset D ofiR N , and let D«() be the set
ofpoints ofD below' relative to D./fu is a parabolicfunction on D and if u«()
is the supremum or infimum of the restriction of u to D«(), then u = u«() on
D«().
(5.1)
of Do, on which therefore A(v - u) < O. On the lower boundary of Do, that
is, on its lower face, v- u ~ m - (m - m l ) - m l = 0, and on the lateral
boundary of Do w~ fine that v- u ~ m - m = O. Now if the minimum
value of v- uon Do is attained at a point (t/, t) either in the interior of Do
or in the interior of the upper face of Do, then o(v - u)/ot:$; 0 at the point;
so ~(v - u) < 0 (Laplacian applied to the space coordinates) there. Since
(v - u)(', t) has a local minimum at t/, the lager inequality is impossible,
and it follows that the restriction of v- u to Do attains its minimum value
at a point of the union of the lateral boundary and lower face; so v- u ~ O.
In particular, this inequality on the segment S becomes
uef, t) :$;
4
m - (m - m l )r e-
ar
<m (0 :$; t :$; s), (5.4)
r.
JD(S)
(u~v - v~u)dIN = i.
oD(s)
(uDnv - vDnu)dIN_1 · (6.1)
270 1. xv. Parabolic Potential Theory: Basic Facts
Equivalently,
The right side of (6.4) can be described as the heat flow of uout of D(t l' t 2 ).
This flow vanishes if uis parabolic.
Equation (6.4) is valid when N = I, in which case dl 1 on the right is the
differential of arc length.
If ~o is a point of D, the heat flow of G(o, ~o) out of D(t1' t 2 ), with t 1 and
t 2 chosen so that ~o is in this set, is the same as that out ofan interval contain-
ing ~o and relatively compact in D(t l ' t 2)' The heat flow of G(o, ~o) out of an
interval containing ~o is I by direct computation.
i. eD(t"s)
uG«e,s + a), 0) cos YdiN = -1. D(tl's)
G«e,s+a),0)AudIN+ 1
- u; r. JoD(t"S)
[uOnG«e,s+ a), 0) - G«e,s+ a), o)OnU] sin 2 ydiN' (7.1)
The dot replacing a variable refers to the integration variable, and the normal
derivative is with respect to this variable. Apply Theorem I of Appendix VII
to find when a -+ 0 that the part of the integral on the left over D(s) has
7. The Parabolic Green Function of a Smooth Domain 271
u(~) = - r.
JD(t ,s)
G(~,·)AudIN+I - r.
J.JD(r.,s)
uG(~")cosydIN
I
(7.2)
- (121
2 .
[uDnG(~,·) - G(~, ·)Dnu] sin 2 ydlN •
cD(t.,s)
The function GJj is unique if it exists because if t/J defined on D(t I ' t 2 ) is the
difference between two functions with the properties (a)-(c), for fixed ~ the
function t/J is coparabolic on D( t l' t 2) with boundary function 0 except
possibly at the points of D(t I)' The maximum-minimum theorem for para-
bolic functions as dualized for coparabolic functions and applied to t/J
implies that t/J vanishes identically.
The restriction of Gv(e,,) to the set of points of D strictly below ~ is
coparabolic, and by the maximum-minimum theorem it follows that
272 1.XV. Parabolic Potential Theory: Basic Facts
L e+ '1), e= (e,s),
00
Thus after dropping a finite number of summands, the series (8.1) and
similarly the series of partial derivatives of each order with respect to '1, e,
s, t converge uniformly on bounded subsets of IR x IR. For fixed ~ [~] in
e
B each term of the series (8.1) except t(s - t, - + '1), the term with n = 0,
defines a parabolic [coparabolic] function of ~ [~] on B. Similarly, after
dropping a finite number of summands, the series
L e- '1)
00
L
• 00
<jJ(a, bHe,~) = [6(s - 1,2nc - e + '1) - 6(s - 1,2nc + 2a - e - '1)]
n= -00
(8.4)
GD(~'~) = nL
N 00
j=ln=-oo
[6(s - 1,2ncj - elJ) + '1()))
- 6(s - 1, 2ncj + 2aj - e(j) - '1lJ)] (8.5)
. (12 a . '.
'1 ~ -2 a'1(j) GD(e, '1)
for" on the part of the lateral boundary with jth coordinate bj and with
density the negative of this derivative for" on the part of the lateral boundary
274 1. XV. Parabolic Potential Theory: Basic Facts
and thereby to see that if f is finite valued and continuous, the function
!iv(', f) has boundary limit f(~) at every point ~ of the lateral or lower
boundary. The inner points of the upper boundary of D are to be considered
as irregular boundary points for the first boundary value problem for para-
bolic functions. (See Chapter XVIII for a discussion of the first boundary
value problem in the parabolic context.)
The Operation tH' If u is a Borel measurable function on an open subset
D of iR N , if B is an interval with closure in D, and if the restriction of u to
the lower and lateral boundaries of B is IN integrable, define
u
If is upper or lower semicontinuous, the above remarks imply that 'tBU
has the same property except possibly at the inner points of the upper
boundary of D and that 'tBU is parabolic on B with a finite limit from below
at each inner point of the upper boundary of B.
in ~N. The interval B(e, b) will play the same role in the study of parabolic
potential theory as the ball B(e, b) in the classical theory. In the following
we take N = I. The added complications in .the general case are merely
notational, and the results will be valid, and applied, for all N. Define the
function!) on the one-dimensional interval [ -I, I] by
L [t(l,4n + e) -
00
I
!2(S) = --
S
L (4n+
00
-00
I)t(-s,4n+ I). (10.2)
According to (9.1), the functions el-+ !1(e/b)/b and SI-+ !2(s/b 2)/b 2 are
respectively the densities relative to II of itB(O 6)(0,') on the lower and lateral
boundaries of B(O, b). If U is a Borel meas~rable function on oB(~, b) for
which the following integrals exist, we define L(u, ~, b) by
. 5:) =J1.B(O.6)'7,U
L'('U,'7,U . ( . .) r6
= J_6 U.('7+ ...J' ,t-u5:2)!(e)/
1 b -b-
1(d ) e
(10.3)
+ r o
Jr-6 2
[u('7 - b,s) + u('7 + b,S)]!2 (:2) 11~~S) [~= ('7,t)].
In order to treat the parabolic analogs of the volume averages in Section
1.2, let 4> be a positive Borel measurable function on ~+ vanishing on
] I, + 00 [, and consider the integral
276 l.XV, Parabolic Potential Theory: Basic Facts
where
When 4> = I on [0, I], we denote the value in (10.4) by A(it, 0, b) and define
A(it,r;,b) = A(it(r; + '),0, b). When 4>(r) = cexp[r- 2 (1- r2)-I] forO < r <
°
I and 4>(0) = 4>(1) = and c is chosen so that n4>(r)/1 (dr) = I, we denote
the value in (10.4) by Aiit, 0) and define Aiit, r;) = Aiit(r; + ,),0). If it is a
Borel measurable function defined on an open subset b of ~, the values
A(it, r;, b) and A 6(it, r;) are defined whenever B(r;, b) c b, that is, whenever
b2 + b4 < Ir; - 0.01 2 , if it is locally 12 integrable on D. Under the latter
condition, A(it,', b) is continuous, and Aiit,') is infinitely differentiable.
Application. It is trivial from the definition that if it is parabolic on .0, then
° °
shows that therefore Ii satisfies the maximum-minimum parabolic function
Theorem 5. Hence Ii = since Ii has limit at every lateral or lower boundary
point of D. Finally, if it is supposed Borel measurable on .0, locally II inte-
grable on lines parallel to a coordinate axis, and either bounded on one side
or locally 12 integrable and also if it(r;) = L(it, r;, b) whenever B(r;, b) c .0,
then it is parabolic because the hypotheses imply that it(r;) is equal to the
third and fourth terms in (10.5) as well as the first. These criteria for para-
bolicity will be weakened to be local in Section 14.
If uis a C(1) function on an open subset of iR N and is C(2) in the space variables,
then u is superparabolic if and only if ~u ::s; 0, in view of (7.3) with D an
interval.
cause ~u = q2 cN - l.
upper boundary, then (by the lower semicontinuity of u) u(~) :s; m(~), and a
trivial variation of the proof of the superparabolic minimum theorem shows
that u is identically m(~) on D(h Hence there is a sequence iT. with the
desired properties.
(c')
or
(c")
small D, depending on ~.
(e) In (a) the function iiJu is superparabolic on D.
(f) Ifu is superparabolic on D and if ~ED, the functions Dt-+L(u,~, D),
(jt-+A(u, ~, (j), (jt-+A(ju(~) are monotone decreasing, with limit u(~) when
D~ O.
It follows that the relation u ~ Dor u= D, if satisfied IN+l almost every-
where on their domain of definition D by superparabolic functions u and
D, is satisfied everywhere on D. Moreover, if uis superparabolic, then
class (;(2), the assertion is trivial because Ait = du. In the general case we
need only discuss superharmonic functions u and superparabolic functions
it. If u is superharmonic, u is (Section IV.10) the limit of an increasing se-
quence of infinitely differentiable superharmonic functions; so it is the limit
of an increasing sequence of superparabolic functions and therefore is super-
parabolic. Conversely, if it is superparabolic, let Do be an open relatively
compact subset of D. For sufficiently small b the function Aoit is defined
on Do x IR, is infinitely differentiable and superparabolic, and depends only
on the space coordinate, Aoit(~,s) = uO<~). Hence Uo is superharmonic on
Do, and u = limo_ o Uo is also superharmonic on Do and therefore is super-
harmonic on D.
(b) Suppose that D is connected, let v be a positive superparabolic
function on D, and define v on D by the following positive integral operation
on the family of time translates of v:
+OO f+oo
v(~) =f -00 v(~, t)/l(dt) = -00 v(~, s + t)/l(dt). (15.1)
a2
~: (", t) T~ = (at",
1--+ -t )
takes the upper [lower] half-space of ~N in a one-to-one way onto the lower
[upper] half-space, and rl~ = ( - a"lt, - a2 It). Define
17. Extensions of a Parabolic Function Defined on a Cylinder 283
EXAMPLE. Ify E IRN and a. = - 1/(12, the Appell transformation of the restric-
tion of the function ~ ~ t(t,,,, - y) to the upper half-space of ~N is the
function
on the lower half-space. This parabolic function [without the factor (2n)-N]
was noted in Section 2 and will be seen in Section XVI.8 to play the same
role in the lower half-space for Poisson-integral-type representations and
minimal parabolic functions that t(·,· - y) plays in the upper half-space.
Observation. The lemma does not assert that the extension is unique. In the
following proof we shall find the maximum extension.
Let r be the class of subparabolic minorants ofIi on Dwhich are majorized
on D' by Ii' and define ti" = sup {u: u E r}. If a < b" < b' and if u is defined
on D by
Let D and D' be as in the lemma, and let vbe a minimal parabolic function
on D. Then viD' is minimal on D'. In fact, if v' is a positive parabolic minorant
of Vllh the extension of i/ to D provided by the lemma must be proportional
to v; so v' is proportional to VID"
Special Case: Extension ofa Bounded Parabolic Function. Let D and D' be as
in the lemma. Then an arbitrary bounded parabolic function v' defined on
D'has a parabolic extension to D with the same infimum and supremum
there as v has on D'. In proving this we can assume that v' has infimum O.
Let y = sUPDv'. Then the function v == yon D is a parabolic majorant of
v' on D'; so v' has a positive parabolic extension to D, majorized there by y.
If D is a finite interval in IR N , the preceding result follows easily from our
discussion of the parabolic context Poisson integral.
Chapter XVI
PI(D, JiHe) = i
IRN
t(s, e- Yf)Ji(dYf) [e = (e, s)]
defines a parabolic function on b. The integral in (1.1) will be denoted by
PI(D,f) (e), and the Poisson integral will be modified in the obvious way
when the lower boundary of D is not the abscissa hyperplane.
(1.2)
(1.3)
286 I. XVI. Subparabolic, Superparabolic, and Parabolic Functions on a Slab
and
· t(s, ~ - ,,)
I1m
H{,o) t(b',,,)
=0
Thus the left side of (1.5) tends to 0 when e -+ «(,0), and the same limit
relation holds whenfis replaced by the constant function I, as required for
the application of Theorem I of Appendix VII. Inequality (1.4) is also a
special case of Theorem I of Appendix VII because
(1.6)
Hence the integral on the left and the same integral with f replaced by the
constant function I tend to 0 when e-+ 00 in D, as required for the applica-
tion of Theorem I of Appendix VII.
Extension. Accordin~ to the theorem as applied to - f, if liml~l_oo f(,,) =
+ 00, then limlh~_oo u(~) = + 00 also. It will be useful to sharpen this result,
as stated in the following extension of the theorem. If (1.2) is true whenever
b' < b and if, for some p > 0,
2. A Generalized Superparabolic Function Inequality 287
Note that p:::; (2u 2b)-1 because of (1.2). To prove this extension of
Theorem I, observe that by hypothesis there is a constant c > 0 such that
f(rf} ~ cexp(PIl'/1 2) for sufficiently large 11'/1, say for 11'/1 ~ r. Then
\im.infu(~)exp(_etl~12) ~
D, 3~""CX)
l,im.inf c r 6(s, ~ -
D, 3~""CX) JIRIN
I'/)exp(PII'/1 2 - etl~12)IN(dl'/)
(1.7)
because the part of the integral over {I 1'/1 :::; r} has limit 0 when I~ 1-+ + 00.
The value of this integral is
2
2 )-N/2 1~12(P - et + 2etpu s)
(I - 2PU s exp I _ 2pu2S '
Let Dk be the slab ~N x ] Ilk, b[ for k so large that k > lib. Let/,.. be an
increasing sequence of positive functions on ~N, finite valued and continuous
with compact support and with limit the lower semicontinuous function
u(', Ilk). According toTheorem I, the function PI(Db An) is a positive para-
bolic function on Dk with limit AnG) at each point (C Ilk) of the lower
boundary of Dk and limit 0 at the point 00; so u-
PI(Dk, fkn) ~ 0 on Dk by
the minimum theorem for superparabolic functions on a slab (Section
XV. B). The lemma follows when n -+ 00 and then k -+ 00.
Application (a). It follows trivially from Lemma 2 that
increasing function of s' on ]0, t[. This is an example of the fact that roughly
(see Section VIII.lO for the classical counterpart) the parabolic average of a
superparabolic function over a set boundary decreases as the set increases.
u
According toTheorem 5 below, when in Lemma 2 is parabolic and positive,
the parabolic average on the left side of (2.2) is constant, equal to u('1, t), as
s'varies.
Application (b). If uis bounded and parabolic on the above slab D and if
u has normal limit f(O = lims _ o u(', s) at IN almost every lower boundary
point (C 0), then an application of Lemma 2 to the function u+ SUPDU and
- u + SUPD u shows that u = PI(D, f). According to Section 5, the bounded-
ness of ucan be replaced here by positivity if f(O = Iim~_(~. 0) u( for all , ine)
~N. Theorem 6(b) gives necessary and sufficient conditions that a parabolic
function on a slab be representable as the Poisson integral of a function.
To see that (a) can be assumed, observe that for any choice of rotation R the
function (~,s)l--+u(R~,s) is parabolic; so ifu(~,s) is replaced by the average
of u(',s) over the sphere in IR N of radius I~I and center the origin, the new
function will be parabolic and positive and have limit 0 at every point of the
abscissa hyperplane. It is sufficient to prove the lemma for this new function.
To see that (b) can be assumed, we show that the function
is parabolic on the given slab. This function satisfies (b), and it is sufficient
to prove the lemma for this function, which satisfies (a) if udoes. If IX> 0,
define Va by
1
00 2
[21tcr 2(s-t)]-N/2 1tN 0 rN-If(r,t)exP2cr2(;_t/l(dr)5,f(0,s), (4.1)
(4.2)
so that if s is fixed,
2
r
u(~,t) =f(r,t) 5, const (l + r)exp-2-'
cr es
r = I~I, t 5, (1 - e)s. (4.3)
It now follows from Lemma 3 that u5, 0 on the slab IR N x ]0, (1 - e)s[; so
u= 0 on this slab and so on IR N x ]0, b[.
290 I.XVI. Subparabolic, Superparabolic, and Parabolic Functions on a Slab
(b2) IfO < s < f>, there is a uniform integrability test function 4>.for
which the restriction to B(O, s) of 4>.(lul) has a parabolic
majorant.
(b3) For every point (e,s) in B the family
define decreasing functions of t on the interval ]0, s'[. To see this, for
example, for the first parabolic average, note that if vis a parabolic majorant
of lui on B, then (by Theorem 5) PI(B(s,t), v(o,t)) = v on B(s,t); so (from
Section 2) the function
is an increasing function on ]0, s'[. With the help of this monotoneity result
the proof ofTheorem 6 becomes so close to that ofTheorem 11.14 in its ideas
292 I. XVI. Subparabolic, Superparabolic, and Parabolic Functions on a Slab
that the details will be omitted. Choose 1>' with 0 < 1>' < 1>, and for 0 < r < 1>'
define charges Jir and Ji; on IR N by
Observe that the stated conditions are satisfied at Nil almost every point
( of IR N • In the more common version of this theorem h == I; so Nir = IN'
In particular, ifueD(Jili_) so that u= PI (D,f) for some functionfon IR N , the
theorem states that uhas parabolic limitf(O at IN almost every slab boundary
point «(,0).
Theorem 3 of Appendix VII can be applied to prove a modified version
of Theorem 7, namely, that under the hypothesis that dllf/dNiI and dN,;/dNiI
8. Minimal Parabolic Functions on a Slab 293
both exist as symmetric derivates at " the function ujh has normal limit
(dNu/dN;,HO at (C 0). The proof of this modification follows the proof of
the corresponding result (Theorem 11.15) in the harmonic function context.
In the latter context the Harnack inequality made it possible to go from
normal approach to nontangential approach, but this step does not seem
possible for general h in the parabolic context. We therefore prove Theorem
7 as an application of Theorem 4 of Appendix VII. In the latter theorem if
we set
_r 2
K(s,r) = ex p - 2 ' b(s) = const SI/2,
2(1 S
we obtain Theorem 7.
Application. We have proved in Section 2 that if uis a bounded parabolic
function on the slab B and if uhas normal limit 1(0 at IN almost every point
(',0), then u= PI(B,f). According to Theorems 6 and 7, the weaker hy-
pothesis that the parabolic function u on B is in D(Jili-) implies that the
parabolic limit, say 1(0, exists at IN almost every boundary point (',0) and
that u= PI(B,f).
(8.1)
(8.2)
(8.3)
for all IX > O. We conclude that every positive parabolic function on the
lower half-space is either strictly positive or identically 0 and is monotone
increasing in the ordinate variable. We leave to the reader the full formula-
tions of Theorems 6 and 7 in the lower half-space context.
(c) b = IR N . It follows easily from (b) that the minimal positive para-
bolic functions on IR N are the positive multiples of the functions (8.1), now
considered on IR N , and that every positive parabolic function Ii on IR N has
a representation of the form (8.2) with (8.3) true for all real IX. Every positive
parabolic function on IR N is either strictly positive or identically 0 and is
monotone increasing in the ordinate variable.
Chapter XVII
and
(a) Uis superparabolic.
+
(b) u
~ = Uon each open set on which is superparabolic.
(c) ~ = u IN+I almost everywhere.
(d) There is a countable subfamily ofr whose infimum has smoothing U.
+
and
The counterparts of the other properties listed in Section ilLS will be listed
below in Section 16.
(4.2)
The reasoning used in the discussion of the Green function can be relativized
with no change in detail, just as in the classical context (Section VII.!) to
use an arbitrary nonempty open subset of IRN as a reference set instead of
IRN • That is, if D and Dare nonempty open subsets of IRN with Dc D, then
on D and
(4.2')
(4.3)
i ') _
( ,>," - «):(l)
'> , ••• , '>):(N» , S,,,
( (1)
,.,.,,,( N,t) ) t-+ G'D,(i,>,"')
5. Potentials
If D is a nonempty open subset of ~N and if it is a measure on D, the functions
5. Potentials 301
are, respectively, the (Green) potential and copotential of Ji. Since the
properties of copotentials follow trivially from those of potentials, we shall
consider only the latter unless the interplay between the two is involved. The
potential GJjJi is lower semicontinuous (Fatou's lemma) and has the super-
parabolic function average property (Fubini's theorem) so GJjJi is super-
parabolic on D if to each point ~ of D corresponds a point of finiteness of
GJjJi above ~ relative to D. If superparabolic, the potential GJjJi is parabolic
off the closed support of Ji. If Ji(D) < + 00, the counterpart of an argument
in Section IV.l shows that GJjJi is superparabolic on D. In particular suppose
that Ji has compact support A in D, and let B be a neighborhood of A. Since
GJj is bounded on the set (D - B) x A it follows that the superparabolic
potential GJjJi is bounded on D- B and has limit 0 at every boundary point
'of D for which lim~_{GJj(e,~) = 0 when ~EA.
If GMt is a superparabolic potential then GMJjGJjJi == 0 by the counter-
part of the proof of the corresponding classical context result (Section IV.3).
EXAMPLE (b). Define D = IIlN X ]0, b[ and D' = IIl N X ] - 00, b[ with 0 < b
: :; + 00. Recall (Section 4) that GD [G D.] is the restriction of G to D x D
[D ' X D']. Let v be a positive superparabolic function on D with associated
Riesz measure Vand extend vto v' on D' by setting v' = 0 on D' - D. Then v'
is superparabolic and vis the projection on D of the Riesz measure v' associ-
ated with v'. For example, if f> = + 00 and v== 1, the function v'is the potential
Ii on IRN discussed in Example (a). Now suppose that v is a potential, v=
GDv = Gn.v on D. Since GD.v = 0 on D' - D, it follows that v' = Gn,v, and
this representation shows that D' - D is v' null. On the other hand, if v
is parabolic there is (by Theorem XVI.6) a measure NrJ on the abscissa
hyperplane such that v' = GJj,NrJ • Thus in this case N" is the projection of v'
on the abscissa hyperplane. We have now proved that whatever the choice
of von D, the extension v' to D' is a potential. One way of phrasing the fact
(Theorem XVI.6) that a positive parabolic function on the slab D is given by
a Poisson-Stieltjes integral is to state that every such function when extended
by 0 to D' becomes a potential. This fact suggests that one way of deriving
the Poisson-Stieltjes representation is to prove directly that the extended
function v'is a potential; it is trivial that the corresponding Riesz measure
must be supported by the abscissa hyperplane.
302 l.XVII. Parabolic Potential Theory (Continued)
(5.1)
if s > -1,
o
ifs~-l.
v.(:&.", 0) = f (
{/~I<I}
exp
2
-lel20'+2 2<e,'7»)
11
'7
4
I'7 I-N +112 1N (d'7) (5.2)
{/81<,,/61
Since the integrand for fixed lei is a function of 1'71, there is a constant c
such that
r21~r (Xlel 2 (X
v(e,O) ~ c JI~I r-
12
/ ex p ----;;:-ll(dr) ~ c2- 1/ 2 IeI 1/ 2 exp 161el 2 (5.4)
Thinness
Dependence of CDiL on D
Theorem. Suppose that diL = jdIN+1 , where j is IN+l measurable and is sup-
ported by a slab IR N x [a, + oo[ with a> - 00.
(a) u
If j is bounded, the potential = GiL is finite and continuous on iR N
and has continuous first partial derivatives with respect to the space
variables, given by formal derivation of the integral de.fming u.
(b) If in (a) j is continuous and satisfies a uniform Lipschitz condition of
exponent p, 0 < p ~ 1, in the space variables,
(6.1)
then u has continuous second partial derivatives in the space variables and a
continuous first partial derivative in the ordinate variable, given by
02U(~) r 02C(~,~)· .
o~(i)o~(j) = JIRN o~(i)o~(j) [f(1], t) - f(~, t) ]IN+l (d1])
.
ou(~)
-~- =
uS
i o· ' . ' . .+'
-;-G(~, 1]) [f(1] , t) - f(~, t)]IN+l (d1])
IRN uS
.
f(O- (6.3)
Hence Au =-f
304 l.XVII. Parabolic Potential Theory (Continued)
Proofof (a). Since JIRN G(~, (rt, t»/N(drf) :$ 1, the potential uis bounded under
the hypotheses of (a). To prove continuity, observe that if U,) is defined by
(6.4)
lu - u,)l:$ supl/l r
s
dt = bsupl/l; (6.5)
J.-,)
so lim,)_o U,) = uuniformly on IR N
, and uis continuous. Formal differentiation
of uyields
Proof of (b). Under the hypotheses of (b) the integral on the right in (6.2) is
absolutely convergent, in view of the majorant of the integrand provided by
XV(4.4) with k = 2. Moreover the integral on the right in (6.2) defines a
continuous function of ~ by an argument following that used in proving
continuity of the two integrals in the proof of (a). Since the function '1t-+
oG(~, ~)/O~(i) is odd about ~, the first equality in (6.6) can be written in the
form
If the integral on the right in (6.2) is integrated in ~(j) over an interval but
evaluated by first integrating in '1, then ~(j), then t, the result is the difference
between the values of ou(~)/O~(i) at the endpoints of the interval. It follows
that (6.2) is correct. The absolute convergence of the integral in (6.3) and
the continuity of the function of ~ thereby defined are proved just as the
8. Parabolic-Polar Sets 305
U(e) = r.
JR N
G(e,~)[j('1,t) - j(~,t)]IN+l(d~) + JS f(~,t)dt,
-00
(6.9)
8. Parabolic-Polar Sets
A parabolic-polar subset of ~N (N ~ 1) is defined as a subset A satisfying the
following equivalent conditions:
306 I. XVII. Parabolic Potential Theory (Continued)
The corresponding argument in the present context shows that the restriction
of (; D(·, () to D - {(} is minimal parabolic and that if v is positive and
superparabolic on D, with associated Riesz measure V,
(8.2)
EXAMPLE (c). Let A be an IN measurable subset of IRN , with IN(A) > O. The
set A x {O} is not parabolic polar in ~N because a positive superparabolic
function on ~N, identically + 00 on A x {O}, would be identically + 00 on
the upper half-space (Lemma XVI.2).
Coparabolic-Polar Sets
It was proved in Section XI.6 that in the classical context a set is polar if
and only if it has no fine limit point, but it was pointed out in Section 9
that although a parabolic-polar set has no parabolic-fine limit point, the
abscissa hyperplane of iRN is not parabolic-polar even though it has no
parabolic-fine limit point. The following definition is therefore natural. A
subset A of iR N will be called parabolic-semipolar [coparabolic-semipolar] if
310 I.XVII. Parabolic Potential Theory (Continued)
See the proof of the corresponding fact in the classical context in Section
111.5(e).
(b) If A and iJ are open subsets of D with A c D and if v is a positive
superparabolic function on D, then
(11.2)
Just as in the classical context (Section VIA), in view of the fact that the
smoothed successive reductions of v on A and D in either order lie between
~~v~A~A and ~v~A, it is sufficient to prove that (11.2) is true when A =D.
To prove this, we need only observe that since ~v~A = v on A a parabolic
function uon D majorizes v on A if and only if Ii majorizes ~v~A on A.
II. Preliminary List of Reduction Properties 311
(11.3)
See the proof of the corresponding fact in the classical context in Section
VIA. Property (c) will be extended in Section 16(g) to cover countable sums
of positive superparabolic functions and arbitrary subsets A of D U oD.
(d) If vis a finite-valued continuous positive superparabolic function on
f-+
D, the set functions A Rt and A f-+~: are strongly subadditive on the
class of subsets of D U oD.
Property (d) will be extended in Section 16(k) where the restriction that
v be finite valued and continuous will be dropped. To prove (d), we first
choose open subsets A and B of D, set v' = R~+v
1\ R~, and prove
+v
(11.4)
The classical context proof of this reduction equality in Section VIA needs
no change except simplification: "quasi everywhere" is to be replaced by
"everywhere." Moreover, when A and B are open, Rf,vB = von An B, so
Rt,vB ~ Rt niJ . Thus (11.4) implies the validity of the strong subadditivity
inequality
when A and B are open subsets of D. In view of (a) this inequality is valid for
arbitrary subsets of D U oD, and the corresponding inequality for smoothed
reductions, true 'N+l almost everywhere on D, must be true everywhere on D.
(e) If A. is an increasing sequence of subsets of D with union A and if
v. is an increasing sequence of finite-valued positive continuous superpar-
abolic functions on D with finite-valued continuous limit v, then
(11.6)
Since (11.6) is true when the sets involved are open, (II. 7) yields (n -+ (0)
Hence
(11.8)
(11.9)
There remains the proof that (11.9) is true when ~ E Apf n A. To see this,
observe that for such a point ~ we have now proved at least that Rt-{~}(~) =
R~-(~}(~). Moreover the reduction value on the left is equal to v(~) because
+v
~ E (A - {e} )pI, and the value on the right is equal to ~:(~) because (Section 8)
a smoothed reduction is unaffected by a parabolic-polar change of the target
set. Thus (11.9) is true for the present choice of e.
The proof of (f) is based on (e) and therefore all but the first assertion
of (f) requires that v be finite valued and continuous. It will be proved
[statement in Section 16(e), proof in Section 17] that the conclusion of (e)
remains true for arbitrary positive superparabolic v, and it follows that the
conclusions of (f), restated in Section 16, remain true for arbitrary positive
superparabolic v.
12. A Criterion of Parabolic Thinness 313
Lemma. Let D be a nonempty open subset of~N, let vbe a positive continuous
finite-valued superparabolic function on D, let ~ be a point of b, and let A be
a subset of D that is parabolic thin at Then e.
I~~ ~v~Ar;B(~) = 0 (B a neighborhood of ~). (12.1)
BH
Recall from Section ll(f) that the reduction in (12.1) is v(~) for every
choice of B if A is not parabolic thin at ~.
e
We can assume in the proof of the lemma that ¢A. In fact, if A contains
~, then replacing A by A - {e} does not affect the hypothesis that A is
parabolic thin at ~ and does not affect (12.1) because (Section 8) a smoothed
reduction on a set is unchanged if the set is decreased by a parabolic-polar
set. The lemma is trivial if v(e) = 0; so we assume strict positivity below.
Since A is parabolic thin at ~, there is (from Section 9) a positive super-
parabolic function u on D, majorized by v at ~ and with limit + 00 at ~
along A. If B is so small that v < 2v(~) on B, then
MAr;B(~)
+ 00 > u(e) ~ ~u~Ar;B(~) ~ inf u
Ar;B sup V
Ar;B
Since sweeping has not yet been treated in the present context, the method
of proof in the classical context is not applicable. To prove (12.1 '), choose
e> 0, let ul be a positive superparabolic function on D with ul(e) = +00,
and let Bo be a neighborhood of~. Then
Apply (12.1) to find 130 so small that the first term in the second inequality
is at most e/2, and with this choice of 130 observe that the second term is
at most e/2 if 13 is sufficiently small, since ut is continuous at ~.
and
(a) u+ is superparabolic,
(b) u
+
= u on each open set on which u is superparabolic,
(c) u+ = uexcept on a parabolic-semipolar set,
(d) there is a countable subfamily ofr whose infimum has smoothing U.
+
Conversely, if A is a parabolic-semipolar subset of D, there is a decreasing
sequence V. of positive superparabolic functions on D with limit v such that
v> +von A.
Assertions (a), (b), (d) and the first equation in (13.1) are contained in
Theorem 2. In view of (d) it will be assumed in the proof of the direct half
of the theorem that U. is a sequence of parabolic functions, and it can even
be assumed, as in the classical context (Section 111.3), that these functions
are positive. We now choose r\ and '2 with '\ < '2' define
lower semicontinuity of ~; so
(13.2)
If there were a point t in D at which the setond and fourth terms in (13.3)
were unequal, there would be two numbers, '1 and '2' strictly between the
t,
values of these terms at with'1 < '2' Since ~ is parabolic-fine continuous,
the set Ar , r 2 would• not be parabolic thin at t, and consequently there can
be no such point C. Thus (13.1) is true. Finally (c) is true because
{U>~}= UA
r 1 .r 2
r ,r2 (13.4)
Vn = L Vkmn2 -k-m
k,m
has the properties described in the converse half of Theorem 14. In fact
v. is a monotone decreasing sequence of positive superparabolic functions
with
316 l.XVII. Parabolic Potential Theory (Continued)
Ii = lim Ii =
n-C() n
L Ii 2 -k-m .
k. m +kmco '
so Ii = Lk m Ii
+ ' • +kmoo
2- k- m up to a• parabolic-semipolar set and therefore every-
where on D. Hence Ii> Ii on A.
+
Application to Reductions
'.4 {ti
on A, 1<.4 = {ti on the upper half-space,
R" = 0 elsewhere, +v 0 elsewhere.
Thus in this example if Ii is strictly positive, the set {1<t > 1<~}
+v
is the abscissa
hyperplane, which is parabolic semipolar but is not parabolic polar.
Character of A pI
The counterpart of the argument (Section XI.6) that in the classical context
the set AI is a Euclidean G6 set and that A - AI is polar yields in the par-
abolic context that ApI is a Euclidean G6 set and that A - ApI is parabolic
semipolar. Although the set AI is fine perfect, the set ApI need not be par-
abolic-fine perfect. For example, if A = Ur {ord e= -lin}, the set ApI is
the abscissa hyperplane, which has no parabolic-fine limit point.
of the reference to the proof in the classical context when the latter proof
requires only translation into the present context. We stress that every prop-
erty in the following list is a property of reductions in the classical context
also, in which "(super)parabolic" is to be interpreted as "(super)harmonic"
and "semipolar" as "polar." Some of the proofs given in the present context
are unnecessarily indirect for the classical context but have the advantage
that they are applicable in many general contexts.
(a) If v/ = v- Rt"iJD, then
(16.1)
lim R1nn =
n-+co V
R1v' (16.3)
•A
R-v ="L.o R·A
00.
Vn '
(16.4)
RA.vB
v + R1v vB = RA.v + R~v· (16.5)
.
(m) If A is a relatively compact subset of D, then GMDR~ +v
= 0; that is,
R+.
A
is a potential. . .. . ..
(n) If v is a potential on D, then Rt = Rt nD and ~ = ~nD.
+v +v
e.
(0) If v is finite valued and continuous, then for every point of D the
•
Observation. In the classical context (Section VI.5) the set function R~(e)
was shown to be a Choquet capacity on D u aD relative to the class of
compact subsets of D u aD when v is finite valued. In the present context
finite valuedness of v is not sufficient for the validity of (0) according to
the following example. Let A be the closure of a ball in ~N, and let An be
the subset A x [0, lin] of ~N. Then A. is a decreasing sequence of compact
subsets of ~N with intersection A = A x {O}. Let vbe the indicator function
of the upper half-space. Then (reductions relative to D = ~N) the reduction
Rt Rt
vanishes identically, but limn_ oo n > 0 on the upper half-space because
according to Lemma XVI.2, the smoothed reduction Rtn is at least equal
to the parabolic Poisson integral on the upper half-space with boundary
function the indicator function of A.
(p) If A is an analytic subset of D u aD, then
(16.8)
Proof of (b). The properties listed under (b) have already been proved
except for the identification of Rj with R~ when An b is parabolic-fine
+v
open. If A is a parabolic-fine open subset of b, the function Jl:
.
is a positive
superparabolic function equal to v on A according to the third line of (b);
so Jl: ~ Rj, and the reverse inequality is listed on the first line of (b). For
general A with An b parabolic-fine open, combine property (a) with the
fifth assertion in (b) and the special case just considered to obtain the stated
identification. 0
Proof of (c). The second assertion was proved in Section 11 (a) by referral
back to the proof in the classical context. Since superparabolic functions
are parabolic-fine continuous, the same proof is applicable to prove the
first assertion. 0
and therefore (16.3) is true, in view of (d), except possibly on the parabolic-
polar set A n {v = + oo}, on which, however, (16.3) is trivial. To prove the
second assertion of (e) suppose first that An c aD. Let ~. be a sequence
dense in D, and choose a positive superparabolic function Un on D, majorizing
vnear An n aD and satisfying
j '5;, n.
The function
Hence
Proofof (g). To prove (g) for two summands, that is, to prove
(17.2)
and the corresponding equation for smoothed reductions, observe that (17.2)
appears as (11.3) in Section ll(c) for A an open subset of D but that the
proof of this special case was there referred back to the proof of the corre-
sponding special case in the classical context. That proof [Section VI.4(f)]
translates trivially into the present context for A a parabolic-fine open subset
of D, with no restriction on vl , v2 • In view of the evaluation in (3.1) of a
reduction in terms of reductions on subsets of D, (17.2) is true whenever
A ("\ D is parabolic-fine open. It then follows from (c) that (17.2) is true
with no restriction on A if vl and V2 are finite valued on A("\ D. Hence
with no restriction on vl and v2 and with Ao = A ("\ {v l + v2 < + oo},
Proof of (h). The proof follows that of the corresponding classical property
in Section VI.4(g). 0
Proof of (i). The proof follows that of the corresponding classical property
in Section VI.4(h) but observe that in the argument there for (h l ) no extra
hypothesis on the smoothness of A was used, whereas the hypothesis that
A("\ D is parabolic-fine open plays an essential role in proving the parabolic
counterpart of (hI)' 0
Proof of (j). This property was proved under added restrictions (or rather
referred back to its classical counterpart) in Section ll(d). The method of
proof referred to is applicable in the present context whenever the sets
A("\ D and iJ ("\ D are parabolic-fine open. 0
17. Proofs of the Reduction Properties in Section 16 323
Proof of (k). Equation (16.5) implies the strong subadditivity of the set
function A 1-+ Rt on the class of sets A with AnD parabolic-fine open
[the argument in Section 11 (d) for AnD open is applicable when AnD is
merely fine open]. An application of (c) then shows that the strong sub-
additivity inequality (11.5) is true whenever Ii is finite valued on (A v D) n D;
so (11.5) is true with no restriction if A and Dare replaced by A n {Ii < + 00 }
and Dn {Ii < +oo}, respectively. Hence by (d) the inequality (11.5) is true
as written except possibly on the set (A v D) n {Ii = + oo}, and (11.5) is
therefore true on D because the inequality is trivially true on (A v D) n D.
The strong subadditivity inequality for smoothed reductions is true on D
because the inequality is true up to a parabolic-semipolar subset of D and
the two sides of this inequality are superparabolic functions. Properties (e)
and (g) imply that there must be countable strong subadditivity when there
is strong subadditivity. 0
Proofof(1). Denote by Ak the set of points of DnA n {Ii < + oo} at distance
~ 11k from C. The function R1
kU {AnaD) is continuous, in fact parabolic, on
on C. The function
324 I. XVII. Parabolic Potential Theory (Continued)
Proofs of(m) and (n). The proofs follow those of the corresponding classical
properties in Sections 111.6 and III.5, respectively. Note however that the
counterpart u of the function u in 111.6 should be superparabolic, but not
parabolic on any open subset of D; choose for example the potential of a
measure supported by a countable dense subset of D. 0
Proofof(o). In view of (e) all that remains to be proved is that Iimn .... ro Rtn =
Rt whenever ti is finite valued and continuous and A. is a decreasing
sequence of compact subsets of Du aD with intersection A: If A c: iJ a~d
if iJ is open, then An c: iJ for sufficiently large n so that R: ~ limn .... ro Rtn,
and therefore in view of(c) Rt ~ limn .... ro Rtn. The latter inequality is actually
an equality because the reverse inequality is obviously true. 0
Since the last supremum is at most the supremum in (16.6) which is itself
majorized by the left side of(16.6), equation (16.6) is true. The same argument
involving smoothed reductions yields (16.6 sm) when ti is a potential. We
have now proved (p) when Ii is either parabolic or a potential so (p) is true
as stated in view of (g) and the Riesz decomposition of a positive super-
parabolic function. 0
17. Proofs of the Reduction Properties in Section 16 325
Proof of (q). The proof follows that of the corresponding classical property
in Section VI.4(n). 0
Proof of (r). The proof must be more than a translation of the proof of
Lemma XI.lO into the parabolic context because the parabolic Dirichlet
problem has not yet been treated. The basic method of the proof of Lemma
XI.lO will be used however. Let D be a nonempty open subset of ~N, let i
be an interval with closure in D, and let a [b] be the ordinate value on the
lower [upper] face 00. Define u(~) = u(~,s) on D by .
I
I if s > b,
(17.4)
Proof of (s). The proof follows that of the corresponding inequalities in the
classical context in Section VI.4(0). 0
e
It follows that for fixed and t the function (", s) 1--+ Go«e, s), ('7, t» is super-
parabolic on iJ and is parabolic on iJ - {(e, t)} with the canonical isolated
singularity at (e,t); so Go«e,s),(",t» ~ Go «'7,s),(e,t». Repeat this inter-
change of space variables to derive equality here, that is, to find that the
function (e,,,) 1--+ Go«e, s), (", t» is symmetric. Define the function ~D on
!R x D x D by
(18.1)
t: Go«e, s),('7, t»lt (dt) = {<Xl ~D(t, e, rOl t (dt) = 0NGD(e, '7);
(18.2)
f(N12 - I) . I 2
°N= 2 NI2 2 IfN>2, O2 = - 22' 0 1 =2.
n U M U
(18.3)
18. Classical Green Function vs Parabolic Green Function 327
with li(·, ti) a positive parabolic function on iJ, and integrating this equality
with respect to /1 over the line through (",0) parallel to the ordinate axis
yields
(18.7)
the indicator func~ion of the set {~E D: ord ~ > s - 1In}, the fu~.tion Un is
p
in the upper PWBh clas~ on for the ~,?u~dary function 1... ; so en) = 0 Ht.<
when n is so large that ¢nED. Hence H~i¢) = O.
(2In) t/2 1
00
-rx 2 .
j
I- ( 1/2 exp 2( /1 (drx) If s > -n
un(¢,S) = s+n) ~ s+n
I if s ~ -n
has the stated properties. (We have simplified the notation by taking (J = I.)
It is not difficult to show, although not necessary for present purposes, that
u n (¢, s) is the parabolic measure of {(O, t): t ~ -n}, the Euclidean boundary
subset relative to (¢, s).
slab boundary is a parabolic measure null set. We show that the boundary
is parabolic resolutive with iIf = PI(D,fo) whenfis a finite-valued contin-
uous boundary function and fo(e) = f«e, 0». To prove these assertions,
observe fi~st that the function fo has limit f( 00) at 00 and (from Section
XVI.l) if' is either 00 or a point of the lower slab boundary the function
PI(D,fo) has limitf«() at (. When b = + 00, the function PI(D,fo) is in both
the lower and upper PWB classes on D for f and so can be identified with
iIf ; when b < + 00, the method used in Example (b) shows that iIt =
PI (D,fo).
2. h-Parabolic Measure
Let D be a nonempty open subset of IR N coupled with a boundary provided
by a metric compactification, and let h be a strictly positive parabolic
function on D. The development of h-parabolic measure follows that of
h-harmonic measure; so the details will be omitted. If A is a subset of oD
with an h-parabolic-resolutive indicator function, we define Ji~(-' A) = lit,
call A a Ji~ measurable set, and call Ji~(e, A) the h-parabolic measure 01 A
relative toe. The set function Ji~(e,·) is a probability measure, and the
completion of the restriction of this measure to t~e class of Ji~ measurable
Borel sets is an extension of this measure. The h-parabolic measure null
sets defined above are the sets A for which Ji~(" A) vanishes identically. A
boundary function measurable with respect to the (J algebra of Ji~ measurable
sets will be called Ji~ measurable, and LP(Ji~) is defined as the class of Ji~
measurable functions from oD into ~, with two functions identified when
they are equal Ji~ almost everywhere (that is, up to an h-parabolic measure
e
null set) for which I/lp is Ji~(e,·) integrablefor every point of D. A function
I from oD into ~ is h-parabolic resolutive if and only if I is in L 1 (Ji~), and
if so, then liJ = Ji~(',f).
The work in Sections VIII.8 to VIII.lO goes through in the present
context except that even if D is connected, it is not true that a positive para-
bolic function on D which vanishes at a point must vanish identically; so
the L 1 class for Ji~(e,·) depends on e; the class of Ji~ measurable sets and
the class L 1 (Ji~) were defined taking this fact into account. .
In the present context the notation ri of Section VIII. I I becomes i~.
Thus if v is an h-superparabolic functi~n on D and if B is an open relatively
compact subset of D, the function i~v is h-superparabolic on D and is
h-parabolic on B, and i~v :::; v, with equality on D- B up to a parabolic-
semipolar subset of oD (Euclidean boundary). In particular, if v ~ 0, then
.~ . hR'D- iJ
rBv = +Ii .
[~= (e,s)]
for (/7,0) on the abscissa hyperplane. The points of the abscissa hyperplane
and the point 00 are parabolic regular, but all other boundary points are
parabolic irregular. It is easy to see (cf. the classical context for D a ball in
Section VIII.9) that the Euclidean boundary is parabolic universally resolu-
tive, that the abscissa hyperplane has h-parabolic measure I for every choice
of h, and if (Riesz-Herglotz type representation, Theorem XVI.6), h =
PI (1), Nir), then
If ~E1>, define 1>~ = {~E1>: ord~ < ord~}. We have seen in Section I,
Example (a), that JiiJ(e,,) is supported by the part of 01> strictly below (
e,
Moreover, if A is a Borel subset of 01> strictly below then the function
/J.iJ~(·, A) .is the restricti?n to 1>~ of /J.iJ(·, A) because if Ii [u) is in the upper
[lower] PWB class on D for the boundary function I A on aD, the restrictions
of these functions to 1>~ are in the corresponding PWB classes on 1>~ for the
restriction of I A to 01>( This fact has the following useful implication, in
which the roles of 1>~ and 1> are reversed. Let now 1> be an open subset of
~N, and let ~ be a boundary point of 1>. Suppose that every point of 1> is
strictly below ~ and that the part of some open neighborhood iJ of strictly e
e
below lies in 1>. Then if A is a Borel subset of a1>, the function /J.iJ(·, A)
is defined and parabolic on b and has the parabolic extension /J.DuS(·, A) to
1> u E.
3. Parabolic Barriers
The classical context definitions of weak h-barrier and h-barrier translate
directly into the parabolic context, as does the proof that if there is an
h-barrier locally at a boundary point, then there is an h-barrier defined on
the whole open set in question. The classical context Bouligand theorem
(Section VIII. 12) is also true in the present context: If there is a weak para-
bolic barrier at a Euclidean boundary point' of an open subset 1> of ~N,
then there is a parabolic barrier there. To see this, adapt the classical context
proof as follows. In view of the fact that the existence of a parabolic barrier
334 l.XVIII. The Parabolic Dirichlet Problem, Sweeping, and Exceptional Sets
is true if D is not too large, for example [Section 1, Example (b)], if Dis
=
on one side ofa hyperplane in IR N and h 1. Letfbe an extended real-valued
function on aD, and define j on aD by settingJ<~, s) = f(~), except that no
restriction is imposed on j on the upper and lower boundaries of D. This
looseness is convenient, and the actual definition of jon the upper and lower
boundaries does not affect the PWBh solutions for j If u is an h-superhar-
monic function in the upper PWBh class on D for f, the function u: (~, s) t-+
u(~) is in the upper PWB h class on i!.- for j if j is defined as - 00 on the upper
and lower boundaries of D.l:len~eiIJ(~, s) ~ fj;(~), and sim,ilarlY!:fJ(~, s) ~
lJ;(~). We conclude that f is h-parabolic resolutive on D whenever f is
h-harmonic resolutive on D, and then iI'j(~,s) ~ H;(O. In pa~ticular, if A
is a J.l~ measurable subset of aD, the product set A = A x IR is Iii measurable
and Ii~«~, s),A) = J.l~(~, A). Conversely, ifj is Borel measurable and PWBh
resolutive and if aD is h-resolutive, thenfis Borel measurable, and we show
it is PWBh resolutive. In fact there is nothing to prove if j is bounded, and
in the general case
J.l~(-, If I) = lim J.l~(., Ifl/\ n) = lim Ii~(·, Ijl/\ n) = Ii~(·, If I) < + 00.
n-oo n-+<X)
(5.1)
(5.1sm)
EXAMPLE (b). If ~o: (~o, so) is a boundary point of D with the property that
the boundary in some neighborhood of ~o consists of points with ordinate
values ~ So and if D contains points arbitrarily near ~o with ordinate values
<so, then ~o is a parabolic-irregular boundary point of D. In fact (Section 1)
338 I. XVIII. The Parabolic Dirichlet Problem, Sweeping, and Exceptional Sets
EXAMPLE (c). [This example strengthens (a) except when the boundary
hyperplane in (a) is horizontal.] Suppose that ~o: (~o,so) is a boundary
point of D, and suppose that th~e is a ball of center ( (~, s) with ~ #- ~o
such that the ball closure meets D in ~o but in no other point. Then ~o is a
parabolic-regular boundary point of D. To see this, let b be the ball radius,
and define uon D by
is a barrier for b at the origin. The inequality (6.3) can be written in the form
which makes it clear that v > 0 on b and that v has limit 0 at the origin.
u
Furthermore, using the fact that is parabolic, we find that
so v is a barrier.
Application. This example shows that the top point of a ball in iR N is
parabolic regular. The other boundary points of a ball are parabolic regular
according to Example (a).
The value of s' will be chosen so near 0 that certain inequalities below will
be true. It will now be shown, in contrast with Example (d) in which c = I,
that the origin is a parabolic-irregular boundary point of b c when c > I.
Define the function v on iRN x ]s', O[ by
I
v(~, s) > log IslI-I-' - (log! log Isil )-1 > 0
..
Av(~,s) = - s
I I-Illog Is11- 1 -, eXP -kl~12- {Nk
--2 -\ I + I> I
2(1 21 s 1 log lsi
(6.8)
+
(k_k
2
*1 2
+
Iloglsll' _kl~12}
exp.
2(12 lsi (log Ilog lsi 1)2 2(12 lsi
Choose s' so near 0 that (I + 1»llog!s'II-1 < Nk/2. The function v is then
superparabolic if
340 I.XVIII. The Parabolic Dirichlet Problem, Sweeping, and Exceptional Sets
(6.10)
On the other hand, if (6.10) is not satisfied at (~,s), the second term on the
right in (6.9) is at least
Iloglsll' -Nk
exp--,
(log Ilog lsi/ )2 I - k
Parabolic Balls
A parabolic ball in rRN of radius J and center (~o, so) is defined as the set
(6.11)
Observe that the center of the parabolic ball is a boundary point. The set
(6.11) lies strictly below the center and is a solid of revolution with vertical
axis through the center. The highest and lowest points of the boundary are,
respectively, the center and (~o, So - J). Example (a) shows that every
boundary point of a parabolic ball except possibly the center is parabolic
regular, and Example (c) shows that every boundary point of a parabolic
8. Sweeping in the Parabolic Context 341
ball except possibly the center and the lowest boundary point is parabolic
regular. The center is a parabolic-irregular boundary point according to
Example (e) because the set Dc of that example is, for an arbitrary value of
c > 1 and an arbitrary [) > 0, included in the parabolic ball of center the
origin and radius [) when s' is sufficiently near O.
This theorem is the parabolic context version of Theorem X1.1 2, and the
proof is omitted because the only change needed in the proof of that theorem
to make it applicable in the present context is to change "polar" to "parabolic
semipolar. "
(8.1)
The swept measures are supported by AnD, and it will be shown in Section
13 that if A is a Borel set, then ~Ji~A [~Ji~A] is supported by the in ~enera!
smaller parabolic-fine [coparabolic-fine] closure of A in D. Since ~G6Ji~A
is unaffected when A is changed by a parabolic-polar set, ~Ji~A is also un-
affected by such a change in A. Dually ~Ji~A is unaffected when A is changed
by a coparabolic-polar set. It will be shown in Section 11 that a set is parabolic
polar if and only if it is coparabolic polar.
The notation of Section X.l is adapted to the present context by writing
~~(¢,.) ~or the probability measure on D supported by {¢} and by defining
[)1 and [)1 by
D D
342 l.XVIII. The Parabolic Dirichlet Problem, Sweeping, and Exceptional Sets
(8.2)
~nd the reasoning in the classical case (Section X.I) shows that Jg : :; I and
b~ :::;; I.
The discussion proceeds as in the classical context, very slightly com-
plicated by the existence of two kernels instead of one, and the details are
left to the reader. It is first shown that if B is an open subset of D and if ~
is in B, then
(8.4)
on the Borel subsets of DnoB. Next the classical context symmetry argument
is adapted, yielding here for an arbitrary subset A of D,
(8.5)
that is,
(8.6)
The common value in (8.5) will be denoted by Gg(~, ~). It is then shown that
J~ and J~ are kernels and that if Ii [v] is a positive superparabolic [cosuper-
parabolic] function,
(8.7)
In particular, if Ii is a measure on D,
(8.8)
Moreover
(8.9)
More precisely the equations in (8.9) are correct according to our definitions
if the potentials involved are superparabolic or cosuperparabolic as the case
may be; if then ~1i~A and ~1i~A are defined by (8.9) for measures Ii on D for
which the swept measures are not already defined, every equation in (8.8)
is true. Finally a trivial integration yields
9. The Extension Gli of Go and the Parabolic Average Jio(~,G;("~» when iJ c B 343
first for a measure v and a parabolic potential Gt>Ji and then by a limit
procedure for v and an arbitrary positive superparabolic function u with
associated Riesz measure Ji. The formulation of the dual of (8.10) is left to
the reader.
Subadditivity of Af-+ bJ
This subadditivity, and the dual subadditivity, are shown by a slight refine-
ment of the proof in the classical context (SectionX.6).
(9.2)
(9.3)
AiJ(~, G; (~, -)) = [GBAiJ(~, -)IB] (~) < + 00 [(~,~)EE x D]; (9.4*)
Proof of (a). Since Euclidean boundaries are parabolic resolutive, the para-
bolic resolutivity of the boundary function};" defined as G; (-,~) on Ell aD
10. Conditions that ~ E Apf 345
(9.5)
(9.6)
Now in the classical context we have proved [Section X.6(a)] that the set
function b6 is subadditive on the class of subsets of D, and this led to a proof
that b~t>B(e, {en increases when the neighborhood B of e decreases. This
reasoning will now be refined to the parabolic context. In the first place
recall that [Section XVII.l6(j)] if A and iJ are open subsets of b and if Vi
is a finite-valued continuous superparabolic function on b, then
-)
where we ha.ve u~ed the f~ct ~h~t t.he measure ~i-B(e, is supported by the
e,
~l~s~re. of A-B. Thus ot,",B( {en in (10.1) increases as B decreases; so
0t(e, {en = 0, and the proof of Theorem lO(b') is now complete.
Observation. In connection with (c) and (c*) recall (from Section XVII.8)
that a parabolic-polar set has a parabolic-polar Borel superset; the dual
assertion for coparabolic-polar sets follows trivially. In view of this observa-
tion it is no restriction on generality in the following proof to assume that
A is a Borel set. Furthermore, if ~ is a point of IR N , the superparabolic
potential G(-,~) is the finite-valued potential on IR N of a nonnull measure
supported by the polar singleton {~}. Hence "bounded" in (c) and (c*)
cannot be replaced by "finite-valued."
+ 00 > L L
G6 vdi = iG6dv = +00
unless v= O. Hence (a) => (c). On the other hand, if A is not parabolic polar,
the superparabolic function ~ qA does not vanish identically; so [from
Section XVII.16(p)] the set A has a compact subset B for which the function
348 l.XVIII. The Parabolic Dirichlet Problem, Sweeping, and Exceptional Sets
Observation (a). In connection with (b) and (b*) recall (from Section
XVII. IS) that a parabolic-semipolar set has a parabolic-semipolar Borel
superset; the dual assertion for coparabolic-semipolar sets follows trivially.
In view of this observation it is no restriction on generality in the following
proof to assume that A is a Borel set.
Observation (b). As the following proof shows, "finite-valued" in (b)
and (b*) can be replaced by "bounded."
Observation (c). Condition (b) of the theorem implies that A is IN+l null
because if A is a bounded Borel IN+l nonnull subset of [RN and if v is the
projection of IN+l on A, then (by Theorem XVII.6) the potential GiJV is
bounded and continuous.
uous. Recall that a set is exceptional for the parabolic context Fundamental
Convergence Theorem in the sense of the converse statement of Theorem
XVII.13 if and only if the set is parabolic semipolar. Now the proof of the
classical Fundamental Convergence Theorem (Theorem VI.l) when trans-
lated into the present context shows that a measure vsupported by a compact
subset A of D is necessarily the null measure if (1) A is exceptional for the
parabolic context Fundamental Convergence Theorem and if (2) vGD is
finite valued and continuous. Hence v is null in the present context. More
generally suppose that v is a measure supported by a Borel parabolic-
semipolar subset A of D, with vGD finite valued and continuous, and let Ao
be a compact subset of A. If Vo is the projection of von Ao , then voGD and
(v - vo)GD are finite valued and lower semicontinuous with a continuous
sum; so voGD is finite valued and continuous, and we have just proved that
therefore Vo is null. Since this is true for all Ao , we conclude that v is null, as
was to be proved.
(b*) ==> (a*) It is sufficient to prove that a Borel subset A of D is co-
parabolic semipolar if every finite-valued continuous potential vGD of a
measure v supported by A vanishes identically. Actually we shall only use
this implication when vGD is bounded and continuous. Let I; U = I; flG D be
a bounded continuous cosuperparabolic potential satisfying the dual prop-
erty of that satis~ed by Ul; in Section XVII.I6(r). The cosuperparabolic
potential ~ I;U~A = ~ I;fl~AGD is lower semicontinuous, ~ I;U, and continuous
at every point where there is equality, in particular, at every point of Ap'f 11 D.
If fll is the projection of ~I; fl~A on a compact subset AI of Ap'f Il ..{ the
potentials fll GD and (~I; fl~A - fll)G D are lower semicontinuous with con-
tinuous sum at each point of AI' and so both are continuous at such a
point. Since fll GDis coparabolic and therefore continuous on D- AI' it
follows that fll GD is bounded and continuous on D; so (b*) implies that
fll = O. Thus ~I; fl~A vanishes on compact subsets of Ap'f 11 A and therefore
vanishes on this set; that is,
Thus the positive superparabolic function b~(" Ap'f 11 A) vanishes I;fl almost
everywhere on D, certainly on a dense subset of D, and therefore vanishes
identically on D. It follows (by Theorem 11) that the set Ap'f 11 A is parabolic
polar and so coparabolic polar, and therefore the union A of the coparabolic-
polar set Ap'f 11 A and the coparabolic-semipolar set A - Ap'f is coparabolic
semipolar, as was to be proved.
(a*) ==> (b) ==> (a) These implications are dual to the already proved
implications (a) ==> (b*) ==> (a*) and are therefore true. The set of these
implications implies the truth of Theorem 12. 0
350 l.XVIII. The Parabolic Dirichlet Problem, Sweeping, and Exceptional Sets
(13.1)
so for every point e in D the measure e5t(e,') is supported by the set {v = v'}.
Now let V. be a decreasing sequence of positive superparabolic functions
on D chosen (Choquet topological lemma) so that lim n_ oo vn = Voo has
smoothing ~V~A. After replacing vn by vn /\ v if necessary! ~e can suppose
that vn ::; vwith equality on A. It follows that the measure b~(e,·) is supported
by {v n = v} for all n aJ?d therefore is supported by the intersection {v oo = v}
of these sets. Thus e5~ is supported by the set Au [{ Voo = v} 11 (D - An
Suppose that C is a compact subset of D - A. According to Section
XVII.l6(1), the sequence V. can be chosen in such a way that Voo = ~V~A on
C. Hence, if e is fixed, the projection on D - A of the measure e5i(e,') is
supported by the set {~V~A = v} 11 (D - A). Finally, if v is chosen as the
function U" defined in Section XVII.16(r), it follows that e52(e,') is supported
by (A u Apf) 11 D. The evaluation of ~it~A in (8.9) shows that this swept
measure is also supported by (A u Apf) 11 D.
(c) Follows trivially from Theorem 13(b). 0
14. Internal Limit Theorem; Smoothness of Superparabolic Functions 351
.* dv dVvi
u = -v = - . (14.1)
dvi. dVi.i:
(e) The function Ii* is coparabolic-fine continuous, and the set where
Ii* ¥= Ii is parabolic semipolar.
(f) In particular, if' E D,
Proof of (f). Assertion (f) is a special case both of (c) and (dl). Its direct
proof is a translation of that of Theorem XI.4(c), but we give the translation
because a direct proof is so much easier than the proof of the general case
and because the direct proofillustrates the adaptation ofthe Theorem XI.4(c)
proof technique to the present context. The equality of the first and second
terms on the right side of (14.2) was pointed out in Section XVII.8. It can
be supposed, replacing v by v - vli ( {O )GJj(', 0, that vli ( {O) = O. Under
this condition, unless (14.2) is true, there is a strictly positive number b
such that the set iJ = {~: v(~) > bGJj(~, ,)} is not coparabolic thin at "
Apply the dual version of Theorem 10 to obtain
Proof of (g). The proof is the counterpart of that of Theorem XI.4(d) and
is omitted. 0
and denote by viac the projection of Via on C. Following the proof of Theorem
XI.4(a), we find that in the reduction notation of Section XVII.16(s) as
translated from the classical context [see Section VI. 3(0)] the smoothed
reductions hAli , hAliAli , ... all majorize CDViac. According to the parabolic
context version of VI(3.12), the sum of these smoothed reductions is at most
[v /\ (bh)]/(b - a); so Viac == 0, that is, Via(C) = O. Now according to the
analysis of the zero set Z of h given at the beginning of this section, a point
of D must be either a Euclidean interior point of Z or a coparabolic-fine
interior point of D - Z. The Euclidean interior of Z is Via null and every
coparabolic-fine interior point of D - Z at which Ii* does not exist is in C
for some rational pair a, b. It follows that Ii* exists Via almost everywhere
on D. Apply this result to h/V to find that Ii* also exists Vii almost everywhere
on D. 0
Proof of (a2). In the context of Theorem XI.4 the fact that u* exists quasi
everywhere on D is a triviality, and in fact u* = u quasi everywhere on D,
but in the present context assertion (a2) that Ii* exists parabolic quasi every-
where on the strict positivity set of h + v is by no means trivial. Since (a2)
is a local assertion, we can assume that h is bounded below on D by a strictly
positive number p. Let ho = CD via o be a potential majorized by p, with mea-
sure Via o supported by the set C defined in (14.4). Then
.. .. V /\ (bh)
hoAli + hoAliAli + ... + h AliAli +
:5: hAli ... :5: b '
-a
and the reasoning showing that each summand of the second series majorizes
CD V~c can be applied to ho and shows that each summand of the first series
majorizes CDVia o c, where Vi, 0 c is the projection of Via 0 on C. Hence Via 0 (C) = 0;
that is, the zero measure is the only measure supported by C whose potential
is bounded. It follows (by Theorem 11) that the set C is parabolic polar for
all pairs a, b with 0 < a < b, and this implies that u* exists parabolic quasi
everywhere on the strict positivity set of h. Apply this result to h/v to com-
plete the proof of (a2). 0
Proof of (b). Write Bb for B defined by (14.4) and observe that the infinity
set
•
of Ii* is included in Boo = nb'=o Bri . If Viali00 is the projection of Via on
Boo, then
(14.5)
because J~b(~,g})= 1 when ~EBri. Hence Via (Boo) =0; so Ii* < +00 Via
almost everywhere on D. To show that u* < + 00 parabolic quasi everywhere
on the strict positivity set of h, we can suppose, localizing the context, that
h has a strictly positive lower bound p on D. Let ho = CDViao be a potential
on D majorized by p with Via o supported by Boo. Then (14.5) with h replaced
354 l.XVIII. The Parabolic Dirichlet Problem, Sweeping, and Exceptional Sets
by ho shows that
•
Vir 0 (Boo) = 0; so the zero measure is the • only measure
supported by Boo whose potential is bounded, and therefore Boo is parabolic
polar. Thus u* < + 00 parabolic quasi everywhere on the strict positivity
set of h. 0
Proofof (c). Since the Euclidean interior of t is Vir null, we need only consider
the Euclidean boundary of t in proving (c). In view of the properties of
this boundary, discussed at the beginning of this section, it is sufficient to
prove that (14.1) is true Vir almost everywhere on an arbitrary compact
subset £ o~ this boundary lying on a horizontal hyperplane. We can suppose
that Ii and h are potentials, after replacing these functions by their reductions
on an open neighborhood of £, relatively compact in D. We first prove that
ifV,;(£) = 0, then u* = 0 Vir almost everywhere on £. Define B by (14.4). Then
Proof of (d). Following the proof of Theorem XI.4(b), it is proved first that
if £ is a Borel parabolic-polar subset of D and if vv(£) = 0, then u* = 0 Vir
almost everywhere on £. Since the proof follows closely that of Theorem
XI.4(b), it is omitted. APl?ly this result to l/h to fmd that (d2) is true, and
apply the same result to Ii/h on the trace of a Vir null support of the projection
of vZ on £to find that (d3) is true. The proof of (dl) follows that of Theorem
XI.4(b) and so is omitted. 0
Proofof (e). It is trivial from the definition of u* that this function is copara-
bolic-fine continuous. To prove that u* = u up to a parabolic-semipolar set,
it is sufficient to prove that if l: > 0, the set
£ = {~: Ii* is defined at~, larctan Ii(~) - arctan 1i*(~)1 > l:}
Since the problem is local and the functions are locally lower bounded, we
can suppose as usual that they are positive. Apply the reduction property
in Section XVII.l6(s) to find
Un A b
1A'11 B + 1A'n BA'n B + ... B + 1A' B A' B +
:s; 1A'nn nnnn
... :s; - -.
b-a' (14.7)
(14.8)
e
for parabolic quasi every point of D; so u* is defined and equal to ~*
parabolic quasi everywhere on D. Hence ~ = u* = u up to a parabolic-
semipolar set, and the proof of the application of Theorem 14 to the Funda-
mental Convergence Theorem is complete.
(b) Application to Reductions. Apply the preceding result to find that if
Ii is a positive superparabolic function on D and A is an arbitrary subset of
D, then R~(~)
+v .
= p*flim~_~ R1(~) if ~ is not. in some parabolic-semipolar
set. Since Rt = v on A, we conclude that R~ +v
= Ii* on AP*J less a parabolic-
semipolar set, and since v* = vup to a parabolic-semipolar set, we find that
iJ: = v on Ap*J less a parabolic-semipolar set. In contrast. recall [from
Section XVII. 16(b)] that this equality is true everywhere on APJ.
p *fl'~m-.
13(';)
-. - _ dN,;(f)
-... (15.1)
rj-~ h(rJ) dN;,
at N;, almost every point' of the abscissa hyperplane.
Observation. If h is a potential, we have already remarked that N;, is the
zero measure so the theorem is vacuous in this case. If v is a potential,
N,; is the zero measure so the limit in (15.1) is 0 at N;, almost every point of
the abscissa hyperplane, as would be expected. If both vand h are parabolic,
Theorem XVI.7 states that (15.1) is true for approach in the parabolic sense
as defined in Section XVI.7. S~ch a restatement of (15.1) in terms of a geo-
metrically simple approach to ( is not possible in the general case, however.
=
For example, if N = I and h I, a potential v can be defined for which
vlh does not have a limit at any point' of the abscissa axis on approach
along the line normal to the axis.
To prove the theorem we need only apply Theorem 14(c) to the ratio
v'liz' onD'.
358 I.XVIII. The Parabolic Dirichlet Problem, Sweeping, and Exceptional Sets
Application to the Harnack Inequality [Martin Point Set Pair (C, b)]
1. Introduction
In discussing the parabolic context Martin boundary of an open subset D of
~N for N ~ 1 we first make the obvious remark that there are necessarily two
boundaries, one adapted to the operator A and superparabolic potentials,
the other adapted to the operator Aand cosuperparabolic potentials. The
first is called the exit boundary; the second is called the entrance boundary.
These dual contexts are interchanged by a reflection of ~N in the abscissa
hyperplane. We shall treat the exit boundary but shall omit the word "exit"
unless both boundaries are involved. The following remarks are offered to
orient the reader to the new features that arise in parabolic context Martin
boundary theory.
Let D be a nonempty open subset of ~N. Throughout this chapter D~ will
denote the set of points of D strictly below ~ relative to D. Suppose that a
Martin function [( based on a point ( of D is defined in the natural way,
Since (Section XYlIA) 06«(, Ii) > 0 if and only if Ii e D~ the function [( has
domain D x J?( For Ii in D~ the fu~ction [«Ii,') is superparabolic on D,
parabolic on D - {Ii}, with value 1at'. The classical Martin boundary treat-
ment suggests that the Martin boundary points to be introduced should
correspond to limit functions of the family {[«Ii, .), lie D~} when Ii in D~ tends
to the Euclidean boundary aD of D. This procedure will only yield Martin
boundary points of D below (; more precisely this procedure will yield a
boundary for D~. A second new complication is the one-sided natu!e of
Harnack's parabolic context inequality, which is relied on to bound K(Ii,')
as Ii tends to aD. In fact this inequality, based on the normalization [«Ii, () =
1, only bounds [«Ii,') strictly below (. Thus a limit function of [«Ii,') as
Ii -+ aD cannot be defined at ( so the normalization of such a function at (
requires a new formulation. This problem does not arise in the classical
context.
These difficulties will be at least partially surmounted in two ways, with-
364 l.XIX. The Martin Boundary in the Parabolic Context
out renouncing the Martin approach. One way is based on a Martin point
set pair, as defined in Section XVIII. I? ; the other way is based on a Martin
measure set pair, to be defined in the next section.
(2.1)
Let D be a nonempty open subset of IRN , and let vbe a measure on D. Then
the pair (v, b) will be called a Martin measure set pair if the following two
conditions are satisfied:
MMS(l) The copotential vO" is finite valued and continuous on the
complement of a compact subset U,; of D.
e e' e
MMS(2) If E b, there is a point strictly above relative to b such
that no neighborhood of ¢' is vnull; that is, ¢' is in the minimal
closed in D support of v.
Observe that condition MMS(2) implies that vcannot have compact sup-
port in D. It is trivial that to every nonempty open subset D of IR N corresponds
a measure vsuch that (it, D) is a Martin measure set pair, and in fact measures
2. The Martin Functions of Martin Point Set and Measure Set Pairs 365
can be chosen for which vGb is finite valued and continuous on D (so cT. = 0)
and D is itself the smallest closed in D support of v. Since Gb(~' 0) > 0 on
D~, condition MMS(2) implies that vGb > 0 on D. The Martin function K
for the pair (v, D) is defined on D x D by
(2.2)
(= 0 at the infinities of vGb)' For fixed ~ with vGb(~) < + <X) the function
K(~, 0) is superparabolic on D, parabolic on D - {~}, and has the normaliza-
J
tion b K(~, 0) dv = 1. This normalization displays a limitation of the approach
to Martin boundaries by way of measure set pairs: every positive super-
parabolic function uto be considered on D will have to satisfy the condition
Jbudv < + 00. In particular, the minimal parabolic functions on D and the
positive parabolic functions on D represented by the parabolic context
Martin representation will have to satisfy this condition. Every positive
parabolic function on D satisfies this condition, however, for a suitable
choice of v, depending on the specified function. Observe that for a Martin
measure set pair (v, D) the function Ul--+ Jbudv from the space of positive
superparabolic functions on D, with the topology of pointwise convergence,
into IR+ is lower semicontinuous (Fatou's lemma), as is (Section XVIII. 17)
the function ul--+Pfu(t) for (t, D) a Martin point set pair. The fact that there
is lower semicontinuity here rather than continuity as in the corresponding
classical context is a complicating feature of the parabolic context Martin
boundary constructions.
Although the approaches to the parabolic context Martin boundary by
way either of Martin point pairs or set pairs involve restrictions on the classes
of positive parabolic functions representable by the Martin representation,
in certain cases (for example, if the domain D involved is a slab), we shall see
that the Martin representation leads to a representation of every positive
parabolic function on D.
If (t, D) [(v, iJ)] is a Martin point [measure] set .,air we shall call a positive
superparabolic function u on D admissible if pfu( 0 < + <X) [f b udv < + <X) ] .
366 I XIX. The Martin Boundary in the Parabolic Context
. .
with equality if and only if A. is supported by the set of points ( for which
there is equality in the corresponding inequality under (3.1). Inequality (3.2)
for (ii, D), with equality under the stated condition, follows trivially from
(3.1) for (ii, D). To analyze (3.2) for «(',iJ) observe (see Section XVIII.l7,
but note that' there is replaced here by h that if iJ is a Euclidean open sub-
set of D with every Euclidean boundarx point except" in D and if iJ is a
parabolic-fine deleted neighborhood of (', then
Since (from Section XVIIA) GD(~'~) > 0 if and only if ~ is strictly below ~
relative to D, it follows that if~. is a sequence of points in D with limit a
Martin boundary point , and if the numerical sequence ord ~. has limit IX,
then K(e,~) = 0 when ord ~ $; IX.
culty into the parabolic context. We shall therefore omit the proofs of the
counterparts of the other results in Sections XII.4 to XII.8 leading to the
Martin representation theorem, but we shall state the basic results in the
parabolic context for ease in later reference.
(4.1)
and
(v,1»: AyA(D M
) = L~U~A dv.
(4.2)
(4.3)
and
AU<OM D) = u«(');
t
pf
(4.4)
(v,D): Au<a D) =
M
udv.
(4.5)
~U~A = Ob A' = i.
<JA
K(t, ·)A(dt),
5. Minimal Parabolic Functions and Their Poles 369
and by (3.2)
PJ~U~A(,,) = f.aA
PJK(" ·)i(d') = i(oA).
(4.7)
(4.8)
(5.1)
Let D be a nonempty open subset of ~N. We shall use the notation corres-
ponding to that of the classical context Martin representation theorem
(Theorem XII.9). Thus hSm refers to the class of differences v/h = (VI - v2 )/h,
where Vi is a positive parabolic function on D and h is a strictly positive
parabolic function on D, omitted from the notation if h == 1. The following
is a parabolic version of the classical Martin representation theorem.
Theorem. Let «(', D) [(v, D)] be a Martin point [measure] set pair determining
a Martin function K and Martin bOWldary if! D.
(a) To each admissible function V in Sm corresponds a unique finite-valued
signed measure M v on OM D, supported by the minimal Martin boundary
o'tD, positive if V is, and satisfying
(7.1)
(7.2)
Suppose first that b < + 00. Let ~' be a point of IRN , and define (' = (~', b).
Then «(', D) is a Martin point set pair, and if K is the Martin function for
the pair,
(8.2)
and
(8.3)
(8.4)
and
(8.5)
~", with pfu(~",b) < +00, then K is changed but the representing measure
Nu in (8.4) is unchanged. Observe also that if Nu is an arbitrary measure on
IR N making u as defined by (8.4) finite at points of D with ordinate values
arbitrarily near b, then u is necessarily parabolic on D. Moreover we have
seen that (8.5) is then true if either side is known to be finite so (8.5) is true
in general.
°
Finally we show that if < b ~ + 00 and if u is an arbitrary positive
parabolic function on D = IR N X ]0, b[, then there is a unique measure Nu
on IRN for which (8.4) is true, and (8.5) is true for every point ~' of IR N when
b < + 00, and that conversely, if Nu is a measure on IR N for which uas defined
by (8.4) is finite valued on D, then uis a positive parabolic function on D and,
if b < + 00, (8.5) is true for every point ~' of IR N • All that remains to be
proved is the existence and uniqueness of Nu satisfying (8.4) when u is
specified. To prove this, choose b' < b and apply the preceding work to the
Martin point set pair «~', b'), IR x ]0, b'[) with arbitrary ~'. The restriction
of u to IR N X ]0, b'[ determines a unique measure Nu for which (8.4) is true
for s < b', and the uniqueness of Nu shows that this measure depends neit~r
on ~' nor on b'. Hence (8.4) is valid for s < b as desired. Observe that we have
now found a new proof of the representation part of Theorem XVI.6(a) and
in addition have derived (8.5) in the positive case when b < + 00. As already
remarked in Section XVI.8, the representation (8.4) shows that a positive
parabolic function on D = IR N X ]0, b[ is minimal if and only if the function
is a positive multiple of the function (~, s) 1-+ t(s, ~ - 0 on D for some point
Cof IR N •
°
If < b ~ + 00 and if D = IR N X ]0, b[, choose a measure v for a Martin
measure set pair (v, D) with vsupported by a set whose intersection with each
slab IR N x ]0, b'[ with b' < b is compact. We can also suppose that vG' is
cosuperparabolic on iR N and therefore coparabolic on a neighborhood of the
abscissa hyperplane. Since vG'L> is the restriction to D of vG', the function
vG'L> has the strictly positive limit vG'(t) at every point t = (C,O) of the abscissa
hyperplane. Hence the Martin function K for (v, b) has a limit at t:
. '.' t(s,~ - 0 ~ = (~,s).
~~K(",~) = vG'(O '
°
Furthermore the function K(~,·) tends to when ~ tends to any Euclidean
boundary point of D not on the abscissa hyperplane. Thus the Martin bound-
ary for (v, D) is the abscissa hyperplane and a point 0, as in the Martin point
set context. The class of positive parabolic functions on D given by the
Martin representation is now limited by the side condition Dudv < + 00. J
Just as in the Martin point set pair case, this form of the Martin representa-
374 l.XIX. The Martin Boundary in the Parabolic Context
e'
Let D be this lower half-space, and let = (c 0) be a point of the abscissa
hyperplane. Then (e', b) is a Martin point set pair. According to Section
XVII A, the Green function GD is the restriction of Gto D x D. The possible
limit functions of [(~,.) when ~ -+ iJD are the following [with = (~, s), e
~ = ('1, t)]:
This Martin boundary has features not present in those discussed in Sections
8 and 9. To simplify the notation, we have taken N = 1, and we leave to
the reader the formulations for N > 1. Suppose first that tJ < + 00. Let e'
be a strictly positive number, and define" = (f, tJ). Then (", D) is a Martin
point set pair, and if K is the Martin function for this pair,
if s > r
(10.2)
if s $ r.
<;:orresponding to each point y of -IR+ we introduce the symbol y" and for
ein the right half-plane define
(10.3)
The functions K(r',·) and K(y",') are positive and parabolic on the right
half-plane. The limit functions of K are the following:
(a) When ~ --+ i = (0, r) with r < tJ,
limK(' .) = ~(r', :) on D.
~-+i 'l, K( r', n (10.4)
limK(' .) = ~(y"<) on b.
~-+ 'l, K(y", n (10.5)
376 l.XIX. The Martin Boundary in the Parabolic Context
Observe that
(c) If ~ = ('I, t)e 1> and either (c1) 'I ~ + 00 and '1/(1 + Itl) ~ + 00 or
(c2) t ~ b with no restriction on the varying of 'I, then limK(~, 0) == O.
and therefore there is equality here; so K(-r', 0) has pole -r'. Thus -r' is minimal,
and similarly every boundary point y" is minimal. Hence 0 is the only non-
minimal Martin boundary point.
In view of the corresponding discussion of the Martin representation for
positive parabolic functions on a slab in Section 8 we omit details in the
following. In the present context the Martin representation theorem states
that if u is a positive parabolic function on 1> with PJu(~',b) < +00, then
there is a unique measure N~ on ] - 00, b[ and a unique measure N~' on -IR+
such that
Conversely, measures N~ and N~' making the integrals on the right in (10.7)
finite define a parabolic function u by (10.6), and (10.7) is then true. For
12. The Minimal-Fine Topology in the Parabolic Context 377
Let «(', iJ) [(v, iJ)] be a Martin point [measure] set pair determining a
Martin function K and Martin boundary OM D. In this context we define
universal resolutivity to mean that OM D is h-resolutive for every strictly posi-
tive admissible parabolic function h, and universal internal resolutivity is to
mean that for every such choice of h every bounded h-parabolic function is
a PWB'; solution. Under these conventions the classical Martin boundary
resolutivity theorem (Theorem XII. 10) goes over directly into the parabolic
context. The parabolic version is stated for the record, but the proof follows
that of Theorem XII. 10 and is omitted.
Theorem. The Martin boundary ofa Martin point or Martin measure set pair
is universally internally resolutive and universally resolutive, with
(11.1 )
f=d~". (11.2)
dM,;
Let «(', D) [(v, D)] be a Martin point [measure] set pair defining a Martin
function K and Martin boundary OM D.
378 l.XIX. The Martin Boundary in the Parabolic Context
Since the assertion to be proved is true when A is open, the smoothed reduc-
tion ~K(',·) ~B" must be a potential for sufficiently large n. Hence ~K(',.) ~A
is majorized by a potential and so is itself a potential, as was to be proved.
The subset A of D is said to be coparabolic minimal thin at the minimal
Martin boundary point' if the conditions of the parabolic context counter-
part of Theorem XII. 11 (b) are satisfied, that is, if the following equivalent
conditions are satisfied:
The first condition is satisfied ifand only ifit is satisfied using the correspond-
ing smoothed reduction. In particular [cf. Section XII.l2, Example (a)], if
D is a deleted Euclidean neighborhood of a finite point " the point' can be
identified with a minimal Martin boundary point of D- {(}, with associated
parabolic function a multiple of Gv(" 0, and according to the dual of
Theorem XVIII. to, a subset A of D - {(} is coparabolic minimal thin at e
if and only if A is coparabolic thin at "
boundary point. In fact it follows easily from the above criteria that the
union of two subsets of iJ coparabolic minimal thin at a minimal Martin
boundary point is also coparabolic minimal thin at the point. Hence, if we
call a subset A of iJ a deleted coparabolic minimal-fine neighborhood of the
point when iJ - A is coparabolic minimal thin at the point, the class (filter)
of these deleted neighborhoods defines a limit theory. Limit concepts for this
filter will be distinguished by the prefix p*mf. A subset of iJ which is a deleted
coparabolic minimal-fine neighborhood of a minimal Martin boundary
point has a closed-in-iJ subset with the same property. Lemma XII.IS goes
over into the present context and thereby leads to the parabolic context
counterpart of Theorem XII.I6. Thus, if ( is a minimal Martin boundary
point, a function ufrom the trace on iJ of a Martin topology neighborhood
of ( into a metric space has coparabolic minimal-fine limit [coparabolic
minimal-fine cluster value] (X at ( if and only if uhas limit (X at ( on approach
along some subset of iJ which is a deleted coparabolic minimal-fine neighbor-
hood of ( [is not coparabolic minimal thin at (].
P .mflim.ti(~)
.;_~ K(Y')
= inf .ti(~) = M.({r}).
Ii K(Y') v ':>
(13.1)
. .
K(~.';»O
,:>, '1 K(T '»0
,."
,:>, '1
(b) If ti
is a positive cosuperparabolic function on D and if E D with e
e)
K(C, > 0, then GIi«,·) > 0 on a deleted Martin topology neigh-
borhood of Cand
(15.1)
Theorem 15 in this context, applied only to the left boundary {O} x ] - 00, 15(,
asserts that vlh has coparabolic minimal-fine limit dN~/dN~ at N~ almost
every point of the left boundary. See Historical Notes for the details on this
result for other than coparabolic minimal-fine approach to the left boundary.
Observe that coparabolic minimal-fine approach to a point (0,.) is signif-
icant only for approach by way of points with ordinate values strictly greater
than. because (from Section 12) the set ]0, + oo[ x ] - 00, .] is coparabolic
.0
e, °
minimal thin at (0, .). If h is not strictly positive, there is a number such
that h( s) > if and only if • > .0' The boundary set {.': • :::; .o} is then
N~ null, and the discussion needs only trivial changes.
Part 2
Probabilistic Counterpart of Part 1
Chapter I
2. Progressive Measurability
If I is a subinterval or singleton of IR, we denote by .?l(I) the class of Borel
subsets of I. If I is a singleton, .?l(I) consists of that singleton and the empty
set. A family {x(t), t E I} of functions from a measurable space (n,!F)
into a measurable space (n', !F') is called measurable ifthe function (t, w)1-+
x(t,w) is measurable from the measurable space (I x n,.?l(I) x !F) into
the measurable space (n',!F'). This definition will frequently not be strong
enough, however, when we deal with an adapted family {x(t), !F(t), tE IR+}.
In fact in dealing with an adapted family one frequently wishes to deal with
a subfamily of the form {x(t),!F(t), t:$ c} and wishes the analysis of this
subfamily, in particular, the measurability of the subfamily, to depend
only on properties involving parameter values in the interval [0, c]. Un-
fortunately even if!F = YrelR+ !F(t), the measurability of the original family
does not imply that the subfamilies of the stated form are measurable.
The following definition is formulated precisely to provide this measur-
ability.
Suppose then that {x(t), !F(t), tE IR+} is an adapted family offunctions. A
subset A of IR+ x n will be called progressively measurable if A n ([0, c] x 0)
E .?l([0, c]) x !F(c) when c ~ 0. The class of progressively measurable sets
is a (J algebra. The adapted family is called progressively measurable if
the function x(·,·) is measurable from the space IR+ x 0 coupled with the
2. Progressive Measurability 389
°
(1 algebra of progressively measurable sets into (0', 1P), equivalently, if
°
implies adaptedness. We leave to the reader the easy proof that if {x(t),
§ (t), t E IR+} is progressively measurable, then for b > the family {x(b + t),
§(b + t), tE IR+} is also progressively measurable. It is immediate that if
{x(·), §(.)} is progressively measurable and if f is a measurable function
from the state space (O',§') into the measurable space (O",§"), then
{f[x(·)],§(·)} is also progressively measurable, with state space (O",§").
°
(a') §(.) is right continuous.
(b) For c > the restriction of the family x(·) to the set [0, c[ is
84([0, cD x §- (c) measurable.
Observe that the pair (a'), (b) implies (a). We now show that {x(·), §(.)}
is progressively measurable if and only if (a) and (b) are satisfied. To prove
that (a) and (b) together imply progressive measurability, we need only
observe that the subsets [0, c[ x 0 and {c} x 0 of [0, c] x 0 have the
latter set as union and are in 84([0, c]) x §(c) and that under (a) and (b)
the function x(·,·) is measurable on both subsets and so also on their union,
relative to 84([0, c]) x §(c). Conversely, progressive measurability implies
(a), and another piecing together of measurable functions shows that pro-
gressive measurability also implies (b).
EXAMPLE. Let {x(t), §(t), tE IR+} be an adapted family whose state spac~
is Polish. Then the family is progressively measurable ifthe sample functions
are all right continuous or all left continuous. For example, in the right
continuous case define
j
xn(t,w) = xf; ,w) if(j - 1)£ < t 5, c, I 5,j 5, n,
n n
(2.1)
xn(O,w) = x(O,w)
390 2.1. Fundamental Concepts of Probability
when c > O. Then the restriction of x n (·,·) to [0, c] x 0 is ~([O, c]) x ~(c)
measurable and Iimn _ oo xi·,·) = x(·, .), so the progressive measurability
condition is satisfied when c > O. The condition when c = 0 is satisfied
because the family is adapted. The left continuous case is treated similarly.
Observe that if whenever e > 0 the restriction of the family x(·) to the
set [O,c] is ~[O,c] x ~(c+e) measurable, then (b) is satisfied. In fact
this condition implies that for 0 < lJ < c the restriction of this family to
[0, c - lJ] is
measurable, and this yields (b). In other words the adapted process {x(·),
~(.)} is progressively measurable if the process {x(t),~(t + e),tEIR+} is
progressively measurable for every e > O.
3. Random Variables
4. Conditional Expectations
If x is a real integrable random variable on a probability space or a real
random variable bounded on one side, and if:F is a (J algebra of measurable
sets, the conditional expectation E{xl:F} is the uniquely determined up
to null sets random variable which is :F measurable and satisfies
The next properties are less immediate, and their proofs will be sketched.
(g) If x is independent of :F (that is, if x is independent of every :F
measurable random variable), E{xl:F} = E{x} a.s.
In fact, if y is the indicator function of a set A in :F, the random variables
x, yare independent and
and since a convex function is the supremum of all the linear functions
it majorizes, and even the supremum of a properly chosen countable subset
of those linear functions, (4.5) implies (4.4). If ~ contains only the space
and the empty set, (4.4) reduces to Jensen's inequality.
According to (h), if p ~ 1, the transformation xl-+E{xl~} takes U
into itself. In particular, let IDl be the space of square integrable ~ measur-
able random variables. The transformation maps L 2 onto IDl, and it is
easy to verify that x - E{xl~} is orthogonal to IDl, so that the trans-
formation acting on L 2 is the orthogonal projection onto IDl.
(i) If x is integrable, the family of all conditional expectations of x is
uniformly integrable.
In proving this it can be assumed that x is positive (or replace x by Ixl),
and then if we write x, for E {x I~} and if c is a strictly positive constant,
E{x,; x, > c} = E{x; x, > c}, P{x, > c} :s; E{x,} = E{x}.
c c
(4.6)
The second relation ensures that, for sufficiently large c, P{x, > c} is
uniformly small as ~ varies and the left side of the first relation must then
also be uniformly small for large c as ~ varies, and this property is precisely
the uniform integrability property.
Alternative Proof
The following less direct proof displays a technique which has many appli-
cations. Since x is integrable, this function constitutes a uniformly integrable
class; so there is a uniform integrability test function (J) (Appendix V) for
which E {(J)(lxl)} < + 00. Apply Jensen's inequality (h) above for conditional
expectations to obtain
E{(J)(E{lxll~})}:s;E{E{(J)(lxl)I~} = E{(J)(lxl)}·
Since the left side is uniformly bounded as ~ varies, the family ofconditional
expectations of x is uniformly integrable.
More generally a trivial extension of either proof shows that the class
of conditional expectations of the random variables of a uniformly inte-
grable family is uniformly integrable.
(j) If {x(t), tEI} is a family of integrable random variables and is
directed upward neglecting null sets, then (whether or not essSUptelX(t) is
integrable)
5. Conditional Expectation Continuity Theorem 393
This fact for integrals, that is, in the present context for expectations,
is proved in Appendix IV.9. Since the family {E{x(t)lff}, tE I} is directed
upward neglecting null sets, the result for integrals yields, when A E ff,
To prove (5.1), choose integers j < k < I < m and real numbers a < b,
and define
Observe that if "~ a" had been "< a" or "~ b" had been "> b" in the
above definitions, the change would carryover throughout with no change
in the reasoning, and a trivial continuity argument for varying a and b
shows that here and in further reasoning below the inequalities allowing
equality imply those prescribing strict inequality and conversely. In view
of this fact (5.4) yields, when successively m -+ + 00, 1-+ + 00, k -+ + 00,
j-++oo,
r
J1a;bl
xdP ~ aP{[a;b]}, (5.6)
IXdP= LX'(+oo)dP.
The equality must also be true for A in .?F( + 00), so x' ( + 00) = x( + 00)
almost surely, as was to be proved.
The proof of (5.2) is similar to that of (5.1) but is easier. If a < band
m < n, the same argument as that in the preceding proof shows that if v is
defined as in (5.3), if
i[I,m)
xdP ~ bP{[/,m]}, (5.4')
i[a;b)
xdP ~ bP{[a;b]}. (5.5')
for all finite n and when n ~ - 00, the L 1 convergence of x(-) implies that
these three integrals are also equal to Sx'( - 00) dP; so x'( - 00) = x( - 00)
almost surely, as was to be proved.
Let (I, :::;;) be a linearly ordered set and let {<;§(t), t e I} be a monotone family
of (1 algebras of measurable subsets of a probability space. Suppose that I
does not have a last element and denote by <;§( 00) either YreI <;§(t) or nteI <;§(t)
according as <;§(-) is monotone increasing or decreasing. If x is an integrable
random variable, we shall now show, generalizing Theorem 5, that
396 2. I. Fundamental Concepts of Probability
To see this when G(·) is increasing, observe that (Appendix IV.2) there is a
countable subset J of / such that x( co) is Y, e J G(t) measurable, and we leave
to the reader the proof that (5.8) is true with to any upper order bound of J.
The following argument is more instructive and shows that to exists satisfying
(5.8) whether G(·) is increasing or decreasing. An order-preserving map 4J
will be exhibited in Section IlIA, involving only elementary inequalities,
taking / into a subset r of IR, with the property that 4J(s) = 4J(t) if and only
if P{x(s) = x(t)} = I. The set r must have a last element t' because r has a
cofinal sequence s:, and if s. is a sequence in / with 4J(sJ = s: and if t is an
order upper bound of s., then 4J(t) = t' is the last element of r. Each element
to of 4J-l(t') satisfies (5.8).
ess lim inf E{x(t)I<§(t)} ~ E{ess lim inf x(t)I<§( co)} a.s. (6.1)
It It
/n particular, if 1= 7!..+,
7. Dominated Convergence Theorem for Conditional Expectations 397
For every kin 7L+ and s in [the left side of(6.1) is almost surely at least
Inequality (6.1) follows from the fact that the right side of (6.2) increases as
k and s increase and has the essential limit E{ess lim infrt x(t)I~(oo)}
according to (4.7).
Let (0, $', P) be a probability space, and let I be an arbitrary set (to be used
as the parameter set of a family of random variables). A subset A of I x 0
is called evanescent if there is a set A in $' for which P {A} = 0 and A c I x A.
A subset of an evanescent set is evanescent, and a countable union of evanes-
cent sets is evanescent. For many purposes evanescent subsets of I x 0 are
counterparts of the polar subsets of the state space in classical potential
theory, and we shall accordingly describe a relation true on I x 0 up to an
evanescent set as true quasi everywhere.
A stochastic process on (0, $', P,I) is a family of random variables
{x(t), tEI} with a common state space, defined on (0, $', P), with parameter
set I. The random variable x(t) of this process has the value x(t, w) at the
point w of 0, and the process thus defines a function from I x 0 into the
state space of the process, that is, the state space of the random variables.
with the property that each function x(t) = x(t, 0) is measurable. Two
processes x(o) and y(o) with common probability space, parameter set, and
state space are called indistinguishable if x( 0, 0) = y( 0, 0) quasi everywhere on
I x 0, that is, if
Assertion (c) is a special case of (b) because in (b) the set A' can be chosen
as [0, c] x A. Assertion (b) is a special case of (a) by the following argument.
The map (t,w) t-+ (t,x(t, w» from the measurable space ~+ x Qcoupled with
the class of progressively measurable sets into the measurable space (~+ x X,
gj(~+) x ~) is measurable because the inverse image of any product set
[0, b] x Xo with Xo in ~ is a progressively measurable set. Hence (Appendix
Theorem 1.8) the inverse image of any set A' analytic over gj(~+) x ?l' is a
set A" analytic over the class of progressively measurable sets. Finally the
projection of A" rl ([0, c] x Q) is then the set in (9.1); so (a) implies (b). To
prove (a), observe that by Theorem 7 of Appendix I the projection of A" on
Q is analytic over ~(c) and therefore is in ~(c) by Lusin's theorem (Theorem
4 of Appendix II because the restriction of P to ~(c) is a complete measure.
In (a) the projection of A" rl ([0, c[ x Q) on Q and in (b) and (c) the sets in
(9.1) and (9.2) with "t ~ c" replaced by "t < c" are all in ~-(c) = Yr<c~(t).
The method of proof of the theorem yields this variant, or the variant can be
deduced by an application of the theorem with c replaced by c - I In, n ~ I.
Generalization
Change of Origin
The analysis of the hitting of a set in the parameter interval [0, c] or [0, c[ is
valid with trivial changes for hitting in an interval [b, c] or [b, c[ with
0< b < c.
(A ef{"). (10.1)
An associated canonical process with the same parameter set, state space,
and finite-dimensional distributions can be defined as follows. Set n = XI.
The map ¢: wl---.x(·,w) is measurable from (n,~) into (n,#) because
(A ef{").
(10.2)
Define Pon # as the measure induced by P; that is, P{A} = P {¢-1 (A)}. If
as usual P is supposed complete, it follows that ¢-1(#*) c~; so ¢ is a
measurable map from (n,~) into (n, #*). Note that ~ may be strictly
larger than ¢-1(#*) so that there may be sample function properties defin-
ing measurable subsets ofn but not ofn. Sample function properties involv-
ing uncountably many parameter values are obvious candidates.
If I is a topological space and if (X, f{) is a topological space with f{ the
(1 algebra generated by the open subsets of X, suppose that x(·) in the pre-
(10.3)
and (b) if t~, ... , t~ is a permutation of t t, ... , t", the measure p(t t, ... , t" ; .)
becomes the measure p(t~, ... , t~;·) when the coordinates of X" undergo
the same permutation.
Let (X, fl') be a Polish space coupled with its (1 algebra of Borel sets. Then
(X", fl'") is for n ~ I also a Polish space coupled with its (1 algebra of Borel
sets, and therefore (Appendix IV.11) every measure on fl'" is inner regular.
Kolmogorov showed that for an arbitrary parameter set I, state space
(X, fl'), and arbitrary finite-dimensional distributions for this choice of
parameter set and statt: space, satisfying (a) and (b) above, there is a canonical
stochastic process with 0 = Xl and the given finite-dimensional distri-
butions. (Kolmogorov had X = ~, but the above inner regularity property
was all his proof needed.) His method of proof was to define P on the
algebra Ug; {.i(t 1), ... , x(t")} by
(A E f£") (10.4)
A = {sup
Ie
x(t) :::;; I} , then A = {sup x(t) :::;; I} E.# and, up to a null set,
IeI'
EXAMPLE (a). Let 1= 1L.+, (X,,q£) = (IR, .sf(IR», and let x(O), x(l), be 0 ••
of convergence of I:O' x(n) is either 0 or 1 does not depend for its validity
on the choice of probability space, and the value of this probability, 0 or
1 as the case may be, depends only on the distributions of the random
variables, that is, on the finite-dimensional distributions of the process x(·).
I if t = w,
x(t,w) = { 0
if t i= w,
Since only countably many parameter values are involved on the right-hand
side the finite-dimensional distributions of the process determine the desired
hitting probability. Thus for a right continuous (or almost surely right
continuous) process the probability of hitting the open set B by time c
406 2.1. Fundamental Concepts of Probability
does not depend on the choice of almost surely right continuous process
with the given finite-dimensional distributions.
U {x(t)eA} =
r,;;c
n
00
n:l
U
0,;;,,;;1
{x(re)eBn }. (12.2)
r rational
Again only countably many parameter values are involved on the right-hand
side. If A is a countable union of closed sets, the set A is hit by time e if and
only ifsome summand is. Thus for a continuous (or almost surely continuous)
process with a metric state space the probability of hitting an Fa set by time
e does not depend on the choice of almost surely continuous process with the
given finite-dimensional distributions.
and if A is defined similarly for x(o), then Ae3i"(e) and Ae#(e). Moreover
since A = fj}-I(A) (notation of Section 10), it follows that P{A} = p{A}.
Thus P{A} depends on the finite-dimensional distributions and the right
continuity hypothesis but not otherwise on the choice of (Q, 3i", P) and x(o).
In particular, if A is an analytic subset of X and A' = [0, e] x A, it follows
that the probability of the set
13. Measurability versus Progressive Measurablity of Stochastic Processes 407
The metric
In the present context a process {x(t), t E IR+} with state space ~ defines
a function PX('): t t-+ x(t) from IR+ into S. This map taking a process into a
function is one to one and onto if two processes are identified when they
are standard modifications of each other.
Proof of (a). (i) If x(o) is a measurable process, then PX(.) is Borel measurable.
Since each measurable process x(o) is determined by a function (t,w)t-+
x(t,w) and since pointwise convergence of a sequence {xio,o),nEZ+}
implies pointwise convergence of the corresponding sequence {Pxno, n E Z+},
it is sufficient to show that if x(o, 0) has the form
with A 1 , •.• , An disjoint Borel subsets of IR+ and AjE F, then PX(.) is Borel
measurable. This Borel measurability is trivial.
(ii) If PX(.) is Borel measurable, then x(o) has a measurable standard modi-
fication. To show this, if is sufficient to show that the class of functions
from IR+ into S corresponding to processes which have measurable standard
modifications includes the continuous functions and is closed under con-
vergence. Suppose first that PX(.) is continuous. Define
The set Ani = {t: mn(t) = j} is a Borel subset of IR+, and for each t
so
lim Xm (l)(t)
n-oo n
= x(t) a.s. (13.4)
When 2- kn < e, the nth term on the left defines a process adapted to and
progressively measurable relative to the filtration ~(o + e). Hence if the
limit in (13.5) is replaced by the limit superior, the resulting process is
progressively measurable relative to ~(o + e) for all strictly positive e and
so (Section 1.2) is progressively measurable relative to ~(o), and this process
is a standard modification of XO(o).
Proof of (b)(ii). Apply the conditional expectation continuity theorem
to (13.4) to obtain
(13.6)
and repeat the reasoning just used, thereby showing that the process defined
when the limit in (13.6) is replaced by the limit superior is a progressively
measurable standard modification of XO(o). The proof of (b) is now complete.
Consider the class of adapted families {x(t); g-(t), te IR+} of functions from
n into IR for which every sample function x(o,w) is left continuous, that is,
for which the family x(o) is left continuous. (Left continuity at 0 is vacuously
satisfied by every function on IR+.) The smallest (J algebra of subsets of
IR+ x n making the function (t,w)l-+x(t,w) measurable for every such
left continuous family x(o) is called the predictable (J algebra, and the sets
in this (J algebra are called predictable. A family {y(t), t e IR+} of functions
from n into an arbitrary measurable space is called predictable if the function
(t,w)l-+y(t,w) on the space IR+ x n coupled with its predictable (J algebra
is measurable. A predictable family is necessarily adapted to the given
filtration. Since left continuity ofa function family with state space (IR, &I(IR»
implies progressive measurability (Section 2), the predictable sets are pro-
gressively measurable, and a predictable function family is progressively
measurable. The predictability definition implies that if x(o) is predictable,
if rx > 0, and if xit) = x«t - rx) v 0), then the family x<x(o) is also predictable.
If 0::; a < b::; +00 and if Aeg-(a), the subset ]a,b] x A of IR+ x n if
b< + 00 or ]a, + 00 [ x A if b = + 00 is a predictable set, as is the product
set {O} x Ao when Aoeg-(O). The class of finite unions of sets in the class
r of product sets of these two types is an algebra, and we now show that
the (J algebra '§ generated by r is the predictable (J algebra. To see this,
observe first that if x(t) = l(oj(t)</> with </> an g-(O) measurable function
from n into IR, or if 0 ::; a < b and if x(t) = lja,b)(t)</> with </> an g-(a) measur-
able function from n into IR, then the family x(o) is '§ measurable. Second,
observe that if {y(o), g-(o)} is a left continuous adapted family of functions
with state space (IR, &I(IR» and if
4n
Yn(t) = y(O)I{oj(t) + L y«(j - l)r n)I)U_1)2-n,ir n)(t),
j=l
then the family Yn(o) is t§ measurable because it has just been shown that
each summand family is. Finally y(o) = limn_tO Yn("); so y(o) is '§ measurable,
412 2.1. Fundamental Concepts of Probability
]a,b]XA=nQ[a+~,bJxA [a<b,AE~(a)],
(14.1)
{O} x A = Dl [o,~J x A [AE~(O)].
Here the sets on the left are in r and those on the right are in the (1 algebra
generated by r'. Conversely, just as trivial a representation of r' sets in
terms of predictable sets shows that the (1 algebra of predictable sets includes
r/. Thus the (1 algebra generated by r' is the predictable (1 algebra. The
representation (14.1) shows that the class of analytic sets over r/ includes
the predictable sets. We leave to the reader the similar trivial argument
showing that if 0 ~ a < b ~ + 00, the predictable (1 algebra is the (1 algebra
generated by the class r" of product sets [a,b[ x A with AE~(O) if a = 0
and AE U<a ~(t) if a> O. The class of finite unions of these product sets
is an algebra. The class of analytic sets over r" includes the predictable sets.
The predictable (1 algebra is the smallest (1 algebra making the function
(t,w)~x(t,w) measurable whenever {x(')'~(')} is an adapted continuous
family with state space (/R, .94(/R». To prove this, we need show only that if
G" is a (1 algebra of subsets of /R+ x n making every such family measurable,
then G" contains r/. This inclusion follows from the fact that the indicator
function of a compact interval of /R+ is the limit of a decreasing sequence
of continuous functions on /R+ vanishing outside an arbitrarily small neigh-
borhood of the interval.
Chapter II
(1.1)
for c :5 + 00. Equivalently, ..?i'(T) is the (1 algebra of sets A in ..?i'( + 00) for
which (1.2) is true when c < + 00.
An{T=c}E~(C) (l.2d)
An{T<c}E~(C) (1.2')
If Sand T are optional with S ~ T, the stochastic interval [S, T], a subset of
IR+ x Q, is defined by
In particular, we write [T] for the interval [T, T], the graph of T (but
observe that this graph is a subset of IR+ x Q; if T == + 00, this graph is the
empty set). The open stochastic interval ]S, T[ and the half-open ones are
defined in the obvious way.
A stochastic interval of the form ]S, T] is a predictable set because each
function 1]5, T](', w) is left continuous. The classes rand r' of generators of
the predictable (J algebra, as defined in Section 1.14, can be described in
terms of stochastic intervals. For example, r consists of the graphs [S] with
S = 0 on an ~ (0) set and S = + 00 elsewhere and of the stochastic intervals
]S, T] with S = a on an !F(a) set A and S = + 00 elsewhere, T = b on A
and T = + 00 elsewhere.
Suppose that the given measurable space is a probability space, and that
each (J algebra !F(t) of the filtrations contains the null sets. Then if Tis
optional, !F(T) also contains the null sets, and if T1 and T2 are functions
2. Optional Time Properties (Continuous Parameter Context) 415
Then [S]n ~ S, with strict inequality where S is finite valued, and the
sequence [SJ. is a monotone decreasing sequence of optional times with
limit S.
so AE§(T). Thus the first assertion of (d) is true. To prove the second
assertion, replace {S::S; c} by {S < c} in (2.1).
(e) If Sand T are optional §(S) n §(T) = §(S /\ T). In particular,
{S::S; c} E§(S /\ c).
(f) If Sand T are optional, the sets {S < T}, {S::s; T}, {S = T} are in
§(S /\ T).
In fact, since
{S<T}n{S/\T::S;c}= U {S::s;rc}n{T>rc} (2.2)
O<rsl
r rational
416 2.1l. Optional Times and Associated Concepts
An {S ~ T}E.fi'(S 1\ T)'
{T ~ c} = {S + T ~ S + c} E~(S + c) (2.3)
F or each pair (a, b) the brace set on the right is in ~ (c) because by hypothesis
{T < b} E~(S + b}, that is,
noOnly (i4) and (i5) need comment. In (i4) we need only prove that
and this inclusion follows from the fact that if
AE no
fF+(Tn) c: fF+(T),
then
fF+(Tn),
00
00
An {T ~ c} = U [A n {Tn ~ c}]EfF(c)
o
so that AEfF(D.
(j) Suppose that {fFo(t), t E IR+} is a filtration of a probability space
(0., fF, P), that fFo( + (0) is a (J algebra satisfying 'Y;eR+ fFo(t) c: fF( + (0)
c: fF, that fF(t) is the (J algebra generated by fFo(t) and the null sets, that Tis
fF(·) optional, and that AEfF(D. Then there are an fF;(·) optional time
To and a set Ao E fF; (To) such that T = To almost surely and that A differs
from Ao by a null set.
For j = 0, 1, ... , + 00 define M nj as an fFour n) set differing from the
fFU2- n) set {[T]n = j2- n} by a null set, and define Sn = j r n on M nj -
Uk<jMnk . Then Sn is an fFo(·) optional time, S. is a decreasing sequence,
and the limit To is an fF;(·) optional time equal almost surely to T. If
A E fF(D and if T = + 00 everywhere on A, let Ao be a set in fFo( + (0)
differing from A by a null set. The set {To = + 00 } n Ao is then in fF; (To)
and differs from A by a null set. If A E fF (D and if T < + 00 everywhere on
A, define the fF(·) optional time T' by setting T' = T on A and T' = + 00
elsewhere. We have shown above that there is an fF;(·) optional time To
equal almost surely to T'. The set {To = To < + 00 } is in fF; (To) and differs
from A by a null set. If A is an arbitrary member of fF(D, apply the two
results just obtained to the sets An {T = + oo} and An {T < + oo} to
complete the proof of (j).
Let fFc be the class of intersections with {T::;; c} of ~(c) sets, and consider
the three measurable spaces
Here and below the infimum of the empty set is defined as + 00. If
{x(t), t e I} is a family of functions on Q with arbitrary state space (X,,q[)
and if A' is a subset of I x X, the hitting time of A' (by {[t,x(t)],teI}) is
defined as
In each case the entry time of the set in question is defined in the same way
as the hitting time except that "t > 0" is replaced by "t ~ 0." Observe that
If A' = I x A, the hitting and entry times of A' reduce to those of A and
that if A" = {(t,w): [t,x(t,w)]eA'}, the hitting and entry times of A"
reduce to those of A'.
The analysis of measurability of hitting and entry times is trivial when
1= 7l..+. For example, if A e,q[, it is clear that the entry and hitting times of
A by x(o) are measurable and in fact are optional for !F(o). From now on
we shall therefore assume that 1= IR+. Observe that if T' [T"] is the entry
[hitting] time of A" and if c > 0, then
To prove the theorem, recall that the sets on the right in (4.4) and the
corresponding ones for A' and A were shown in Section 1.9 to be in ff(c);
so the entry and hitting times are optional for ff+(·). The last assertion of
(b) is trivial because the probability of hitting and entry in the stated con-
texts, by time c, does not depend on the choice of probability space according
to Section 1.9.
Generalization
For n :s; + 00 let Tn be the nth entry time of A"; that is,
Tn(w) = inf {t z 0: (t, w)eA" for at least n values of t}.
Then T1 is the entry time of A" and under the hypotheses of (a) is optional
for ff+ (.). If n < + 00 and if Tn is optional, the stochastic interval] T,., + 00 [
is progressively measurable. Hence Tn + 1 is the entry time of the progressively
measurable set A Tn, + 00 [ and so is optional. It follows that T1 , T2 , •••
II ( \ ]
and therefore also Too = limn.... oo Tn are optional. The corresponding assertion
is true for A' and A. Further, if ff(O) contains the null sets, part (a) of the
theorem as just generalized is valid if A" differs by an evanescent set from
one as described in (a), and part (b) of the theorem as just generalized is
valid if {x('), ff(')} is indistinguishable from a progressively measurable
process.
We use the notation introduced at the beginning of this section. The last
hitting time of A" by {(t, w), t e I} is defined as
under the convention that this supremum is 0 of the set in question is empty.
The last hitting times of A' and A, in the respective contexts of (4.2) and
5. Application to Continuity Properties of Sample Functions 421
(4.3), are defined in the obvious way. If c > 0, let S(c) be the hitting time
of A" by {(c + t,W),tEIR+}. The function S" is not optional except in
trivial cases, but {S" > c} = {S(c) < +oo} so that measurability problems
for last hitting times can be reduced to dual problems for hitting times.
and define ~r(t, w) as the corresponding limit inferior. (Recall that according
to our conventions r > t in these superior and inferior limits.) We shall not
need an analysis of the left limit properties of sample functions.
We prove the first assertion of (a) but omit the similar proofs of the other
parts of the theorem.
Fix c > 0, a> 0, and define jO(c -) = Yb<c jO(b), ~ = 8IJ([0, x cD
jO(c -), T(t, w) = inf{sE [t, c[: O:(s, w) ;;:: a}, for t E [0, c[. Then
6. Continuation of Section 5
We use the notation of Theorem 5. If e > 0, let 1'. be the entry time of the
set
Then 1'. is optional and (1'.(w), w) is in this set when 1'.(w) < + 00; so the
hypothesis of (a) implies that T. /\ n = n almost surely for every n > 0, and
(a) follows. The proof of (b) is similar.
°
conditions in (7.1) fails to hold. Then A e ff(O), and if we redefine T" on A
as (T - Tn) V or T /\ n, according as T is finite or not, the modified op-
tional times are still optional, and (7.1) is now satisfied. Thus under the
stated hypotheses on P and ff(O), an optional time equal almost surely to a
predictable time is itself predictable.
We leave to the reader the proof that the maximum and minimum of a
finite number of predictable times is predictable. The following properties
are slightly deeper. Let T. be a sequence of predictable times, and let T". be
a sequence announcing T".
(a) The optional time sUPnel Tn is predictable because it is announced
by the sequence
00
Sn = L Tmn l{4>n=ml
m=O
U {Sn 1\ Tm = Tm } = 0;
00
lim Sn 1\ Tm = Tm ,
n-oo n=O
so
by Section 2(i5). Hence Y':=o §(Sn) ::> Y:=o §(Tm), and there must be
equality because S. and T. can be interchanged. Thus Y':=o §(T,,) does not
depend on the choice of the announcing sequence T., and we denote this (f
algebra by §(T-). According to Section 3, if S is a predictable optional
time and if x(o) is a predictable process, then Slls< +oo} is §(S -) measurable.
Predictable Filtrations
8. Section Theorems
Let (0, §, P) be a probability space, and let A be a subset of IR+ x O.
A section theorem is a theorem stating that under certain conditions on A
there is a function T with useful properties, from 0 into ~+, such that a
8. Section Theorems 425
Proof of (b). Observe first that if A is a set in the algebra r'" generated by
r" (defined in Section 1.14), then (b) is trivial because the entry time T of
A is predictable and satisfies (8.3) with e = O. Second, suppose that A E r;',
that is, A = nO' An is a countable intersection of r'" sets. Then the entry
time of A is predictable because it is the supremum of the sequence of entry
times of Al , Az , ... , and again (8.3) is satisfied with e = O. The general case
is reduced to this special case as follows. According to (a), if A is predictable,
there is an J7 measurable function S from Q into jR+ for which [S] c A and
P{S < + oo} = P{n(A)}. Define
for bE r"'. The set function A is a measure on the algebra r'" and therefore
(Hahn-Kolmogorov theorem) has a unique measure extension to the (J
algebra generated by r"', that is, to the predictable (J algebra, and (8.4)
is valid for the extension. The extended measure A is supported by A, with
A(A) = P{n(A)}. According to the full statement of the Hahn-Kolmogorov
theorem, there is a set bE in r;' such that bE c A and A(ba) ~ P{ n(A)} - e.
Let T be the entry time of bE' According to the result in the special case of
(b) already treated, [T] c bE and P{T < + oo} = P{n(bE)}; so P{T < + oo}
~ A(bJ ~ P{n(A)} - e, and Ttherefore satisfies (8.3). 0
Theorem. Let (Q, J7, P; J7(t), tE IR+) be aftltered probability space, Suppose
that J7(.) is right continuous and that J7(O) contains the null sets.
(a) An optional time is predictable if and only if its graph is predictable.
(b) The intersection of a predictable set with the graph of its entry time
is a predictable set. In particular, the entry time of a predictable
set is predictable if the entry time graph is included in the set.
Proof of (b). If a set A is predictable and if T is its entry time, the stochastic
interval ] T, + 00 [ is predictable because its indicator function defines an
adapted left continuous process. Hence the set A - ] T, + 00 [ = A n [T]
is predictable.
Generalization
The Class D
This class of processes is the class of processes x(·) for which the family
E{(1)[lx(T)I]} ~ c (11.2)
for all Tin (11.1). Observe that if a point + 00 and a (1 algebra ff'( + (0)
are introduced as in Section I and if x( + (0) is an arbitrary ff'( + (0) measur-
able and integrable random variable, then if the original process was in D
relative to the original filtration the augmented process is in D relative to the
augmented filtration. In fact the family (11.1) augmented by the random
variable x( + (0) is uniformly integrable so there is a uniform integrability
test function (1) and a constant c such that (11.2) is true for T as in (11.1)
and also so that E{(1)[lx(+oo)IJ} ~ c. The augmented process, in which T
is allowed to have the value + 00, then satisfies (11.2) with c replaced by 2c.
12. Accessible and Totally Inaccessible Optional Times 429
Observe that LP c D when p > I. Adjoin a pair {x( + (0), ~(+ oo)} to each
process x(·) as in the discussion of the class D, but under the additional
condition of finiteness of E {Ix( + 00 W}. Follow that discussion to show
that (11.3) is true for the augmented process if true for the original process
and that then in the continuous parameter context (11.3) is true with Tan
arbitrary (:::;; + (0) optional time.
(The reader is warned that the now accepted definition of these optional
times differs slightly from the original version.) An optional time T is said
to be totally inaccessible if P {S = T < + oo} = 0 whenever S is a predictable
optional time. In particular, the distribution function of Ton IR+ is con-
tinuous; that is, P{T = c} = 0 for every finite constant c. Observe that this
definition only involves the properties of T on {T < + 00 }; total inaccessi-
bility is a property of T where T is finite valued. A striking token of this
fact is that an optional time T is both predictable and totally inaccessible
if and only if T = + 00 almost surely. Observe also that predictability of
430 2.11. Optional Times and Associated Concepts
n {Sn#Sdn{Sn< +oo}
n-l
Ao={So< +oo},A n = ifn>O,
k=l
S' = {Sn
n +00
12. Accessible and Totally Inaccessible Optional Times 431
T= S: < + 00 on I\.n,
Special Case: 0 < IX < 1. In this case define the accessible optional time
T and the totally inaccessible optional time Til by
T(w) = {T(W)
if T(w) = Siw) < + 00,
+00 otherwise;
These optional times are uniquely determined up to null sets, and there is
a subset I\. of n such that T = T on I\. and T" = Ton n - 1\.. Thus [T] =
[T] u [Til] up to an evanescent set. The optional times T and T" are
called, respectively, the accessible and totally inaccessible components of T.
1. Definitions
Let (D.,:F, P;:F(t), tel} be a filtered probability space, and let {x(·),:F(·)}
be a process on this space, with state space (~, ~(~». The process is called a
supermartingale if the process random variables are integrable and if the
supermartingale inequality
[c, (0, Q)], where c is the common expected value of the process random
variables.
EXAMPLE. Let 1=71. in increasing order, let ~(n) consist, for each n, of
the empty set and the whole probability space, and consider the process
all of whose sample functions are identically 1. This process is a martingale
and becomes a right closed martingale if the constant function 1 is adjoined
at the end or a right closed supermartingale if the constant function 0 is
adjoined at the end.
Choice of Filtration
Let {x('), ~(.)} be a supermartingale. The following remarks are made for
the supermartingale case but are valid with the obvious changes in the
other two cases. Define ~o(t) = ~{x(s),s s; t}. Then ~o(t) c ~(t) and
{x('),~o(')} is a supermartingale because if s < t,
Thus ~o(') is the minimal filtration ~(.) for which {x(')'~(')} is a super-
martingale. The larger the (j algebras of the filtration, the more one knows
about the process, more precisely, the more (1.1) implies. It is sometimes
convenient to suppose that each (j algebra ~(t) contains all the null sets.
If this inclusion is not already true, ~(t) can be replaced by ~l (t), the
smallest (j algebra containing ~(t) and the null sets, to obtain a filtration
~l(') for which {X(')'~l(')} is a supermartingale and ~l(') contains the
null sets.
2. Examples
EXAMPLE (a). If ~(.) is a filtration (arbitrary linearly ordered parameter
set I) of a probability space, if x is an integrable random variable, and if
x(t) = E{xl~(t)}, then the process {x(·), ~(.)} is a martingale. Every right
closable martingale is of this type. Suppose in this example that T is a
countably valued optional time with values in I. Then we shall show that
434 2.111. Elements of Martingale Theory
J f
Ar
xdP =
Ar
x(r)dP = f
Ar
x(T)dP. (2.3)
Sum in (2.3) over the countably many values of r taken on by T to find that
x(T) is integrable. The equality (2.3) for all r is an integrated version of
(2.1). In the proof of (2.2) we shall use freely the properties in Section 11.2
of optional times and the (j algebras they determine. The translation of
these properties into the present context of countably valued optional
times is trivial. If S ~ T [S ~ T], then ~(T) c ~(S) [~(S) c ~(T)];
so (2.2) reduces to the special case 1(4.2). We now reduce the general case
to this special one. Observe that the set {S ~ T} and its complement are
in ~(S 1\ T) and that x(S 1\ T) is ~(S 1\ T) (c ~(T» measurable; so
EXAMPLE (b). Let y( I), y(2), ... be mutually independent integrable random
variables, and let x(n) = I:~y(j), g;(n) = ~{y(j),j ~ n}. Then {x(o),g;(o)}
is a submartingale if E{y(j)} ~ 0 for j > I and is a martingale if these
expectations vanish.
as was to be proved.
EXAMPLE (d). Let n be the interval [0, I], let!F be the class of Borel subsets
of n, and let P be Lebesgue measure on !F. Define a stochastic process
{x(o), 3O(0)} by
x(n) ={ °
2n on [0,2- n],
on ]2- n , I],
3O(n) = 3O{x(l), ... ,x(n)}, n > 0.
(3.1)
(3.3)
Hence 4> is countably additive and thus has a countably additive extension
to the (J algebra Yse r ~(s), and this extension is absolutely continuous
5. Convergence of Supermartingale Families 437
relative to 4J. If x = d4J/dP, the pair [x, 'Y.eI§'(S)] right closes the given
submartingale. A trivial variation of this argument shows that a uniformly
integrable martingale is right closable; the converse martingale result was
noted above.
(f) A supermartingale which majorizes a uniformly integrable sub-
martingale is right closable. In fact, if {y(o), §,(o)} is a supermartingale
which majorizes the uniformly integrable submartingale {x(o),§'(o)}, we
use the notation of (e) and show that the pair just obtained which closes
x(o) also closes y(o). For A E §'(s) and t ~ s,
and the inequality here between first and last terms is the integrated form
of the desired almost sure supermartingale inequality y(s) ~ E{xl§'(s)}.
for each process x(o) in r, and therefore the right side can be replaced by
(ess inf r)(s) to obtain the supermartingale inequality. In the other direction,
if r is a family of supermartingales which is directed upward, the process
ess sup r is a supermartingale if its random variables have finite expectations
in view of the monotone convergence theorem for conditional expectations.
If the processes in this upward-directed set r are martingales, this reasoning
shows that the process ess sup r is a martingale.
If r is an upward-directed family of supermartingales (essential order
of processes) with essential limit a supermartingale, there is an increasing
sequence {xn(o), n E Z+} in r with the property that ess sup r = sUPnel1+ xn(o)
up to a standard modification. To see this, it can be supposed (Section 4)
that the parameter set of the process x'(o) = ess sup r is a subset of IR ordered
by inequality. The monotone decreasing function tl-+E{x'(t)} is the su-
premum of the upward-directed family of decreasing functions tl-+E{x(t)}
for x(o) in r. Hence there is a sequence {xn(o), n E Z+}, increasing in the
essential order, for which
If T is bounded by k, then
k
E{lx(T)I} ~ LE{lx(j)I} < + 00.
o
r
l[x(T)-x(S)]dP= j~O
k r
l. ~ [x(i+ 1)-x(i)]dP
T-l
=
k
j~O i~
k J J
A.. [x(i + I) - x(i)]dP ~ 0,
(6.2)
JI
and there is equality if the given process is a martingale. Thus the integrated
version of the desired supermartingale inequality or martingale equality
is true.
Observation. According to this theorem if T. is an increasing sequence
of bounded optional times the process {x(T,), S;;(T,)} is a supermartingale,
or a martingale if the original process is a martingale.
E{<I>[x(T)]} ~ c (6.7)
in the class D in the strong sense that the family {x(T): T optional} is
uniformly integrable. In particular, a right closable, equivalently, uniformly
integrable, martingale {y(t),~(t),tEI} is a class D process [set x(t) =
ly(t)IJ; if 1= IR+ and if the martingale is almost surely right continuous,
the family {y(T): T optional} is uniformly integrable.
so that x(·) is the sfim of a positive supermartingale with last element 0 and a
martingale, both relative to ~(.). Thus it is sufficient to prove the theorem
for a positive supermartingale with last element O. Under this hypothesis
define Tn = T /\ n, Sn = S /\ n, and observe that according to Theorem 6
E{x(O)}~E{x(Tn)}' It follows (n~oo) that E{x(O)}~E{x(T)}. Thus
x(T) is integrable. Again according to Theorem 6, if m :5 n,
(7.3)
(7.4)
JAm
x(S)dP ~ J
Am
x(T)dP. (7.5)
+00
on U
j;n+l
{T= rJ,
and define Sn similarly in terms of S. Then Sn and Tn are optional, take
on only finitely many values, and Sn ~ Tn. Theorem 6 is applicable to Sn
and Tn because only the parameter values ro, ... , rn, 00 are involved. An
application of Theorem 6 to the pair (0, Tn) of optional times shows that
E{x(Tn )} ~ E{x(O)}; so when n ~ + 00, we find that x(T) is integrable. An
application of Theorem 6 to the pair (Sn, Tn) shows that
so (n -+ + 00)
8. Optional Stopping
Let {~(t), t E I} be a filtration of a probability space, with I either 7L+ or IR+,
and let Tbe an optional time. If {x(')'~(')} is a stochastic process on the
probability space, the process {x(T /\ t), t E I} is described as the process
stopped at T.
Suppose that 1= 7L+ and that {x('), ~(.)} is a supermartingale [martin-
gale]. According to Theorem 6, the stopped process {x(T /\ n),~(T /\ n),
n E 7L +} is also a supermartingale [martingale]. It is sometimes important
that even the process {x(T /\ n),~(n),nE7L+} is a supermartingale [mar-
tingale]. To prove this result, suppose that AE~(n). Then
because the integrands are the same on the integration domain, and
with equality in the martingale case, because the integrands are x(n) and
x(n + 1), respectively, on the integration domain; so the supermartingale
inequality [martingale equality] is applicable. Adding (8.1) and (8.2) we
obtain an integrated version of the desired supermartingale inequality, or of
the martingale equality in the martingale case.
9. Maximal Inequalities
Theorem. (a) If x(O), ... , x(n) is a submartingale and IX is an arbitrary real
number,
To prove the first inequality in (9.1), define T = n /\ min {j: x(j) ~ IX}
Then T is optional for the submartingale; so (Theorem 6) the ordered pair
[x(T),x(n)] is a submartingale. The submartingale inequality E{x(T)}:5
E{x(n)} yields
9. Maximal Inequalities 443
which implies the first inequality in (9.1). To prove the second inequality,
define S = n /\ min {j: x(j) :s; (X}. Then S is optional; so the ordered pair
[x(O), x(S)] is a submartingale, and the submartingale inequality E{x(O)} :s;
E{x(S)} yields
E{x(O)} :s; (XP{minx(j) :s; (X} + E{x(n); minx(j) > (X}, (9.4)
j~ j:5.n
which implies the second line in (9.1). To prove (9.2), apply (9.4) to -x(o).
Observe that in (9.1) and (9.2) if "~(X" and ":S;(X" are replaced by the
corresponding strict inequalities, the resulting versions of(9.1) and (9.2) are
apparently weaker than the old versions but actually imply them by a trivial
continuity argument.
If the parameter set of the submartingale or positive supermartingale in
question is any linearly ordered countable set A, the inequalities (9.1) or (9.2)
as the case may be are valid for every finite set x(to), ... , x(tn), where 1. is a
finite ordered subset of A. It follows that
Moreover in this right closed case the derivation of the first inequality in
(9.1') yields the in general smaller right-hand side E{x(b); SUPIEAX(t) ~ (X}.
If the parameter set of the submartingale or supermartingale is uncount-
able, (9.1 ') and (9.2') remain true if "sup" and "inf" on the left are replaced
444 2.m. Elements of Martingale Theory
by Hess sup" and "ess inf" respectively, because these essential bounds are
equal almost everywhere to ordinary bounds over suitably chosen countable
parameter subsets. On the other hand, if the process parameter set A is an
interval and if the process is almost surely right continuous, then .(9.1') and
(9.2') are correct as written since replacing A in these inequalities by a count-
able dense subset including the right-hand endpoint of A if A is right closed
changes neither the left nor the right side.
where z is the indicator function of the set {maxj:snxU) ~ cc}. The other
inequalities in Section 9 can be extended similarly. Such extensions to con-
ditional inequalities will be omitted from now on.
According to Section 9,
then
12. Crossings 445
(11.4)
Now
r
E{yP}=PJodPJo
ry(W)
rxP-'drx=p
J+oo
P{y~rx}rxP-'drx
1
0
~p
1
o
+
00
rx p - 2 drx
{Y~IXI
xdP=p i0
xdP JY(W) rx p - 2 drx (11.5)
0
12. Crossings
Let/, g, h be functions from a linearly ordered set / into jij, with g ~ h. The
number Dn[f;g,h] of downcrossings of [g,h] by fis defined as the su-
premum of the values of the positive integer k for which there exist t I < ...
446 2.m. Elements of Martingale Theory
< t 2k in I satisfyingf(t) ~ h(t) whenj is odd andf(tj ) ::s; g(t) whenj is even.
Upcrossings are defined in the obvious dual way. Observe that limi _ oo fi = f
implies that
Theorem. Let n E Z+, and let x('), x/(·), x"(·) be adapted processes on aftltered
probability space (n,~,p;~(j),O::S;j::S; n). Suppose that x/(·) ~ 0 and that
x('), x,,(·) and x"(·) - x/(·) are positive supermartingales relative to ~(.). Then
In particular, ifx(') and y(.) are positive supermartingales relative to ~(.) and
if a, b are numbers with 0 ::s; a < b,
(12.4)
As usual the minimum of the empty set of numbers is defined as + OCJ. The
sequence To is an increasing sequence of optional times for ff(o).
(12.7)
n
2: L: E{x"(n) - x'(n);Dn 2: k} (12.8)
k=l
n
2: L: E{k[x"(n) - x'(n)];Dn = k} = E{[x"(n) - x'(n)]Dn}.
k=l
Proof of(12.3) and (12.4). Inequality (12.3) is a special case of (12.2). Alter-
natively (12.3) can be obtained by summing (12.4). To prove (12.4), define
So and To by (12.6) with x"(o) = by(o) and x'(o) = ay(o). Observe that for
k 2: I,
448 2.III. Elements of Martingale Theory
E{y(S2k+2);S2k+2 ~ n} ~ E{y(T2k+2);S2k+l ~ n}
Furthermore for k ~ 1,
E{y(n);Dn[x(o);ay(o),by(o)] ~ k} = E{y(n);S2k ~ n}
a)k-l E{x(O)}
~ E{y(SZk); S2k ~ n} ~ ( b b'
(12.11)
Proofof(12.5). To prove (12.5), define So and To by (12.6) with x" (0) == band
x'(o) == a. Since Tn == n,
n
x(O) - x(n) = L [x(1j) - X(1]+I)], (12.12)
j=O
Thus on A k ,
(12.13)
and therefore
Strict Downcrossings
and (12.15) is also valid if the parameter set I is an interval of ~ and the
process is almost surely right continuous. In fact under this hypothesis
the two sides of(12.15) are unchanged, for strict downcrossings and therefore
for downcrossings, if I is replaced by a countable dense subset including
each endpoint of I in I. In the context of (12.15) if the supermartingale
x(o) is left closed, by a random variable x(a), the supremum in (12.15) is
E{x(a) 1\ b}. If this supermartingale is right closed, by a random variable
x(P), the infimum in (12.15) is E{x(P) 1\ b}.
are null sets so limn_a:> x(n) exists almost surely, and the limit is almost
surely finite because
This inequality shows that x(o) is L 1 bounded ifand only ifinfn~o E{x(n) /\ O}
> - 00. See Section IS for further discussion of the convergence of a right
closable supermartingale.
is a martingale.
and when m -+ 00, this equation yields, in view of the L 1 convergence of x(·),
This equality holds for A in the algebra UO" ~(n) and therefore holds in
the generated u algebra ~( + 00); so this limit random variable is x( + 00).
It is trivial that the process (14.1) is a martingale. If p> 1 and if
sUPnez+E{lx(n)iP} < +00, then (Fatou's lemma) E{lx(+oo)iP} < +00. If
p> 1 and if E{!x(+oo)iP} < +00, then (Theorem 11 applied to JX(')I)
E{suP"eZ+ Ix(n)iP} < +00. So E{suP"eZ+ Ix(n) - x(+oo)iP} < +00, and
therefore (dominated convergence) the sequence x(·) converges to x( + 00)
in the LP metric.
and since the corresponding right closure result for martingales was proved
in Section 14, it can be supposed from now on that the given supermartingale
is positive. Apply Fatou's lemma for conditional expectations to get
which shows that x( + (0) coupled with ~(+ (0) = y;, ~(n) right closes the
given supermartingale. Finally
The fact that the parameter set 7l.-: ... , - I, 0 has a last element makes
backward martingale theory convergence theorems stronger than forward
ones. It will be convenient to treat the martingale case first.
The example x(n) == -n shows that the limit in (b) may be identically + 00.
Part (a) is trivial and is stated only for orientation. Just as in the proof of
Theorem 13 but more easily here because the process is right closed, the
downcrossing inequality implies that there is an almost sure backward
limit x( - (0). Apply Fatou's lemma and the supermartingale inequality
to obtain
supposed that the process random variables are integrable. Let Sand T
be countably valued optional times with values in I and with S ~ T. Suppose
that x(1) is integrable, and define the process .STX(·), writing .STX(t)
instead of .STX(·)(t), by
Observe that
The process .STX(·) is adapted to §"(.) and .STX(1) = x(1) almost surely
by Section 2, Example (a). Furthermore the process .STX(·) is a martingale
between times Sand T in the sense that the process
is a martingale; in fact
E{.STX(t)I§"(s)} = E{I{sss}.sTx(t)I§"(s)}
= E{I{sss)E{x(T v t)I§"(t)}I§"(s)}
= E{x(T v t)I§"(s)}
= ·STX(S).
Theorem. Let x('), XI (.), X2(') be positive supermartingales, and suppose that
(essential order) X(');5;; x l (·) + x 2('), that is, for each parameter value the
indicated inequality is true almost surely. Then there are positive super-
martingales X/I (.), x;(·) for which (essential order) x;(·) ;5;; x;(·) and x(·) =
X/I (.) + x;(·).
It is easy to check that the bracketed process is the same as x;(·) for parameter
values ~ t and is a positive supermartingale. Hence this process majorizes
x;(·), and it follows that
See Section V.5 for Theorem 19 as modified for right continuous pro-
cesses in the continuous parameter case.
The proof of this theorem is formally identical with that of its classical
counterpart Theorem 1.111.2. The class roof submartingale essential order
minorants of r contains x 1 (o) v x 2 (o) with x 1 (o), x 2 (o) and is therefore
directed upward in the essential order with essential order supremum (limit),
say {x'(o),ff(o)}, an essential order minorant of r. We prove the theorem
by showing that {x'(o),ff(o)} is a martingale. For every parameter value t,
every x(o) in r, every y(o) in r o,
in the essential order. Thus 'try(o)Ero, and the essential order supremum
of r o is the same as that of {'trY(o): y(o)Ero}. For every t the latter class
on the parameter set ~ t is an upward-directed set of martingales; so
{x'(o), ff(o)} is a martingale.
Special Case (Counterpart of Theorem l.IlI.1). If {x(o),ff(o)} is a super-
martingale with a submartingale essential order minorant, then the greatest
submartingale minorant of x(o) will be denoted by GMx(o), the tth random
variable of this process will be denoted by GMx(t), and GMx(o) can be
obtained as follows. For each parameter value t the process 'trx(o) is a
supermartingale essential order minorant of x(o) and is a martingale up
to the parameter value t. As t increases, the supermartingale decreases, and
the essential order infimum and limit of this decreasing family is GMx(o).
The proof is formally identical with that of Theorem 1.111.1 and is left to
the reader. According to Section 5, there is an increasing sequence to of
parameter values such that lim"-+oo't, x(o) = GMx(o) up to a standard
modification. . "
22. Potential Theory Reductions in a Discrete Parameter Probability Context 459
where {y( 0), ~ (o)} is a positive supermartingale with the following properties:
(a) GMy(t) = 0 almost surely,for each t.
(b) infteIE{y(t)} = O.
(c) ess limst tsy(t) = 0 almost surely,for each t.
Since the function t 1-+ E {y( t)} is monotone decreasing, the infimum in (b)
is actually the limit as t increases. Each of these three properties of a positive
supermartingale implies the other two, and a positive supermartingale with
these properties will be called a supermartingale potential. Observe that in
the present context if the parameter set has a last element P, a positive super-
martingale {x(o), ~(o)} is a potential if and only if x(P) = 0 almost surely.
Recall that in classical potential theory a positive superharmonic func-
tion u on a connected Greenian set D is a potential if and only if G MDu = 0,
e
equivalently (for a point of D), if and only if infB,uB(e,u) = 0 when B
ranges through the open relatively compact subsets of D containing e,
equivalently, ifand only iflimBtDtBu = limBtD,uB(o,u) = 0 when B increases
through the open relatively compact subsets of D. These three classical con-
text conditions are respective counterparts of conditions (a)-(c) above. The
decomposition (21.1) is the counterpart of the Riesz decomposition in
classical potential theory and will accordingly also be called the Riesz
decomposition.
To prove the theorem, define y(j) as the right side of (22.1), and observe
(set T == j) that y(j) ~ z(j) almost surely. Next observe that for fixed j the
class of conditional expectations in (22.1) is directed upward. In fact if Sand
T are optional and ~j, define U = Tor U = S according as the inequality
is true or false. Then U is optional and E{z( U)I.?(j)} is almost surely the
maximum of the conditional expectations in (22.2). Next observe that
{y(,),.?(.)} is a supermartingale; so y(·)er. In fact, if j > 0 and if the
optional time sequence S. is chosen with Sk ~ j for all k and is also chosen to
make the sequence E{z(S.>I.?(j)} monotone increasing with limit y(j), then
Application to Reductions
n
Let A be a subset of 71.+ x for which the process j ~ IA(j, .) is adapted to
.?('), and let {z('), .?(.)} be a positive supermartingale. Define R~.), also to
be denoted by ~z(·) ~A, as RZ(o)lA(o). Then according to Theorem 22, if we
define IA(+oo)=O,
then
(22.4)
etc., with equality if y'(o) is a martingale. Now the iterated reduction in-
equalities in Section l.VI.3(0) were proved in the context of classical poten-
tial theory using elementary reduction properties valid in the present context.
Hence (almost surely)
(23.2)
and
x(o) A by(o)
YAli(o) + YAliAli(o) + .. ':S b
-a
. (23.5)
1_ Continuity Properties
Proof of (a) and (b). If to > 0, the restriction to An [0, to] of almost every
x(o) process sample function is bounded, according to the inequalities
11I(9.1 ') applied to - x(o). If such a restriction does not have a left and right
limit at every point of [0, t o [, there must be a pair of rational numbers
r 1, r2 with r 1 < r 2 such that the sample function restriction to A n [0, to [
has infinitely many downcrossings of [r l' r2]. Since the downcrossing in-
equality 111(12.5) yields
E{D n [ x (0)'
IA,r 1,r 2
]}
~
E{x(O) /\ r2 - x(to) /\ r2 } , (1.1)
r2 - r1
When t' ! t sequentially and s' ! s sequentially, apply Fatou's lemma for
conditional expectations together with the conditional expectation con-
tinuity theorem to derive
466 2.IV. Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales
Hence E{f(t)IY+ (s)} ;S; f(s) almost surely; so the process {f(')' y+ (.)} is a
supermartingale, and the proof of (cl )-(c4) for x(')
+
is now complete. 0
process almost surely has right and left limits. Define X(I,W)
+
= X(I+,W)
[,!(I,W) = x(t-,w)] if this right [left] limit exists, and define i(l,w)
[,!(I,W)] arbitrarily otherwise. Then we show that i(o,o) = x(o,o) =,!(o,o)
up to a semipolar subset of IR+ x n. Since an evanescent set is semipolar, we
lose no generality if we adjust the process if necessary on a null set of n to
make the process progressively measurable with no sample function having
an oscillatory discontinuity, and we shall suppose that this has been done.
Define
so the set on the left is semipolar as asserted, and similarly the set {,!(0, 0) #
x(o, o)} is semipolar.
Returning to the original hypotheses of this application of Theorem I,
observe that one choice of x( 0, 0), in fact the choice we shall always use below
+
whenever x(o) almost surely has right limits, is i(t) = lim infs.!.r x(s). This
choice makes {i(o), g;;(o)} progressively measurable if g;;(o) is right con-
tinuous even if {x(o), g;;(o)} is not progressively measurable.
Let {x(t), .?F(t); t E IR+} be a right closable almost surely right continuous
supermartingale, and suppose that .?F(.) is right continuous. If x right closes
the supermartingale and if E {xl.?F(t)} is chosen properly, the equation
exhibits x(·) as the sum of a positive almost surely right continuous super-
martingale and an almost surely right continuous uniformly integrable mar-
tingale. The discrete parameter version of this decomposition was used in
Section 111.15. Going farther, the representation
and
and
(2.5)
for Ae§([T]n)' Hence (2.5) is true for A in the smaller (] algebra §(n.
When n -+ 00, we can integrate to the limit on the left side of (2.5) because
the sequence ofintegrands, a sequence ofconditional expectations of x( + 00 )
according to (2.3), is uniformly integrable [Section I.4(i)]. Since the same
argument is applicable to the right side of (2.5), equation (2.5) implies that
x(S) and x(S /\ T) are integrable and that
a(t) = IIT.+ool(t),
an(t)=E{a«k + 1)2- n)I§(t)} on Ink = [krn,(k+ l)r n [, keZ+.
= ~ r a«k + l)r")dP
k-O J{T"eI"kl
(2.7)
~ ~ r a(T" + r")dP
1-0 J{Tnelnk}
and by definition of Tn
Observation (a). Almost sure right continuity of x(o), instead of right con-
tinuity, is sufficient for the proof of (a), but under this weakened hypothesis
x(T) may not be measurable, and so (b) and (c) may fail. If ~(O) contains the
null sets, however, the theorem is true with no change in proof even if x(o) is
only almost surely right continuous because (Section 1.8) x(o) is indistin-
guishable from a right continuous process adapted to ~(o). If the supermar-
tingale is almost surely right continuous and if ~(O) does not contain the
null sets, each (J algebra ~(t) can be replaced by the (J algebra generated by
~(t), and the null sets to get an enlarged family of (J algebras for which the
preceding argument becomes applicable.
Observation (b). If the process in the theorem is not right closable but if
Sand T are bounded, say T ~ c, the process restricted to the parameter
interval [0, c[ is right closable, and the theorem is applicable with a trivial
reformulation to the process on this parameter interval. In particular, and
we state the following for martingales as well as for supermartingales since
the supermartingale result can be applied to both x(o) and -x(o) in the
martingale case, if {x(t), ~(t), t E IR+} is a right continuous supermartingale
[martingale] and if Tis optional, the process {x(T /\ t),~(T /\ t),tEIR+},
the process x( 0) stopped at T, is a supermartingale [martingale]. A slight
refinement of the proof below (see Section JII.8 for the discrete parameter
case) yields the stronger result that {x(T /\ t), ~(t), t E IR+} is a supermar-
tingale [martingale].
Since the given supermartingale is right closable, the almost sure limit
x( + (0) exists (Section 111.15), and the reasoning used in the discrete parame-
ter case in that section shows that x( + (0) right closes the supermartingale.
Since the process x(o) is right continuous and therefore progressively mea-
surable, the function x(T) is measurable. The process {x(jr n), ~(jTn),
j = 0, I, ... ,oo} is a supermartingale and [T]n as defined in Section 11.2 is
optional for the indicated discrete (J algebra family. Hence (Theorem III.7)
x([S]n) ~ E{x([T]n)I~([S]n)}
= E{x([T]n) - E{x( + oo)I~([T]n)}I~([S]n)} (3.2)
+ E{x( + oo)I~([S]n)} a.s.
Under the hypotheses of Theorem 3 we have seen that the process x(·) has
almost sure left limits. Suppose that Sand T are as described in that theorem
and that T. is an increasing sequence of optional times with limit T and with
Tn = Ton {S = T}. Define x-(T) = limn_ex> x(Tn). We shall now prove that
the ordered triple
yield when n - 00 the fact that x-(T) is integrable and (3.4a) is true. If
x(o) is a uniformly integrable martingale, it is a class D martingale (Section
III.6); so the martingale equality
the x(-) sample functions are right lower semicontinuous. Furthermore the
restriction of the supermartingale x(-) to the parameter set of strictly positive
rationals almost surely has a right limit y at the origin according to Section
111.17, and
It follows that
Thus x(-) is almost surely right continuous at 0, and hence as pointed out
above, x(-) is almost surely right continuous. Almost sure right continuity
implies (Section I) almost sure left limits at all points.
Proof of (b). To finish the proof of (b), it is sufficient to prove (b'): If
lX and P are strictly positive numbers, then for almost every OJ in the set
{X(lX) < P} the values x(t, OJ) and x(t+, OJ) are finite for t > lx. To reduce
this fact to what we have already proved, define zn(t) for t ~ 0 as Xn(lx + t)
on {X(lx)::; P} and as 0 elsewhere. Apply (a) to the increasing sequence
{z_(t),31'(lX + t),telR+} of supermartingales to find that limn_cozn(-) ac-
cording to what we have proved already is an almost surely right continuous
supermartingale and that therefore almost every sample function is bounded
on compact intervals. The remaining part of (b) follows.
The proof given above of almost sure right continuity of x(-) is natural,
but it is of interest to exhibit an elementary proof that does not involve
the relatively deep theorems on hitting probabilities. The following proof
does not even need the supermartingale convergence theorems. We can
assume as in the proof already given that 31'(-) is right continuous, that 31'(0)
contains the null sets, that each process x n (-) is positive and right continuous,
and that x(-) is bounded. Define x( + CX» = x n( + CX» = O. Observe first
4. Increasing Sequences ofSuperrnartingales 475
e
{Tn ~ c} = suplxn(r) - x(O)I::s; -2
r<c
(r rational, c > 0)
(4.4)
for sufficiently large n. Now under (4.4) either x(Tn) - x(O) ~ xn(Tn) -
x(O) ~ el2 for sufficiently large n, which leads to lim infn~<Xl x(Tn) - x(O) ~
el2 and thereby contradicts (4.3) or under (4.4), for every k, xk(Tn) - x(O) ::s;
xn(Tn) - x(O) ::s; -e12 for infinitely many values of n, in which case Xk(O) -
x(O) ::s; -eI2, which is impossible for large k. Thus Tis almost surely strictly
positive. Furthermore Ixn(t) - x(O)1 ::s; el2 on [0, Tn[ and so almost surely
Ix(t) - x(O) I ::s; el2 on [0, T[, and if we set
then almost surely r(t) ::s; e on [0, T[. The class r c of almost surely strictly
positive optional times T for which almost surely r(t) ::s; e on [0, T[ is not
empty according to what we have just proved, is directed upward, and is
476 2. IV. Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales
Theorem. Let {x a ('), F(·), (lEi} be a family of positive almost surely right
continuous supermartingales on a filtered probability space
5. Probability Version of the Fundamental Convergence Theorem of Potential Theory 477
It is supposed that ff(o) is right continuous and that ff(O) contains the null sets.
(a) There is then a process {x(o), ff(o)} determined up to indistinguish-
ability by the following conditions.
(al) {x(o), ff(o)} is nearly progressively measurable.
(a2) IfrxEJ, then x(o, 0) ~ XIJ(o, 0) quasi everywhere on IR+ x Q.
(a3) If {y(o), ff(o)} is a process satisfying (al) and (a2), then y(o, 0) ~
x(o, 0) quasi everywhere on IR+ x Q.
(b) The process {x(o), ff(o)} in (a) is a supermartingale with almost sure
right and left limits. If i(o) is the (almost surely) right continuous
smoothing of x( 0), then up to an evanescent subset of IR+ x Q
x(t)
+
= x(t+), x(t-)
+
= x(t-), x(t)
+
~ x(t), (5.2)
The notation ess* inflJeJxlJ(o). If {x(o), ff(o)} satisfies the conditions under
(a), then every process indistinguishable from x(o) also satisfies these con-
ditions. The equivalence class of these processes under indistinguishability
and in the usual notational abuse the individual members of this class will
be denoted by ess* inflJeJxio). The equivalence class of right continuous
smoothings i(o) and its individual members will be denoted by AlJeJxlJ(o)
when lattice concepts in martingale theory are discussed systematically in
Chapter V. A right continuous smoothing x(o) is up to indistinguishability
+
the maximum almost surely right continuous supermartingale majorized
in the essential order by every supermartingale {xi o), ff(o)}.
Without loss of generality we can suppose that every process x«(-) is right
continuous because xi-) can be made so by a change on a null set (depending
on a) and this change does not affect the theorem. We shall suppose through-
out the proof that this change has been made.
At = {(t,w): x(o,w) and x(o,w) have left and right limits at t and
+
x(t+,w) = x(t,w)
+
= x(t+,w),
+
x(t-,w) = x(t-,w)},
+
The set (~+ x Q) - M is evanescent. When (t, w) eBe' the sample functions
x(', w) and i(', w) are continuous at t and equal there; so for each IX in J,
x(',·) = i(',') :s; X/l(',') quasi everywhere on Be. The problem is to enlarge
J o to ensure that also x(',·) :s; X/l(',') quasi everywhere on Bd. If J' is a
countable superset of Jo and if x'(·) = inf/lEJ,x/l('), then x'(·) = x(·) almost
surely on the positive rationals; so the almost surely right continuous
processes i(') and i'(') are indistinguishable. Moreover M, Be> and Bd are
changed by at most evanescent sets when J o is increased to J'. According
to the discussion of the discontinuities of a supermartingale at the end of
Section I, there is a sequence T. of optional times the union of whose graphs
covers Bd. Choose J' so large that inf/lEJ' x/l(Tn ) is a version ofess inf/lEJ x/l(Tn)
for all n. Then for each IX in J, x'(',·) :s; X/l(',') quasi everywhere on ~+ x Q;
the exceptional evanescent set depends on IX. The countable set J' is the final
choice of J o and has the properties described in (c). 0
Proof of (d). We can suppose that A c: Ut' [Sk] for some sequence of
optional times. For k and n in Z + define
L xkn(t).
00
xn(t) =
k=O
so (d) is true. 0
Let y(.) be a version of this infimum process. Since y(.) is equal quasi every-
where to the infimum of a countable set of almost surely right continuous
positive supermartingales, equivalently, equal quasi everywhere to the limit
of a decreasing sequence of almost surely right continuous positive super-
martingales, the fact that the optional sampling Theorem 5 is applicable
to an almost surely right continuous positive supermartingale implies that
this theorem is applicable to y(·).
480 2.IV. Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales
Increasing Processes
From now on in this section we shall suppose that I has a first point, denoted
by 0, but no last point. A process {A(t), tEI}, not necessarily adapted to
$'(0), with state space (~+, &lI(~+)), will be called an increasing process if
the following conditions are satisfied.
(a) A(O) = 0, P{A(s) ~ A(t)} = 1 when s ~ t;
(b) E{A(t)} < +00 for tEl.
Let "+ 00" denote a point not in I, and define A ( + (0) = ess SUPte I A (t).
If A (0) is L 1 bounded, that is, if E {A ( + oo)} < + 00, define (uniquely up
to a standard modification) a supennartingale {x(t), $'(t), t E I} by
that is, ifand only if the difference process {A(o) - B(o), ~(o)} is a martingale.
In particular, suppose that lis either r or IR+ and that {A(o),~(o)} is an
adapted L 1 bounded increasing process generating a supermartingale x(o).
If 1= IR+, it is supposed that ~(o) is right continuous and that A(o) is almost
surely right continuous; so we can suppose that x(o) is also almost surely
right continuous. Under these hypotheses if x( + 00) is defined as 0, equality
(6.1') can be strengthened.
In fact, if T (~ + 00) is an arbitrary optional time,
•
I=IR+:A= (100 {
"=1 (t,w):t~O;A(-n-'w t - I ) >0 } ,
t + I ) -A (-n-'w
where we set A(t) = 0 when t < O. In the continuous parameter case, the
nth set on the right is nearly progressively measurable relative to the filtration
:F(o + lin) so A is nearly progressively measurable relative to this filtration
for all n, and therefore (Section 1.2) A is nearly progressively measurable
relative to :F(o).
for every choice of yeo). It will be shown in Section 7 that this somewhat
awkward condition on A(o) is satisfied ifand only if A(o) is nearly predictable.
In the following examples 1= IR+, and A(o) is adapted, L 1 bounded,
almost surely right continuous.
EXAMPLE (a). The process A(o) is natural if almost surely continuous because
(6.2, I = IR+) is then trivial because almost every yeo) sample function in
this equation has at most countably many discontinuities.
°
and if T. is an increasing sequence of optional times announcing T, the
martingale equality E{y(T 1\ n) - y(Tn 1\ n)} = leads to (6.3) when n -+ 00.
= E{y(+oo)A(+oo)}, (7.1)
oo
1= IR+ : E{t y(t)dA(t)} = E{y(+oo)A(+oo)}.
so
= E{y(+oo)A(+oo)}. o
Proofof (a2) when 1= Z+. See the exactly parallel proof below for the case
1= IR+. 0
Proof of (a3) when 1= Z+. If A(o) is predictable apply (7.1,1 = Z+) to both
A(o) and the increasing process {A(k + 1) - A(I);ff(k),keZ+} to derive
(6.2, 1= Z+). Conversely, suppose that {A(o),ff(o)} is an adapted L 1
bounded increasing process and that (6.2, I = Z+) is satisfied for every
choice of y(o). To show that then A(o) is nearly predictable, it is sufficient
to observe that A(O) is ff(O) measurable and to prove that A(I) is also ff(O)
measurable, because this result can then be applied to the increasing process
{A(k + I) - A(l),ff(k + 1),keZ+} which satisfies the counterpart of (6.2,
1= Z+) for the filtration {ff(k + l),keZ+} to show that A(2) is ff(l)
measurable, and so on. To prove that A(l) is ff(O) measurable, let y be a
bounded ff(l) measurable random variable and define y(o) as the martingale
E{Ylff(O)}, y, y, ... Then (6.2,1 = Z+) yields
Hence
7. Natural versus Predictable Increasing Processes (/ = 7L+ or IR+) 485
Since y can be the indicator function of an arbitrary ~(l) set, it follows that
Proof of (al) for / = IR+. If {y(t), tE IR+} is a bounded almost surely right
continuous martingale and if Yn(') is the process defined by
L
00
=E{y(+oo)A(+oo)}.
(7.5)
Since limn.... ooYn(t) = y(t) almost surely, simultaneously for all t, (7.5) yields
(7.1,1 = IR+) by the Lebesgue dominated convergence theorem. 0
Proof of (a2) for / = IR+. If A(') is natural apply both (6.2,1 = IR+) and
(7.1,1 = IR+) with y(t) = E{zl~(t)} to derive
and (7.2,1 = IR+) now follows from the fact that E{zl~(t-)} = z almost
surely when t > IX. Conversely, if(7.2, / = IR+) is true and if y(.) is a bounded
almost surely right continuous martingale, apply (7.2, / = IR+) with z = Y(IX)
and then let IX -+ + 00 to derive the condition (6.2, / = IR+) that A(') be
natural.
P L ATn(o)
<Xl
A(o) -
n=O
i
E{A(T)-A(T-);T< +oo}
= lim f
n-co k-O
[A«k + l)r n) -
n
A (k2- )] dP;
- {Tel"k} (7.6)
so it is sufficient to show that the right side vanishes. The sum in (7.6) is
equal to
L E{l(T~(k+l)rn}[A«k + l)r
<Xl
n n
) - A(k2- )]
k=O
_ I }[A«k + l)r n) - A(k2- n)]},
{T~k2-n
If we define the interval Ink and the processes 0(0) and on(0) as in Section 2, the
first sum in (7.7) can be written in the form E{J~ 0n(1- )dA(t)}, and this
7. Natural versus Predictable Increasing Processes (I = 7r or IR+) 487
If now Tn is defined by
which has limit (n --+ (0) the right side of (7.8); so A(·) does not charge T, as
asserted. 0
In the proof of (a3) it was shown that A(·) if nearly predictable can be
expressed as a countable sum of increasing processes of which one is almost
surely continuous and the others have the fonn cA T (.) with T and A T (.)
predictable. That reasoning in the present context, in which A(·) is to be
proved nearly predictable and in which we have just proved that A(·) charges
no totally inaccessible optional time, leads to the same expression for A(·)
except that as first defined each optional time T is accessible. In fact we need
only point out that the discussion in the proof of (a3) leads to optional times
T charged by A(·) and therefore without totally inaccessible components.
Since A T (.) is nearly predictable if T is accessible (Section 11.12), A(·) is
nearly predictable if natural.
L y(krn)llk2-n.(k+l)rnl(t)
00
When n ~ 00 this equation yields (7.3, I = ~+). Thus the latter equation is
true if y(.) is bounded and left continuous, and since the class of bounded
predictable processes on ~+ is the smallest class of bounded processes closed
under bounded monotone convergence and containing the left continuous
adapted processes, (b I) is true.
(b2) We give the proof for I = ~+; the proof for 1= Z+ is similar but
less deep. Suppose first that A ( + 00) and B( + 00) are bounded, and combine
(7.1,1 = ~+) with (7.3,1 = ~+)to find thatE{y( + oo)[A( + 00) - B( + oo)J}
= 0 whenever {y(.), ~(.)} is a bounded almost surely right continuous pre-
dictable martingale. If now we choose y(.) = A(') - B(·), we find that
A( + 00) = B( + 00) almost surely. Hence (martingale equality) for each
value of t it follows that A(t) = B(t) almost surely; so by the almost sure
right continuity of A(') and B(·) these processes must be indistinguishable.
In the general case we need only find an increasing sequence S. of optional
times for which limn.... ro Sn = + 00 almost surely and for which A(Sn) and
B(Sn) are almost surely bounded for each n. In fact, if the result for bounded
processes is applied to the pair A(Sn /\ .), B(Sn /\ .), it follows that these
processes are indistinguishable so A(') and B(') are. To find a sequence S.,
observe that for n > 0 the entry time Tn of the predictable set
{(t,w):A(t,w) + B(t,w) ~ n}
is predictable (Theorem 11.9), and if Tn. is a sequence of optional times
announcing Tn' then A (Tn) + B(Tn) < n; so we can choose
n-l
A(O) = 0, A(n) = L [x(m)-E{x(m+ 1)13"(m)}] ifn>O, (8.1)
m=O
and define A( + 00) = sUPn€Z+ A(n). Then E{A( + oo)} = E{x(O)} and
L E{[x(m) -
00
Decomposition of a Submartingale
+ 00 if A( + 00) :::; c
T= {
C inf {j: A (j + 1) > c} if A ( + 00) > c.
490 2.IV. Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales
Then
J
r{.A.(+oo»e}
A(+00)dP~31
{.A.(+oo»e/2}
x(1'c/2)dP. (9.1)
By definition of Te , A(TC> ~ c and {A( + (0) > c} = {Te < + oo} e§,(Te)
so that
~ 21
(9.2)
x(Tc/2 ) dP,
{.A.(+oo»c/2}
r
J
{.A.(+oo»e}
A( + oo)dP ~ 1
{.A.(+oo»e}
x(Tc)dP + cP{A( + (0) > c}
31
(9.3)
~ x(Te/2 ) dP,
{.A.(+oo»e/2}
as was to be proved.
Observe that when 1= Z+, this theorem does not contain Theorem 8
because in that theorem the increasing process is predictable; in fact this
10. Generation of Supermartingale Potentials by Increasing Processes 491
= =
Proof (a) (b) and (a) (c) See Section 6 where these implications are
derived without the adaptedness hypothesis on A(o).
=
(b) (a) Assume first that 1 is a bounded subset of ~+ and includes 0.
The random variable x(t) can be identified with a point of L 1(0, fJi( + 00), P).
This function has a left [right] limit at each point of the closure lof 1 which
is a limit point of 1 from the left [right] according to the supermartingale
convergence theorems and the condition that the given process x(o) is in D,
so is uniformly integrable. According to an elementary theorem on functions
from a subset of ~ into a metric space, the set 10 of points t of I for which
two of the members x(t-), x(t), x(t+) of L 1(0, fJi( + 00), P) exist but are not
the same is countable. Let J be a countable subset of I, dense in I, including
0, 10 , and every point of 1 which is not a bilateral limit point of I, and let I n
be a finite subset of J, including 0, with J o c J 1 C ••. , Uo
I n = J. The
restriction of x(o) to I n is a positive supermartingale to which Theorem 8 as
trivialized for finite parameter sets can be applied. (Theorem 8 is stated for
the parameter set 71.+ but can be applied to a finite parameter set, say 0, ... , k,
by defining the process random variables to vanish identically at parameter
values strictly greater than k.) According to Theorem 8, there is a process
{An(t), tEJn} for which An(O) = 0, An(o) is increasing and is predictable, and
if we define A n( + 00) as the value of An(o) at the maximum parameter value
in I n ,
the class D property of x(') the right side of (10.4) has limit 0 when c -+ 00,
uniformly as n varies, and it follows that the sequence A.( + 00) is uniformly
integrable. Hence some subsequence A", ( + 00) converges weakly in L 1 (n,
.F( + 00), P) to a limit random variable A( + 00), and consequently for each
parameter value t in I the sequence E{A", (+ oo)IF(t)} converges weakly in
L1(n,.F(t),P) to E{A(+oo)IF(t)}. From (10.2) if teJ, the sequence A",.(t)
also converges weakly in L1(n,F(t),P) to a positive F(t) measurable
random variable A(t), with A(O) = O. Furthermo"re (10.1) is true for t in J,
and A(·) is an increasing process on J. By definition of J each point t in
1- J is a bilateral limit point of J, and x(t) = x(t+) = x(t-) almost surely
if the one-sided limits are defined either as L 1 limits or as sequential almost
sure limits. Hence for t in 1- J,
(b) = (a) (in the general case) According to Section I1I.4, there is an
order-preserving map t 1-+ cjJ(t) from I into IR such that cjJ(s) = cjJ(t) if and
only if x(s) = x(t) almost surely. We can choose cjJ to be bounded and
to take the initial point of I into O. Define i = cjJ(I). If i e i, define #(i) =
Yleq,-'(i) .F(t), and define x(i) asAx(t) for some t in cjJ-l(i); the choice of t
does not matter. If sand i are in I and if s < i, then when cjJ(t) = i,
E{x(i)I#(s)} = E{X(t)1 Y
oet/>-I(s)
F(S)} a.s.
If A(') and B(') are increasing processes adapted to ff(') and generate the
same supermartingale, then the process {A(·) - B(·), ff(')} is a martingale
(Section 6). Thus in view of Sections 6 and 7 to prove the theorem, all we
need prove is that in the present context there is an almost surely right
continuous predictable Ir 1 bounded increasing process that generates x(·).
Define ff( + 00) = VleR+ ff(t), and define ff(t) = ff(O) for t < O. Let J be
the set of dyadic points of ~+, and let I n be the set {m2- n,meZ+}. Then
according to Theorem 8, there is a process {An(t), ff(t), t eJn} for which A n(')
494 2.1V. Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales
is increasing, L 1 bounded, and predictable, and (10.2) is true with A"( + 00) =
SUPteJ"A"(t). It follows as in the proof of Theorem 10 that the sequence
A.( + 00) is uniformly integrable and that therefore some subsequence
A-x'< + 00) converges weakly in L 1(n, ff'( + 00), P) to a limit random variable
A( + 00). When tEJ, the sequence E{A-x'< + 00 )Iff'(t)} therefore converges
weakly in L l(n, ff'(t), P) to E{A( + 00 )Iff'(t)}, and so (10.2) implies that the
sequence A-x.(t) converges weakly in L 1 (n, ff'(t), P) to an ff'(t) measurable
random variable A(t). In particular, the sequence A-x (0) converges trivially
to A (0) = O. Equation (ILl) is true for tEJ, and (t f 00) +
I
0= E{A( + 00) ff'( + oo)} - supA(t) = A( + 00) - supA(t)
teJ teJ
a.s. (11.2)
Observe that in view of the right continuity of ff'(') and the conditional
expectation continuity theorem the process A(·) as we have defined it on J
is almost surely right continuous. If now we apply Theorem 2 to choose a
version of E{A(+oo)Iff'(t)} for each t to obtain an almost surely right
continuous process and define A(t) for tE IR+ - J by (11.1), the process A(')
is an almost surely right continuous increasing L 1 bounded process generat-
ing x(·). Finally we prove that {A(·),ff'(·)} is a natural increasing process.
According to Theorem 7, it will follow that {A(·), ff'(')} is nearly predict-
able; this process can be trivially adjusted to be predictable if desired. Let
{y(.), ff'(')} be a bounded almost surely right continuous martingale, and
define y(+oo) = limt_ooy(t). Then {A(·),ff'(·)} is a natural increasing
process because
E{t oo
y(S-)dA(S)}
= lim A(k2-")]}
n-oo k=O
00
L E{y(kT")E{A"«k + 1)2-") -
00
= lim A"(k2-")Iff'(k2-")}}
"-00 k=O
L E{y(k2-")[A"«k + 1)2-") -
00
= lim A"(k2-")]}
"-00 k=O
where we have used the discrete parameter case of Theorem 7 to derive the
last line, and in the last line n -+ 00 along the sequence Ct•• Incidentally this
proof shows that there is convergence in (11.3) when n -+ 00 unrestrictedly.
12. Meyer Decomposition ofa Submartingale 495
It is easily deduced that the original sequence A.( + (0) converges weakly to
A( + (0), but we shall not need this fact.
Uniqueness Observation
tingale. The restriction of this process to [0, c[ is also in the class D according
to Section 111.6. The sum process {y(o) + A(o), §"(o)} is a submartingale
whose restriction to any parameter interval [0, c[is in the class D. Conversely,
we shall now show that an almost surely right continuous submartingale
{z(o), §"(o)} whose restriction to each parameter interval [0, c[is in the class D
can be written as a sum {y(o) + A(o), §"(o)} with {y(o), §"(o)} an almost surely
right continuous martingale and {A(o), §"(o)} an almost surely right contin-
uous predictable increasing process; moreover both components are unique-
ly determined up to indistinguishability. Let zc(o) be the restriction of z(o) to
the parameter interval [0, cr. This submartingale is in the class D by hypoth-
esis, and the right closable martingale
{E{z(c)I§"(t)},§"(t), ° ~t< c}
is also in the class D (Section 111.6). The version of the conditional expecta-
tion in the process
is a martingale. In fact
(We have ignored the evanescent set on which one of the processes
involved is not right continuous with left limits.)
Set x( + (0) = 0, y( + (0) = y( + 00 -). For tE ~+ let T(t) be the first entry
time ~t of A by x(·). Since A is progressively measurable, T(t) is optional.
Choose t a point ofalmost sure continuity of A ('), that is, a point ofcontinuity
of the monotone function s 1-+ E{A (s)}. This choice of t excludes an at most
countable set, and in view of the almost sure right continuity of x(·) and
y(.) it is therefore sufficient to prove that x(t) :5 y(t) almost surely. Define,
for the chosen value t,
Then T' and T" are optional, t < T' :5 + 00, t :5 Tn :5 + 00, and
{T' = T" = +oo} = {T(t) = +oo}.
(Null sets are ignored throughout.) The optional time T' can have no totally
inaccessible component because [see the proof of Theorem 7(a3)] A(') does
not charge any totally inaccessible optional time. Hence T' is accessible.
Let S be a predictable time whose graph is a subset of that of T', and let S.
be a sequence of optional times announcing S. It is no restriction to suppose
that So ~ t. The almost sure supermartingale inequality
yields (n - (0)
Now
Furthermore {S < + oo} c {T' < + 00 }, and S can be chosen to make the
probability of the difference arbitrarily small. Using this fact, we can replace
S by T' in (13.2) and (13.5) so (13.2) yields
Since A( + 00) = A(t) on the set {T' = T" = + oo}, the right side of (13.7) is
almost surely x(t), and the proof is now complete.
Special Case: Almost Sure Continuity of A(·). The parabolic context
domination principle (Theorem I XVIII .16) is the exact translation of the
classical domination principle (Theorem l.V.lO) into the parabolic context
if the Riesz measure corresponding to the given superparabolic potential
vanishes on parabolic sernipolar sets; that is, under this condition coparabol-
ie-fine limits are not involved. Corresponding to this fact, in the present
Theorem 13 if A (dt) almost surely vanishes on semipolar subsets oflR+ x n,
that is. if
500 2.1V. Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales
is a martingale. The dual results for {x(o), JF(o)} a submartingale are clear.
Observe that if {x(o), JF(o)} is a positive supermartingale and if we define
x( + (0) = 0, then we need not restrict 8 and T to be finite valued in the
preceding discussion.
tingale GMx(') is limn-+ oo "tOnx(·). For each positive integer k the sequence
n ~ {"tonx(t), .?i'(t), t ::;; k} is, for n ~ k, a decreasing sequence of almost
surely right continuous martingales. An application of Theorem 4 shows
that one version of GMx(') is an almost surely right continuous martingale,
and in the present continuous parameter context we shall accept only such
versions. More generally, if r is a class of almost surely right continuous
supermartingales adapted to .?i'('), for which GMr exists, we now show that
GMr has an almost surely right continuous version. Such a version is the
only one we shall accept; it can be modified trivially to yield a right contin-
uous version, if desired. To prove the assertion, observe first that we can
assume that r is directed downward, at the price of adjoining to r the finite
minima of its members; the enlargement of r does not change GMr. The
class {GMx('): x(·) e r} is a downward-directed class of almost surely right
continuous martingales with essential order infimum and limit GMr, and
according to Section 111.5, there is a decreasing sequence of these mar-
tingales whose limit is a version of GMr. An application of Theorem 4
shows that this version is almost surely right continuous.
Let (0, oF, P; oF(t), t E IR +) be a filtered probability space for which oF(·) is
right continuous and oF(O) contains the null sets. The fine topology of
IR + x 0 is by definition the smallest topology on IR + x 0 making every
right continuous supermartingale {x('), oF(·)} into a (fine topology) contin-
uous process in the sense that the function (t, (I)) -+ x(t, (I)) is to be continuous
in the fine topology. The set of fine limit points of a set A will be denoted by
AI.
EXAMPLE (a). If A is a P null subset of0 and if x(',·) is the indicator function
of A = IR+ X A, the process {x(o),oF(o)} is a right continuous martingale;
so A is both fine open and fine closed.
EXAMPLE (b). Let T be optional and define x(o, 0) as the indicator function
of the stochastic interval [0, T[. Then {x(o), oF(o)} is a right continuous
supermartingale; so both stochastic intervals [0, T[ and [T, + oo[ are fine
open and fine closed. If Sand T are optional with S ~ T, we conclude that
the stochastic interval [S, T[ = [0, T[ n [S, + 00 [ is fine open and fine
closed. If we choose Tn = T + lin, we find that the stochastic interval
[S, T] = nr [S, Tn [ is fine closed. In particular, the graph [S] is fine closed.
If S is optional, if A E oF(S), and if SA = S on A but S = + 00 otherwise,
the stochastic interval [SA' T..t [ = (IR + x A) n [S, T[ is fine open and fine
closed. Observe that the intersection of this stochastic interval with another
one (IR+ x A') n [S', T'[ of the same type is
also of this type, and that S v S' is identically constant if Sand S' are.
A Base for the Fine Topology. The class of sets (stochastic intervals)
(IR+ x A) n [ex, T[ with ex a positive constant and A EoF(ex) is a base for the
fine topology because if {x(o), oF(o)} is a right continuous process, not
necessarily a supermartingale, and if T, is the entry time of the set
16. The Fine Topology of Ikl+ x n 503
then
is a fine neighborhood of (to, wo) for every B > 0, and the set of these fine
neighborhoods for all B > 0 is a base for the fine neighborhoods of (to, wo).
Hence a subset A of III + x n has (to, wo) as a fine limit point if and only
if A contains points (tn' wo) with tn > to, limn.... oo tn = to. Thus if all n single-
tons are P null the fine topology is the direct product of the discrete topology
on n and the one sided Euclidean topology on 1Il+ in which a base for the
topology is the class of left closed intervals.
If Tis optional, call a subset A of 1Il+ x n almost thin at Tifthe set [T] n AI
is evanescent. Then an evanescent set A is almost thin at every optional time.
A progressively measurable set A almost thin at every optional time T is
semipolar if all n singletons are null, according to the following argument.
If T1 is the entry time of A, then [T1 ] c A up to an evanescent set, and the
hitting time T2 of A after T1 , that is, the second entry time of A, is almost
surely strictly larger than T1 on {T1 < + 00 }. Continuing in this way, we find
an increasing sequence T. of optional times such that Tn < Tn+ 1 almost
everywhere on {Tn < + oo}, and [Tn] C A up to an evanescent set. Going
on by transfinite induction, the next optional time is the first entry time
2: lim n.... oo Tn, .... If IX is a countable ordinal for which Ta has been defined,
either Ta + 1 = + 00 almost surely, in which case A is semipolar because
A c U.sa[Tn] up to an evanescent set, orP{Ta+1 > Ta} >o;so
E{arctan Ta + 1 } > E{arctan Ta }.
It follows that the second possibility can occur only countably many times,
504 2.IV. Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales
Let Abe a subset of IR+ x n for which t --. lA (t) is a process adapted to ff(o),
and let z(o) be a positive almost surely right continuous supermartingale.
Define the reduction R~(.) as the supermartingale RZ(')lA(')' The right smooth-
ing of the reduction will be denoted by RA or by ~z(oHA. According to
Theorem 5, the process R~(.) is determined ~r;> to indistinguishability by the
following conditions:
The reduction is a progressively measurable process.
Whenever y(o) is in the class r of almost surely right continuous
positive supermartingales ~z(o) quasi everywhere on A, the inequality
y(o) ~ R~(.k) is true quasi everywhere on IR+ x Q.
If x( 0) is a process satisfying the preceding conditions, then x( 0) ~ R~(.k)
quasi everywhere on IR+ x Q.
Furthermore a reduced process R~(.k) is a supermartingale with almost sure
right and left limits, coinciding quasi everywhere with the respective right
and left limits of its right smoothing R+z(·) (0), and R+z(·) (0) ~ Rz(.)(o) quasi
everywhere, with equality up to a semipolar set. Finally, a suitably chosen
decreasing sequence of members of r has as limit a version of the reduction.
We shall see that many reduction properties in the present context are
close counterparts of reduction properties in the context of classical and
parabolic potential theory. In one respect the present context is simpler than
those earlier ones. The fact that superharmonic and parabolic functions can
have infinities complicates their theory, whereas almost every sample func-
tion of an almost surely right continuous supermartingale is finite valued
with finite left limits.
referred to. Proofs are given or referred to in Section 19. We leave to the
reader the translation of the listed properties to the context of a countable
parameter set.
(a) [See Section l.XVII.16(b).]
one version of the right-hand side is the infimum when iJ runs through some
decreasing sequence of fine-open supersets of A. In particular, if all almost
surely right continuous supermartingales on the given space are almost
surely lower semicontinuous, then whenever z(o) is almost surely continuous,
the set iJ in (18.2) can be further restricted to have open t cross sections for
fixed w.
(e) [See Sections l. XVII I I (b) and l.XVII.16(i).] If A c iJ and if A is
0
fine open, then the supermartingales ~~Z(o)~A ~B and ~Z(o)~A are indistinguish-
able. If iJ is also fine open, these supermartingales are indistinguishable from
~ ~z(o)~ BV
180 Reduction Properties 507
AuB + RA(")B
R '(0) A
< R .(.)
'(0) _
+ R .(.)
B (18.3)
and the corresponding inequality (18.sm) for smoothed reductions are true.
The exceptional evanescent set depends on z(·), A, D. [See (i) for countable
strong subadditivity.]
(h) [See Sections 1.xVII.11 (e) and 1.xVII.16(e).] If A. is an increasing
sequence of subsets of IR+ x Q with union A and if {zn(·),ne;r} is an
increasing sequence of almost surely right continuous positive supermartin-
gales with limit z(·), then quasi everywhere on IR+ x Q both
and the corresponding equation (18.4sm) for smoothed reductions are true.
(i) [See Section 1.xVII.16(k).] The set functions A 1-+ R:('j and A 1-+ R
A
•• +.(.)
are countably strongly subadditive in the sense that if A. and B. are sequences
ofsubsetsoflR+ x Q with An c Dn, then quasi everywhere on IR+ x Qboth
(18.5)
and the corresponding inequality (18.5sm) for smoothed reductions are true.
(j) [See Section l.XVII.16(g).] If {zn('),ne;r} is a sequence of almost
surely right continuous positive supermartingales, if z(·) = I:~ zn(') (almost
surely right continuous by Theorem 4) is a supermartingale, that is, if
I:~ E{zn(O)} < + 00, then quasi everywhere on IR+ x Q both 0
(18.6)
and the corresponding equation (18.6sm) for smoothed reductions are true.
(k) [See Section l.XyII.l6(m).] If S is a finite optional time oand if
A = [0, S], then GM RA. +~
= 0 quasi everywhere (equivalently, RA. is a
+~
supermartingale potential) if either S is bounded or S is unrestricted and
z(·) is uniformly integrable.
(1) [See Section l.XVII.l6(0).] Suppose that (Q, iF, iF('), P) has the
property that every almost surely right continuous supermartingale is almost
surely lower semicontinuous, and suppose that {z('), iF(')} is an almost surely
continuous class D positive supermartingale. Then the set function A1-+ R:(.)
508 2.1V. Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales
(18.7')
(18.7")
(18.7"')
(m) [See Section l.XVII.16(p).] Suppose that (0, JF, JF(o), P) has the
property that every almost surely right continuous supermartingale is almost
surely lower semicontinuous, and suppose that z(o) is a positive almost
surely continuous supermartingale. Let r be the class of predictable product
sets defined in Section 1.14, and let r p be the class of finite unions of r' sets.
Then if A is analytic over the class of predictable sets, there is an increasing
sequence Fo of r P<J subsets of A for which quasi everywhere on IR + x 0 both
and the corresponding equation (18.8.sm) for smoothed reductions are true.
(n) [See Section l.XVII.16(q).] If y(o) and z(o) are bounded positive
almost surely right continuous supermartingales, then
where sup' means the supremum up to evanescent sets, and the corresponding
inequality (I8.9sm) is true for smoothed reductions.
(0) [See Section l.XVII.16(s).] Let {x(o),JF(o)} and {y(o),JF(o)} be
almost surely right continuous positive supermartingales, let a and b be
positive numbers with 0 ~ a < b, and define
Denote ~y(o)~"', ~ ~y(o)~'" ~Ii, ... by y... (o),Y"'Ii(o), .... Then the iterated reduc-
tion and downcrossing inequalities 11I(23.2)-11I(23.6) are true in the present
context, as are also the other martingale theory translations of the classical
context reduction inequalities in Section l.VI.3(0). Moreover these in-
equalities are true for the parameter restricted to an interval. In particular
if Dnt[x(o),y(o);a, b] refers to downcrossings on the parameter interval
[0, I], then (almost surely) for IE IR+,
(t, w) entry into the nearly progressively measurable set [S:] n A, then
{Tn = S:< + oo} c AI up to a null set; it then follows from (b) that
Tn> S: almost everywhere. on A. Sin.ce the set [S:, Tn[ n A is evanescent
A
it follows from (c) that R+z(') (S:) = R:(.)(S:) almost everywhere on A; this
equality implies that A is null.
(g) To prove strong subadditivity of the reduction operator and its
smoothing, suppose first that A and iJ are fine open, in which case (18.3sm)
reduces to (18.3), and define z'(o) = R~.) /\ R:(.). Then [see the proof of the
corresponding potential theory equality l.VI(3.4) and I.XVII(II.4)]
AuB
Rz(') + RAuB -
z'(.) -
A
Rz(') + RBz(') q.e. (19.1)
This equality implies inequality (18.3) for fine-open A and D and in view
of (18.2) thereby implies (18.3) for all A and D. Inequality (l8.3sm) follows
trivially from (18.3).
(h) The proof of (18.4) follows the proof of the parabolic potential
theory equation 1XVII (I 1.6). If each set An is fine open, (18.4sm) reduces
to (18.4) and follows from the fact that on the one hand (quasi everywhere)
the limit on the left side of (18.4) exists and is majorized by the right side
and on the other hand the limit process is almost surely right continuous
(Theorem 4) and (quasi everywhere) majorizes z(o) on A and so majorizes
the right side on ~+ x n. If the sets involved are not fine open, let T be a
finite valued positive 'Yr?o ~(t) measurable function, and let Xk(o, 0) be the
indicator function of the set {z(o,o) ::; k}. Then
Since (18.4) is true when the sets involved are fine open, (19.3) yields (when
n -+ 00)
Hence
The set
has the property that its intersection with the graph of Thas a null projection
on n, whatever the choice of T. It follows (from Theorem 11.8) that Ck is
evanescent and that therefore (18.4) is true. Then (l8.4sm) is true up to a
semipolar set and since both sides of this equation are almost surely right
continuous processes the two sides must be indistinguishable.
(i) Inequality (18.5) and (l8.5sm) follow from strong subadditivity
combined with (18.4) and (18.4sm).
(j) To prove (18.6) for two summands, it is sufficient to give the proof
for A fine open, in which case the proof of the classical. context counterpart
1. VI(4.2) translates easily into one valid in the present context. It then follows
from (18.2) that (18.6) is true for arbitrary A and finitely many summands
and therefore by (18.4) for countably many summands. Finally (l8.6sm)
has now been shown to be true up to a semipolar set, and since both sides
of (l8.6sm) are almost surely right continuous processes, the two sides must
be indistinguishable.
(k) If A = [0, S] and if E = [S, + 00 [, it is .
trivial that R A
+z(')
°
= quasi
everywhere on E. Hence the martingale GMR+z(') vanishes quasi everywhere
A
lim
t-oo
E{R A (t)} = lim
+z(') /-00
f
{S>t}
z(t) dP, (19.6)
and this
.
limit is
potenttal.
° A is a supermartingale
if z(o) is uniformly integrable; so R+z(·)
512 2.IV. Basic Properties of Continuous Parameter Supermartingales
lim sup
n-co Is;T
R:t/t) = 0 a.s.,
n
An <
R z(') -
Ii
Rz(') + RAn-Ii
z(.) q.e.,
t,. c A, (19.8)
(19.9)
20. Evaluation of Reductions 513
E{Z(S)I§(t)} if t < S
zo(t) =
jo
z(t) if S :$ t < T
if+oo>t~T
EXAMPLE (b). If A is as in Example (a) and b = [S, T], then any positive
right continuous supermartingale y(.) majorizing z(·) on b majorizes R1c.)
quasi everywhere and satisfies (20.1). Moreover for B > 0 the process
y(.) 1[0. T.+d(·) is also a positive right continuous supermartingale majorizing
z(·) on B. It follows that quasi everywhere
. jE{Z(S)I§(t)} if t < S,
R~(.,(t) = z(t) if S :$ t :$ T, t < + 00,
o if + 00 > t > T,
Tbeorem. Suppose that (n, §, § ('), P) has the property that every almost
surely right continuous supermartingale is almost surely lower semicontinuous,
and suppose that z(·) is an almost surely continuous positive supermartingale.
Let A be predictable, and let T; [1;] be the entry [hitting] time ofA 1\ [t, + 00].
Then for each t ~ 0
It is sufficient to prove this theorem for z(·) bounded since (20.2) and
(20.2sm) are true for z(·) if true for z(·) /\ n when nE 7L+. Moreover the truth
of (20.2) implies that• of (20.2sm) by the following argument. Since R+z(·) A is
the smoothing of R~.), there is a countable subset of IR+ such that for t not
A (t) = R1(.)(t) up to a null set which depends on t. Now the
in this set R+z(')
process T. ·is the smoothing of T:, 1; = lim•.!.t T;; so there is a countable
subset of IR+ such that for t not in this set 1; = 1;' up to a null set which
depends on t. Thus, if (20.2) is true, it follows that (20.2sm) is also true for t
21. The Energy of a Supermartingale Potential 515
so (20.2) for An becomes (20.2) for A when n -+.00. In ,(ii) SOt :s; S1I :s; ... ,
and limn.... oo Snt = T;. On the one hand, limn.... oo R~~) = R:o by (18.7"'). On the
other hand, (20.3) is true; so again (20.2) for An becomes (20.2) for A when
n -+ 00.
Observation. The reduction Rj.) is identified in (20.2). only up to a stan-
dard modification. In fact, however, we have defined R~.) as a very special
standard modification, unique up to an evanescent set.
and we shall now show that if E{A( + 00)2} < + 00, then according to this
definition,
(21.2)
Since A(') is bounded, the processes x(·) and y(.) are also bounded; so
(by Theorem 7)
and for tE IR+ define y(t) = JI{T,;;/} (=0 on the set {T = + oo}). Let T. be a
sequence of optional times predicting T. Then
(a) the process x(') + y(.) is an almost surely right continuous super-
martingale, almost surely continuous at TI{T<+OO}, right closable by x( +(0) + J,
and E{J} ~ E{x(O) - x(+oo)}.
In fact according to Section 3 (extension of Theorem 3), x(T-) is inte-
grable, and the following supermartingale inequalities are true:
Hence J is integrable, and E{J} satisfies the stated inequality. To prove that
x(·)+ y(.) is a supermartingale observe that y(.) is adapted to §"(.) and that
x(·)+ y(.) satisfies the supermartingale inequality if and only if 0 ~ s < t
implies that
Hence
are nearly predictable because they are adapted and left continuous; so their
almost sure limit processes (n -+ (0) are nearly predictable. The first almost
sure limit process is that with tth random variable the first in (22.5). The
second almost sure limit process is that with tth random variable the second
in (22.5). Thus y(o) is nearly predictable, as asserted.
x(o) means that x(t-) ~ x(t) almost surely, simultaneously for all t.
Theoremo Let 9"(0) be a right continuous filtration ofa probability space, and
suppose that ~(O) contains the null sets.
(a) A nearly predictable almost surely right continuous supermartingale
{x(o), ~(o)} is almost surely lower semicontinuous, almost surely
continuous if the process is a martingale.
(b) Ifx(o) in (a) is right closable it can be written as a sum x"(o) - x/(o)
ofprocesses adapted to g;(o), nearly predictable,for which
(bl) Almost every x/(o) sample function is monotone increasing, constant
exceptfor the -x(o) sample function jumps, and x/(O) = O.
(b2) x"(o) is an almost surely continuous supermartingale and is right
closable.
(c) If every ~(o) optional time is predictable and if §"(o) is predictable,
then every almost surely right continuous supermartingale {x(o), g;( o)}
is nearly predictable and therefore is almost surely lower semicontin-
uous, almost surely continuous if the process is a martingale.
Proof of (a). Since it is sufficient to prove (a) for x(o 1\ n) for all n > 0, we
can assume that x(o) is a right closable supermartingale, or a right closable
martingale if the process is a martingale. The process {x(o_), §"(o)} is
almost surely left continuous and therefore nearly predictable so the process
{x(o) - x(o -), §"(o)} is nearly predictable, and it follows that when c > 0,
the set
fIe = {(t,w): x(t,w) - x(t-,w) ~ c}
23. Supermartingale Decompositions and Discontinuities 519
Since x(·) is right closable it is right closable by lim n_ oo x(t) which we denote
by x( + 00). According to Section 22, Jnk ~ 0 almost surely, the process x nk (·)
is nearly predictable [the reference filtration is ~ (.) here and below], the
process x(·) + x nk (·) is a right closable (by x( + 00) + JnJ almost surely right
continuous supermartingale, and E {Jnk } ::s; E {x(O) - x( + 00) }. If the jump
processes are added successively to x(·) and if we define (summing over all
nand k) J= 'LJnk and x'(t) = 'LXnb then E{J}::S; E{x(O) - x(+oo)}. It
follows that J and x'(t) are almost surely finite. The process x'(·) is nearly
predictable, and its sample functions are almost all right continuous except
for positive jumps J"k at 1'"k. The process x"(·) = x(·) + x'(·) is almost surely
continuous and therefore is nearly predictable, and we conclude that x(·)
(supposed right closable) is nearly predictable. :The supermartingale x"(·)
is right closable by x( + 00) + J. If x(·) is not right closable, this result
implies that xC, 1\ n) is nearly predictable for all strictly positive n; so x(·)
is nearly predictable. 0
Proofof (b). In the proof of (c) a decomposition of x(·) was obtained satisfy-
ing (bl) and (b2), under the hypothesis that x(·) was a right closable almost
surely continuous supermartingale satisfying certain conditions on the
reference filtration ~(.). A glance at the proof shows that wherever these
conditions on ~(.) are used, near predictability of x(·) suffices. 0
Chapter V
Recall further that the essential order infimum essinfr of a set r of stochas-
tic processes, that is, the essential order infimum of their equivalence classes,
can be obtained as follows. If we write x(')er to mean that the equivalence
class containing x(·) is in r, in other words that x(·) is a version of an equiva-
lence class in r (see the remark on the abuse of notation in Section 1.1),
then ess inf r is the equivalence class consisting of all the versions of
{essinfx(t), teI}.
x(.)er
This is the context in which I = IR+, ~(o) is right continuous, ~(O) contains
the null sets, and the proc«sses to be classified will be almost surely right
continuous. Recall that two almost surely right continuous processes on the
parameter set IR+ which are standard modifications of each other are
indistinguishable, that is, equal quasi everywhere on Q x IR + .
(See Section l.IX.2 for the potential theory counterpart of this section.)
Let {x(o), ~(o)} be a submartingale with an arbitrary linearly ordered
parameter set I having a first element. If Sand Tare countably valued
optional times, upper bounded in I, with S ~ T, then x(o) ~ 't"sx(o) ~ 't"TX(o)
in the essential order. According to the dual of the Special case in Section
111.20, either x(o) has no essential order supermartingale majorant and
limst E{x(s)} = + 00, or x(o) has an essential order supermartingale major-
ant, LM x(o) exists, the process {LM x(o), ~(o)} is a martingale,
(As usual we write LM x(t) for [LM x(o)] (t).) In view of one of the forms
of the submartingale sampling theorem (Theorem 111.7) the supremum and
directed limit
is equal to the supremum in (2.1 '). Thus LM x( o):exists if and only if the set
of expectations of the random variable class
is bounded.
If {x(o), ~(o)} is a positive submartingale, the existence of LM x(o) is
equivalent to the L 1 boundedness of the random variable class (2.3) and
in this case a trivial argument shows that Sin (2.3) need not be bounded in
I. Moreover the hypothesis that I has a first element can be dropped because
in any case the process is left closable by the random variable 0 coupled with
the trivial (1 algebra (0, Q). In particular, suppose that the positive sub-
522 2. v. Lattices and Related Classes of Stochastic Processes
supE{<I>[x(s)]} <
sel
+ 00. (2.4)
Take the essential limit as s increases to find that the left-hand side of (2.5)
is an essential order minorant of the right-hand side. The reverse order
relation is trivial.
Recall from Section IV.14 that in the continuous parameter context (defined
in Section 1) if {x(o), F(o)} is an almost surely right continuous submartingale
for which LM x(o) exists, this martingale majorant can be chosen to be right
continuous; the notation LM x( 0) will always refer to an almost surely right
continuous version. Moreover, if {x(o), F(o)} is a positive almost surely right
continuous submartingale, not only is the existence of LM x( 0) equivalent to
the finiteness of
as already stated in the general context, but the restriction that S be countably
valued is unnecessary. In fact if the supremum in (2.6) is c, let T be an arbi-
trary optional 'time except that T < + 00. Then if [T]" is defined as in
Section 11.2, Example (b2), it follows from Fatou's lemma that
E{x(T)} ~ liminfE{x([T]")} ~ c.
"-<Xl
If an integrable random variable x( + (0) can be adjoined to right close the
submartingale, as is possible if the submartingale is uniformly integrable
3. Uniformly Integrable Positive Submartingales 523
[Section III.3(e)], then this argument is valid for an arbitrary optional time
T::;; + 00 ; so in this case S in (2.6) can be an entirely unrestricted optional
time.
If IX(')I here is identified with x(·) in Section 111.2 and Section 2, the
present theorem follows; if {x('), ~(.)} is a martingale, one representation
of x(·) with the properties stated in (e) and the final assertion of the theorem is
Theoremo Let {x(o), .F(o)} be a stochastic process with state space (IR, 8iJ(IR»
and an arbitrary linearly ordered parameter set, and suppose that p ~ 1. If
{lx(o)l, .F(o)} is a submartingale, thelollowing conditions are equivalent:
(a) x(o) is U bounded.
(b) The submartingale {lx(o)jP,.F(o)} has a martingale essential order
majorant.
5. The Lattices ('S±, ~), ('S+, ~), (S±, ~), (S+, ~) 525
The proof is left to the reader because whatever is not already covered
by Theorem 3 with <Il(s) = sP follows easily from the discussion in Section 2.
Observe that assertion (c) of the present theorem with p> I is slightly
stronger than Theorem 3(d) with <Il(s) = sp. In fact in Theorem 3(d) it is
not asserted that if x(·) = x.(·) - x 2 (·) and if <Il[x;(-)] has a martingale
essential order majorant, then <Il[lx(')I] has a martingale essential order
majorant. However, for <Il(s) = sP and p ~ 1 this assertion is true because
then
x(t)
+
= limr,J.rinf x(t) (r rational). (5.1)
P{x(t) = i(t)} = 1
except possibly for a countable set of values of t. Moreover the limit inferior
in (5.1) is an almost sure limit for each t. Let S± be the set of equivalence
classes ofalmost surely right continuous supermartingales, under the relation
of indistinguishability. Then S± can be imbedded in 'S± (in the present
continuous parameter context) in an obvious way. If r is a subset of S±
and if we denote by T the subset of'S± consisting of the equivalence classes
of the latter set which contain those of r, we have noted above that if AT
exists there is a sequence {xn(o),nEZ+} in r such that the process x(o) =
infn;,oxn(o) determines AT. The process x(o) is almost surely right upper
semicontinuous so i(o) :=:; x(o) in the essential order, and there may be strict
inequality. The process x(o) +
is in the equivalence class of the maximal
essential order S± minorant of r. Thus, if we denote by (S±, :=:;) the set S±
in the essential order, this set becomes a conditionally complete lattice, for
which we shall use the order symbols :=:;, ~, v, /\, but the S± order infima
and suprema are not inherited from the natural imbedding in ('S±, ~). The
argument just given together with the analysis of ('S±, :=:;) shows that if
r c S± then the (S±, :=:;) infimum [supremum] of r, if it exists, is the
infimum [supremum] of a countable subset of r. If r is countable and if r o
is a set of supermartingales consisting of one member from each equivalence
class in r, then the equivalence class Ar has as one member the process
i( 0) for x( 0) the pointwise infimum of r 0' and (Theorem IV.4) if r is directed
upward and is bounded above in (S±, ~), the equivalence class vr has as
one member the pointwise supremum of r o.
X'(·)
+i <
- x.(·)
I ,
The set 'S+ is a cone as defined in Appendix 111.3 and therefore defines a
specific order on itself for which we use the order symbols ~, 2:, Y, A, and
'S+ in the specific order will be denoted by ('S+, -<). Define'S = 'S+ - 'S+,
so that each member of'S can be identified with an equivalence class of
differences x 1(·) - X2(·) between two positive supermartingales. Each
random variable xl(t) - x 2(t) is well defined off the probability null set of
common infinities of Xl (t) and X2(t). If'S is ordered by the specific order with
positive cone 'S+, we obtain a partially ordered vector space ('S, -<).
Theorem. (a) The space ('S, -<) is a conditionally complete vector lattice.
[In (b), (c), (d) let r be a subset of'S with a specific order majorant.]
(b) Yr is the specific order supremum ofa countable subset ofr.
(c) ffr' is the class ofspecific order majorants ofr, then vr ~ r'.
(d) Ifr is directed upward in the specific order, then yr = Yr.
The duals of (b), (c), (d), involving infima, are obtained by replacing r
by - r. Since r' is directed downward in the specific order in (c), the dual
of (d) implies that Ar' = Ar' = Yr.
The reader will observe that this theorem has precisely the same statement
as Theorem l.IX.6, although S in that theorem does not have the same
meaning as'S here. The point is that the contexts of the two theorems are
quite different but the order properties in the two contexts are identical.
The proof of Theorem 6 is simply a translation of that of Theorem l.IX.6
into the present context. For example, to prove that Ar' = Ar' = yr if
r c 'S +, we can follow the proof of this assertion in Section l.IX.6. That is,
we now interpret the members u, v, <p, ... of S+, r, r' in that section as
positive supermartingales and interpret R D there as a generalized probabil-
istic reduction, namely, as the equivale;te class of essential infima of the
set of positive supermartingale essential majorants of <p(.). The details of
the translated proof are left to the reader.
The set S + is a cone and therefore defines a specific order on itself, for
which we use the order symbols -<, >-, Y, A, and S+ in the specific order
7. The Vector Lattices ('Sm, :=0:) and (Sm, :=0:) 529
will be denoted by (S+, :S). If x(·) and y(.) are positive almost surely right
continuous supermartingales, we describe x(·) as a specific rninorant of y(.)
and write x(·):s y(.) if this relation holds between the equivalence classes
determined by the processes. The corresponding significance is given to
x(·) Y y(.) and other abuses of notation involving processes and equivalence
classes.
Define S = S+ - S+, and denote by (S, :S) the vector space S ordered
by the specific order with positive cone S+ . Then S can be identified with a
subset of'S. Moreover the following relations between ('S, -<) and (S+, :S)
are true.
(rl) If x(·) and y(.) are in S+, then x(·) :S y(.) in ('S, :S) implies that
i(') -< r(') in (S, :S). In fact by hypothesis there is a z(') in 'S+ such that
x(·) + z(') is a stochastic modification of y(.), and therefore x(·) +
+ +z(') is a
stochastic modification of and in fact is indistinguishable from y(.); so
+
i(') :S r(') in (S, :S).
(r2) If x(·) and y(.) are in S+, then x(·) -< y(.) in (S, :S) if and only if
x(·) :S y(.) in ('S, :s).In fact "if" is trivial, and "only if" follows from (rl).
(r3) If X(')E 's and if x(·) is almost surely right continuous, then X(')ES
because (up to a standard modification) by hypothesis x(·) = x l (·) - x 2 (·)
with Xk)E'S+; so x(·) = il (.) - i/') with ii(·)ES+.
If r c: S+ we can identify r with a subset T of 'S+. If x(·) is in the equiv-
alence class AT then i('):S Tin ('S,:S) by (rl). Moreover, if x l (·) is in
S+ and if Xl (.) :S r in (S, :S), then Xl (.) :S r in ('S, -<); so Xl (.) -< x(·) in
('S, -<), and therefore Xl (.) :S i(') in (S, :5). So A r exists and is the equiv-
alence class in S+ containing i(·)' Hence (S+, -<) is a conditionally complete
vector lattice. We leave to the reader the verification that Theorem 6(b)-(d)
holds for(S, :S).
Intrinsic Definition of S
yr=LMr, Ar=GMr
in the sense that if one side of an equation exists, the other side also exists
and there is equality. According to Section 4, a martingale is in an 'Sm
equivalence class if and only if the martingale is L 1 bounded.
The class 'S;b is defined as the subset of'S+ whose equivalence classes contain
the quasi-bounded positive supennartingales, that is (Section IV.6), contain
the supennartingales x(·) which satisfy the following equivalent conditions,
in which all processes are adapted to the specified filtration.
(a) The process x(·) is the specific order essential supremum of a set of
bounded positive supennartingales.
(b) The process x(·) is the limit of a specific order increasing sequence
of bounded positive supennartingales; that is, x(·) is the sum of a
series of bounded positive supennartingales.
The class 'S;b is a cone which satisfies the conditions (Appendix 111.8)
implying that the set 'Sqb = 'S;b - 'S;b is a band in ('S, ::S) and as such is
a conditionally complete vector lattice. The equivalence classes in this band,
and also their stochastic process members, are called quasi bounded. Observe
that if x(·) in (a) and (b) above is a martingale, then the bounded positive
supennartingales in (a) and (b) must also be martingales because they are
specific order minorants of x(·).
to Theorem IV.I 0, 'Spqb = 'Sp 11 D if the parameter set has a first !,oint but
not a last point.
It is sufficient to prove the first equality, and [by Theorem 3(d)] even
sufficient to prove that 'S~qb = 'S~ 11 VI. In this context if x(o) is a uniformly
integrable positive martingale, it is right closable [Section III.3(e)] by some
random variable x; so x(t) = E{xl~(t)} almost surely. If xn(o) is the bounded
martingale defined by xn(t) = E{x A nl~(t)}, then limn....ooxn(t), t c: ~+,
defines a martingale in the equivalence class of x( 0); so x( 0) is quasi bounded.
Conversely, if x(o) is a quasi-bounded martingale, so that there is a sequence
of bounded martingales, {Yn(o),nE.:r}, such that x(o) = ~o Yn(o), then Yn(o)
is right closable, say by a random variable Yn, and x(o) must be right closable
by ~o Yn; so x(o) is uniformly integrable.
in the bands 'Ss and Ss and the processes they contain are called singular.
A process in 'S+ [S+] is singular if and only if every bounded 'S+ [S+]
specific order minorant of the process is a standard modification of [indis-
tinguishable from] the identically zero process. We leave to the reader the
verification of the fact that in the continuous parameter context if x(o) is
an almost surely right continuous supermartingale, then x( 0) e 'S; if and
only if x(o)eS; and that x(o)e'Ss if and only if x(o)eSs. Thus in the con-
tinuous parameter context the equivalence classes in S; [Ss] can be identified
with those in'S; ['S] which contain almost surely right continuous processes.
We shall denote by 'Sms and Sm., respectively, the bands 'Sm (') 'Ss and
Sm (') Ss of singular martingales in their respective vector lattices. The bands
'Sps and Sps of singular supermartingale potentials are defined correspond-
ingly. Thus we now have an orthogonal decomposition of each of the lattices
's and S into four bands:
and choose the conditional expectations in such a way (Section IV.1) that
E{x( + 00 )I$i"(o)} is an almost surely right continuous martingale. This
conditional expectation martingale comes under Case (a). The bracketed
difference in (11.1) is a martingale with almost sure limit 0 at + 00 and so
comes under Case (b). Thus (ll.l) exhibits x(o) as the sum of its quasi-
bounded and singular components.
If x(o)e'S~, then esslim,tx(t) exists (Section 111.13), and Cases (a)-(c)
go through as in the continuous parameter context.
is an almost surely right continuous martingale. For example (take T" == n),
an almost surely right continuous martingale is a local martingale. Observe
that if T" in (12.1) is replaced by T" A n, that is, if the almost surely right
continuous martingale (12.1) is stopped at t = n, then the stopped process
is a martingale (Section IV.3), uniformly integrable because it is right closed
by x(T" A n). Hence it is no restriction on a local martingale if T" in (12.1)
is supposed bounded and if each martingale (12.1) is supposed uniformly
integrable.
It is trivial (calculate expectations or use the fact that Sp .1 Sm) that an
almost surely right continuous supermartingale potential which is a martin-
gale is indistinguishable from the identically zero process. As the following
theorem shows the situation is quite different if "martingale" is replaced
here by "local martingale."
Then lim._ co T" = + 00 because almost every almost surely right continuous
supermartingale sample function is bounded on compact intervals. Observe
that "tT x(o)eS+ with "tT x(t) < n for t < T. and that y(o)eS+ with y(t) < n
• •
13. Quasimartingales (Continuous Parameter Context) 535
for t < 1',. and y(t) = 0 for t ~ 1',.. Thus y(.) -<: x(·), and y(.) is bounded;
so y(.) = 0 quasi everywhere, that is,
almost everywhere on the set {1',. > t}. Since the first and third terms in
(12.2) are trivially equal almost everywhere on the set {1',.:S; t} [because
this set is in ~(t) and the function x(1',. 1\ t) is ~(t) measurableJ, the process
(12.1) is a martingale. Hence x(·) is a local martingale. Conversely, suppose
that X(·)ES; and that x(·) is a local martingale, so that there is an increasing
sequence T. of finite optional times with almost sure limit + 00 such that
each process (12.1) is a martingale. If z(·) is in S+ and is a bounded specific
order minorant of x(·), then z(1',. 1\ .) ::5 x(T,. 1\ .); so z(T,. 1\ .) is a martin-
gale with a bound independent of n. The martingale equality E{z(O)} =
E{z(T,. 1\ t)} yields E{z(O)} = E{z(t)} in the limit, and therefore Z(·)ES~.
Since X(·)ES;, it follows that z(·) = 0 quasi everywhere; so x(·) is singular,
as was to be proved.
Under the obvious definition of a local martingale with parameter set 71..+
a trivial adaptation of the preceding proof shows that the counterpart of
Theorem 12 for the parameter set 71..+ is true.
y(tj ) = L IE{x(t
k,,j
k) - x(tk+l)lff(tj )} I (13.2)
exists for all s. Moreover xm(s) is ff(s) measurable because ff(O) contains
the null sets, the process xm(o) is L 1 bounded because
i X m(S2) dP = IL
l
~~ E{x(t)lff(S2)} dP = ~~~ i E{x(t)lff(S2)} dP
[x m + (t) is defined arbitrarily when this right limit does not exist] is an almost
surely right continuous martingale and is obviously L 1 bounded. Moreover
(Section 4) the process xm(o) is the difference between two positive almost
surely right continuous martingales. At the price of replacing x(o) by x(o) -
x m + (0) [which does not change the sum in (13.1) or y(tj ) in (13.2)] we can
therefore suppose from now on that L 1 Iim l .... "'E{x(t)lff(s)} =0. If the
13. Quasimartingales (Continuous Parameter Context) 537
and therefore
Apply Section IV.l again to find that the positive right limit processes
z(o) and z(o - x(o) are almost surely right continuous supermartingales
+ +
relative to 9'(0) on the parameter set IR+. The desired representation of
x(o) is x(o) = -f(o) - [-f(o) - x(o)}.
Markov Processes
Define ~(s) = ~{x(r), r ~ s}. It will now be shown that (l.l) implies
(1.2)
and if Z 1 = IA [x(t 1)], the right side of (1.2) becomes, using (l.l),
so that (l.l') is true for Z = ZoZ 1 when Z has this special form. Equation (l.l')
for Z1 = 4>1 [x(t 1)] then follows using the usual approximation procedure.
We now proceed by induction. If (l.l') is true for Z = Zo Zk with an
arbitrary choice of to = s < t 1 < ... < tkand functions 4>0' , 4>k' for some
k ~ I,
540 2.VI. Markov Processes
= zoE{E{Zl zk+llx(tl)}I~(s)}
as was to be proved.
A manipulation of conditional probabilities which will be left to the
reader shows that if the process parameter set is a set of consecutive integers,
(Ll) is true in general if true for l = s + 1.
The Markov property can be reformulated: {x(o), ~(o)} is Markovian if
and only if the past and future are independent, given the present, or, in
precise form, if AE~(S) and ME~(s), then
To derive (1.5') from the Markov property, suppose that y and z are measur-
able, as described, and bounded. Using (Ll'),
so performing the operation E { -Ix(s)} on the first and third terms yields
(1.5'). Conversely, under (1.5')
so
Let {x(t), ~(t), tEl} be a Markov process with measurable state space
(X, Pl). If I has a first point to, the distribution of x(to) is called the initial
distribution of the process. If there is a stochastic transition function q with
parameter set I (Appendix VI.3) such that for s and t in I with s < t and for
A in Pl,
then x(o) is said to have transition function q. This equation implies, when
the operation E{ -Ix(s)} is applied to both sides, that the right side is almost
surely P{x(t)EAlx(s)}. Thus (l.ll) implies that {x(o),~(o)} is Markovian.
Recall that by definition of transition function with parameter set I the
Chapman-Kolmogorov equation
by x(s) and x(t), in view of (1.1'), and that as so modified (1.l3) can be
written in the form
fAn
q(tn-l ~n-l ; tn, d~n)'
In particular, if Ihas a first point to, and if v is the distribution of x(to),
Recall (Section 1.10) that to a prescribed state space and prescribed finite-
dimensional distributions correspond a stochastic process with those finite-
dimensional distributions if the state space satisfies a certain weak condition
(for example, if the state space is a Polish space coupled with its Borel sets)
and if the finite-dimensional distributions are consistent. Thus, under the
1. The Markov Property 543
stated restriction on the state space, if I has a first point, to each specified
initial distribution and stochastic transition function with parameter set I
correspond a Markov process with the specified initial distribution and
transition function; if I has no first point, to each stochastic transition
function q and absolute probability function for q correspond a Markov
process with the specified transition and absolute probability functions. The
finite-dimensional distributions of the process are determined by (1.17), and
the absolute probability function is determined by the initial distribution if
I has a first point.
When I has a first point and the Markov process context requires the
identification of the initial distribution, two systems of notation will be used.
We shall sometimes identify the initial distribution v by writing p. and E.
for probabilities and expectations, specializing to P~ and E~ when v is
supported by {~}; in the latter case the process will be said to have initial
point ~ or to be a process from ~. Alternatively, we may denote probabilities
and expectations by P and E but identify the initial distribution by a sub-
script in the process notation, writing x.(o) for the process and specializing
to x~(o) if the process has initial point~.
q(s,~;s+ I,A)=p(~,A)
then the transition function value q(s, ~; s + t, A) does not depend on s for
any value of t = 1,2, ... , and in fact according to the Chapman-Kolmo-
gorov equation, (s, A) t--+ q(s, ~; s + t, A) is the tth kernel iterate of p(o, 0). In
this case {x(o), ff(o)} is said to have stationary probabilities and to have
transition function p. If I = IR+ and if q is stationary (Appendix VI.3), that
is, ifthere is a stationary continuous parameter transition function (t,~, A) t--+
p(t,~, A) for which
q(s, ~; s + t, A) = p(t,~, A)
1 e,
becomes
here s = 0 yields the version of (l.l8) in the present context, since J1.(0, 0) is
the initial distribution.
20 Choice of Filtration
Let {x(o), §"(o)} be a Markov process with an arbitrary linearly ordered
parameter set
The larger the (j algebras of the filtration §"(o) the more significant is the
assertion that {x(o), §"(o)} has the Markov property. The minimal choice of
filtration §"(o) to which x(o) is adapted is §"o(o); operating on both sides of
(l.l) with E{ -I§"o(s)} shows that {x(o), §"o(o)} is Markovian. In the other
direction it is trivial that {x(o), jO'(o)} is Markovian. Thus
and the filtrations §"o(o), §"o(o), §"(o), §"'(o), some of which may be identical,
all make x(o) Markovian. The following lemma will be used in Section 7.
Lemmao If §"(t) c §"o for some parameter value t, then §"' (t) c §"o (t).
and in particular,
proof that the extension exists is omitted.) This construction has the advan-
tage that the space (0, #) is defined without reference to J.l or p, an advantage
illustrated by the fact that if X contains the singletons, the function 1---+e
p~{A} for A in # is X measurable and for arbitrary J.l
(3.3)
because these assertions are true when Ais a finite-dimensional product set.
If {x(o), §(o)} is an integral parameter Markov process on a probability
space (0, §, P,..) with the above state space and transition function, the map
<jJ: W 1---+ [x(O, w), x(l, w), ... ] is measurable from (0, §) into (0, #), and
PIJ = <jJ-l(PIJ) in the sense that <jJ-l(#(n» = §{x(j),j ~ n} c §(n), <jJ-l(#)
= §{x(j),jeiz:+} c §, and PIJ{<jJ-l(A)} = PIJ{A} for he#. In view of
these facts it is usually correct as well as convenient to prove theorems for
discrete parameter Markov processes by proving them for the special ones
as just defined on (0, F).
Observe that the preceding discussion remains valid if J.l(X) :1= I, which
implies that prO} :1= l. To avoid pathology, we shall always assume that J.l
is the sum of a sequence of finite measures, but we allow J.l to be infinite
valued. All that is needed is the acceptance of the idea that in probability
theory the measure on the space on which random variables are defined
need not be a probability measure; that is, prO} need not be I! Whenever
P may not be a probability measure, this fact will always be mentioned,
however.
If pis substochastic, the state space (X, X) can be enlarged (Appendix VI.l)
to a state space (XiI,XiI) by adjoining an absorbing state a,
a "trap", to
obtain a stochastic transition function extendingp to (Xo, Xc). The adjoined
point ais absorbing in the sense that if a sample path reaches the point, the
path stays there from then on. The first time Tthat ais reached is an optional
time, the "lifetime" of the process, equal to + 00 for a path that never
reaches a. If convenient, the state a can now be dropped, so that to any
initial distribution corresponds a process x(o) for which
Extension of Theorem 3
p(e,A) = JiDw(e,A).
Here JiDW is harmonic measure; so this measure is supported by oD(n It is
e
supposed that D(e) depends on in such a way that p(., A) is Borel measur-
able when A is a Borel subset of D. The classical superharmonic, harmonic,
subharmonic functions are, respectively, superharmonic, harmonic, sub-
harmonic relative to this transition function. The same procedure in the
context of parabolic potential theory makes the superparabolic, parabolic,
subparabolic functions, respectively, superharmonic, harmonic, subharmon-
ic relative to a transition function defined in terms of parabolic measure.
Observe that in this case the sample sequences move in the direction of
decreasing ordinate values.
the fact that p(e,f) is the unweighted average of f on aD(e) and that the
e.
radius of D(e) varies continuously with With this choice of D(e) the fact
that limn-+ oo = x( 00) exists almost surely is proved as before, and the limit
must be on aD because
Ix(n) - aDI
jx(n + 1) - x(n)1 = t: /\ 2 a.s.
P,,{x(t)EAj,j ~ n}
and in particular,
P~{x(t)EAj,j ~ n}
Polish, coupled with its Borel subsets. Given a Polish state space (X, ~), a
probability measure f..L on~, and a stochastic transition functionp on (X, ~),
there is a canonical Markov process with state space (X, ~), initial distribu-
tion f..L, and transition function p. We sketch the definition of this process
(cf. Section 1.10). The space 0 is the space of functions OJ from ~+ into X,
and x(t,OJ) is the value of OJ at t. Define #(t) = ~{x(s),s ~ t}, # =
YI"20#(t). The measure P/l on # is determined by defining P/l{x(t)EA j,
j ~ n} by the right side of (5.3), and this definition is extended to # using
Kolmogorov's theorem. The measure P/l is then completed, thereby enlarging
ff to ff/l' and finally #;.(t) is defined as the (1 algebra generated by #(t) and
the P/l null sets. The process {x(·), #;.(.)} is the desired canonical process on
the probability space (0, ff/l' P). Observe that if {x(·), ~(.)} is a Markov
process with this state space (X,~) and transition functionp, on a probability
space (n/l'.9'", P/l)' and if 4> maps nil into 0 by 4>(w) = OJ = x(·, w), then in
view of our convention that process probability measures are complete,
and in addition 4> -1 (#;.(t» c ~(t) if ~(O)containsthe P/l null sets. Moreover
(5.4)
These relations all follow from the fact that for t. and A. as above, if A =
{x(t)EAj,j ~ n}, then 4>-I(A)E~(t"), and (5.4) is true for this set A.
e
If AE #, the function f-+ P~(A) is ~ measurable, that is, Borel measur-
able, and
(5.5)
because (5.3) is valid for F/l' and therefore the assertion is true for in ~ {x(tj ),
j ~ n}, hence true for A in the algebra U~{x(tj),j ~ n} (where the union
is over all finite parameter sets), and finally the assertion is true for A in
#. From the general theory (Appendix VI.2) we know that if for each the e
measure P~ is restricted to the class 0/1(#) of universally measurable sets
over ff or even to the possibly larger class 0/1;(#) of universally measurable
sets over # relative to the kernel (e, A) f-+ P~(A) on ~ x #, then the function
p. {A} is universally measurable on X, and (5.5) remains true. In expectation
language the function E. {x} is ~[O/I(~)] measurable if x is the indicator
function of a set in # [0/1;.(#)], and therefore by the usual approximation
procedure if x is # [0/1;.(#)] measurable and is positive or absolutely P/l
integrable, then E. {x} is ~[O/I(~)] measurable and
(5.6)
552 2.YI. Markov Processes
(5.7)
and the right side of (l.l') can be expressed in the form Ex(.) {z}.
In view of (5.4) and the corresponding equation for expectations the
relations (5.5) and (5.6) can be applied to noncanonical processes to deduce
that
EI'{I/>-l(X)} = i E~{I/>-l(X)}JL(d~),
x (5.8)
where Aand x are as above and l/>-l(X) = x(I/». Here P~ is the probability
measure, and E~ is the corresponding expectation operator for an arbitrary
Markov process with state space (X, X), transition function p, initial point
~, on a probability space (Q~,~, P~), and the set Q~ may vary with ~.
(6.1)
It now follows from (5.4) that for any almost surely right continuous
Markov process x(o) on a probability space (0, ff, P) with state space (X, ,q[),
initial distribution J.L, and transition function p the probability of hitting A
at some time:::;; t, that is, the probability that the entry time T of A is at
mostt,isP{T:::;; t} = P,,{4>-1(h)} so thatthis probability does not depend on
the choice of probability space. If J.L is supported by g}, this probability
is JH4> -1 (h)} and is universally measurable as a function of ~. Finally the
probability for general J.L is the integral JxJH4>-1(h)}J.L(d~). The corre-
sponding remarks are valid for hitting and entry time distributions. We
conclude that such probabilities and expectations as the following define
universally measurable functions of the initial point ~.
(a) P~{SUPtEIU[X(t)] > c}Jor I an interval and u a Borel measurable
function from X into R
(b) E~{SUPtEIU[X(t)]} if [notation of (a)] u:<:: 0 or if this expectation
with u replaced by lui is finite for all ~.
(c) P~{limSUPttTU[X(t)] > c} for u as in (a) and for Tthe hitting time
of an analytic subset of X by x(o).
(d) E~{lim SUPttTu[x(t)]} if [notation of(c)] u :<:: 0 or if this expectation
with u replaced by lui is finite for all ~.
If for every point ~ of the state space there is a continuous process with
initial point ~ and the given transition function p, then all the work in this
n
section can also be carried through with the space of continuous functions
from IR + into X.
We now change some of the notation in the right continuous context we are
treating. Let A be an analytic subset of X, let I be a compact parameter
interval, let x~(o) be a right continuous Markov process from ~ with the
given transition functionp, and recall that the sp~ce on which x~(o) is defined
may depend on ~. Consider the function
much less elegant and sadly incomplete, however. Observe that if x~(') is as
above and if r is a countable subset of parameter values, the function
The process random variables need not be defined on the whole space; so
"a.s." means "almost everywhere where x(s) is defined." In any expression
involving a random variable of the process the added condition that the
random variable is defined is to be understood and will sometimes be written
explicitly. Thus the set {x(t)e X} is the domain of definition of x(t). With
7. Continuous Parameter Markov Processes: Lifetimes and Trap Points 555
this convention (5.3) remains valid. According to (7.1) and the Chapman-
Kolmogorov equation, the random variable x(O) is defined almost surely,
e,
and the function tI--+P{X(t)EX}, equal to Ixp(t, X)Jl(de) when t > 0, is
monotone decreasing and right continuous on IR +. If 0 < S < t, the random
variable x(s) is defined almost everywhere where x(t) is defined because
If there is a positive random variable S (::s; + (0) such that x(t) is defined if
and only if t < S, the random variable S is called the process lifetime. Integral
parameter process lifetimes were discussed in Section 3. The existence of a
process lifetime is not much of a restriction. In fact without the hypothesis
of the existence of a process lifetime define S by
We shall need the following intuitively obvious fact. Let x(·) be an almost
surely continuous Markov process from a point ~. It is supposed that the
state space is a Polish locally compact but not compact space. Let S be the
process lifetime. A trap point is adjoined as described above. Let' be the
adjoined point of the Alexandrov one-point compactification of the state
space. It is supposed that x(S -) = , almost surely. For t in IR+ let ~(t) be
the (1 algebra generated by the null sets of the x(·) probability space and
~{x(s),s:::;; t},anddefine~ = V,eR+ ~(t). LetB. be an increasing sequence
of open relatively compact subsets of the state space, containing ~, with
oB
union the state space, and let Sn be the hitting time of n by x(·). Then
limn-+C() Sn = S almost surely. Define <§ = YneZ+ ~(Sn)' Then we show that
~ = <§. The inclusion <§ c ~ is known from Section 1.12. To prove the
reverse inclusion, we prove that x(t) is <§ measurable for each t. In doing
this it is no restriction to identify the process trap point with ,. Then we
need only observe that x(t /\ Sn) is ~(t /\ Sn) c ~(Sn) c <§ measurable and
that x(t) = limn-+C() x(t /\ Sn) almost surely.
Theorem. Let {x('), ~(.) } be an almost surely right continuous Markov process
with Polish state space and with transition function p. Suppose that whenever
t > 0 and f is a bounded continuous function on the state space, the function
p(t, 'J) is continuous, or at least the process p(t, x(')J) is almost surely right
continuous. Then
(a) The process {x('), ~+(.)} is Markovian with transition function p.
(b) If for all t ~ 0 the (1 algebra ~(t) is generated by the null sets and
~{x(s),s:::;; t}, then ~+(.) = ~(').
Observation (1). Condition (a) implies that for fas in (b) the function
p(o, ~,f) is right continuous on IR+ because if x~(o) is chosen as in (a), the
function tl-+p(t, ~,f) = E{f[x~(t)]} is right continuous.
Observation (2). If ~T(t) = ~(T + t), the theorem implies that the process
{x(T + 0), ~;(o)} is a Markov process on {T <: + oo} with transition func-
tion p and initial distribution the distribution of x(T). To see this, first note
that the process in question is adapted because (Section 11.3) the function
x(T + t) is ~(T + t) measurable, and second note that if to ~ 0 and if the
pair (T, T + t) in (9.2) is replaced by (T + to, T + to + t), then (9.2) becomes
the Markov property for the translated process; that is,
General Case
Apply the first special case to find that the process {x(T + '), $'T(')} is a
right continuous Markov process on {T < + oo} with transition functionp.
Next we apply the second special case. If T is finite valued, the fact that S
and T are optional for $'(.) implies (according to Section II.2(h), but the
notation there is different) that S - T is optional for $'T(') = $'(T + .).
Since S - T is $'T(O) measurable, the second special case can be applied to
{x( T + '), $'T(')} with the pair (0, S - T) of optional times, to show that
(9.5) is true. If T is not necessarily finite valued, observe that S 1\ n is
$'(T 1\ n) measurable for all n and apply (9.5), but with the pair (S 1\ n,
560 2. VI. Markov Processes
iAn
j[x(S)]dP= r p(S- T,x(S),f)dP.
JAn
The Hunt theory has been presented in varying degrees of generality. For
example, the theory includes classical potential theory on Greenian subsets
of IR N with regular boundaries if the following hypotheses are imposed.
HI. The state space is a locally compact Hausdorff space satisfying the
second separability condition, coupled with its Borel sets (but
10. Probabilistic Potential Theory; Excessive Functions 561
(10.2)
(10.3)
(10.4)
e-a1p(t,·, u) = u (10.5)
for all t > 0, then u is called invariant (X-excessive. For example, if v is (X-
excessive, the function Iim l -+ CXl e-a1p(t,., v) is invariant (X-excessive. If u is
(X-excessive and if (10.5) is true for some strictly positive t, then u is invariant
(X-excessive. In fact on the one hand (10.5) is true for 2t when true for t
because if true for t, then
r 1n
p(t,·, un) = n Jo p(s + t,·, U 1\ n)/l (ds).
/
(10.6)
uous. Hence the evaluation (10.6) implies that Un is excessive. Moreover the
e,
monotoneity of p(., U /\ m) implies that the sequence
l/n
nl-+n
J 0 p(s,·,u/\ m)/l(ds)
l/n
U ~ lim Un
n.... co
~ lim n
".... 00 J 0
p(s, ·,U /\ m)/l(ds) =U /\ m
Excessive Measures
In the most common Markov process setting the state space for the transition
function p is a topological space coupled with some (J algebra of subsets
564 2. VI. Markov Processes
including the Borel subsets. For example, the state space of Brownian motion
in an open subset D of ~N can be taken as the u algebra of Borel subsets
of D or perhaps more naturally as the u algebra of I n measurable subsets of
D (the last because the transition distributions are absolutely continuous
relative to IN)' At first glance it may seem that whatever the context, it makes
no difference which of the possible u algebras is chosen. But in fact the choice
is involved in the definition of excessive functions and measures. In the
Brownian motion case it makes no difference in the sense that (Sections
IX.6, 8, 18) whichever choice is made of the three possibilities mentioned,
a function u is excessive if and only if on each connected component of D
this function is either identically + 00 or positive and superharmonic, and
a measure is excessive if and only if it is the indefinite integral of an excessive
function. For space-time Brownian motion in an open subset D of iR N ,
however, the situation is different. It will be seen (Section IX.l8) that
coupling D with its u algebra of Borel subsets is less suitable than coupling
with the much larger u algebra of those subsets of D which meet every
hyperplane orthogonal to the ordinate axis in a Borel set. (Replacing "Borel"
here by "IN measurable" would not change the classes of excessive functions
and measures.)
When the context is not otherwise unambiguous, we shall use the language
"fiE measurable excessive function" and "excessive measure on fiE" to indi-
cate the choice of fiE.
(12.1)
(13.2)
Here as before we adopt the convention that the integral of a function over
a set means the integral over the part of the set on which the function is
defined. Thus in (13.3) without this convention A would be replaced An
{s~ > t}. In particular,
lifetime), and it follows easily that there is an almost surely [right] continuous
process with initial point eand transition function ph.
In probabilistic potential theory hypotheses are imposed on the state
space and transition functionp ensuring that for any ein the state space there
e
is a right continuous Markov process x~(·) from with transition functionp
and that for such a process the composed process u[x~(·)] is almost surely
right continuous whenever u is excessive. In this theory it then follows as
sketched above that h-path processes x~(·) from points of finiteness of h can
be chosen to be right continuous. Moreover, if u is excessive for p, the fact
that u[x~(·)] is almost surely right continuous and therefore almost surely
right continuous for the measure ph suggests that u[x~(·)] is also almost
surely right continuous. Finally the fact that ph{X~(t)EX - X h} = 0 sug-
e
gests that almost no h-path from ever hits X - X h • Proofs of these state-
ments and conjectures will be given in more detail in the contexts ofBr.ownian
motion and space-time Brownian motion.
e
for and rr in X. The hypothesis of strict positivity of p' will be satisfied in the
applications to be made and avoids technicalities. This hypothesis implies
that if h is excessive for p, then / {h = + oo} = 0 unless h is identically + 00.
Choose t > 0, and let e,rr be any (not necessarily distinct) points of X.
If x~(-) is a Markov process with initial point eand transition function p,
if we consider x~(·) in X, that is, before transition to a trap point, and if
0< SI < ... < Sn < t, the formally calculated joint density of X~(SI) =
'1' ... , 'n
X~(Sn) = given that x~(t) = rr is
This joint density can be interpreted as that ofa Markov process x~,,(·) on the
e
parameter interval [0, t[ with initial value and nonstationary transition
density (from 'I at time SI to 'Z at time Sz with 0 ::s; SI < Sz < t)
(14.3)
568 2. VI. Markov Processes
The joint density (14.2) is also that of a Markov process reversed in time on
the parameter interval ]0, I] with initial value" at time I and nonstationary
transition density (from (2 at time S2 to (I at time SI with 0 < SI < S2 ~ I)
(14.4)
(15.2)
Next suppose that A is not necessarily closed but that h is strictly positive,
and define ph(/,~, d,,) = p(/,~, dri)h(,,)/h(~). Consider x~(·) killed at L~ except
that the parameter value 0 is dropped; that is, consider X~L~' defined for each
I > 0 as the restriction to {L~ > I} of x~(t). If 0 < 11 < ... < In,
15. Killed Markov Processes 569
(15.4)
and stationary transition function ph. That is, X~L~(·) probabilities can be
computed by computing probabilities for a Markov process from ~, with
transition function ph, and then multiplying the probabilities obtained by the
n
constant h( Thus killing a Markov process at the last hitting time of a set
leads to a conditioned Markov process in the sense of Section 13. The process
killed at L~ in the present context is trivially right continuous, verifying a
property of conditioned Markov processes derived in Section 13. Observe
that ph may be substochastic even if p is stochastic and that the distribution
of X~Lit) may not be a probability measure:
when t tends to 0, the right-hand side tends (increasing) to the limit h(~).
Chapter VII
Brownian Motion
If 0 ::s; n 1 < ... < nk , the increments x(n 2 ) - x(n 1 ), .•• , x(n k ) - x(n k - 1 ) are
independent random variables, and these increments are independent of x(O).
If Yo, Yl, ... is an arbitrary sequence of random variables with values in
IRN and if X n = LoYj, the joint distribution of Yo, Yl, .. , determines that of
X o , XI' .•. , and conversely. Hence two different distributions of Yo, Yl, ...
do not induce the same distribution of X O, XI' . . . . In the context of the
preceding paragraph this one-to-one correspondence between distributions
implies that if, for n ~ 0, qn is a probability measure on IRN and if Pn is defined
by Pn(~, A) = qn+l (A - ~), then any Markov process determined by the
initial distribution qo and these transition functions is a sequence of succes-
sive sums of independent random variables, X n = Lo
Yj' for which Yj has
distribution qj'
Let {x(t), t E IR+} be a stochastic process with state space IRN and with
independent increments; that is, O::s; t 1 < ... t k implies that the increments
I. Processes with Independent Increments and State Space IR N 571
x(t 2) - x(t 1 ), ••• ,x(t k ) - X(t k - 1 ) are mutually independent. If s < t and if
q(s, t, 0) is the distribution of x(t) - x(s), the fact that the distribution of the
sum of two independent random variables with state space IRN is the convolu-
tion of their distributions implies that for 0 S; Sl < S2 < S3'
(1.3)
and for SE~+ the set of increments {x(t) - x(s): t > s} is independent of
§(s). Equation (1.5) is the Chapman-Kolmogorov equation for the transi-
tion function p. Conversely, suppose that {x(t), §(t), t E ~+} is a Markov
process with stationary transition function (t,~, A) 1--+ p(t,~, A) and suppose
that p has the form (1.6). Then the random variables (1.3) are mutually
independent, and for 0 :::;; s < t the increment x(t) - x(s) has distribution
q(t - s,o). Finally to any family {q(s, o),s > O} of probability distributions
on ~N satisfying (1.5) along with a further probability distribution v on ~N
corresponds a Markov process {x(o), §(o)} with initial distribution v and
transition function (s,~, t, A) 1--+ q(t - s, A - ~).
2. Brownian Motion
Define 6(t, rO by I.XV(4.1), but in discussing transition densities it will
sometimes be more intuitive to write 6(t,~,,,,) for 6(t,,,, - ~). The variance
parameter u 2 is fixed throughout. A stochastic process w(o) is called an
N-dimensional Brownian motion or a Brownian motion in ~N if the following
four conditions are satisfied :
BM1. The parameter set is ~+. The state space is ~N.
BM2. The process has stationary independent increments. If 0 :::;; to <
to + t, the distribution of the increment w(t o + t) - w(to) has
density 6(t, 0) relative to IN'
BM3. The random variable w(O) is independent of the set of process
increments.
BM4. The process is almost surely continuous.
A Brownian motion in ~N can also be defined as a Markov process
{w(t), §(t), t E ~+} satisfying the following three conditions:
BMI*. BMI.
BM2*. The (stationary) stochastic transition function has density
6(t,~,,,,) = 6(t,,,, - ~) relative to IN'
BM3*. BM4:
Observe that BMl *-BM2* imply that for fixed s > 0 the set ofincrements
{x(t) - x(s): t > s} is independent of §(s).
The two Brownian motion definitions are equivalent in the following
2. Brownian Motion 573
(2.1)
(2.2)
574 2.VII. Brownian Motion
(2.3)
when t > O. Since the function (", t)t-+t(t, e,,,) = t(t, e-,,)
is parabolic on
e,
iR N - {( 0) }, the function U, which is Borel measurable and is finite valued
on a dense subset of iRN , has the parabolic average property and so is parabol-
ic on iRN . Under our hypotheses when SE ~ the process {w(s + t), tE ~+} is
a Brownian motion with initial distribution of IN density ti(e, s). The distribu-
tion of each increment x(t 2 ) - X(tl) with t l i't 2 is an infinite-valued
measure. Since the process is Markovian, the reversed time process is also
Markovian, and a version of the reverse transition density relative to IN is
e
easily calculated: the density of a transition from at time s to '1 at time
t < s is
u(", t)t(s - t,,,, e)
(2.4)
ti(e,s)
The conditions BM 1*-BM2* are conditions for a Markov process with state
space ~N and with a specified transition function. Hence (Section VI.5) such
a process exists for an arbitrary choice of initial probability distribution J.I.,
for example, as a canonical process on the space of all functions from ~+
into ~N. A useful additional fact is that since the distribution of the process
in question is the integral with respect to J.I.(de) of the distribution of the
e,
process with initial point it follows that there is such a process when J.I. is
an arbitrary measure on ~N, finite on compact sets, and not identically O.
In Section 3 we shall show that any process satisfying BMI *-BM2* has a
standard modification satisfying BM3*. Thus Brownian motions with
parameter set ~+ exist.
2. Brownian Motion 575
Suppose that b > 0, that 1= [0, b], and that {w(t), t E I} is a process which
satisfies the Brownian motion defining conditions BMI-BM4 and BMI *-
BM3* except that IR+ is replaced by I as parameter set. Then the process
may not be the restriction to I of a Brownian motion process for the para-
meter set IR+, but if 0 < a < b, we now exhibit a Brownian motion {w(t),
t E IR+} such that w' (t) = w(t) for t::; a: choose any function f, strictly
increasing and continuous, mapping [a, + oo[ onto [a, b[, and define
with state space IR N is called a space-time Brownian motion from ~o' This
process has stationary independent increments and is Markovian relative
to the same filtration as w(·). Space-time Brownian motion with an arbitrary
576 2.VII. Brownian Motion
initial distribution is defined in the obvious way and has these same proper-
ties. In this definition space-time Brownian motion moves downward in
iRN , that is, in the direction of decreasing ordinate values. The dual motion
moving upward will be called space-cotime Brownian motion. It will be
convenient to introduce the following notation. If A is a subset of iRN ,
define At = {'': (11, t)EA} and At = At x {t}. The transition probability func-
tion (r, (e, s), A) ...... p(r, (e, s), A) for space-time Brownian motion has the
property that p(r, (e, s), 0) is a measure supported by A.- n and this measure
when considered as a measure on A.- r is absolutely continuous relative to
IN' with density 6(r, e, 0). Define
~=(e,s), ~= (11, t)
so that i(~,~) governs the transition density for time s - t when s > t,
p(r,~, A) = L i(~,
As - r
(11, s - r»IN (d11),
U _lX 2
P{x ~ lX} < -exp--2 . (3.1)
lX 2u
n n
P{maxx(k) ~ IX} = LP{T=j} ~ 2LP{T=j,x(n) - xU) ~ O}
k,;;n 1 1 (3.4)
S 2P{x(n) ~ IX}.
(3.5)
According to (b) this inequality is true if the supremum on the left side
is replaced by the supremum for only finitely many values of r ~ t. The
inequality is therefore true as stated except possibly for the countably
many values of IX which are discontinuities of the distribution function of
the supremum on the left. The inequality is true without exception because
both sides of (3.5) define left continuous functions of IX.
By symmetry, if x(r) - x(O) is replaced in (3.5) by its absolute value,
the right side of (3.5) should be doubled.
We can assume in the proof that the variance parameter is I and that
N = I. Applying (c) above, if m > 0, n > 0 and if rand s are rational,
mn-l
P{ sup Ix(s) - x(r)1 ~ 21X } ~ L P { sup Ix(s) - x(jjn)! ~ IX}
O<s-r<ljn j=O O<s-jjn,;;2jn
s,;;m
Since the last term has limit 0 when n -. 00, the restriction to the rationals
of almost every sample function is uniformly continuous on [0, m[. In
other words the restriction to the rationals of x(', w) for w not in some null
set coincides with a continuous function Xl (', w) on IR+. Since
limE{[x(t) - X(S)]2}
/-, = 0,
surely continuous. If $'1 (t) is the (1 algebra generated by $'(t) and the null
sets, the process {w(·), $'1 (.)} is still a Brownian motion. Since s < s' < t
implies that w(t) - w(s') is independent of $'t(s), the random variable
w(t) - w(s) is independent of $'t(s), and this independence implies that
the process {w(·), $'t(·)} is a Brownian motion. Thus there is no loss of
generality in assuming that for a Brownian motion {w(·, $'(.)} the (1 algebra
$'(0) contains the null sets of the probability space and $'(.) = $'+(.), that
is, $'(.) is right continuous. In particular, if {w(')' $'(.)} is a Brownian motion
with $'(t) = $' {w(s), s :s; t} and if $'1 (t) is the (1 algebra generated by $'(t)
and the null sets, then {w(·), $'1 (.)} is a Brownian motion, and (by Theorem
VI.8) $'1 (.) is right continuous.
In view of the properties of Brownian motions the entry and hitting times
of analytic subsets of the state space are optional for a Brownian motion
{w(·), $'(.)} whenever $'(0) contains the null sets of the probability space and
$'(.) is right continuous. The space-time Brownian motions have the strong
Markov property and the preceding entry and hitting time property under
the stated conditions on the Brownian motions involved.
(4.1)
neglecting null sets. Thus (*) is true for this choice of x. More generally an
only slightly less trivial calculation shows that (*) is true if
•
x = for w(O)] D.Ii[ wet) - w(tj _ 1)],
1
where.li is continuous on IRN with limit 0 at 00 and 0 :s; to < ... < t•. It
follows (Stone-Weierstrass theorem) that (*) is true for the random variable
Proof of (b). To prove that each set in F(T) is in V;' F(Tn), let x be the
indicator function of a set in F(T), and recall that we have proved above
that we can define x(t) = E{xIF(t)} for t :S + 00 to make x(') a continuous
process. Apply the conditional expectation continuity theorem and the
martingale optional sampling Theorem IV.2 to obtain
(5.1)
and in fact tJ(s - t, ~, 11) = G«~, s), (11, t». This relation between Brownian
motion transition density and the parabolic Green function of iRN will be
extended to the corresponding relation between the transition density for
Brownian motion in an open set D and the parabolic Green function of
D x ~ in Section IX.I? As we shall see in cases related to the Dirichlet
problem for parabolic functions many Brownian motion probabilities can be
evaluated in terms of solutions of the heat equation on the relevant domains
with the appropriate boundary conditions or, if there is stationarity in time,
can be evaluated in terms ofsolutions of Laplace's equation with appropriate
boundary conditions.
582 2.VII. Brownian Motion
°
parameter interval has infinite length. To prove this, it is sufficient to show
that for one-dimensional Brownian motion w(·) from with variance para-
meter 1 the part of almost every Brownian sample function corresponding to
the parameter interval [0,15] is of unbounded variation, for every 15 > 0. To
see this, define s" = 1:~ Iw(jc5jn) - w«j - l)c5jn)l, and note
if I> 0,
if 1 = 0.
This result is a version of the strong law of large numbers in the continuous
parameter context, as applied to Brownian motion.
Theoremo Ifw(o) is a Brownian motionfrom a point, the (J algebras §"1 and §"2
generated, respectively, by the null sets and
n§"{w(s),s::; t},
1>0
n§"{w(s),s ~ t}
1>0
(6.1)
are trivial.
It can be assumed that the initial point of the Brownian motion is the
origin. If A E §"1 and if t > 0, the set A is independent of the class of dif-
ferences {W(S2) - W(SI)' t::; SI < S2} and therefore is independent of the (J
algebra §" {W(S2) - W(SI), 0 < SI < S2} which, since w(O+) = 0 almost sure-
ly, together with the class of null sets generates a (J algebra including §"l'
Thus A is independent of itself and so has probability either 0 or 1. Apply
this result to the Brownian motion {tw(l/t),tEIR+} [see Section 5(£)] to
derive the triviality of §"2'
Observation. Since a Brownian motion process satisfies the conditions of
Theorem VI.8(b) after the associated filtration §"(o) is enlarged if necessary
to have §"(O) contain the null sets, it follows from Section VI.8 that for a
Brownian motion from a point the (J algebra §"1 is trivial. This proof was
not used above because a direct proof is more elementary and just as short.
°
Since the condition in the braces defines an fF2 set, the probability in question
must be or 1, and so is 1, and therefore lim sUP,_oo w(t) = + 00 almost surely
because c is arbitrary. Similarly or by symmetry the inferior limit is almost
large parameter values. In particular, almost every w(o) path hits at ar-
bitrarily large parameter values and therefore also [Section 5(f) J hits at
°°
surely - 00. Thus almost every w(o) path hits each point of IR at arbitrarily
°
(b) According to Theorem 6, if A is an analytic subset of IR N , the value
of P{TA = o} must be either or 1. The following examples exploit this fact.
The dichotomy suggests that a topology of IR N [iRNJ can be defined by making
a point a limit point of a set A if the hitting time of every analytic superset Al
of A by a [space-timeJ Brownian motion from the point is almost surely 1.
We shall see in Section IX.15 that this can be done (even with A 1 open in
the Euclidean topology) and that the topology so defined is the [parabolicJ
fine topology already defined in Section I.XI.l [Section I.XVII.9]' From
now on in this section the remarks relating probability results to fine topology
results will always be for the classical context, but the corresponding remarks
for the parabolic context will also be true.
(c) Let A be an open right circular cone in IR N with vertex the origin.
°
Then P{w(t)eA} is independent of t > and is proportional to the cone
central angle. Hence, if to is a sequence of strictly positive parameter values
with limit 0,
Let u be a function from a metric space D into a metric space D' with distance
function d'. Recall that if rjJ is a function from an interval JO, b[ into D, with
C = rjJ(]O, b[), and if the limit rjJ(O +) exists, then the closed possibly empty
6. The Zero-One Law for Brownian Motion 585
set n,>o u(I'jJ(]O, t[»- is the "cluster set," that is, the set of limiting values,
of u at I'jJ(O +) along C. A point r( is in this cluster set if and only if
liminfdl(r(,u[l'jJ(t)]) = O.
' .... 0
almost every w(o) path back to the origin because according to (d) the
probability
P{liminfdl(r(,u[w(t)]) = O}
' .... 0
I
P{limdl(A , w(t» = O} = 1. (6.3)
'-0
In fact AI is obviously closed so if,,1 e D I - AI, there is a neighborhood B I of
/ I
,,1 so small that if B = u-t(B ), then P{T B ' = O} = O. The set D - AI is
therefore a countable union UjB;
of open sets B;
with this property. It
follows that neglecting a null set of w( 0) paths, the cluster set of u along each
w(o) path back to the origin is a subset of AI. Furthermore, if A~ is a countable
dense subset of AI, the cluster set of u on almost every w(o) path back to the
origin includes A~ and therefore includes AI and so is AI. The set AI may be
empty, but if D is compact, AI cannot be empty, and (6.3) is true because if
A" is an open neighborhood of AI, a finite subunion of Uj B; covers D - A".
I
586 2.VII. Brownian Motion
This Gaussian joint density is that of a Markov process w~~(·) on the para-
meter interval [0, t], with initial value ~, value '1 at t, and transition density
(from (1 at time 51 to (2 at time 52' with 51 < 52 < t)
(7.2)
The joint density (7.1) is also that of a Markov process reversed in time on
[0, t] with initial value '1 at time t and value ~ at time 0 and transition density
(from (2 at time 52 to (1 at time 51' with 0 < 51 < 52)
(7.3)
(T2 5 (t - 5)
t
8. Andre Reflection Principle 587
The joint distribution of ~~(SI)' ~~(S2) is Gaussian with means and var-
iances as just evaluated and covariance 0"2 SI (t - S2)/t.
Suppose that N = 1 and that t is specified, and consider the process
defined by y(s) = wo(s) - swo(t)/t, 0 ~ s ~ t. The y(o) process is almost
surely continuous, and its finite-dimensional joint distributions are Gaussian
with zero means and
(7.4)
If y*(s) = ~is) - [~(t - s) + '1S ]/t, 0 ~ s ~ t, the y(o) and y*(o) processes
have the same finite-dimensional joint distributions, and it follows that there
is a choice of ~~(o), that is, a process with the specified finite-dimensional
distributions, with continuous sample functions having values ~ at time 0
and '1 at time t. In the following the notation w~~(o) will refer to such a
process on IRN except that the continuity condition may be weakened to
almost sure continuity. This process is sometimes called a Brownian bridge.
Denote expectations and probabilities for ~~ by E~~{o}, P~~{o}. If 4J is a
bounded Borel measurable function on (IRN )n and if 0 ~ SI < ... < Sn < t,
define x~ = 4J [w~(s I), ... , w~(sJ] and x~~ = 4J [ w~~(s I), ... , ~isn)]. These
are random variables defined on the probability spaces of w~(o) and ~~(o)
processes respectively. Then
(7.5)
that is, there is equality in (3.5). Since the left side of (8.2) is P{T ~ t},
the distribution of T is absolutely continuous relative to IN, with density
given by
Since the term on the right is trivially equal to P{w(t)EA'}, we have proved
P {sup w(s) < a, w(t) Ed,,} = [t(t,,,) - t(t,2a - ,,)]/1 (d,,) (" < a). (8.6)
s:St
Since the distributions involved here are continuous, "< a" and "~a" are
interchangeable in (8.6), and the corresponding remark is valid in the
preceding equations.
The preceding derivations are formally satisfactory but give less insight than
the following derivation of corresponding results in JRN, results that could
of course also have been derived by the above methods. Let D be a half-
space of jRN whose closure does not contain the origin, and let ,,' [A'] be
the reflection of a point" [subset A] of jRN in the bounding half-plane 1t
of D. Let {w('),jO(·)} be a Brownian motion in jRN from the origin, and let
Tbe the hitting time of 1t by w(·). The strong Markov property of Brownian
motion implies that the process {w(T + '), jO(T + .)} is a Brownian motion
9. Brownian Motion in an Open Set (N ~ I) 589
('lED), (8.7)
(8.8)
An almost surely continuous Markov process {z( 0), l§ (o)} with state space D
and transition function given by (9.1) will be called a Brownian motion in
D; the process {wD(o),§(o)} is a natural example. If l§(t) is the (1 algebra
generated by the null sets and §{z(s),s $ t}, then l§(o) is right continuous
according to Theorem VI.8. Depending on the context, it mayor may not
be useful to make the transition function stochastic by adjoining a trap point
toD.
Since the right side of (9.1) is at most P{w~(t)EA}, the measurep(t,~,o)
590 2.VII. Brownian Motion
In particular, 6D(t,~, '7) = 6(t,~, '7) when D = ~N. By the symmetry remark
closing Section 7 the function 6 D (t, 0, 0) is symmetric. Equation (7.5) yields
(c) e
The equation is true for IN almost every' when is fixed because
tJD is a transition density for Brownian motion in D.
In view of the inequality tJ D ~ tJ it follows from (9.6) that tJD(t,·,·) is a
continuous bounded function on D x D for each value of t. Moreover,
according to the analysis of the integrand in (9.5), the expectation on the
right in (9.5) is for fixed 17 a bounded function of (e, t) on D x ]0, + 00 [.
(9.7)
In Section IX.17 we shall identify tJD as defined by (9.7) with the Brownian
transition density function tJD defined in this section. The probabilistic
evaluation of parabolic measure to be made in Section IX.13 makes the
expectation in (9.5) the solution HJ of the parabolic Dirichlet problem on
D withfthe restriction to aD (Euclidean boundary) of tJ(·,·, 17). In this light
(9.5) can be interpreted as the Dirichlet solution construction of GDdescribed
in Section 1.XVIII.I.
e
Observe that according to (8.8), in which = 0, equation (9.8) is true with
the probability interpretation of tJDas a Brownian transition density function.
e
where w~(') is a space-[co] time Brownian motion from and S~ is the hitting
time of aD. From now on only the space-time Brownian motion is considered
unless the contrary is stated. We shall use the space-time notation introduced
in Section 2. The measure p(t, e,') is supported by D.-to and the set function
e,
A 1-+ jJ(t, A x {s - tn for A a Borel subset of D.- t is majorized by
(10.3)
ib(~1'~3) = f D S2
iD(~1'~2)ib(~2'~3)IN(de2)' ~i = (ej,Si), (10.4)
e3
satisfied identically for ~1 and in b with Sl > S2 > S3'
The condition that an extended real-valued positive universally measur-
able function u on b be excessive for space-time Brownian motion in b is
the validity of the inequality
JDS2
ib(~l' ~2)u(~2)IN(de2) :$ u(e 1) (10.5)
(10.6)
°
in b, invariant excessive for space-time Brownian motion in b - {('1, O)},
continuous and at the points of b - {('1,0)} with ordinate values :$0.
We shall show in Section IX.17 that 6D (s - t,e,'1) = Gb«e,S),('1,t». Even
without this identification the fact that 6D (-,·, '1) is superparabolic on band
parabolic on b - {('1, O)} follows from the fact to be proved in Section IX.8
that a space-time Brownian motion excessive function is superparabolic on
the set of points strictly below any point of finiteness of the function and that
a space-time Brownian motion invariant excessive function is parabolic on
the set of points strictly below any point of finiteness of the function. More
594 2.VII. Brownian Motion
The probabilities of these events are easily calculated using the reflection
principle. For example, paabO} is the probability that a w~(o) path reaches
b by time 1 after having hit a, or, reflecting the path in a at the hitting time
of a, and setting c = b - a
probn = 2LIp{w(t) > 2nc + b -~} - P{w(t) > (2n + 2)c - b +~)].
o
(11.4)
12. Probabilistic Evaluation of Parabolic Measure for an Interval 595
Just as (8.2) was strengthened into (8.5), so the condition W~(1) E d" can be
imposed on each term of (11.2) to obtain
00
and similarly
P{OaO', w~(t)Ed,,} =
o (11.6)
- t(1,(2n + 2)e + a - ~ + la - ,,1)]11 (d,,) (" E IR)
L [t(1,2ne -
00
(11.8)
sion will be given for N = 1 to simplify the notation. Suppose then that
D = ]a,b[.
-00
~)6(f,2nc +b - ~). (12.1)
The first hit of the segment of the lateral boundary with absicca value b is
at the point (b,s - 71,); so (12.1) can be interpreted to yield the distribution
density ofthe hitting point, and comparison with equation I.XV(9.1) shows
that this density is the density of parabolic measure, as asserted.
This identification of the parabolic measure Jib(e,') with the distribution
of the first hitting point of f)1J by a space-time Brownian motion from e
will be made for arbitrary open subsets 1J of iRN in Section IX.B. The
identification gives an intuitive interpretation of the fact (Section 1XVIII. I)
that the parabolic measure of a boundary subset relative to a reference
point vanishes if the set is above the reference point.
where the partial derivatives are evaluated at [w(t), t]. Thus it is plausible
that u must be coparabolic and that conversely the process u[ w(o), oJ is a
martingale in some local sense if u is coparabolic. Equivalently, u com-
pounded with space-time [cotime] Brownian motion is a martingale in some
local sense if and only if u is parabolic [coparabolic]. In particular (if u is
a function of the space variable), a function u on IR N composed with Brownian
motion is a martingale in some local sense if and only if u is harmonic.
The results suggested in this section will be formulated rigorously and
proved in later chapters.
Chapter VIII
1. Notation
Let {w(·), g;(.)} be a Brownian motion in ~, defined on some probability
space (Q, g;, P). It is supposed that g;(.) is right continuous and that g;(O)
contains the null sets. The Ito integral J~ </> dw will be defined for stochastic
processes </>(.) in the space r of not necessarily adapted to g;(.) real processes
{l/J(t), t E ~+} with the following property: there is a progressively measurable
process {</>('), g;(.)}, depending on l/J('), for which
for I} almost every t. In this chapter ds refers to Lebesgue measure I}. For
economy in later references absolute value signs are used in (1.1) and similar
contexts because the present discussion will be extended in Section 7 to cover
vector processes and processes with complex state spaces. Observe that a
process indistinguishable from one in r is itself in r. Let I} x P be the
completed indicated product measure on ~+ x Q, defined on the completion
of gjJ(~+) X g; relative to this product measure. According to Section 1.13,
if {</>('), g;('1} is an extended real-valued adapted process and if the function
</>(.) is I} x P measurable, then this process is in r if (1.1) is satisfied.
We metrize r by identifying two members </>(.) and l/J(') of r whenever
(1.2) is true for I} almost every t, thereby making r into a space ofequivalence
classes, and by defining (abbreviating the notation)
Here </>(.) and l/J(.) are progressively measurable, and we are adopting the
usual convention: the right-hand side of (1.3) is the distance between the
600 2. VIII. The Ito Integral
equivalence classes containing ¢(o) and t/J(o). In the following the reader is
asked to judge from the context whether notation like ¢(o) refers to an
individual process or to an equivalence class. It is also left to the reader to
verify the fact, which we shall not use, that r is complete in its metric.
The subset of r for which (1.1) is true with t = + 00 will be denoted by
f, and the subset of f for which
(1.5)
(1.6)
for all finite t, and there is convergence in the f metric if and only if (1.6)
is true for t = + 00. Here ¢n(o) and ¢(o) are chosen to be progressively
measurable members of their equivalence classes, in r or f as required.
There are sometimes formal advantages in having members of r defined
at the parameter value + 00. This can be effected for our purposes by defining
¢( + (0) arbitrarily, by defining IF( + (0) = IF, and leaving the r, f and r z
metrics unchanged.
Observe that if t/J is a bounded member of r, then t/J(o)¢(o) is in r or f
or r z if ¢(o) is. A useful special case is t/J(o) = 1ST , defined as the indicator
function of the stochastic interval [S, T].
As usual the definition of an integral is first given for a simple linear
class of integrands. In the present context this class, a subclass of r z, is the
class r o each of whose equivalence classes contains a process ¢(o) defined
as follows. There is a finite set 0 < t 1 < ... < tk < + 00 and corresponding
bounded random variables /1' ... ,h such that./j is IF(t) measurable and
that
2. The Size of f o 601
ift::;t 1 ,
if tj - 1 < t ::; tj , 2 ::;j::; k, (1.7)
if t > t k •
2. The Size of r 0
o 1'f t::;-,
I
m
f
U - 1l/ m .- I .
J-
if- < t ::; L, 1 <j::; nm,
m I/Inds
m m
U-2)/m
o if t > n.
(2.1)
L2- E{l
00
k
r/dist(x(o),y(o» = /\ sUPlx(/) - y(/)I}. (3.1)
1 t5k
The space f' is the subset ofr' for which almost surely Iim t_ oo x(t) = x( + (0)
exists and is finite. The f' metric is defined by strengthening (3.1) to
The space r~ is the subset of f' for which E {SUPt< + 00 Ix( 1)j2} < + 00. The
r 2metric is defined by strengthening (3.2) to
The spaces r', f/, and r; are complete in their metrics. When 4>(o)er, the
integral J~ 4> dw = x( I) will be defined for 0 ~ 1 < + 00 [or 0 ~ 1 ~ + 00 if
4>(o)e f] and will have the following properties.
(a) x(O) = 0 almost surely, and a version of x(t) can be chosen for each
1 in such a way that x(o) e r'. In the following it will be assumed that x(o)
is so chosen.
3. Properties of the Ito Integral 603
(b) The map 4>(0) HX(o) is linear and continuous from r into r', f into
f', and r 2 into r~ in terms of the metrics of the spaces involved.
(c) If T is a finite optional time, then
100
1 00
If 4>(0) is in f, the optional times need not be finite valued. It will sometimes
be convenient to use the notation S~ 4>dw for the left side of (3.5).
(d) Let Sand T be optional times with S :::;; T < + 00. If1 is a bounded
~(S) measurable random variable and if 4>(0) is in r, then
(3.7)
Then
(3.8)
and the process {x(T /\ (S + t)), ~(S + t),O :::;; t:::;; + oo} is an almost surely
continuous martingale. If 4>(0) and t/t(o) in r satisfy (3.7), then
(3.9)
[The integral S~ 4> dw is defined in (3.8) and (3.9) eve~ if T is infinite valued
because (3.7) implies that the process lST(o)4>(o) is in r.]
604 2.VIII. The Ito Integral
For 4>(0) in r define
(3.14)
and
as will be seen in Section 12, Example (b), by means of Ito's formula, but
the special case (3.16) will be needed before Ito's formula is derived.]
i
l k
x(t) = c/J dw = Ifj-l [w(t j 1\ t) - w(tj_l 1\ t)], o =s; t =s; + 00. (4.1)
o 2
Under this definition x(O) = 0, x(t) is .?F(t) measurable, and x(o) is a contin-
uous process, but we allow as other versions of the integral process every
process indistinguishable from that in (4.1). Furthermore, if to = 0, then
almost surely
t
E{ x(t)I.?F(tj_ I)}
E{Y.p(0)1.?F(0-1)}
1 = Y.p(O) a.s. if} = 1,
= Y.p(tj_I)E{exp [fj-l (w(t j) (4.4)
Now fj-l and w(tj) - w(tj _l ) are mutually independent, and whenever z
is a normally distributed random variable with mean 0 and variance (x,
E{exp(az)} = exp(a 2 (X/2). Hence the right side of (4.4) reduces to Y.p(tj - l ).
Thus {Y.p(t.), .?F(t.)} is a martingale, and it follows repeating an argument
just used that {yq,(o), .?F(o)} is a martingale.
606 2.VIII. The Ito Integral
(5.2)
P {~~~ II I~
cP dw l> + ;;2 J: cP 2dS} ~ 2e-l/~. (5.3)
(5.4)
and it follows that the map cPl-+ J~ cPdw is uniformly continuous from r 2
into r 2.
Proof of Section 3(c). (cl) In order to prove (3.4) either for q,(.) in r with
T < + 00 or for q,(.) in f with T::;; + 00, it is actually sufficient to prove (3.4)
for T bounded. In fact, if (3.4) is true for T bounded, then for general T,
Now when either q,(.) is in rand T < + 00 or q,(.) is in f and T::;; + 00, it is
true that limn.. oo x(T 1\ n) = x(T) almost surely and the integrand process
in (6.1) tends to the process 10T(')q,(') in the f metric so that
~~~ILoo 10Tq,dw -1
00
10TAnq,dWI
t
::;; ~~~sup 1f 10Tq,dw -
,,,0 0
it0 10TAnq,dW/ = O. (6.2)
Thus (3.4) is true. From now on in the proof of (3.4) we shall suppose that
Tis bounded and that q,(.) is in r.
(c2) If (3.4) is true for the optional time [T]n, it is true for T because
oo oo
limn.... 10ITln(·)q,(·) = 10T(')q,(') in the f metric and lim n.... x([T]n) = x(T)
almost surely.
(c3) Proof of (3.4) for q,(.) in roo According to (c2), it is sufficient to
prove (3.4) with T replaced by [T]n. At the possible cost of modifying the
representation (1.7) of q,(.) we can suppose that t. includes the values
{j 2 -n ,j E;r} in the interval [0, tkl Finally by linearity of the map q,(.) ~
J~ q, dw it is then sufficient to prove (3.4) for q,(') given by (1.7) with k = 2.
That is, we now suppose for f the indicator function of the :F(t 1) set
{[T]n> td that
(6.3)
in the r metric; so
plim IX(T) - xn(T)1
n~a:>
~ Plimsupl Jrr IOT4>-dw - Jr IOT4>ndwl = O.
n-+oo t 2:0 0 0
0 (6.4)
(t~+oo).
Since the process {xn(t), §(t), t S + oo} is a martingale, it follows that the
limit process is a martingale. Moreover
because this equation is valid for xi·) and 4>n(·). In the general case of
Section 3(f) if we apply what we have just proved to IST(·)4>(·), we find
[see (3.5)] that
is a martingale and that (3.8) is satisfied. Equation (3.9) is obtained from (3.8)
as usual by polarization. Since the martingale (6.5) is almost surely contin-
uous and right closed, the process remains a martingale when t is replaced
by S + t; so the process {x(T /\ (S + t» - xeS), §(S + t), t ~ + oo} is a
martingale; equivalently, {x(T /\ (S + t»,§(S + t), t ~ +oo} is a martin-
gale. 0
6. Proofs of the Properties in Section 3 609
~= inf {t: a; I 2
14>1 ds ~ IX}. (6.6)
Proof of Section 3(g). Let 4>(') be in r, and let {4>n(')' ne;r} be a sequence
in r o with limit 4>(') in the r metric. Then
lim
n-oo
r 4>ndw Jor 4> dw
Jo
=
in the r' metric; so plimn_ooY</>n(t) = y(t) for each t. The process {Y</>n('),
.?F(')} is a positive martingale, and an application of Fatou's lemma for
conditional expectations shows that {Y</>('), .?F(')} is a supermartingale. 0
Proof of Section 3(k). If b < + 00, replace 4>(') by 10b (')4>(') to obtain an
equivalent context in which we can suppose that b = + 00 and 4>(·)er2 . We
are to prove that {y</>(t), .?F(t), t =::; + oo} is a martingale; equivalently, since
this process is an (almost surely continuous) supermartingale with
E{y</>(O)} = 1, we are to prove that E{y</>( + oo)} = 1. According to Section
2, there is a sequence {4>n('), n e.:r} in r o with limit 4>(') in the r 2 metric
and satisfying
(6.8)
Hence
I = r
J(Sn=+OO}
y"q,( + co)dP + r
J(Sn<+OO}
Y"q,(Sn)dP
Proof of Section 3(j). If T" is defined by (6.6) and if 4>(') is in r, then the
process 4>(') lOT (.) satisfies the hypotheses of Section 3(k) because
"
a; I l
l4>l oT ds ~ lX
The spaces r', f', r; defined in Section 2 are used below, with the same
state space ~. It is left to the reader to check that at most minor modifications
of the proofs in Section 6 show that (a)-(l) in Section 3 are valid for N ~ I
under the following conventions. In (3.9) the integrand 4>l/J is to be interpreted
as the inner product ~~ 4>(j)l/JUl. In Section 3(1) y is to be interpreted as a
vector; the right side of (3.15) is to be interpreted as the inner product of
the vector y and the vector-valued integral; (3.16) is to be interpreted
correspondingly.
If (b) is true then under the hypotheses of (a) define z(o) as the almost surely
continuous martingale z(o) = E{zl3"(o)}, and then apply (b) and the condi-
tional expectation continuity theorem to find that
so
(8.3)
It follows that
(8.4)
whenever jj is an exponential polynomial of the form ~:=I cjk exp (iak') with
(Xreal and therefore that (8.4) is true whenever jj is a continuous periodic
function on R Since any continuous bounded function on IR is the point-
wise limit of a bounded sequence of continuous periodic functions (whose
periods may become infinite), (8.4) is true whenever II and/2 are continuous
and bounded on R It then follows that (8.4) is true when II and 12 are
the indicator functions of open subintervals of IR, and we conclude that
E{z!w(sl), W(S2)} = 0 almost surely. Replace the left side of (8.2) by
and proceed as above to find that E{zlw(s.)} = 0 almost surely for every
finite subset s. of IR+ and therefore for a countable dense subset of IR+
(conditional expectation continuity theorem). Hence by the almost sure
continuity of Brownian motion E{zlw(s),SEIR+} = 0 almost surely, equiv-
alently E{zlY:elR+ §(s)} = 0 almost surely, and since z is by hypothesis
YselR+ §(s) measurable, this vanishing conditional expectation is almost
surely z.
9. A Change of Variables 615
9. A Change of Variables
Review of the Inverses of Monotone Functions
Letfbe a function from IR+ into IR+ satisfying the following condition.
M. fis monotone increasing, right continuous, and limt_oof(t) = +00.
Define J(t) = inf {r: f(r) > t} for tE IR+. Then J saJisfies M, and J(t) :::;; r
if and only iff(r + e) > t whenever e > O. MoreoverJ = f Finally ./[f(r)] =
r if r is not a point of a constancy interval off, and f[f(r)] = r if r is not a
point of a constancy interval of j, that is, if r is not a discontinuity point off
{St :::;; r} = n
00
n=1
{Sr+l/n > t}. (9.1)
The process {S., ~(.)} is an adapted process whose sample functions satisfy
condition M. The filtration §(.) = ~(S,) is right continuous, and ~(O)
contains the null sets. Moreover {St:::;; r} E~(r) in view of (9.1) and the
right continuity of S•. Hence each random variable St is optional for §(.).
Furthermore ~(t) c §(St) for all t; that is, if A E ~(t), then An {St :::;; ex} E
§(ex) for all ex, equivalently,
00
for all ex and p. In fact (9.2) is trivial if t > P, whereas if t :::;; P, all the sets
in (9.2) are in ~(P).
(9.3)
In other words the problem is to show that the process {Yyq,(S.), !F(S.)} is a
martingale. Now according to Section 3(k), ift/l(o) = yl/>losp' the process
Extension to N > I
is only true almost everywhere for each t [which implies that (9.3) is true
almost surely simultaneously for all t.]
Application (a). If N ;;:: I and if 14>1 = 1 in Theorem 9, then S, = t, #(t) =
~(t), and w(t) = S~ 4> dw. We leave it to the reader to show that in this case
whenever VJEr (state space~) and (VJ4» is the scalar multiple of the vector
4> by VJ. More generally, if M(t) is for each t in ~+ an N x N orthogonal
matrix-valued random variable and if the component processes of M(-) are
in r, thenthe vector process {J~ M dw, ~(-)} is an N-dimensional Brownian
motion with parameter value (12.
I
Application (b). (N;;:: 1) Let 4>0(-) be a real vector process in r, and
define
<1>.(1, w) if l4>o(t,w)1 :F 0,
if l4>o(t,w)1 = 0,
4>k(t) = {4>(t) if t $; k,
(1, ... ,1) ift>k,
618 2.VIII. The Ito Integral
i
t
.
2
n
(czl (/ll_
(12 JI W(s), S] ds if lx = p,
~~~j~1 f U-lln !:ijn !:ijn - 0 0 (10.1)
1 if IX # p.
} (10.2)
Thus to prove (10.1) for lx = Pin the L 2 limit sense forfbounded it is suffi-
cient to prove
(l0.3)
10. The Role of Brownian Motion Increments 619
When the indicated square is multiplied out, each term has the form
{" I'
JU-l)nJ(k-l)n Ujn
(A (<1)2 -
2 -n t) ( Ukn
A(<1)2 -
2 -n t) , }5. k.
If} < k, the last factor is a random variable with expectation 0 and is inde-
pendent of the other factors. Hence the expectation of the term vanishes.
The terms with} = k yield
Jo
t
a.s.
The sum on the left side of (10.1) for ex = P differs from the sum with /
replaced by gm on a set of small probability when m is large. It follows that
(10.1) for ex = Pis true as stated.
To prove (10.1) for ex :F p with the limit in the L 2 sense for bounded 1/1
by c, observe that (for (1 = 1)
(10.5)
(ex :F P).
(10.6)
An application of the Borel Cantelli theorem yields Levy's theorem, that is,
(10.7)
620 2. VIII. The Ito Integral
and
I
¢(O) if t = 0,
¢ll(t) = ¢(tj - 1 ) if tj - 1 < t :s; tj,j :s; n,
¢(t) if t > b.
(11.1)
Theorem_ (a) If the restriction to [0, b] ofalmost every ¢(-) sample function
is bounded and II almost everywhere continuous, then
(11.2)
Proof (a) Under the hypotheses of(a) the usual reasoning in the discussion
of the Riemann integral yields
plim sup
.1(,,)-0 rsb
Irr (¢1l - ¢)dW\
Jo
= o. (11.4)
12. Ito's Lemma 621
Therefore (b) is true, and in fact (11.4) is true as an L 2 limit because the
map ~(o) ....... J~ ~ dw is continuous in the (r2 , r~) pair of metrics. 0
Integration by Parts
If ~(o) is in r and if the restriction to the interval [0, b] of almost every ~(o)
sample function is right continuous and of bounded variation, then
where for almost every point (J) of the basic measure space the integral on
Jt
the right is the Riemann-Stieltjes integral w(s, (J) ds~(s, (J). In fact the
hypotheses of Theorem II (a) are satisfied, and the sum in (11.1) is equal to
n
w(b)~(b) - w(a)~(a) - L w(tj) [~(tj) -
j=l
~(tj-l)]' (11.7)
which almost surely yields the right side of (11.6) when J(n) -. O.
OU 02 U
Uo = ot ' uij = O'1(i)O'1())
exist and are continuous. Before proving Ito's lemma we prove an important
special case: simultaneously for all t E IR + ,
622 2.VIII. The Ito Integral
and from now on relations like (12.1) will sometimes be written in the
corresponding differential form. It is sufficient to prove (12.1) to be valid
for fixed t because each side of(12.1) is the tth random variable of an almost
surely continuous process. Fix t and denotej2- nt by Sjn, so that
2n
u[w(t), t] - u[w(O), 0] = L {u[w(Sjn), Sjn] - U[W(Sjn), SU-l)n]}
j=1
n (12.2)
2
+ L {u[w(Sjn),SU-l)n] -
j=1
u[w(SU-1)n),SU-l)n]}'
The jth term in the first sum is U o [w(Sjn), Sjn] r n t up to an error which for
each continuous Brownian motion sample function is uniformly 0(2 -n) as j
varies and n -+ 00. Hence the first sum in (12.2) has the first integral in (12.1)
as almost sure limit when n -+ 00. The jth term in the second sum in (12.2)
. 'f A (a) _ (a)() (a)(
IS, 1 LJ.jn - W Sjn - W SU-l)n,
)
Localization
(12.1) is almost surely valid for t < S in the sense that if Do is an arbitrary
open relatively compact subset of D and if So is the hitting time of aDo by
w(o), then (12.4) is almost surely true on {W(O)E Do} if t is replaced by t 1\ So.
To see this, let U o be a C(2)(IR N ) extension of the restriction of u to Do. Then
an application of (12.4) to U o with t replaced by t 1\ So gives the desired
result.
We now turn to Ito's lemma. Let u and w(o) be defined as at the beginning
of this section. Let M be a strictly positive integer, and for I ~ m ~ M and
I ~ n ~ N let </>mn and tjlm be processes in r except that the integrability
requirement for tjlm is weakened: it is supposed only that almost every tjI(o)
sample function is integrable over finite intervals. Define x(o) = [X(l)(o), ... ,
xM(o)] by
du = Uo dt + L
M
U mdx(m) +-
(12
L
M
U mn dx(m) dx(n), (12.5)
m=l 2 m,n=l
where dx(m) dx(n) is to be interpreted as the formal product under the convention
(dt)2 = dtdw(n) = 0,
so that
It is sufficient to prove the lemma for </> and tjI in r o , given by representations
of the form (1.7) with a common partition:
In the interval [0, I I] the evaluation (12.6) is trivial. In the interval] II' 12 ]
A glance at the proof of the special case of Ito's lemma already treated
shows that it is applicable with the help of Section 3(d) to yield
which agrees with (12.6). The verification of (12.6) on the remaining inter-
vals ] Ij_I' I j ] is similar, and the verification on ] l ko + 00 [ is trivial.
with </> and '" as described above form an algebra. In fact, if dX i = </>i dw +
"'i dl
,
2
d(w") = nw"-I dw +; n(n - l)w"-2 dl.
EXAMPLE (c) (N ~ I). Recall (Section l.XV.3) that the space-time Hermite
polynomials
•
are coparabolic and satisfy l.XV(3.8). Define Hm 1 "'m N j as
H mj "'mrv with
I {0 ifmj = O.
130 The Composition of the Basic Functions of Potential Theory with Brownian Motion 625
Then
N
dHm• omN[W(I), I] = ~ mjHm... mNjdWj(I).
0 0 o
)=1
Thus in the stochastic calculus based on the Ito integral the process
{Hm• om [W(I), I], IE jR+} plays the role of the product ofpowersm t , ••• ,mN
0 0
E {I I
grad ul 2 dS} < + 00 (13.3)
for all I > 0. In particular, if u is harmonic, the process {u[ w(·)], ~(.)} is a
martingale if (13.3) is satisfied, for example, if u is a harmonic polynomial.
More generally, if !:iu :::; 0, that is, if u is a (:(2) superharmonic function, and
if (13.3) is satisfied, the process u[w(·)] is the sum of a martingale and an
adapted process with decreasing sample functions and is therefore a super-
martingale if its random variables are integrable. If u is a (:(2) function from
an open subset D of jRN into jR, let Do be an open relatively compact subset
of D, choose ~ in Do, and let So be the hitting time of oDo by w(·). There is
a (:(2) function u' on JRN, with compact support, extending UIDo' and if the
preceding argument is applied to u', we find that the process in (13.2) with
u replaced by u' is a martingale. This process, stopped at time So, is therefore
a martingale, and in particular if u is [super] harmonic on D, the process
{u[ w(So /\ I)]; ~(I), I ::; + oo} is a [super] martingale. In the superharmonic
context the supermartingale inequality at times 0, + 00 yields the inequality
u(~) 2: E{u[ w(So)]}, with equality in the harmonic function context. Hence
626 2. VIII. The Ito Integral
and {j[ z(So 1\ t)]; fF(t), t ;:5; + oo} is a martingale. An adaptation of Appli-
cation (b) in Section 9 shows that if we define
since w(t) - w(s) is independent of F(s) for s < t. The second process is a
martingale when N = I and therefore when N ~ I because s < t implies that
E{[w(t) - '7]2IF(s)}
= E{[w(t) - w(s)]2IF(s)} + 2[w(s) - '7]E{w(t) - w(s)IF(s)} + [w(s) - '7]2
= (12(t - s) + [w(s) - '7]2 a.s. (1.2)
The third process is a martingale (for any complex vector y) because if s < t
628 2.IX. Brownian Motion and Martingale Theory
(1.4)
yields
2
N 13 ]
E{expi<f3, w(t) - w(s» I~(s)} = exp [ _(J2(t - s) ~ ~ a.s. (1.5)
(1.6)
(1.7)
which implies
P{w~(S~)=b} =-b-'
e-a (1.8)
-a
I. Elementary Martingale Applications 629
Thus the probability that a Brownian path from ~ in ]a, b[ reaches the
boundary first at b is the solution of Laplace's equation on ]a, b[ with
boundary limit I at band 0 at a. In other words in this elementary case the
distribution of w~(') at the first hitting place on the boundary is harmonic
measure on the boundary relative to the initial point ~. This evaluation of
harmonic measure will be extended to the Borel boundary subsets of an
arbitrary Greenian subset D of IR N in Section 13. That is, if w~(·) is an N-
dimensional Brownian motion from ~ in D and if S~ is the hitting time of
aD by w~(')' it will be shown that S~ is almost surely finite when N = 2 and
that under the convention w~( + (0) = 00 when N > 2 the harmonic measure
evaluation (1.8) generalizes to
(1.8')
(1.9)
and therefore
(1.11)
(1.12)
As in the case N = I, the function ~ 1-+ E {S~} is the solution of the equation
q2 N !:iu = - 2 with the boundary limit function 0 in the sense that
q2 NE {S~} + I ~ 12 is the harmonic function which is the PWB solution of the
harmonic function Dirichlet problem with boundary function '11-+ 1'11 2 .
Application of M3. Let N = I, let w(o) be a Brownian motion from the
origin, choose ex> 0, and let Tbe the hitting time of {ex} by w(o). The density
of the distribution of T is given by VII (8.3) and will now be derived again
using the martingale M3. The optional time Tis almost surely finite because
according to the application of MI above the probability that a Brownian
path from 0 hits ex before -c (with c> 0) is cj(c + ex), which has limit I
when c - + 00. Equating expectations of the random variables of M3 at
times 0 and T /\ t yields
(1.13)
Take y real and strictly positive, so that the integrand is at most exp (yex).
When t - + 00 (1.13) becomes
(1.14)
that is
(1.15)
This equation specifies the distribution of Tby way of its Laplace transform.
Ito integral and incidentally gain insight into the space-time Hermite poly-
nomials. Since every space-time coparabolic polynomial is a linear combina-
tion of space-time Hermite polynomials, it is sufficient to consider these as
defined in Section l.XV.3 by
iT = (~, t)
(2.1)
with {w(·), ~(.)} a Brownian motion in IR N from the origin, and we shall
prove that the process {Hm, ... mN[w(.)],~(,)} is a martingale.
To prove this fact, define Ylt) = exp [< y, w(t) >-lyI2(T2 t/2] as in VIII
(3.10) so that
(2.2)
ifm. = n.,
(2.3)
otherwise.
For fixed y and t the series in (2.2) is a series of orthogonal random variables
with mean square limit sum Ylt). Thus integration to the limit with respect
to the probability measure is legitimate. Now the process {< y, w(·», ~(.)}
is a Brownian motion with variance parameter lyI2(T2; so (Section 1, Example
M3) the process {Yl'), ~(.)} is a martingale. The validity of the martingale
equality for this process is an identity in y and implies the validity of the
martingale equality for each process {Hm,'''m [w(·)],~(·)}, and each of
these processes is therefore a martingale. The NL 2 martingale maximal in-
equality (Theorem 111.11) together with (2.2) implies that for b > 0
y(N)mN . • 12 }
Jk
00 y(l)m,
This inequality implies that almost surely the partial sums in (2.2) converge
uniformly for t :s; b, Iyl :s; b l for each pair b, b l ·
Harmonic Polynomials
(3.1)
Application to Potentials
Jlli 2
J(i~-":S11
• = (4(12t)-IJ.1.(1R 2) < +00.
the last line is finite because the potential of the projection of Jl on the
exterior of B(~, ex) is harmonic on that disk and so is finite at ~.
Parabolic Context
(3.6)
We have seen in Section VII.6 that almost every path of a Brownian motion
in IR hits every point of IR at arbitrarily large parameter values. When N > I
we shall now show that almost no path of a Brownian motion in IR N hits a
specified point" of IR N at a strictly positive parameter value. It is sufficient
to consider Brownian motions from a point of IR N . The function u = G(",·)
is superharmonic on IR N with value + 00 at ". This function is positive when
N> 2 and satisfies the integrability condition (3.1) for every point ~ (" not
excluded) when N = 2. If {w(·),§'(·)} is a Brownian motion from ~, the
process {u[ w(·)], §,(.)} is therefore a supermartingale except that the param-
eter value 0 is to be excluded if ~ = ". This supermartingale is almost surely
continuous, so (Section IV.I) almost every sample function is finite valued.
Hence almost no w(·) path ever hits" except when ~ = " and the parameter
value is O. It follows that if N> 1 and if A is a countable subset of IR N ,
almost no path of a Brownian motion ever hits A at a strictly positive param-
eter value. This result will be extended to polar sets A in Section 5.
4. Hitting of an F. Set 635
(4.1)
Parabolic Context
Proofof(c). Let Bbeadisk, and let u(~, B) be the probability that a Brownian
motion w~(-) from ~ ever hits B. According to Section 4, the positive function
u(-,B) is superharmonic on 1R 2 , and it follows (Section 1.11.13) that u(-,B)
is identically constant, necessarily identically 1 because this function is 1 on
B. Thus almost every Brownian path from ~ hits B at a strictly positive time.
If s > 0, the process {w~(s + t), t E IR +} is a Brownian motion with initial
distribution the distribution of w~(s), and so almost every Brownian path
hits B after time s; that is, almost every Brownian path from a point of 1R 2
hits B at arbitrarily large parameter values and therefore hits every disk
with rational radius and rational center at arbitrarily large parameter values.
Part (c) follows. 0
Part (c) implies that the cluster set of almost every plane Brownian path
as the parameter value becomes infinite is the whole plane. According to
Theorem 10 below, (c) is true with "disk" replaced by "analytic nonpolar
set. "
Theorem 5 exhibits the special nature of dimensionality 2 in classical
potential theory. Dimensionality 1 is also special, for example, in that only
the empty set of IR is polar; so Theorem 5(a) becomes trivial when N = 1.
Theorem 5(c) is almost as trivial because almost every Brownian path is
unbounded positively and negatively. On the other hand the cases N = 1,2
are not special for the parabolic version of Theorem 5.
Parabolic Context
Theorem 5(a) is true in the parabolic context, that is, almost no space-time
Brownian path meets a parabolic-polar set at a strictly positive time. The
proof of Theorem 5(a) is applicable, and simpler in the parabolic context
in that the proof given above for N > 2 is valid in the parabolic context for
N;::: 1. The parabolic version of Theorem 5(b) is trivial: if w(-) is a space-
time Brownian motion limt_cx> ord w(t) = - 00. See Section 15 for the hitting
of a parabolic-semipolar set by space-time Brownian motion.
See Section 8 for the converse theorem. The condition that u be excessive is
(a) tD(t,·,u):s;u,
(6.1)
(b) limtD(t,·,u)=u,
/.... 0
and we show first that (6.1b) and the finiteness of tD(t,·,u) follow from
(6.1a). For each point ~ of D let {w~(·),~(-)} be a Brownian motion in D
from ~, with lifetime S)., (Section VII.9); for example, this process can be a
Brownian motion in IR killed at the hitting time S~ of fJD. We can assume
that ~(O) contains the null sets and that ~(.) is right continuous. Since u
is lower sernicontinuous and positive and w~(·) is almost surely continuous,
Fatou's lemma yields
and therefore (6.1a) implies (6.1 b). The finiteness of tD(t,~, u) follows from
(6.la) ifu(O < + 00. Ifu(~) = + 00, let B be a ball with center ~ and closure
in D. The function 'tBU is positive and superharmonic on D, finite on B,
equal to u on D - B. Apply (6.1a) to 'tBU to find that tD(t,~, 'tBU) < + 00
and therefore
in view of the fact that u is IN integrable over B. Thus to prove the theorem,
it is sufficient to prove (6.1a).
In the following proof we refine an example given in Section VIA. Let
B.(,,) be the ball with center" in D and radius € 1\ (I" - fJDI/2), in particular,
of radius € if D = IRN . Choose a point" at which u is finite, and define
To = 0, n >0.
The function T1 is optional for ~(.) because T1 is the hitting time by the
almost surely continuous process {w~(·), ~(.)} of a closed set. The function
Tz - T1 is the hitting time of a closed set by the almost surely continuous
process
(6.5)
{u[w~(t)]l{s >t};~(t),tEIR+}
~
Parabolic Context
EXAMPLE. Let {w(o), jO(o)} be a Brownian motion in 1R 3 from the origin, let
¢o be a point of 1R 3 other than the origin, and define u( ¢) = I~ - ~o 1-1. Then
u is a positive superharmonic function on 1R 3 , and (by Theorem 3 or Theorem
6) the process {u[w(o)],jO(o)} is an almost surely continuous supermartin-
gale, trivially right closable by O. This supermartingale has the following
properties.
(a) u[w(o)] is L 2 bounded (and therefore uniformly integrable because
the function n ...... ,2 is a uniform integrability test function on IR +). In fact,
if B = B(~o, l~oI/2) and if 6(t, 0 = 6(t, 0, ~), then
f {w(t)ED;l3_Bj
u2[w(t)]dP = r
JD;l3_B
6(t, ~)I~ - ~ol-213(d~) ~ 41~ol-2,
(6.6)
f {W(tlEB}
u2[w(t)]dP~ (6(t,~)I~-~ol-213(d~)=231tI~oI6(t,~).
JB
(b) limt_oou[w(t)] = 0 almost surely because [by Theorem 5(b)]
limt _ oo w(t) = 00 almost surely.
(c) Choose fJ < leol, and let TlJ be the hitting time of oB(eo' fJ) by w(o).
Then, under the convention that u[ w( + 00)] = 0, the process
and therefore the process in (e) is a potential which in view of (c) is a local
martingale and as such (Theorem V.12) is singular.
(h) The process in (e) is not in the class D. In fact, if this process were
in D, we could go to the limit (<5 - 0) in (d) to find, since
limP{u[w(T~)] = O} = I,
~ ...o
(b) The processes {x~(·), ~(.)} and {x~(·), ~(.)} are almost surely right
continuous supermartingales except that the parameter value 0 is to
be omitted if u(e) = + 00. (The second process will be shown in
Section II to be almost surely continuous.)
(c) Ifu = up or u = um.. the limit in (a) vanishes almost surely. Ifu = Umqb,
the process {x~(·), ~(.)} is a uniformly integrable martingale.
(d) u(e) ~ Umqb(e) = E{limtts~u[w~(t)J}.
Observation. When S~ ::s; t ::s; + 00, the random variable x~(t) can be de-
fined arbitrarily on the null set on which the limit in (a) does not exist. Note
that if u(e) = + 00, the function u is necessarily continuous at so x~(·) e;
and x~(·) are almost surely continuous at the parameter value 0 in this case,
even though this parameter value must be excluded in the supermartingale
assertion.
This random variable is the hitting time of the Euclidean boundary by w~(·).
The equivalent definition in the theorem was formulated to stress that the
theorem does not involve any specific boundary of D. When N> 2, the
hypothesis that D is Greenian reduces to the hypothesis that D is nonempty
and open. In this case S~ may be infinite valued with strictly positive proba-
bility and, in fact, is almost surely + 00 if D = IR N . When N = 2, the hypo-
thesis that D is Greenian, that is, (Theorem l.V.6) that 1R 2 - D is not polar
and that D is not empty, is made to avoid trivialities. In fact, if D is not
empty and not Greenian, then a positive superharmonic function on D is
necessarily identically constant; so the theorem is trivially true. Finally
according to Section to below, S~ < + 00 almost surely when N = 2 and D
is Greenian.
the parameter value 0 is omitted when u(e) = + 00. Throughout the follow-
ing proof we assume that u(e) < + 00; the modifications to be made in the
arguments when u( e) = + 00 will be obvious. Let u. be an increasing sequence
of finite-valued positive continuous superharmonic functions on D with
limit u (Theorem l.IV.lO). Denote by x~~(·) the primed process (7.1) with u
replaced by Un' According to what we have just proved, the process
{x~~(·), ~(.)} is a supermartingale, almost surely right continuous because
w~(·) is almost surely continuous. Thus the process {x~(·), ~(.)} is the limit
of an increasing sequence of almost surely right continuous supermartin-
gales, x~(t) = limn...."" x~~(t), and is therefore almost surely right continuous
(Theorem IVA). Since an almost surely right continuous supermartingale
almost surely has finite left limits (Theorem IV.I), it follows that (a) is true.
Thus x~(') can be defined by (7.1) and is almost surely right continuous. Let
D. be an increasing sequence of open relatively compact subsets of D with
e
union D and with in Do, and let Sn~ be the hitting time of aDn by w~(·).
The x~~(') process stopped at Sn~, that is, the process
when 0 s; s < t. Furthermore, for each parameter value t, limn..."" x~~(t 1\ Sn~) =
x~(t) almost surely. Apply Fatou's lemma for conditional expectations
in (7.2) when n -+ 00 to find that the almost surely right continuous process
{x~(')' g-~(.)} is a supermartingale. (According to Theorem 11 below, this
process is actually almost surely continuous.) 0
Proof of (c) and (d). Denote the expectation in (d) by u'(~). The supermar-
tingale inequality for x~(') at the pair of times 0, + 00 yields u ~ u'. The
reader is invited to prove, without analytic set theory, that u' is Borel mea-
surable. It follows from the general theory in Section VI.6 that u' is univer-
sally measurable, which is all we shall need. If B(e, (5) c D and if T is the
hitting time of aB(e, (5) by w~(·), the strong Markov property of Brownian
motion implies that w~(T + .) is a Brownian motion with initial distribution
the distribution of w~(T), the uniform distribution on aB(e, (5) in view of the
spherical symmetry of a Brownian motion about its initial point. Hence
This vanishing can be phrased in various ways. For example, in view of the
Riesz decomposition of a positive superharmonic function u on a Greenian
set D the function is a potential if and only if GMDu = 0; equivalently
(Section l.VIII.11), when B. is an increasing sequence of open relatively
compact subsets of D with union D, the positive superharmonic function u
is a potential if and only if
lim 'CB"u
n-+(()
= n-oo
lim JlB,,(.' u) = O.
The function u is positive and harmonic on D and has limit 0 at every bound-
ary point except' ; so although u is not a potential, u has limit 0 along almost
every Brownian path from a point of D to the boundary.
8. Excessive and Invariant Functions for Brownian Motion 645
Parabolic Context
Theorem 7 and its proof translate directly into the parabolic context.
Observe, however, that "right continuity" will not be strengthened below
to "continuity" in the parabolic context. That is, if u is a positive super-
parabolic function on an open subset b of ~N, then the parabolic context
analog of the process x~(') is almost surely right continuous but not neces-
sarily almost surely continuous, as shown by an example in Section 12.
See Section 6 for the (partial) converse theorem. It can be assumed in the
proof that D is connected. Suppose first that u is excessive continuous and
e
bounded on D, and let be a point of D. Then if {w~(·), ~(.)} is a Brownian
e
motion in D from and if x~(') is defined by (7.1), the pro~ess {x~('), §~(.) }
is an almost surely right continuous supermartingale. If B(e, (5) c D and if
T(<5) is the hitting time of oB(e, (5) by the Brownian motion, the supermartin-
gale inequality for times 0 and T(<5) yields the superharmonic function
e,
inequality u(e) ~ L(u, (5) because w~(T(<5» is uniformly distributed on
oB(e, (5) (spherical symmetry of Brownian motion about its initial point).
Hence u is superharmonic. In the general case define
(8.1)
J II~-~I <ell
U('1)6D(t,~, '1)IN(d'1) ~ (27U1 2t)-N/2 f
(I~-~I <ell
u('1)IN(d'1)
and therefore tends to 0 when t -+ + 00. The first integral in (8.2) increases
to L(u,~, b) when t -+ + 00, and since u is locally IN integrable, it follows
that u is harmonic, as asserted.
Parabolic Context
(9.1)
Theorem. (a) Let w(·) be a Brownian motion in 1R 2 , and let A be a plane set
which is not inner polar (for example, A may be analytic and nonpolar). Then
almost every w(·) path hits A at arbitrarily large parameter values.
(b) If a plane open set D is Greenian, almost every Brownian path from a
point of D hits the boundary. If D is not Greenian, almost no Brownian path
from a point of D hits the boundary.
Proofof (a). It can be assumed that w(·) = w~(') is a Brownian motion from
e.
some point It can also be assumed that A is compact and nonpolar. Then
its complement D is Greenian (Theorem I.V.6). Choose any point" in the
e.
same open connected component of D as The function u = GD (",·) /\ I
is a positive nonconstant continuous superharmonic function on D. Accord-
ing to Section 6, if S~ is the hitting time of oD, the process {u[ w~(t)] llse t },
t E IR+} is a supermartingale. The sample functions of this supermartingale
are almost all right continuous, even continuous except for a possible jump
at the parameter value S~ if S~ < + 00. Such a supermartingale has almost
surely a limit as the parameter becomes infinite (Section 111.13). If
P{S~ = + oo} > 0, there is a w~(') path with the following properties:
e
Let D be a Greenian subset oflRN , let be a point of D, let w~(') be a Brownian
e,
motion from and let S~ be the hitting time of oD (Euclidean boundary).
When N = 2, this optional time is almost surely finite according to Theorem
10. When N> 2, lim t .... "" w~(t) = 00 almost surely, and it is convenient to
II. Continuity of the Composition of a Function with Brownian Motion 649
define w~( + 00) = 00. It will be shown in Section 13 that for N "? 2 the
distribution of w~(S~) is the harmonic measure J.tD(e, e).
[0, bE. Hence (under the present hypothesis that A. = IN) for every b > 0
almost every u[wi')] process sample function is continuous, where defined,
on the parameter interval [0, b[ and therefore on IR+. Referring back to
e
Section VI.6 again, it follows that for IN almost every in IR N this sample
function property holds for u[ w). (.)] when A. is supported by {e} and therefore
holds for u[wi')] when A. is absolutely continuous relative to IN' If now
w(') is a Brownian motion in IR N with an arbitrary initial distribution and
if r > 0, the process w(r + .) is a Brownian motion with an initial distribution
absolutely continuous relative to IN' The theorem follows for parameter
values ~ r and therefore as stated.
Parabolic Context
According to Section 7, if x~(') is the parabolic context version of the process
defined in (7.1), the process {xe('), ~(.) is an almost surely right continuou;s
supermartingale except that the parameter value 0 is to be omitted if u(e)
= + 00. It follows that except possibly at the parameter value 0, the xH')
sample functions are almost surely finite valued with finite left limits. It is
u
left to the reader to check that more generally if is any superparabolic
function on an open subset of IR N and if w(·) is a space-time Brownian
motion on IR N , then except possibly at the parameter value 0, almost every
u[w(')] sample function (where defined) is finite valued and right continuous
with finite left limits. As the following example shows these sample functions
need not be continuous.
then the process {x~(t), ~(t), 0:::;; t:::;; + oo} is an almost surely con-
tinuous uniformly integrable martingale.
Proof of (b). Equation (13.1) for PWB resolutive f follows from (a) since
Hf = J1.D(·,f). To prove the rest of (b) we first prove that for each t ~ 0
(13.3)
This equation is trivial on the set {S~ ~ t}. On the complementary set
{S~ > t} the Markov property of Brownian motion implies that the right-
hand side of (13.3) is almost surely E{f[ w~(S~)lw~(t)}. Since the process
w~(t+·) is a Brownian motion with initial distribution the distribution of
w~(t). this conditional expectation is the expectation offat the first hit of aD
by a Brownian motion from w~(t). In view of (a) this expectation is almost
surely Hf [ w~(t)]. Thus (13.3) is true and shows that {x~(·). ~(.)} is an almost
surely right continuous martingale. uniformly integrable because it is right
closed. a family of conditional expectations of a given random variable.
Since this martingale is almost surely right continuous. it must almost surely
have left limits at all points; so the limit in (13.2) exists. (Alternatively apply
Theorem 7 as in the above observation to obtain the existence of this limit).
To identify the limit asf[w~(S~)]. we can apply Theorem VII.4 which states
that an almost surely right continuous martingale relative to a suitably
defined filtration of a Brownian motion is almost surely continuous. but we
can also give the following more elementary direct proof. Observe that in
the notation of the proof of Theorem 7 it is clear that W~(Sk~) is Yooo ~(Sn~)
measurable for all k; so limk .... oo W~(Sk~) = w~(S~). and therefore also f[ w~(S~)]
are Yooo ~(Sn~) measurable. It now follows from this measurability and the
conditional expectation continuity theorem that
(13.4)
that is. limn.... oo Hf [ w~(Sn~)] = f[ w~(S~)] almost surely. and (b) is now com-
pletely proved. 0
Parabolic Context
Theorem 13 translates directly into the parabolic context with no change in
proof.
14. Probabilistic Evaluation of Reductions 653
that is,
(14.2)
Observation (a). Equations (14.1) and (14.1 sm) make obvious many of
the reduction properties which are not at all obvious from their potential
theoretic context, for example, the countable additivity of the function
vl-+R~ [Section l.VI.3(f)].
Observation (b). The proof of (14.1) and (14.1sm) for compact A given
below involves neither analytic set theory nor capacity theory, and since
these equations are true for A an Fa set if true for A compact, it follows that
the proof of these equations for A an Fa set involves neither analytic set
theory nor capacity theory.
Observation (c). The right side of (14.3sm) defines a superharmonic func-
e
tion of according to Section 9. More generally the function defined by the
right side of (14.1sm) is excessive for Brownian motion (Section VI.l2) and
654 2.IX. Brownian Motion and Martingale Theory
4>o(A) = inf {4>o(B): B ::> A, B open} = inf {4>(B): B ::> A, B open} ;:::: 4>(A).
lim v[ w~(s)]
sts~
exists almost surely, and we define v[ w~(t)] for S~ ~ t < + 00 as this limit,
so that (Section 7) {v[w~(')]'~(')} is an almost surely continuous super-
martingale. LetA be a Borel subset of D, and define A = {(t, w): w~(t, w)EA}.
The set A is nearly predictable because w~(·) is a nearly predictable process.
In the classical context R+vA is a positive superharmonic function on D, and
we define
and in particular,
(14.5)
To prove (14.4), observe that if z(') is the w~(') process killed at Tg D , then
(strong Markov property) z(T/ + .) is a Brownian motion process killed
at Tr - T~A with initial distribution that of Z(T~A), of total value ~ I. The
hitting time of B by this process is T{B - T( Thus the right side of(14.4) is
P{Tt=O}=1 (15.1)
along with the corresponding relation for the inferior limit. For general D'
a point '1' of D' is a fine cluster value of u at ~ if and only if '1' is a cluster
value of u along almost every w~(') path back to ~, and u has fine limit '1'
at ~ if and only if liml_ou[w~(t)] = '1' almost surely. Recall that a point
'1' is a cluster value of u along either almost no or almost every w~(') path
back to ~ and that P{limr_ o u[ w~(t)] exists} is either 0 or I, and in the latter
case this limit is almost surely constant, that is, a single point '1'.
Parabolic-Fine Topology
According to Theorem 14, the distribution of W~(T~A) for T~A < T!D is
~t(e, 0). Observe that on the one hand for T~A < T$D the process W~(T~A + 0)
is a Brownian motion with initial distribution that of W~(T~A) and on the
other hand for T~A < T£D and w~(Tt) not in A the set of strictly positive
values of t with w~(Tt + t) in A must have limit point O. Hence according
to Theorem 15 and the strong Markov property of Brownian motion, the
distribution ofw~(Tt) for T~A < T$D, that is, the measure ~t(e, 0), is supported
by the trace on D of the fine closure A u AI of A. This reasoning in the
parabolic context yields the corresponding result for the support of a swept
measure in that context. These results have already been derived non-
probabilistically in Sections l.XI.l4 and l.XVIII.B. In the classical context
but not in the parabolic context we can go further. In fact (classical context)
almost no w~(o) path hits the polar set A - AI; so ~t(e, 0) must be supported
by AI, as proved nonprobabilistically in Section l.XI.l4. A simple time
reversal argument shows that W~(T~A) is almost never a fine interior point
e e
of A if E D - AI; so for such a point the distribution ~t(e, 0) is supported
by D n alAI, as was proved nonprobabilistically in Section l.XI.l8.
induction, defining Tp+1 ;S; Tp+2 ;S; .••. Observe that E{Ty} = E{Ty+d if
and only if Ty = c almost surely; so there is a countable ordinal y such that
Ty = c almost surely, and it follows that almost every w(·) path meets A
at most countably often in the parameter interval ]0, c[, as was to be proved.
Since (Section I.XVIII.l2) a parabolic-semipolar set is also coparabolic
semipolar, a parabolic-semipolar set is a countable union of Borel sets
which are both parabolic thin and coparabolic thin at every point of fRN,
so we could have supposed in the preceding proof that A has this property.
Under this hypothesis on A it follows easily that P{U:'=1 {Tn = c}} = I in
the preceding proof; so transfinite induction could have been avoided.
. Iw(t)1
hm sup = I a.s. (15.2)
1-0 (20- 2tlogllogtl)I/2
almost surely for all sufficiently small strictly positive values of t, depending
on the Brownian path, but when c = I, there are almost surely arbitrarily
small strictly positive values of t for which there is equality in (15.3). This
result is a restatement in probability language of the significance of Section
I.XVIII.6, Examples (d) and (e). To see this, observe that on the one hand
according to Example (d) when c = I, the open set
(16.1)
at (~, t).
If u is an arbitrary not identically + 00 IX-excessive function, the decom-
position u = up + Umqb + Ums of the positive superparabolic function U into
its potential, quasi-bounded parabolic, and singular parabolic components
is invariant under a translation (11, t) 1-+ (11, t + c). Hence, if v is anyone of
the above three components,
u(~) = E{lime-atU[w~(t)]}.
tts~
(16.2)
Theorem. Let D be a nonempty open subset of iRN , and let i v be the transition
density of space-time Brownian motion in D.
662 2.IX. Brownian Motion and Martingale Theory
Proof (a) Assertion (a) is true if iJ = IR N because then both sides of the
e,
equality in (a) reduce to 6(s - t, 11). In the general case 66 is given by
VII(lO.3), and according to the probabilistic evaluation of parabolic measure
in Section 13, equation VII(lO.3) means that for fixed '1, t6(e, '1) is equal
e, e
t06(s - t, '1) less the parabolic Dirichlet solution on iJat for the boundary
function 6(' - t,', '1) (defined as 0 at the point ex:> if iJ is unbounded). Since
G6 can also be expressed in terms of 6 in this way (Section l.XVIII.l), (a)
is true.
Assertion (b) is a specialization of (a) requiring no separate proof. 0
t
Observation (a). The transition density 6 satisfies two differential equa-
tions: t6(', '1) is parabolic on iJ - {'1}, that is, .1~t6(e, '1) = 0 there; t6(e,')
is coparabolic on iJ - e, that is, J.~t6(e, '1) = 0 there. These equations are
called, respectively, the backward and forward equations of the space-time
Brownian motion because they refer, respectively, to initial and later posi-
tions. If iJ = D x IR with D a Greenian subset of IRN the transition density
e,
6D also satisfies two differential equations: 6D(t, 11) defines a parabolic
e
function of (e, t) and one of (11, t) for :F '1. This formulation obscures the
difference between the backward and forward equations, however. The
point is that 6D(S-t,e,'1) is parabolic in (e,s) (backward equation) and
coparabolic in ('1, t) (forward equation) for (e, s) :F ('1, t).
Observation (b). It was proved in Section l.XVII.18 that if iJ =D x IR
with D a Greenian subset of IR N , then
(17.1)
for aN as specified in that section. We shall now sketch how (17.1) can be
derived from the probabilistic definition of 6D in Section VII.9 without
using the potential theory derivation. Observe first that for N ~ 3 equality
(17.1) follows from the evaluation of 6D in VII(9.5). In fact (17.1) is true
if D = IR N , in which case 6D = 6, and on integration VII(9.5) becomes
in view of the fact that w~(S~) has distribution J.l.D(e, .). The bracketed quantity
was identified with GD(e, '1) in Section l.VIII.3. When N = 2, first let D
be a half-plane D+. We have evaluated GD + in l. XVII (I 8.3) and in VII(9.8)
18. Excessive Measures for Brownian Motion 663
we have evaluated the Brownian transition density from the origin as initial
point for a half-plane not containing the origin. This evaluation is easily
adapted to give the expression l.XVII(18.4) for the transition density of
Brownian motion in a half-plane. Equation (17.1) can now be verified for
D = D+. When D c D+ , the evaluation
(17.3)
derived as VII(9.5) was, is then integrated to prove that (17.1) is true for
D c D+ , and therefore surely if D is an arbitrary nonempty open bounded
plane set. Hence, applying this result to each member of an increasing se-
quence of bounded open subsets of an arbitrary Greenian set D, with union
D, yields (17.1) in the general case when N = 2. The case N = 1 is treated
similarly. Observe that the above argument when N ~ 3 is simpler than the
argument given in Section lXVII.18 because parabolic measure is available
in the present context.
Application to Energy
J1.(A) = L
udlN • (18.1)
(t > 0) (18.2)
(18.3)
for all s > 0, t > 0, YJED. Hence for fixed ~ the left side of (18.3) increases
as t decreases. Define u'(YJ) as the limit of this left side when t -+ O. Then
u' ~ u IN almost everywhere on D, and there must be equality IN almost
everywhere because the left side of (18.2) has limit p.(A) when t -+ O. The
function u is uniquely defined up to an IN null set, and we now replace u
by u'. This change does not affect the left side of(18.3); that is, we now have
u' = u, and u is obviously excessive. Conversely, if u is a 6D -excessive function
and is not identically + 00, that is, if u is a positive superharmonic function
on D, then u is locally IN integrable, and using again the symmetry of 6D( t, ., .),
we find that
(18.5)
with the obvious convention for uncountable sums. In the following "mea-
sure on~" refers to a measure defined in this way, but we make no hypotheses
on the finiteness of it or of J..L(', t) on any class of sets. A measure it on ~
is iv-excessive if and only if whenever A E D,
(18.8)
JDt
( J..L(dPl, t) r iIi «PI, t), (~, s»IN(d~) ~ J..L(A
JA s
s' s) (18.10)
Here A depends on ~ = (1], t), but in view of the parabolic version of Lemma
I.XI.8 we can choose A so that (20.1) is true for ~ in a countable dense
subset of D x ]0, + 00 [. The parabolic context Harnack theorem now
implies that (20.1) is true for all ~ in this product set and that the convergence
is locally uniform so the function ~ H 6D (t,', 1]) is parabolic on this product
set. Finally we show that 6D (t, C·) is the distribution density of w'(t). To
see this, observe that ifjis a continuous function on D with compact support,
in view of the fine limit result we have just obtained. The integral on the
left is a version of E{f[w'(t)]lw'(s)}, and in view of the Markov property
of Brownian motion this conditional expectation defines a martingale for
o < s < t, t fixed, and an application of the conditional expectation con-
tinuity theorem and the 0-1 law of Brownian motion shows that when s -+ 0
sequentially the almost sure limit of this conditional expectation is
E{f[w'(t)]}. This fact combined with (20.2) shows that 6D (t,C') is the
stated density. The corresponding result in the parabolic context is left to
the reader.
Chapter X
1. Definition
Observe that the fact that h is ~D-excessive implies that ~D(t, e, .)= 0 IN
almost everywhere on D - Ii' when eeli'. An h-Brownian motion in D
is a Markov process with state space D, transition density ~~, and initial
distribution supported by D h • After proving in Section 2 that there is always
a continuous process satisfying these conditions, we shall add to the definition
the condition that the process be almost surely continuous. It will be shown
that then almost no sample path leaves D h • Thus a I-Brownian motion in
D is what we have defined as a Brownian motion in D.
(1.3)
so under these hypotheses almost every h-Brownian path has a finite lifetime.
If h is minimal harmonic on D, then ho = ch for some constant c, and since
ho is invariant excessive for t D ,
tt-Excessive Functions
Parabolic Context
The translation of the discussion in this section into the parabolic context
is left to the reader. Observe, however, that in the parabolic context an
example in Section IX.12 shows that the composition of a superparabolic
function with space-time Brownian motion, almost surely right continuous
with left limits, may have a dense discontinuity set which is the same for
every sample function.
A are defined in the same way in terms of w(·) sample functions as T h and
N are defined in terms of wh (.) sample functions, then
Although we shall only need very special cases of (2.1), its intuitive meaning
clarifies the subject so we prove (2.1) under very general hypotheses.
Case (a) of (2.1): T== 1 for some strictly positive constant I. Define a
measure Ql on the measurable space (n, g;(/» by
QI(A) = IA,,{S>I}
h[w(/)] h~~) (2.2)
to obtain a measure space on which the process {w(s), s ::;; 1hS>I} is almost
surely continuous. Suppose that 0 < 11 < ... < tn = 1 and that A E f!J(D n ).
Define
and observe that M o c {S> I} and M~ c {Sh > I}. In view of the fact
that D - Dh is polar and therefore IN null we can evaluate QI(M o) in terms
of6~:
QI(M o) = f .~. J6~(t, e, eo) ... 6~(tn - I n- 1, en-1, en)/N(de1) ... IN (den)'
(2.4)
Thus
(2.5)
the fact, which we shall not need, that for the class of pairs (M, M h)
obtained in this way the class of sets M is the class of subsets of {S > t} in
the (f algebra ff{w(s),s::;; t} and the class of sets M h is the class of subsets
of {Sh > t} in the (f algebra ff{wh(s),s::;; t}.
A/most Sure Continuity of h-Brownian Motion. Equation (2.5) states
that the almost surely continuous process {w(s), s ::;; t }IIS>I} under (! has the
same finite-dimensional distributions as the process {wh(s), s ::;; t}lIsh>I}' It
follows that the latter process has an almost surely continuous standard
modification and that therefore every h-Brownian motion in D from a
point of D h , and more generally every h-Brownian motion in D with initial
distribution supported by D h , has an almost surely continuous standard
modification up to the process lifetime. In more detail, what we have shown
implies that when t > 0 the restriction to the rationals in [0, t] of almost
every wh(')IISh>l} sample function is uniformly continuous and that for fixed s
Hence, if w'(s) is defined on n!' for s < Sh as the limit at s of wh(.) along the
rationals, w'(') is the required almost surely continuous standard modifi-
cation of wh (.) and is itself an h-Brownian motion from ~. We refine our
preliminary definition of h-Brownian motion accordingly: from now on
an h-Brownian motion in D is any almost surely continuous up to (but not
including) the process lifetime process in D with transition density t~ and
with initial distribution supported by D h . In particular we assume from
now on in this section that wh (.) is almost surely continuous up to but not
including the process lifetime.
under QI and the almost surely continuous process {wh(s), s ~ thSh>,} have
the same finite-dimensional distributions, it follows that these processes
have the same probabilities of hitting an analytic subset B of D during a
specified parameter interval (Section 1.12), and more generally the same
argument shows that the same assertion is true if the processes are restricted
to sets M and M h , respectively, linked as described above. That is, if T [T h ]
is the hitting time of B by w(o) [wh(o)], then (2.6) remains true.
Representation ofan Arbitrary h-Brownian Motion in terms ofa Brownian
Motion. For t > 0 define a measure (lh on ,?i'h(t) by
Qlh(M h) = i h(e)
Mhf"\{Sh>l} h[ whet)]
dph
,
(2.7)
and note that Qlh(M h) = 0 ifand only if ph{M h 11 {Sh > t}} = O. The process
{wh(s), s ~ t}IIsh>I} under Qlh has the same finite-dimensional distributions
as the restricted Brownian motion process {w(s),s ~ t}lIs>I}' We can now
complete a full circle in the discussion: the integral
whose value is ph{M h 11 {Sh > t}} when MhE,?i'h(t), expresses wh(o) process
probabilities to time t under the side condition Sh > t in terms of a Brownian
motion in D under the corresponding side condition. The important point
is that this Brownian motion and the h-Brownian motion involve the same
probability space and the same random variables; only the measures are
different. In particular, ifu is a function on D, then u[wh(o)] for parameter
values ~ t is not only a function of wh(o) under ph but also under Qlh,
and we can thereby deduce properties of u on h-Brownian motion from the
known properties of u on Brownian motion.
The following assertions are immediate consequences of the representa-
tion of h-Brownian motion in terms of Brownian motion that we have
obtained.
(a) If A is a polar subset of D, almost no path of an h-Brownian motion
in D hits A at a strictly positive parameter value. In particular, almost no
such path hits D - D h .
(b) A superharmonic function v on D composed with h-Brownian
motion in D yields a process almost surely continuous up to the h-Brownian
motion lifetime with finite-valued sample functions except possibly at the
parameter value O.
We have already pointed out in Section I that if v is a positive super-
harmonic function on D and if u = v/h (= 0 where h = + 00), then u[wh(o)]
is a supermartingale if defined as 0 for parameter values ~ Sh and with the
understanding that the parameter value 0 is to be omitted if u(e) = + 00.
2. h-Brownian Motion in Terms of Brownian Motion 675
We now see from (a) and (b) that this supermartingale is almost surely
continuous except for a possible discontinuity at Sh. For almost every
sample function the supermartingale right limit exists at Sh trivially and
is 0; the left limit at Sh must exist (finite) almost surely because almost
surely right continuous supermartingales almost surely have finite left limits
at all parameter values, including the parameter value + 00 if the super-
martingale is positive.
(c) h-Brownian motion filtrations and the strong Markov property.
Theorems VI.8 and VI.9 are not directly applicable to an h-Brownian motion
unless h is finite valued, in which case D h = D, but the proofs of these
theorems are applicable to the h-Brownian motion context. Hence, if .?l'h(t)
is generated by the null sets and .?l'{wh(s),s ~ t}, it follows that .?l'h(o) is
right continuous. Moreover, even without this special choice of filtration,
the strong Markov property VI(9.l) holds for wh(o). These assertions are
e
of course true not only if wh(O) = but for an arbitrary initial distribution
supported by D h •
(d) The zero-one law for h-Brownian motion. Let .?l't be the (1 algebra
generated by (l1>0.?l' {wh(s, s ~ t} and the null sets. Then [assuming as
e
above that wh(o) is an h-Brownian motion in D from in U] .?l't is trivial;
that is, it consists of the null sets and their complements. Two proofs of
the zero-one law for Brownian motion were given in Section VII.6; the
second one is applicable to h-Brownian motion for all h. The zero-one law
implies that if B is an arbitrary analytic subset of D and if T is the hitting
time of B by wh(o), then the probability P{T= O} must be either 0 or 1.
The representation of h-Brownian motion in terms of Brownian motion
shows that this probability does not depend on the choice of h, and it follows
e
(Theorem IX.15) that this probability is I if and only if is a fine limit
point of A. Roughly, the initial character of h-Brownian motion from a
point does not depend on the choice of h. Because of this fact, assertions
(c)-(f) of Section VII.6 are valid for h-Brownian motion for all h.
The basic filtration in this case is #0+(0). Let tbe an arbitrary #0+(0) optional
time and let A be an #o+(f) set. We make the obvious choices of t h and
N, namely t h = t and Ah = A, and prove (2.1) in this context. Observe
that, with the optional time notation defined in Section II.2, Example (b),
and using the fact that
(2.6) yields
ao
Ph{N (] {Sh > [th]n}} = L Ph{N (] {Sh > j2- n = [th]n}}
j=O
(3.1)
When n -+ 00, the left side of (3.1) tends to Ph{N (] {Sh > t h}}. The right
side is E{h[w([t]n)];N}/h(e). The sequence ... , h[W([tJl)]' h[w([t]o)]
ordered as written is a supermartingale, left closable by h[ w( 1')] and
(Theorem III.17) uniformly integrable; so there is L 1 as well as almost
everywhere convergence to the limit h[w(t)]. Hence we can integrate to
the limit (n -+ (0) in (3.1) to obtain (2.1) in the present context.
Application of Case (b). If {w(o),~(o)} [{Wh(o),~h(o)}] is a Brownian
[h- Brownian] motion in D from e
on the probability space (0., ~, P)
4. Asymptotic Character of h-Brownian Paths at Their Lifetimes 677
[(nh , g;h, Ph)] with lifetime S [Sh], the problem of finding large classes of
pairs (T, T h ), (A, N) for which (2.1) is true is partially solved by a reduction to
case (b). In fact, if we make the convention that all processes involved have a
common trap, the maps WHW(',W) = OJ, WhHWh(·,W h) = OJ take nand
n n
n h into = h , the space of a canonical Brownian motion in D from ~.
n
In the notation of case (b), an optional time ton has as inverse images
under these maps an optional time T on n and an optional time T h on n h
if we suppose, as we can, that g;(.) and g;h(.) are right continuous. A set
Ain .#o+(t) has as inverse images a set A in g;(T) and a set Ah in g;h(Th)
and (2.1) is true as written if T, A, Th, and N are obtained in this way be-
cause (2.1) is true in the context of case (b). For example, if t is the hitting
time by w(·) of a closed subset of D, then T [T h ] is equal almost surely to
the hitting time of this set by w(·) [w h (.)].
(Not used below.) It is natural to try to extend Case (b) and thereby the
application just noted to allow for the P and Ph null sets. This generalization
is needed, for example, if T is to be the hitting time by w(·) of an arbitrary
analytic or even merely Borel subset of D. More specifically define #(t)
[#h(t)] as the (J algebra generated by #o(t) and the P [ph] null sets. Ac-
cording to Section 2, the filtrations #(.) and #h(.) are right continuous.
If t is an #(.) optional time and if AE#(t), there are [from Section
II.2(j)] an #0(') optional time to and an #o(to) optional time Ao such that,
up to a P null set, to = t and Ao = A. Now according to case (b) of (2.1),
an #o+(to) subset of {S > to} is P null if and only if it is Ph null. Hence,
up to a Ph null set, t = t and Ao = A. Thus if we define T = t, T h = to,
A = A, N = Ao ' equation (2.1) is true in the canonical process context,
generalizing case (b). We could equally well have started with an #h(.)
optional time t h and an #h(t h) set N.
Observation (1). Part (a) of the theorem does not state that when h is
e
harmonic, almost every h-Brownian path from tends to a point of aD,
and in fact it will be proved in Section 3.11.2 that if aD is obtained by a
metric compactification of D, then almost every h-Brownian path from e
tends to a point of aD if and only if aD is h-resolutive, and in that case the
distribution of the path limit point on aD is JLt(e, 0). We can already verify
this result in a special case, when h == 1 and aD is the Euclidean boundary,
resolutive according to Theorem l.VIII.4. In fact, if a Brownian motion in
IR N from ~ in D is killed at the hitting time of the Euclidean boundary aD
to obtain a Brownian motion in D, almost every path of the Brownian
motion in D obtained (without loss of generality for the present purpose)
in this way tends to a point of aD at the path lifetime, namely to the point
at which the original Brownian path first hits aD. The distribution of this
hitting point on aD is JLD(~' 0) according to Theorem IX.B.
Observation (2). We shall prove a stronger result than Theorem 4(b):
h-Brownian paths from ~ can be obtained in this case by first choosing
the asymptotic endpoint' for a path according to the probability distribution
v(~, 0) and then choosing a GD(o,O-Brownian path from ~ (necessarily
tending to' at the path lifetime). It follows, as stated in (b), that if A is polar,
v(~, A ( l D h) = 0 because (Theorem l.V.ll) h = GDJL = + 00 JL almost every-
where on A; so JL(A ( l D h ) = O.
ph{Sh> T h} =f {S>T}
h[w(T)] dP
h(~)
= E{h[w(T)]}
h(~)
(4.1)
= JLDo(e, h) = 1
h(~) .
Thus almost every wh(o) path hits aDo. To prove (a), we prove that if C is a
compact subset of D and if now T h is the first hitting time by wh(o) of C
after hitting aDo, then ph{Sh > T h} is arbitrarily small if Do is sufficiently
large. With this definition of T h (2.1) yields
Now the probability on the right is the probability that a Brownian path
in D from ~ hits C after hitting aDo, and this probability is arbitrarily small
4. Asymptotic Character of h-Brownian Paths at Their Lifetimes 679
as in the proof of (a). Since h is now a potential, the right side of this equality
can be made arbitrarily small by choosing Do sufficiently large (Section
1. VIII .11); so almost every h-Brownian path from ~ has closure a compact
subset of D. Now consider a particular case, h = Gv(·,O for some point
, of D other than ~. We show that in this case almost every w h (.) path tends
to , at the path lifetime. To see this, define D' = D - g}, and denote by
h' the restriction of h to D'. The function h' is harmonic on D', and h'-
Brownian motion in D' from ~ can be identified with h-Brownian motion
in D from ~; so it follows from (a) that almost every w h(.) path tends to
aD' = {Ou aD at the path lifetime. Since we have just proved that almost
every w h(.) path has closure a compact subset of D, it follows that almost
every h-Brownian path from ~ tends to' at the path lifetime. More generally,
if h = Gv J1,
(4.2)
and if 0 < t 1 < ... < tn' the joint density of wh(t 1)' ... , wh(tn) is
L 6v(t 1'~' ~1)6v(t2 - t l' ~1' ~2) ... 6V(tn - tn- 1, ~n-1' ~n) ~~~~'g v(~, dO·
(4.3)
h 2 . The evaluation
Suppose now that all probabilities are multipled by h(~o). This change does
not affect the conditional densities in h-BM(3) but replaces h-BM(2) by
h-BM(2') wto(t) has distribution density function 6 D (t, ~o, ')h when
t > O. The fact that the measure space on which the process is defined now
has measure h(~o) which may not be I causes no difficulty. From now on
an h-Brownian motion from ~o will mean as before a process satisfying
h-BM(I)-(3) ~hen h(~o) < + 00, but satisfying h-BM(l), (2'), (3) when
h(~o) = + 00. In the latter case the measure space on which the process is
5. h-Brownian Motion from an Infinity of h 681
when t > 0. We have not yet shown that an h-Brownian motion from an
infinity of h exists, and we now proceed to do so. We shall construct the
desired process on the space n of all functions from IR+ into D U {a} with
value eo at the parameter value 0. Observe first that if a process w~o(o) exists,
e'
satisfying either h-BM(l)-(3) or h-BM(I), (2'), (3), then if e D and if
s' > 0, and whether h(eo) is finite or not, the w~O<°) process conditioned by
w~(s') = f has the following properties: the process on the parameter
set [0, s'] is independent of the process on the parameter set [s', + 00 [;
the process on the first parameter set is Markovian, with reverse transition
density (5.1); the process on the second parameter set is an h- Brownian
motion from ~'. Now a process x(o) can be constructed on the function
space n with the finite-dimensional distributions of the so-conditioned
process. In fact the standard procedure of Kolmogorov can be used, in
which a measure p~,s' is assigned to n making the family of coordinate func-
tions {x(t), t e IR+} have the specified finite-dimensional distributions for
strictly positive parameter values, with x(O) = ~o' The class of measurable
sets is the smallest class making every coordinate function measurable.
The probability assigned to n itself in this way is I. If now f is given the
distribution on D with density 6D (s', ~o, o)h, the probability measure p~,s'
on n becomes a measure
with p;,(n) = 6D (s', ~o, h); the latter value is finite according to Theorem
IX.6. The sequence {P~/n, n ~ I} of measures on n is an increasing sequence
with the property that if 8 is a measurable subset of n and if 8' = 8 n
{x(ljn)eD}, then P~fn{S'} = p~/m{S'} when n > m. The limit of this in-
creasing sequence of measures is a measure ph on n for which ph {n} =
h(~o) ::s; + 00 and for which the process x(o) is Markovian and satisfies
h-BM(2'), (3). The measure P;' is the restriction of ph to the class of measur-
able subsets of {x(s')eD}. The measure ph can be expressed in terms of
Brownian motion following Section 2 without the measure normalization
used there. That is, if {w~o(o), .?"(o)} is a Brownian motion in D from ~o
with lifetime 8, if s' > 0, and if Ae .?"(s'), then the measure
A~ r h[w~o(s')]dP
JAI"\{S>S'}
assigns a distribution to {w~o(s), s ::s; s'} which has the same finite-dimensional
distributions as {x(t),t::S; s'} on the set {x(s')eD} under ph. It follows,
682 2.X. Conditional Brownian Motion
Furthermore for t > 0 the conditional distribution of x(s + t), given x(s)
in D - {e}, can be chosen to be absolutely continuous on D for each value
of x(s), with
... , x(s) = 11
for s 1 < . . . < sn < sand 11j ED. Thus for any choice of initial parameter
value to the restriction of the process x(t o + .) to the parameter set IR+ and
to the n x IR set {x(to)ED} = {O ~ z - to < Sn is a Markov process with
initial distribution specified by the density (6.1) (which involves h) and
transition density (6.2) (which does not involve h) as long as the x(to + .)
paths lie in D. More precisely, if the process is killed when the paths reach
~, so that the process lifetime is z - to, the so-restricted and killed process
x(to + .) is a GD(~' ·)-Brownian motion, with initial distribution of density
(6.1). Furthermore an easy adaptation of Theorem VI.9 (strong Markov
property) to the present context shows that if A is an analytic relatively
compact subset of D and if T' is the hitting time of A by x(·), then the process
x(T' + .), restricted to the set {T' < + oo} and killed when the paths reach
~, is a GD(~' ·)-Brownian motion process. More precisely, if we define a
filtration §'(.) of n x IR by setting §'(t) for t in IR to be the (1 algebra
generated by the P x /1 null sets and § {x(s), - 00 < s ~ t}, then the process
{x(T' + t),§'(T' + t),tEIR+}, restricted and killed as just described, is a
GD(~' ')-Brownian motion process. Going back to the original space n,
define L~ as the last hitting time of A by w~(·), and let §(.) be the filtration
of n obtained by defining §(t) to be the (1 algebra of subsets of n generated
by the P null sets and §{w~(L~ - s),s ~ t}. Then what we have proved
yields in this context that the process {w~(L~ - t), §(t), t E IR+} killed at
time L~ is a GD(~' ')-Brownian motion, with initial distribution the dis-
tribution ofw~(L~). The distribution ofw~(L~) will be evaluated in Section 10.
(Markov property). When n ---+ 00, Fatou's lemma yields the inequality
684 2.X. Conditional Brownian Motion
and there is actually almost sure equality because the expectation of each
side is Eh{j[wt(S; - I)]}. It follows that the process wt(S; - .) is a Go(~, .)-
Brownian motion, as asserted. In particular, suppose that D is provided
with a boundary aD by a metric compactification with the property that
limIts'! w~(t) exists almost surely. Define w~(st) as this limit where the
limit €xists, and define wt(S~h) arbitrarily elsewhere. This convergence con-
dition is satisfied if the boundary is the Euclidean boundary and h == 1 or
at least if h has a strictly positive harmonic extension to a neighborhood of
D. When D is connected, we shall show that (Theorem 3.11I.2) that this
convergence condition is satisfied if and only if the boundary is h-resolutive.
If this convergence condition is satisfied, the process {wt(S; - I), Ie IR+},
killed at time S;, is an almost surely continuous Markov process whose
initial distribution is supported by aD. We shall prove in Section 3.11I.2
that this initial distribution is the h-harmonic measure Jl~(~, .). Observe
that, whether or not a boundary is introduced, if wf(·) is an h-Brownian
motion in D with initial distribution A. and lifetime st, and if Sf is almost
surely finite valued, then the process {wf(St - I), I> O}, killed at time
st, is a Go A.-Brownian motion, which can be extended to the parameter
set IR+ with initial distribution supported by aD if a boundary is introduced
with the above stated properties. We shall describe the w1(Sf - .) process as
a Go A.-Brownian motion whether or not the parameter set is extended to IR+ .
Suppose here that D is bounded and that h not only is harmonic but has a
strictly positive harmonic extension to an open neighborhood D 1 of 15.
According to Section 2, an h-Brownian motion in D can be identified with
an (extended h)-Brownian motion in D 1 killed at the hitting time of oD.
Therefore almost every w~(·) path tends to a point w~(S~-) of oD at the
path lifetime. In particular, if h == 1, then according to Theorem IX.13 the
harmonic measure J1D(~") is the distribution on oD of w~(S~ -). We shall
now prove the corresponding fact for J1~(~, '). The representations of h-
Brownian motion probabilities in terms of Brownian motion probabilities
and of h-harmonic measure in terms of harmonic measure (Section 1. VIII.8)
yield for B a Borel subset of oD,
That is, extending trivially the meaning of "hitting," the h-harmonic measure
J1~(~,') is the hitting distribution ofw~(') on oD, as was to be proved. Further-
more Theorem IX.13 can now be translated directly into a theorem on h-
Brownian motion, with no change of proof, but recall that D here is bounded
and that h here has a harmonic extension to an open neighborhood of D.
The general case, for arbitrary Greenian D and strictly positive harmonic
h on D is treated in Section 3.11.2 and is more delicate because even the
Euclidean boundary of a Greenian set is not necessarily h-resolutive for
every strictly positive harmonic h.
Since u is 6~-excessive (Section VI. 12), u = vjh on D h for some positive super-
harmonic function v on D. Here v ::s; h on D h ; 'so V ::s; h on D. In particular,
if h is harmonic, the function u is h-superharmonic, and the proof given in
Section IX.9 for the case h == 1 shows that u is h-harmonic on D - A. The
following discussion for general h puts hitting probabilities into the context
of reductions.
both on AnD and near An oD. This reduction has already been defined in
Section l.VIII.l when h is harmonic, and trivially I R~ = R~. According to
Section I, every t~-excessive function u vanishes on D - Dh, and there is a
superharmonic function, which in this section we shall denote by [uh], such
that u = [uh]/h on D h. Obviously hR~ = u = 0 on D - D h, the reduction hR~
is not changed if A is replaced by A n (D h U oD), and
(7.2)
on D", and in this section we shall abuse notation by denoting this smoothing
A
by "R+u
even though this t~-excessive function is not necessarily the lower
semicontinuous smoothing ofhR~. With this definition, hR A ~ hR~ and there
+u
is equality quasi everywhere on D; in particular [Section l. VI.3(b)], there is
equality on D - A.
Recall from Section IX.l4 the reduction evaluations
when v(~) < + 00. We shall now generalize (7.3) and (7.3sm) to the context
of conditional Brownian motion and shall also provide D with a boundary
and allow A to contain boundary points. A few preliminary remarks will be
needed. In the first place observe that if as above u is a t~-excessive function
on D, then u[w~(·)] (defined as 0 at parameter values ~S~) is an almost
surely right continuous supermartingale (Sections I and 2) and so has almost
sure left limits. In the second place recall that if hI is the (Riesz decomposi-
tion) harmonic component of h, then hI (O/h(~) is the probability that a
7. Dirichlet Problem, Hitting Probabilities, Generalized Reductions 687
(7.5)
which are merely reformulations of (7.3) and (7.3sm) by way of (7.2) and the
relation between Brownian motion and h-Brownian motion probabilities
discussed in Sections 2 and 3.
Proof when A n aD is a countable union of compact sets. If A n aD is
compact, let B. be a decreasing sequence of open subsets of D u oD with
intersection A n aD, and define An = (A u Bn) n D. By definition of the
reduction operation
lim Eh{u[»1(T~hAn)]}
n-oo
Parabolic Context
Theorem 7 and its proof can be translated directly into the parabolic context.
surely continuous at the parameter value 0 in this case even though this
parameter value must be excluded in the supermartingale assertions.
The proof of (a)-(d) follows that of Theorem IX.7 (the special case
h == I)and is therefore omitted. To prove (e), observe that U = up + Ums + Uqb;
so in view of (c) it is sufficient to show that Umqb is identically constant, and
this constancy follows trivially from the minimality of h.
If h is harmonic, Theorem 8 states that u has a finite limit along almost every
h-Brownian path from a point of D to the one-point boundary of D. On the
other hand Theorem LXII. 19 states that u has a minimal-fine limit at M h
almost every Martin boundary point of D. These two results will be seen to
be equivalent in Section 3.111.4 by means of the following reasoning. Let K
be a Martin function. It will be shown that almost every w~(·) path tends to
a minimal Martin boundary point at the path lifetime and that the distribu-
tion of ~(S~-) is the harmonic measure Jlt(e,,) on the Martin boundary.
In particular, it follows that if (is a minimal Martin boundary point, almost
e
every K«(, ')-Brownian path from has limit ( at the path lifetime. Further-
more it will be shown that for arbitrary strictly positive harmonic h the
distribution of w~(·) can be constructed by choosing a minimal Martin
boundary point ( with the distribution Jlt(e, dO and then choosing K«(,-)-
e.
Brownian paths from More precisely the conditional distribution of w~(·)
given w~(S~-) = (is the distribution of K«(, ·)-Brownian motion from It e.
follows from Theorem 8 that for Jlt(e,,) almost every minimal boundary
point (the positive h-superharmonic function u has a limitf(O along almost
e
every K«(, ')-Brownian path from to (. It will be shown that the valuef(O
e,
does not depend on the path, does not depend on and is in fact the minimal-
fine limit at ( whose existence is asserted in Theorem XII .19 of Part 1. The
equivalence between the latter theorem and the present theorem in the con-
text of the Martin boundary lies in the facts to be proved in Chapter III of
Part 3 that conditional Brownian motion on the Martin space can be gen-
erated as described above and that a function has a minimal-fine limit f3 at
a minimal Martin boundary point ( if and only if the function has limit f3
along almost every K«(, ')-Brownian path from a point of D to (. Precise
statements will be given in Chapter III of Part 3. In Section 9 it will be seen
that the preceding reasoning is easily carried through when D is a ball, in
which case the Martin boundary is the Euclidean boundary. It was shown
in Sections IXII.19 to I.XII.23 how the fine topology Fatou theorem yields
the classical one for a ball or half-space, in which the classical boundary
approach is nontangential or normal.
(9.1)
(Section 1.11.1) JDK«(, ,,)/N(d,,) < + 00. Fix (and consider a K(C o)-Brownian
motion from a point ~ of D. According to Section I, the lifetime of the
process is almost surely finite because
(9.3)
(9.4)
This expression shows that h-Brownian motion paths from ~ can be obtained
by first choosing the asymptotic path endpoint ( according to the distribu-
tion J.l.t(~, 0) and then choosing K(C o)-Brownian paths from ~ to (. Thus
w~(st-) exists almost surely and has the distribution J.l.t(~, 0), as already
proved (Theorem IX.13) when D is an arbitrary Greenian set, h == I, and oD
is the Euclidean boundary. In Section 3.11.2 this evaluation of J.l.t will be
extended to every pair (h,oD) for which oD is h-resolutive, in fact extended
in a natural sense to every pair (h, oD).
If h = hI + h2 is an arbitrary strictly positive superharmonic function on
the ball with hi positive harmonic and h 2 a potential (Riesz decomposition),
10. Last Hitting Distributions; Capacitary Distributions 693
Recall that for a ball the Fatou theorems involving radial and nontangential
approach to the boundary, and the relations between those theorems and
those involving the minimal-fine topology boundary approach, have already
been discussed in Sections 1.11.15, I.XII.19 to I.XII.23. According to
Theorem 8, if v and h are strictly positive superharmonic functions on a ball
D and if »{(.) is an h-Brownian motion in D from ~, with lifetime S~, then
(almost surely) the left limit vJh[ w~(S~-)] exists and is finite. Now suppose
that h is harmonic. In view of the structure of h-Brownian motion Theorem 8
in this case is equivalent to the statement that at M h almost every ball
boundary point (, that is, at every boundary point up to an h-harmonic
measure null set, the function vJh has a finite limit along almost every
K«(, ')-Brownian path from ~ to (. The fact that the existence of a limit in
this sense at ( is equivalent to the existence of a minimal-fine limit at ( will
be proved in Section 3.111.3.
Hence almost no w~(·) path hits A arbitrarily near oD if and only if when B
is an open relatively compact subset of D, the value RA-B(e)
+h
can be made
arbitrarily small by choosing B sufficiently large. According to Section
l.VIII.II, this condition is satisfied if and only if R+hA is a potential, as we
suppose from now on, l}: = GDA~. Under this hypothesis w~(L~) is well
defined aside from the points of the w~(·) probability space for which
L~ = st, in which case we define w~(L~) = ~(st-), almost surely a point
of D. (Recall from Section lour convention on the generic use of P and E.)
(10.1)
According to Section VI.l5, on the parameter set ]0, + oo[ the w~(·)
e
process killed at L~ becomes an l}:-Brownian motion from except that the
RhA-Brownian
+
motion probabilities are to be multiplied by RA(e)/h(e).
+h
According to Section 4, the distribution of l}:-Brownian motion at the path
lifetime is GD(e,Yf)A~(drf)/l}:(e), and (10.1) follows. The second assertion is
now trivial.
space generated by the null sets and §' {w~(s), s :s;; t}. In Section VII.6 it was
supposed that h == 1 and the asymptotic properties of w~(·) paths and of
functions on these paths, as the parameter value tends to 0, were investigated.
In Section 2 of the present chapter it was shown that the results in Section
VII.6 do not depend on the choice of h. In this section we investigate the
dual questions, in which the parameter value tends to S~ instead of O.
In Sections VII.6 and in Section 2 of the present chapter the key was the
initial (J algebra, denoted by §'1 in Section VII.6. In this section the corres-
ponding role is taken by the tail (J algebra of sets, determined by w~(·) as the
parameter tends to S~. The natural definition of this (J algebra ~~ is the
following. If BcD, let S~B be the hitting time of aB by w~(.). Define ~~ as
the (J algebra generated by the null sets and the (J algebra
n {§'{ W~(S~B + t), tE IR+}: B3~, B open, relatively compact in D}. (1Ll)
(11.3)
for n ~ I, A' a Borel subset of iRn , and U i a Borel measurable function from
D into iR. A trivial map shows that iR can be replaced here and in the defini-
tion of ~t by an arbitrary compact subinterval of iR.
The following results (a)-(c) on the tail (J algebra and associated concepts
will be used in later chapters. A characterization of the tail (J algebra in terms
of a suitable boundary of D is given in Section 3.11.4.
(a) Let u be a function from D into iR with the property that the set
{u > c} is analytic for all real c, define u~ by (11.2), and define u'(~) = E{u~}
whenever this expectation is meaningful. Then
(al) u~ is ~~ measurable.
(a2) If u is lower bounded, the function u' is either identically + 00 or
h-harmonic and quasi bounded.
(a3) If in (a2) the function u' is h-harmonic, then
696 2.X. Conditional Brownian Motion
for each ~ in D.
(a4) If u is an arbitrary Borel measurable function from D into iR, then
unless E{lu~l} = + 00 for all ~ in D, the function u' is h-harmonic
and quasi-bounded, and (11.4) is true.
Proof of (a2). Suppose first that u is bounded. Then the strong Markov
property of conditional Brownian motion yields
Hence (Section 7)
(11.8)
and (Section 1.4) one version of the conditional probability on the right has
the form 4>n[w~(S~Bn)], where 4>n is a Borel measurable function from fJBn
into [0, I]' We apply the conditional expectation continuity theorem, again
using the fact that
~~ C Y ff~(t) = Y ff~(S~Bn),
telJi+ nE~+
(11.9)
If u is the function on D defined for all n as 4>n on fJBn and defined as 0 else-
where on D, this function is Borel measurable from D into [0, I] and
for every e.
(c5) The function e.. . . .
P{limtts'!v[wt(t)] exists a.s.} is either identically
o or identically 1, and in the latter case there is a point ,( of D'
~
such that limtts'! v[ wt(t)] = ,,' almost surely, for every point ofD.
~
e
Proof of (cl) and (c2). We shall prove (c2) which implies (cl). It can be
supposed, replacing u by arctan u if necessary, that u is bounded. The func-
tion e ........ u'(e) = E{u~} is h-harmonic according to (a2). Since u' is bounded
and h is minimal, the function u' is identically constant, u' == c, and (11.7)
then yields u~ = c almost surely, as was to be proved. 0
so if u(e) = -d'(,(, v(e», assertions (a) and (c2) combine to imply (c3). 0
Proof of (c4). The proof of Section VII.6(e) with obvious changes to the
present context yields (c4). 0
Proof of (c5). Let A~ be the wt(o) probability space subset for which v~ =
limtts'! v[wt(t)] exists. Then A~ € l§~ (Section 11.5); so P{ A~} is either 0 or 1.
~
12. Conditional Space-Time Brownian Motion 699
The function ~ ...... P{A~} is h-harmonic by the same reasoning [see (11.6)]
making u' an h-harmonic function. Hence the function ~ ...... P {A~} is either
identically 0 or identically I. In the second case fix ~ and observe that v~ is
~~ measurable; so v~ is almost surely a point rt' of D', that is,
limsupd'(rt',v[~(t)]) = 0 a.s.
tt~
According to (c2), it follows that this limit relation is true for all ~; so r(
does not depend on ~. The proof of (c5) is complete. 0
Let {w(t), te IR} be a Brownian motion in IRN with parameter set R Then
(Sections VII.2 and IX.8) there is a positive parabolic function u on IR N
such that for s in IR the random variable w(s) has distribution density u(', s),
with integral + 00 over IR N • The process w(·) has reverse time transition
e
density (transition from at time s to " at time t < s)
(13.1)
(13.2)
from - 00 to the finite process death time, every wh (.) sample path comes in
from the point 00, along a direction determined by y if y :f. 0, and tends to
, at the process death time. For general uand general h the process is made
up of such processes. Thus in generallim/__ co [w(t)/t] is a random variable
with distribution ([2 N;.(dy), and (Theorem 4) if h = Gil and if h(e) < + 00,
e
the conditional distribution for w(s) = of the left limit of wh (.) at the
process death time is G(e, OIl(dO/h(e). Roughly, the choice of udetermines
~(.) at the beginning of the process, and the choice of h determines the
process at the end.
(O,Y;,Y;(·),P), ....
See Sections l.IX.3, l.IX.4, 2.11.11, and 2.V.4. In the classical potential
theory context we denote these classes more specifically by LP(tl~_) and
D{tt~_) when there is danger of ambiguity. In classical potential theory, in
parabolic potential theory, and in martingale theory SeLl and for p > 1:
The set 8 II LP is a vector sublattice of (8, :S) but not a band; 8 II LP C D.
4. PWB-Related Conditions on h-Harmonic Functions and on Martingales 707
then x(·) is in D.
The difference on the right is constant in s and is at most el2 for sufficiently
small (negative) n because x(·) is in D. The process x;(·) is defined as
LM[x(·) v n] for such a choice of n, and the process x~(·) is defined dually.
Conversely, if x;(·) and x~(·) exist as in the converse assertion, with x;(·) ~
-K. and x~(·) :::; K., where K. > 0, and if b > 0 is chosen so that
P{!x(t)1 = b} = 0,
then
Parabolic Context
Theorem. In the classical and parabolic potential theory contexts and in the
martingale theory context
(5.1)
2.111.14, E{lx( + ooW} < +00 if and only if x(·) is LP bounded, equivalently
(by Section 2.VA) if and only if x(·)eLP. Under the latter condition it
follows easily from Section 2.V.2 that
Observe that (6.1) and (6.2) are identical with the same equations for
unsmoothed reductions because {v :> c} is an open subset of ~N and Ac is a
fine-open subset of~+ x Q. In (6.1) the reduction decreases when cin~reases.
In (6.2) we can only assert that c < d implies that ~z(·) ~Ad S; ~z(·) ~Ac quasi
everywhere, and that is why in (6.2) the limit is sequential. The set Z+ in
(6.2) can of course be replaced by any other unbounded increasing sequence.
Proof in the classical potential theory context. (The martingale theory proof
is a direct translation.) If u = ~o Uj with Uj in S + and bounded, then
00 00
h~U~{v>C} = Lh~Uj~{v>cl S; LUj' (6.3)
o 0
710 3.1. Lattices in Classical Potential Theory and Martingale Theory
(6.4)
Parabolic Context
The lemma and its proof need no change in the parabolic potential theory
context.
Parabolic Context
Theorem 7 and its proof need no change in the parabolic context. The
parabolic criterion corresponding to (b2) does not require a new proof and
is of course stated in terms of the limit of a positive h-parabolic function
along h space-time Brownian paths.
Observation. Equations (8.1) and (8.2) are equivalent to the same equa-
tions with unsmoothed reductions. See the observation in Section 6 on the
corresponding point for Lemma 6, and on the explanation of the sequential
convergence (n -. 00) in (8.2) rather than the unrestricted approach (c -. 00)
in (8.1).
Proof in the classical potential theory context. (The martingale theory proof
is a direct translation.) Suppose first that UES:. By Section l.VI.3(i) as
adapted to reductions in the h-superharmonic context,
(8.3)
(8.4)
The first term on the right has limit 0 quasi everywhere when c -+ 00 according
to Lemma 6, and the second term on the right is Us for every c because
so Theorem 8 is true. 0
Parabolic Context
lim ~Z('HAn
n.... oo
=0 q.e. (neZ+).
Observation. PT(c) and MT(c) are equivalent to the same equations with
unsmoothed reductions. See the observation in Section 6 on the corre-
sponding point for Theorem 6 and on the explanation of the sequential
convergence (n -+ (0) in MT(c) rather than the unrestricted approach (c -+ (0)
in PT(c).
°
To show that the second term on the right has limit when n -+ 00, note
first that (Section l.V.4) there is a function v positive and superharmonic
on B, with v = + 00 on A and v(~) < + 00. Hence v ~ I on Cn for large n;
°
so lim SUPn_ro JlB n (~, Cn) ~ v(e), and since for every () > the function ()V
satisfies the same conditions as v, it follows that lim n_ ro JlBn (~, Cn) = 0. Hence
(class D property) limn_roJlBn (~,ule) n
= 0; so
E{z(T)} s; E{z(O)},
Hence the family {z(T): T optional} is uniformly integrable; that is, z(o)eD.
MT(b) => MT(a) See Theorem 2.IV.1I.
MT(a) <:> MT(c) See Theorem 8.
The proof of the theorem is now complete. 0
PT(a) UES;s'
PT(b) h~U~{u>C} = ufor every (equivalently some) strictly positive constant
c.
PT(c) Jl. is supported by a polar set.
Parabolic Context
In this section we use the notation of Section 2.x.8 but restrict the context
slightly by assuming that h is harmonic. Thus u is a positive h-superharmonic
function on D to which the lattice theoretic discussion of this section is
applicable. The restriction to the parameter set IR+ of the process ~(o)
defined in 2.x(8.1) will be denoted by o~(o). If u(e) < +00, the latter
process is an almost surely right continuous supermartingale to which the
716 3.1. Lattices in Classical Potential Theory and Martingale Theory
lim6~(t,~,u) = limE{o~(t)} = 0
1-00 1-00
the parameter value S{ For almost every w this cluster set is a compact
boundary subset. In particular, if h == 1 and if aD is the Euclidean boundary,
the process wt(·) can be identified with a Brownian motion in IR N killed
at the hitting time of aD, and rt(w) is then almost surely a singleton,
{wnst(w)- ]}. Similarly, if D is bounded, if aD is the Euclidean bouEdary,
and if h has a harmonic extension h' to an open neighborhood D' of D, then
wt(·) can be identified with an h'-Brownian motion in D' killed at the hitting
time of aD, and again rt(w) is almost surely a singleton, {wnst(w)- ]}.
According to the following theorem, whatever the choice of aD, the dis-
tribution of rt is the h-harmonic measure Jl~(~, '), an h-resolutive function
fis for almost every w a constant function on the cluster set rNw), and H}
has the prescribed value off as limit along almost every wt(·) path to the
rt
boundary. Furthermore aD is h-resolutive if and only if is almost surely a
singleton, that is, if and only if the left limit wt(st-) exists almost surely.
Thus the PWB method generalizes the classical concept of solution of the
Dirichlet problem but nevertheless leads to solutions which have the pre-
scribed boundary limit function in a reasonable sense.
The methods used in this chapter are applicable in the parabolic context, and
the statements of the results in that context are left to the reader.
and
(2.4)
(2.6)
Proof of (a). The equality H1hA = hR~ = R~/h was pointed out in Section
l.VIII.2. The last equality in (2.1) is a special case of Theorem 2'x.? An
application of (2.1) to iJD - A yields (2.2). 0
function U2, U 1 , H} has a finite limit along almost every w;(·) path to the
boundary, and
Moreover
x~(lfl; '), x~(lfl - f; .), x~(lfl/\ n;·), x~(n - (Ifl/\ n); .).
(2.9)
The fact that the last two of these processes are supermartingales implies that
x~(IJI/\ n;·) is a martingale and therefore (n ~ 00) that x~(lfl,') is a mar-
tingale, that is, that (c) is true whenfis positive. Since the first two processes
in (2.9) are now known to be almost surely continuous martingales, the
process x(f;·) is also, as was to be proved. 0
Proof of (d). If the boundary is h-resolutive, that is, if the Borel boundary
subsets are Ili measurable, choose € > 0, and let AI' ... ,A k be compact
boundary subsets of diameter at most € and with union aD. Since (2.3)
implies that r; is almost surely a subset ofany A j it intersects, the diameter of
r; is almost surely at most €. Hence r; is almost surely a singleton; that is,
the left limit w;(st-) almost surely exists. ConverselY,ifr; is almost surely
a singleton for some point e, the set function A 1-+ Hue) is an additive
function of Borel boundary sets by (2.1); so the boundary is h-resolutive
(Section I.VIII.9). 0
Special Case: h Is Minimal. If h is minimal, then for every boundary subset
A the h-harmonic function fi~A = R:/h is either identically I or identically
O. In fact by minimality fit is a constant function, so that R:== ch"and
iterating the reduction operation [Section I. V1.3 (h)] yields ch = cR~ = c 2 h;
so c = 0 or I. For every boundary point ( if R~{) == 0, then (since R~') is the
infimum of the class of reductions on boundary neighborhoods of 0 R:
== 0
3. PWB· Examples 723
A close examination of the analysis reveals that the theory of analytic sets
and Choquet capacities is not needed in the derivation of Theorem 2 if it is
supposed that the left limit w~(st-) exists almost surely for some (equiva-
lently every) point eof D or, going in the other direction, if the boundary is
h-resolutive. This hypothesis is satisfied if iJD is the Euclidean boundary and
if either h == I or D is a relatively compact open subset of an open set on
which h has a positive harmonic extension.
3. PWBh Examples
EXAMPLE (a). The Alexandrov one-point boundary of a Greenian set D is
trivially universally resolutive. From the point ofview ofTheorem 2 universal
resolutivity corresponds to the fact that for strictly positive harmonic h on
D almost every h-Brownian path from a point of D tends to the one-point
boundary at the path lifetime.
EXAMPLE (c). Let N = 2, let D be a disk, let' be a boundary point, and let
h = K(C') be the minimal harmonic function corresponding to , (Section
e e
l.II.l). For in Diet q,(e) be the angle between the rays from' to and to
the disk center, -n/2 < q, < n/2. Then q, is harmonic on D. Define a
distance function d(·, .) on D x D by
a
If D is provided with a boundary rD by completion under this distance
function, the Euclidean boundary point ( is ramified into a compact set A
of points corresponding to the directions of approach to (. In this example
h is minimal; so the quasi-bounded h-harmonic functions, in particular the
PWB h solutions, are the constant functions, and the Euclidean boundary
singleton {(} has h-harmonic measure identically I. Almost every h-Brownian
path from a point ~ of D has limit (in the Euclidean metric. We now inves-
a
tigate the cluster sets of these paths on r D, that is, the boundary cluster sets
in the d metric defined by (3.1). Recall from Section l.XII.l2 that if ( is
identified with a minimal Martin boundary point of D, no ray from ( into D
is minimal thin at (. We shall show in Section 111.3 that a Borel subset B of a
Greenian subset of IH N is not minimal thin at a minimal Martin boundary
point if and only if almost every conditional Brownian path from a point of
the Greenian set to that boundary point hits B arbitrarily near the boundary
a
point. In the present context, using the notation relative to r D, it follows
that r~ is almost surely the set A. According to Theorem 2, a function Ion
arDis h-resolutive if and only iflis identically constant (=I: ± OCJ) on A, and
if so, the PWB h solution for I is identically the constant I(A). The ramified
a
boundary r D has too many points to be h-resolutive.
EXAMPLE (d). Let B be an open subset ofa Greenian set D, let D be provided
with a boundary aD by a metric compactification, and let aBbe the boundary
of B relative to this compactification. Then aB depends on the choice of
aD unless B is relatively compact in D. According to Theorem 2, aB is h-
resolutive if and only if almost every h-Brownian path in D from a point of B
either hits D n aB or tends to a point of aD n aB at the path lifetime. Thus it
is sufficient for h-resolutivity of aB that aD be h-resolutive. This simple
resolutivity argument should be compared with the nonprobabilistic argu-
ment in Section l.VIII.8, Example (b). The relation l.VIII(8.3) connecting
Jl~ and Jl~ is an immediate consequence of the strong Markov property of
conditional Brownian motion.
{w: r~(w) c A} for Borel It~ measurable boundary subsets A;. (4.1)
We now fix ~ and ( and discuss the absolute probability distributions of the
w8') process: (t, A)f-+ P{W8t)EA} = p(t, A) for A ranging through the Borel
subsets of D - g}. Since
(2.2)
Observe that the value of the integral on the right does not depend on the
choice of s for 0 < s < t because 6}, satisfies the Chapman-Kolmogorov
equation; so (2.2) defines PD(', C·) on ]0, + oo[ x (D - g}). The function
p},(t, C·) is the IN density of the distribution of w8t) in D, and the function
pM', (,.) is GD(~' ')-parabolic, that is, <P = pM', C ·)GD(~'·) is parabolic, on
]0, + oo[ x (D - {~}) in view of the following properties of <P on this
product set:
<P is Borel measurable.
<P is locally IN + 1 integrable.
<P has the parabolic function average property locally, because 6D
(. - s, '7,.) is parabolic on the domain of <p.
It is natural to conjecture that when '7' -+ (suitably, the transition density
6},(t, '7', '7) tends to pMt, C'7), and we now derive one version of such a limit
relation: for each strictly positive t,
(2.3)
To see this, observe that the function ('7',1') f-+ 61,(1' '7', '7) is GD(~' ')-parabolic
on (D - g}) x ]0, + oo[ and, in fact, is invariant excessive for GD(~")
space-time Brownian motion on this set. Moreover (2.2) implies that
Hence the process {6i>(t - s, w8 s), '7), 0 < s < t} is a martingale. This mar-
tingale is almost surely continuous and so (from Section 2.111.16) has an
almost sure limit as the parameter tends to O. This limit is a random variable
measurable with respect to the K(C ')-Brownian motion tail (1 algebra and
so (from Section 11.4) is almost surely identically constant. Since every mar-
tingale is uniformly integrable on a right closed set of parameter values
[Section 2.III.3(e)], this constant must be the common expectation in (2.4);
that is, (2.3) is true.
730 3.111. Brownian Motion on the Martin Space
and the process {~(L~n - I), IE IR+} with lifetime L~n is a GD(~' ')-Brownian
motion with initial distribution the distribution of ~(L~n)' Observe that
limn _ lXl L~n = + 00 almost surely and that limn _ lXl ~(L~n) = ( almost surely.
According to the results in this section, this limit is pf>(/, (, 1'(). If now ~ tends
to a second finite boundary point (1' the transition density hi> tends to a
limit transition density, that of K«(1' ')-Brownian motion, and pf>(/, (,.)
tends to a limit density which can be described as the absolute probability
density at time I of a Brownian motion from ( to (1'
whenever B is an analytic superset ofA, and it is sufficient that (3.1) be true for
e
a single point ofD whenever B is an open superset of A.
(3.2)
Since the left side is I for all B if and only if ( is a minimal-fine limit point
of A and the right side is I for all B if and only if (3.1) is satisfied, the theorem
is true when A is analytic. Since ( is a minimal-fine limit point of a subset A
of D if and only if ( is a minimal-fine limit point of every open superset of A
(Section I.XII.12), the theorem is true for every set A.
732 3.m. Brownian Motion on the Martin Space
for each point ~ of D, and the corresponding equation for inferior limits is
also true.
u~ = limu[wt(t)] (4.1)
tt~
exists for J.Lt almost every (, a result we have already proved nonprobabil-
istically (see Theorem l.XII.l9). Observe that the boundary limit function
was identified in Theorem l.XII .19 as dMv/dM", where M" [Mv] is the
Martin representing measure corresponding to h [to the harmonic compo-
nent of v in its Riesz decomposition]. The following argument shows how
f can be identified in the present context, without invoking Theorem I.XII .19.
It is sufficient to identify ffor u an h-potential, u a singular h-harmonic func-
tion, and u a quasi-bounded h-harmonic function since (Section l.IX.lI) u
is the sum of its components of these types. According to Theorem 2.x.8(c)
as now interpreted, the limit function f vanishes J.L~ almost surely if u is an
h-potential or is a singular h-harmonic function. According to Theorem
5. Probabilistic Approach to Theorem 1.XI.4(c) and Its Boundary Counterparts 733
{Xn(I), IE IR +} -_{GD(~'
v[wi(L~n - I)]
wi(L~n _ I)' IE IR
+} (5.1)
is at most c/(r 2 - r 1 ). Since this is true for all n, the same assertion is true for
o< t < Sf, and we deduce just as in the discussion ofsupermartingale conver-
gence that the function v/GD(~' .) has a limit at ( along almost every wi(·) path;
equivalently (Section 3), the function V/GD(~'·) has a minimal-fine limit at (.
Observe that E {xn(O)} > 0 because v ~ 0, and observe also that L~n+1 - L~n
is the hitting time of Dn by x n + 1 (·); so by the supermartingale inequality at
optional times E{xn+1(0)} ~ E{xn(O)}, and therefore limn-+coE{xn(O)} > O.
6. Martin Representation of Harmonic Functions in the Parabolic Context 735
Since this limit is the almost sure limit of vjGD(e,·) at' along wi(·) paths as
well as the minimal-fine limit of the function at " this minimal-fine limit
must be strictly positive (~ + (0).
Parabolic Context
°
is locally uniform on D. Thus if 6D (t,·,h) is defined on D as 6D(t,·,h) for
t > and as h for t ~ 0, the function 6D (·,·, h) is continuous on jj and in fact
is parabolic there because this function is already known to be parabolic on
jj+ and has the parabolic function average property on jj - jj+ . In the fol-
°
lowing we write 6~(t, e, h) for d6D (t, e, h)jdt. The function 6~ is thereby
defined, negative, and parabolic on jj, identically on jj - jj+. This func-
tion vanishes identically if and only if h is 6D invariant excessive.
(a) The function - t~(·, ., h) is i v invariant excessive on jj + ; that is,
at all points below a zero. Hence, if s' > 0, equation (6.1) is true for (e,S)E
D x ]0, s'] if t is not in some II null set. When s' runs through the strictly
positive integers, we find that there is an II null set A such that (6.1) is true
for (e,s)ED+ if and only if t is not in A. However, for t not in A and for
strictly positive sand J,
u
Conversely, we now prove that if is a positive parabolic function on D with
u
these three properties, then can be obtained in this way; that is, there is a
u
positive harmonic function h on D such that = - t~(· , ., h). In fact the.
integral in (d2) defines a positive harmonic function h on D (Section 1XV.IS)
and
6. Martin Representation of Harmonic Functions in the Parabolic Context 737
Hence
Analytic Sets
2. Suslin Schemes
We use the notation N = 7L+ X 7L+ X . . . . Let (Y,!J!J) be a paved space. A
Suslin scheme is a map Y. from the set of finite sequences of points of 7L+
into!J!J, (nt, ... ,nk) 1-+ Yn, ..... nkE!J!J. To each point n. = (n t ,n 2 , .•• ) of N
then corresponds the intersection Y", n Y",n 2 n .. " and the uncountable
union Un eN (Yn , n Y" 1 n2 n···) is called the nucleus of the Suslin scheme
and is said to be a set analytic over !J!J. The class of these nuclei will be denoted
by d(!J!J). If A E!J!J and if Y", ..... nk = A for all k and nt, ... ,nk, the nucleus is
A; so!J!J c d(!J!J). Furthennore d(!J!J)" = d(!J!J) because if AjEd(!J!J), say
Aj = U (l}n, nl}n,n2 n
neN
.. '), (2.1)
let IX be a one-to-one map from 7L+ onto 7L+ x 7L+ and define
742 A.I. Analytic Sets
Then Ug> Aj is the nucleus of Y:. Somewhat less easily d(0JI)6 = d(OJI). To
prove this, suppose that A j is given by (2.1). Then ng> A j is an uncountable
union whose general summand can be obtained by choosing in succession the
first two sets from the union for A I , then the first from the union for A 2' then
the third from the union for AI' then the second from the union for A 2 , then
the first from the union for A 3 , and so on in the usual diagonal procedure, so
that (remembering that the subscripts are dummies)
no A). = U (Yin
<Xl
1
n Yin n
12
n Y2n 3 n Yin n n
124
n Y2n3.5
n n ... ).
n EN
The class d(OJI), although closed under countable unions and intersections,
is not necessarily a (T algebra because it is not necessarily closed under
complementation.
Theorem. Let (X,~) and (Y,OJI) be paved spaces. Then d(~) x d(OJI) c
d(fI x dJI). If ~EX and A Ed(fI x OJI), then {,,: (~,")EA}Ed(dJI).
To prove the first assertion, suppose that AEfI. Using the obvious
notation, it is clear that
Similarly, if A E d(CW),
and this is the desired inclusion relation. To prove the second assertion,
suppose that A E d(fI x CW), say
A = U (Xn 1
X Y" ) n
I
(Xn 1 n 2 X Y" n )
1 2
n ....
n.EN
The algebra do(iJ!I) generated by iJ!I is the class of finite unions of finite
intersections of iJ!I sets and their complements. Hence do(iJ!I) c d(iJ!I). Since
d(iJ!I) = d(iJ!I)" = d(iJ!I)fJ' the class d(iJ!I) is a monotone class. According to
a standard theorem, d(iJ!I) must therefore contain the (T algebra generated
by do(iJ!I), which is the same as that generated by iJ!I.
F or example, if iJ!I is the class of closed [open] subsets of a metric space
Y, d(iJ!I) contains the open [closed] subsets and therefore contains the (T
algebra of Borel subsets.
Theorem. Let (Y, iJ!I) be a paved space, and let (X,~) be a topological space
paved by its class of compact subsets. Then the projection on Y of a set in
d(~ x iJ!I) is in d(iJ!I). For a suitable choice of (X, ~), and some suitable
choices are compact metric, d(iJ!I) is the class ofprojections on Y ofthe sets in
(~ x iJ!I)"fJ'
Suppose that the paved spaces are as described in the first assertion and
that A E d(~ x iJ!I),
= U (Xn 1
n X n 1 nn
2
... ) x (Y" n Y" n n ... ).
1 1 2
n.E r\j
L rjlarctanmj -
00
arctannjl·
j=O
If n l ' . . . ,nk are in Z + , let Xn , ... nk be the compact set of points of X with first
k coordinates n 1 , •.• ,nk' The nucleus of the Suslin scheme Y. on Y is then
the projection on Y of
= no U(x
00
where for each k the union in the second expression is over all finite-valued
k-tupll~s n 1 ... ,nk •
and since (by Theorem 5) the projection on Y of a set in the class on the right
is in d(1Y), the present theorem is true.
Application. The first assertion in Theorem 3 can now be strengthened.
In fact
d[d(f!C) x d(1Y)] = d(f!C x OJI)
This theorem is a trivial consequence of the fact that the inverse image
underf of an arbitrary intersection [union] of sets is the intersection [union]
of their inverse images.
Theorem. (a) A GlJ ofa complete metric space is homeomorphic with a com-
plete metric space.
(b) A set which is a subset ofa complete metric space and is homeomorphic
with a complete metric space is a GlJ.
(c) A complete separable metric space is homeomorphic with a GlJ in a
compact metric space.
LT n 1\ Id-l(e,X -
00
e
open and shrinks (n -+ (0) to a point of X. Necessarily f = f(e)ef(X).
Let A~ be the set of points of X' at distance < lin from f(X). Then
(W [A~ (") {IX < lin}] = f(X) is a G", as was to be proved.
(c) Replacing the distance function d on X by d A I if necessary, it can
e.
be supposed that d ~ I. Let be a sequence dense in X. Then
plete metric space [0, I], is homeomorphic with a complete metric space. In
this case the image can be taken as the Baire null space, and the map can be
written explicitly by means of the continued fraction representation of an
irrational number x in ]0, 1[,
x=----- n.eBN.
I
nl + --=---
n2 + ...
L:2- j larctanm
00
dist(m.,n,) = j - arctannjl.
1
The space BN OO is compact metric, and the subset of this space with finite
coordinates is a G{) homeomorphic with BN.
Proof (a) => (d) Under (a) there is a complete metric space X such that the
set A is the nucleus of a Suslin scheme X.: n l ' . . . ,nk 1-+ Xn, ... nk with each
set Xn, ... nk a closed subset of X. It will be convenient, and irrelevant to the
construction of analytic sets, to restrict n l ' n2' ... to be strictly positive. For
j and k strictly positive integers choose B jk a closed subset of X, of diameter
< Ilk, with U]~l Bjk = X. Then
A = U(Bn I
1 n Xn2 ) n (Bn3 2 n Xn24
n ) n (B n 3 n Xn n n ) n .. "
5 246
(12.1)
where the union is over all sequences n l ' n2' ... of strictly positive integers.
The kth set in parentheses is closed and has diameter < 11k. Let (a, b) 1-+
lX(a, b) be a one-to-one map of the set of pairs of strictly positive integers onto
the set of strictly positive integers, and define
to get a Suslin scheme X: for which, given n., the set X~, ... nk is closed, has
diameter < 11k, decreases as k increases, and either is empty for sufficiently
large k or shrinks to a singletonf(nJ. The functionfis thereby defined on a
subset of BN, is continuous, and maps its domain onto A. To extendfto
e
BN, choose some point of A, and if X~, ... nk is not empty, choose a point
en, .. .nk in this set. If f(nJ is not defined, either X~, is empty, in which case
e,
definef(nJ = or there is a maximal k ~ I for which X~, ... nk is not empty,
in which case define f(nJ = en, ... nk' Then f is a continuous map from BN
onto A. (Alternatively, it is easy to see that the original domain offis closed
and so is itself a Polish space and as such is the continuous image of BN,
which makes A the continuous image of BN.)
(d) => (a) If (d) is true A =f(BN), wherefis continuous from BN into
the Polish space containing A. Let Y", ... nk be the set of points of BN with
first k coordinates n 1 , . . . ,nk • This set is closed and has diameter Ij(k + I).
Let XnI ... nk be the closure of f( Y", ... nk)' If n. E BN,
(k ~ 00),
Parts (a) and (b) are special cases of Theorem 3. To prove (c), observe
that the projection map is continuous; so in view of Theorem 12(b) the
projection on Y of an analytic subset of X x Y is the continuous image of a
continuous image of a Polish space and is therefore analytic. To prove (d),
letfbe a Borel measurable function from X into Y. The graph offis a Borel
and therefore analytic subset of X x Y. Furthermore, if A is an analytic
subset of X, A x Y is an analytic subset of X x Y; so the intersection A of
the graph off with A x Y is analytic, and its projection on Y, that is to say
f(A), is therefore analytic by part (c), as was to be proved.
Appendix II
Capacity Theory
1. Choquet Capacities
If (X, fl') is a paved space for which fl' is closed under finite unions and inter-
sections, a Choquet capacity on (X, fl'), that is, on X relative to fl', is a func-
tion / from the class of subsets of X into iR with the following properties:
(a) / is increasing; that is, Xl C X 2 implies that /(X I ) ~ /(X2 ).
(b) X n i Xoo implies that /(Xn) -+ /(Xoo )'
(c) XnEfl' and X n ! Xoo implies that /(Xn) -+ /(Xoo )'
A subset A of X is called capacitable [relative to (X, fl', /)] if
2. Sierpinski Lemma
Lemma. Let (X, fl') be a paved space, let A be the nucleus ofa Suslin scheme X.
over fl', and let b I ' b 2 , ••. be a sequence in 71.+ . Define
(2.1)
Only the assertion that Be A is not trivial. To prove this relation, suppose
that ~ E B, so that for every k there is a k-tuple (n I' ... , nk) with ni ~ bi for
which ~EXnl n··· nXn""nk' Call such a k-tuple admissible. Then admis-
sibility of (n l , . . . ,nk) implies admissibility of (n l , . . . ,nk- l ). Since the
4. Lusin's Theorem 751
4. Lusin's Theorem
Theorem. If (X, f!l', Jl) is a complete measure space for which Jl is a countable
sum offinite measures,for example, if Jl is (J finite, then d(f!l') = f!l'.
Then Jl* is a Choquet capacity relative to (X, f!l'). In fact the defining property
Section 1(a) is trivial, (b) is a standard property of outer measures defined
in this way, and (c) is a standard property of finite measures. According to
the Choquet capacity theorem, the sets of d(f!l') are capacitable, and in the
present context capacitability and measurability are equivalent.
752 A.II. Capacity Theory
that n(d(:#» = d(.1F) = .1F, and (by Theorem 1.5) that I(A) = P(n(A» if
A Ed(:#). An important result in capacity theory is that I so defined is a
Choquet capacity on IR + x 0. relative to :#, that is, that I satisfies Section
I (a)-(c). Condition (a) that I is monotone increasing is obviously satisfied.
The left continuity condition (b) is satisfied because every outer measure
defined like P* in terms of a measure satisfies this condition. To prove that
the right continuity condition (c) is satisfied, suppose that S. is a decreasing
sequence in :# with intersection S. Then the point w is in n(Sn) if and only
if the compact set {t: (t,W)ESn} is not empty; so n(S,) is a decreasing
sequence in .1F with intersection n(S). Hence
lim I(Sn)
11-00
= n-oo
lim P(n(Sn» = P(n(S» = I(S);
(c) For an arbitrary strictly positive integer n when At, ... ,An and
B t , ... , B n are in:!£ and A j C B j forj ~ n,
In fact under (a) and under (c) with n = 2 inequality (6.1) yields (b) when
At = A ( l B, A 2 = A, B 1 = B, B 2 = A. Conversely, if (a) and (b) are true,
(c) is proved as follows. If A = B t and B = At U B 2 , conditions (a) and (b)
yield
(6.2)
(6.3)
These two inequalities combine to yield (6.1) for n = 2, and the general case
is proved by induction. If (6.1) is true for a countable sequence (involving
countable unions and sums) of pairs (A j , B) in X with A j C Bj , the set
function I is called countably strongly subadditive.
Let I be a positive strongly subadditive set function on (X, :!£), and let!i be
a subclass of :!£C1' closed under finite intersections and countable unions.
Define the function A t-+ I*(A) from the class of all subsets of X to jR+ by
then J* is an extension ofJ, does not depend on the choice of:i, and is a Choquet
capacity on X relative to X, countably strongly subadditive on the class of all
subsets of X. If J*(A) < + 00, the set A is (X, X) capacitable if and only if to
each e > 0 correspond sets A~ in X 6 and A; in :i satisfying
(7.3)
The limit on the left is therefore at least (and trivially at most) J*(A).
(ii) J* is strongly subadditive on the class of all subsets of X. In fact,
since the inequality in Section 6(b) is true for A and B in X, increasing
sequences of pairs (A, B) yield the same inequality for sets in :i. If A and B
are arbitrary and if either J*(A) or J*(B) is infinite, this strong subadditivity
inequality is trivially true for J*. If both values are finite and A c A' e:i,
Be B' e:i, then
and (ii) is true because the right side can be made arbitrarily close to
J*(A) + J*(B).
(iii) An i A implies that J*(A n) --+ J*(A). This conclusion is trivial if
lim n _ oo J*(A n) = + 00. If this limit is finite and if e > 0, choose A~ in :i in
such a way that A~ => An, J*(A~) < J*(A n) + rne. By strong subadditivity
[see (6.1)]
(7.6)
Hence
J*(A) :$ J* (0
\1
A~) = lim J*
m-oo
(01 A~) :$ lim J*(A m) + e,
m-oo
(7.7)
The conditions (a), (b), and (i)-(iv) imply that f* is a countably strongly
subadditive Choquet capacity relative to (X, ~). The last assertion of the
theorem is trivial. There remains the proof that f* does not depend on the
choice of :i. Let f:be the Choquet capacity obtained with the choice
fi = ~'" and let f* be the Choquet capacity obtained with some other
choice. It is assumed that (b) in the theorem is true for both choices. It is
trivial that f,,* ~ f* and that there is equality on ~ and therefore also on ~".
Now if A is an arbitrary subset of X,
f:(A) = inf {f:(B): B:::> A, BE~,,} = inf {f*(B): B:::> A, BE~,,} ~ f*(A),
8. Topological Precapacities
Let (X,~) be a locally compact second countable space together with its
class of compact subsets. Suppose that f is a function from ~ into jij+ with
the following properties:
(a) f is strongly subadditive on ~.
(b) If A. is a monotone sequence of compact sets with compact limit A,
then limn_co f(A n ) = f(A).
Then f will be called a topological precapacity on X. Theorem 7 can be applied
with :i the class of open subsets of X if f*(A) = f(A) for A compact, and
this is true because if B. is a decreasing sequence of relatively compact
open subsets of X with ngo
Bn = ngo
lin = A, then in view of (b) and the
fact that f(A) ~ f*(B n ) ~ f(lin ),
The class of capacitable sets includes the analytic subsets of X. A set A with
f*(A) finite is capacitable if and only if to each e > 0 correspond a compact
subset A~ of A and an open superset A;
of A such that f*(A;) < f(A~) + e.
Letting e run through a sequence with limit 0, it follows that A with f*(A)
finite is capacitable if and only if there is an F,. subset A' of A and a GlJ
superset A" of A such that f*(A') = 1*(A) = 1*(A"). This condition is
trivially necessary and sufficient for capacitability of A when 1*(A) = + 00.
756 A.II. Capacity Theory
Note, however, that if A has compact subsets with arbitrarily large values
of I, then I*(A) = + 00, and A is capacitable no matter how complicated
its structure.
EXAMPLE. Let (X,:I") be IR together with its compact subsets, and define
I(A) for A compact as 0 or I according as A is empty or not. Then I is a
topological precapacity. Let :I" be the class of open subsets of IR. The exten-
sion I* is I on every nonempty set, and all sets are 1* capacitable. Observe
that 1* has the property that there is a decreasing sequence A. of capacitable
sets for which
Let I be a function from the class of all subsets of a locally compact second
countable space into jR+. Suppose that I is monotone increasing, that the
restriction of I to the class of compact sets is a topological precapacity, and
that if B is open
It follows that the extension of this restriction to 1* coincides with Ion the
class of capacitable sets, in particular, on the analytic sets.
so that
O//(:I") c A(qj(:I"» c qj(:I"),
IfI is a map from the measurable space (X, :!l") into the measurable space
(Y, qy) and if1-1 (qy) c :!l" that is, iflis measurable, a measure Jl. on X trans-
forms into a measure Jl.f on qy by way of Jl.iA) = Jl.[f-l(A)]' Moreover, if Jl.
is complete, this relation remains valid for A in the domain of the completion
of Jl.f. In particular, this relation is valid for A in OlI(qy) and 1-1 [011 (qy)] c
0lI(:!l"); that is,j is measurable from (X, 0lI(:!l"» into (Y, OlI(qy».
Appendix III
Lattice Theory
1. Introduction
The following is an outline of the lattice theory used in this book. Elementary
proofs are omitted or merely sketched. Vector spaces are always over the
reals. The reader is warned that the nomenclature of this subject has not
been standardized and that therefore the definitions given below are not
universally accepted.
2. Lattice Definitions
A lattice is a class of objects ordered by a transitive reflexive binary relation
for which every pair x, y of the objects has a unique order supremum x Y y
and infimum x Ay. The lattice will be called complete if every subset has
a supremum and infimum. If every upper-bounded subset has a supremum,
then every lower-bounded subset has an infimum, the supremum of the lower
bounds of the subset, and if every lower-bounded subset has an infimum,
then every upper-bounded subset has a supremum, the infimum of the upper
bounds of the subset. If these suprema and infima exist, the lattice will be
called conditionally complete.
A lattice will be said to have the countability property if each subset which
has a supremum [infimum] contains a countable subset with the same
supremum [infimum].
A subset of a lattice is called a sublattice if x Y y and x A yare in the
subset whenever x and yare.
3. Cones
A cone is a set closed under a commutative addition operation (x + y) and
multiplication by positive constants (cx) satisfying the usual associative and
distributive laws together with
x +y = 0 => x = y = 0,
A cone can be ordered by the convention that x -< Y if there is a cone element
z such that x + z = y. This order, called the specific order, is transitive and
reflexive, and x :5 Y implies that cx :5 cy when c ~ 0 and that x + z :5 y + z
for all cone elements z. Moreover if x + z:5 y + z for some cone element z,
then x :5 y. A supremum or infimum of a set of cone elements is necessarily
unique.
If in the specific order every pair of cone elements has a supremum
[infimum], then every pair also has an infimum [supremum] and the cone
is therefore a lattice. To see this, suppose for example that every pair x, y
has a supremum x Y y. Then it will now be shown that x A y exists and
xYy+xAy=x+y. (4.1)
z + x Y y = x + Y:5 x Y y + y;
If .It is a vector space and if .;V is a cone in .It, the space .It can be given
a transitive reflexive order by setting x ::S y if y - x E .;V. The order thereby
assigned to .;V is the specific order, and .;V becomes the set .It + of positive
elements of .It, that is, the set of elements x ~ O. This ordering of .It is
called the specific order relative to .;V. It is trivial that in this order the pair
of relations x::S y and y::s x implies that x = y. Conversely, let .It be a
vector space with a transitive reflexive order in which this implication is
valid and in which x::s y implies both that cx::s cy for c E IR + and that
x + z ::S y + z for z E.It. The set .It + of elements >-0 is then a cone, and the
.It order is the specific order relative to .It + .
5. Vector Lattices
and
The property (5.2) can be used to deduce properties involving suprema from
dual properties involving infima and conversely. We shall use the notation
x +y - (x Y y) = (x + y) + (-X) A. (-y) = y A. x;
that is, (4.1) is true for vector lattices. We rewrite this result for later reference
together with some useful relations easily deducible from it.
x Yy +x A. y = x + y, Icxl = IcIIXI,
Ix + yl:s IXI + Iyl·
(5.4)
(5.5)
Dually, the existence of AaEl X a implies that AaEI (x a Y y) exists and that
(5.6)
Only (5.5) will be proved. The right side of (5.5) majorizes x a A. y for every IX,
and conversely, if x ~ X a A. y for every IX, then
(6.2)
To prove linearity of %oL, observe that if xe %1. and ce IR, then cxe%1.
because when y is in %,
and if Xl and X 2 are in %1., their sum is in %1. because (6.2) implies that
when y is in %,
V (xa -
[aeI xp)l A Iyl = V [(xa - xp) A lylJ = 0;
j aeI
so x - x p, and therefore x are in %1.. In the general case choose any index
value P, and replace Xa by x~ = Xa Y x p for all 0(. The set x: has a smallest
element; so its supremum x is in %1., as was to be proved.
9. Projections on Bands
If % is a band in a conditionally complete vector lattice .R, define the map
1t% from .R onto % by
(9.1)
for x 2: 0, and for arbitrary x define 1t%x = 1t%x+ - 1t%x-. The map 1t%
reduces to the identity on % and 1t%x ~ x for x >- O.
The map 1tx is obviously order preserving on .R+. The linearity of 1t%
to be proved below will therefore imply that 1t% is order preserving on .R.
764 A.III. Lattice Theory
If yE % and if X;> 0, then Iyl A (x - 1r.¥x) + 1r.¥X ::S x, and since the left
side is a positive element of %, it follows that operating with 1r.¥ on both
sides shows that the left side is majorized by 1r.¥X. Thus O::S Iyl A (x - 1r.¥x)
::S O. The indicated infimum is therefore 0; that is, x - 1r.¥XE %1., and x can
be written in the form x = Xl + X2 with Xl = 1r.¥XE% and X2 = x - 1r.¥XE
% 1.. This representation of x as the sum of an element of % and one of
%1. is trivially extendible to not necessarily positive elements x. Since such
a representation must be unique, .A is the direct sum of % and % 1., %1.1. =
%, and the map X 1--+ Xl = 1r.¥X must be linear. Replace % by %1. above to
find that X2 = 1r.¥.LX.
Lemma. Let %0 be a subset ola conditionally complete vector lattice, and let
% be the band generated by %0' Then %l = %1..
(11.1 )
so (k --+ (0) 1rX::S 1r 2 X ::S 1rX, and it follows that 1r = 1r 2 • The map 1r is additive
because on'the one hand using (6.2)
12. Order Convergence 765
Then
and if these two values are equal, x(·) is said to have this common value as
limit. This discussion becomes trivial if I has a last element because then
both sides of (12.2) become the value of x(·) at the last element.
lim A x(t) == lim inf x(t), lim y x(t) = lim sup x(t)
n-co t~ln tt n-co t~tn tt
and that if s is an upper bound of t., then (13.1) is true. If I has no cofinal
increasing sequence, there are (infinitely many) such points s, and we are
done. If I has a cofinal increasing sequence, the sequence t. is cofinal, and
we define In = {t: tn :::;; t < tn+ 1 }. Let I: be a countable subset of In, chosen
so that x(·) has the same infimum and supremum on I: as on In. The set
I:
J = U~ satisfies (13.2).
Appendix IV
Y §"=§"{§"
ael
a «' IY.EI} , A~= n~·
ael ael
Borel subsets of X, that is, the (J algebra generated by the class of open
subsets of X. If (X, f![) and (Y, r1JI) are measurable spaces, a function ¢ from
X into Y is defined as measurable if ¢ -1 (r1JI) c f![, and for this it is sufficient
that ¢-l(A)Ef![ for each set A in a subclass of r1JI which generates the (J
algebra r1JI. If ¢1 is a measurable function from (X, f![) into (Y, r1JI) and if ¢2
is a measurable function from (Y, r1JI) into a third measurable space (Z,~),
then the composed function ¢2(¢1) is measurable from (X, f![) into (Z, ~).
If X is a set, if ~ is a (J algebra of subsets of X for each point ex of some
index set I, and if ¢ is a measurable function from (X, Yael ~J into a
measurable space (Y, f![), then if r1JI is countably generated, there is a count-
able subset J of I such that ¢ is measurable from (X, YaeJ~) into (Y, r1JI). In
fact it is sufficient to show that for each set A in a countable generating class
for Y the set ¢ -1 (A) is in the (J algebra generated by a countable subclass of
~., and we have already remarked in Section I that this is true.
Suppose that to each point t of a set I corresponds a measurable space
(X;, f![t)· The product (J algebra x teI f![t is defined as the (J algebra of subsets
of the product space xte/X; generated by the class of product sets xtelA t
with At = X; for every value of t with one possible exception and for that
value At Ef![t. The product measurable space is defined as (x teI X/> X te/f![t).
If (X, f![) is a measurable space and if (X;, f![t) is a replica of (X,!!l) for every
t in a set I, we denote the product measurable space by (XI, f!(1), or by
(xl, f![k) if I has cardinality k.
3. Composition of Functions
If y is a function from a space X into a measurable space (Y, r1JI), the smallest
(J algebra ~ of subsets of X making y measurable from (X, ~) into (Y, r1JI)
will be denoted by ~{y}. That is, ~{y} = y-1(r1JI) is the class of subsets of
X of the form {y E A} with A in r1JI. If ¢ is a measurable function from (Y, r1JI)
into a measurable space (Z, ~), the composed function z = ¢(y) is measur-
able from (X, ~ {y}) into (Z, ~). Conversely, if z is a measurable function
from (X, ~ {y}) into (Z, ~), it is a useful fact that z must have this form
¢(y) under suitable restrictions on the measurable space (Z, ~). The follow-
ing lemma, stated in the preceding context, gives one such restriction.
Lemma. Let (Z, ~) be a Polish space coupled with its class ofBorel sets. Then
if z is a measurablefunction from (X, ~ {y}) into (Z, ~), there is a measurable
function ¢ from (Y, r1JI) into (Z,~) such that z = ¢(y).
We can suppose that Z has been assigned a metric making the space
complete and separable. To prove the lemma, suppose first that z has as
range a sequence '- of points of Z. Then Z-l«(;) E~{Y}; so there is a (perhaps
not uniquely determined) set B j in r1JI such that Z-l«(j) = y-1(BJ If we
replaceBo,B 1 , •.. byBo,B1-Bo,B1-(BouB1), ... if necessary, we can
4. The Measure Lattice of a Measurable Space 769
~{y(t),tEI} = Y ~{y(t)}.
leI
The only nontrivial part of this assertion is the countable additivity of the
set functions defined in (4.1). If )'(A) is the right-hand side of the first line
and if A = Uf=o A j (disjoint union),
- Bj ): Bj C Aj } )'(A j ).
j=O j=o
Thus). is a measure, and an analogous argument shows that the second line
of (4.1) defines a measure.
The class A+ has the identically vanishing measure as order infimum and
the measure assigning + 00 to each nonempty set as order supremum. More-
over the lattice A+ is a complete lattice. In fact we now prove that an
arbitrary subset {Jl<z, IX E I} of A+ has an order supremum (and therefore
also an order infimum). In proving that the supremum exists it can be
supposed that Jl. contains every supremum of finitely many of its elements
because adjoining these suprema does not change the conditions for an
overall supremum. Define Jl on f£ by Jl(A) = SUP<ZEI Jl<z(A). It is trivial that
Jl = ~EI Jl<Z once it is shown that Jl is a measure. If A = U~ Aj (disjoint
union),
00 00
for all IX; so Jl is countably subadditive. Finite additivity is trivial and implies
(4.4)
Support of a Measure
A support of a measure Jl on (X, f£) is a set with the property that its comple-
ment is Jl null. In some contexts uniqueness can be attained by a further
condition on a support. For example, if Jl is a measure of Borel subsets of
an open subset X of IR N , finite on compact subsets, then Jl has a smallest
support closed relative to X.
Orthogonal Measures
If Jl and v are measures on (X, f£), they are orthogonal if Jl A v = 0, that is,
if (Jl A v)(X) = O. This condition is satisfied if and only if the measures have
5. The (J Finite Measure Lattice of a Measurable Space (Notation of Section 4) 771
Theorem. The lattice ",1(<1+ has the countability property .. that is if {J.l.. , (XE I} is
an upper-bounded subset of ",1(;, there is a countable subset J of I such that
Y..eJJ.l.. = Y..elJ.l...
It can be assumed in the proof that J.l. contains every supremum of finitely
many of its elements since these suprema can be adjoined to J.l. if necessary
to achieve this, without altering the generality of the context. It can also be
assumed that J.l.(X) is bounded because if v is an upper bound of J.l. in ",1(;,
there is a disjoint sequence A. of sets of finite v measure, with union X, so
that J.l.(A) ~ v(A j ) < + 00, and if the theorem is known to be true for the
projections on A j of the measures involved, the theorem follows as stated.
Under these assumptions choose index values (Xl' (X2' ••• in such a way that
J.l.. 1 ~ J.l.. 2 ~ ... and that lim,,_ex> J.l..n (X) = sUP.. el J.l..(X). Define J.l = Y..'2l J.l...
n'
that is, J.l(A) = lim,,_ex> J.l.. (A) for every set A in q-. Then J.l ~ Yael J.l... In the
other direction observe first " that for all (x,
The measure J.l Y J.l.. - J.l has value 0 on X and is therefore the zero measure;
that is, J.l ~ J.l.. , and so J.l ~ Yael J.l... Hence there is equality, and we have
proved that the supremum in question is the supremum of the sequence J.l....
772 A.IV. Lattice Theoretic Concepts in Measure Theory
A. = J1 - v,
This particular Jordan decomposition is minimal in the sense that J1 :s; J1' and
v:s; v' whenever J1' - v' is a Jordan decomposition of A.. Conversely, if J1 and
v are measures on X, their difference J1 - v need not be a signed measure,
but if both J1 and v are (J finite, there is an increasing sequence B. of sets
with union X such that both J1 and v are finite on every set Bj ; so the restric-
tions of J1 and v to the class of subsets of Bj are finite, and we can therefore
build a set A + from the positivity sets of these restrictions such that J1 ~ v
on the subsets of A+ and J1 :s; von the subsets of A- = X - A+. In this way
we have found what amounts to a Hahn decomposition of X for J1 - v and
thereby found a Jordan decomposition of this difference, although the
difference may not be defined on all ~ sets. In Section 7 such differences will
be rigorously defined and ordered to obtain a vector lattice.
Charges
topology that Pl' is either the class B8(Pl') of Borel subsets of X or the perhaps
partial completion of B8(Pl') relative to some class of measures. Suppose now
that X is a locally compact second countable Hausdorff space. (In this book
X will in fact usually be an open subset of IR N .) In this context it is to be
understood in the absence of a contrary statement that the set functions are
finite valued on compact sets. A member I'" of vita for which 11"'1 = 1"'+ + 1"'-
is finite valued on compact sets will be called a charge. If either 1"'+ or 1"'- is
finite valued, the charge can be identified with the signed measure 1"'+ - 1"'-,
in particular with the measure 1"'+ if 1"'- == O. We shall not use the term
"Radon measure" in this book, in which "measure" always implies positivity.
The class ofcharges is a sublattice of vita and is itselfa conditionally complete
vector lattice with the countability property.
In the following sections it is to be understood that the measures and
charges discussed are defined on some measurable space, specified further
as needed by the context.
(8.1)
I'" Yv = (1"';,1"") with dl"'; = (f. + g2) V (f2 + g.) dA., dl"" = (f2 + g2)dA.,
I'" A v = (1"';',1"") with dl"';' = (f. + g2) 1\ (f2 + g.) dA..
(8.2)
and the essential limit infimum is defined dually. A functionfis called the
essential limit of f. if both the essential limit superior and essential limit
inferior are equal A. almost everywhere to f
lim inf x(tn) = ess lim inf x(t), lim sup x(tn) = ess lim sup x(t) a.s.
n-oo 11' n-oo 11'
(10.1 )
because the sums of the integrals of the bracketed A. almost everywhere posi-
tive functions converge. Hence (10.1) is true with t. the set {t nj :n ~ O,j:S; an}
arranged in increasing order.
Generalization
Let {x(t), tEl} be an upper-directed (in the essential order) family of mea-
surable functions from the (T finite measure space (X,:!E, A.) into ~. The
ordering of the functions defines an ordering of I, and
[If I does not have a countable cofinal set, this result is trivial because
according to Theorem 111.12 there is a point t' of I such that x(t) = x(t')
almost surely whenever t ~ t'.] If ess infl e I x(t) ~ 0, then
II. Measures on Polish Spaces 777
Now suppose that P1-+ fp is a function from a directed set I into the space
of measurable functions from (X,'¥, A) into iR. Then if ess infpEdp ~ 0, the
preceding monotone limit result yields Fatou's lemma in the present context:
Drop the positivity hypothesis and apply the usual argument using Fatou's
lemma to prove the Lebesgue dominated convergence theorem in the present
context: if ess limptfp = f exists and if ess SUPPE/lfpl is A integrable, then
We sketch the proof for A a finite measure. In the first place (11.1) is
true if "compact" is replaced by "closed" because the class of Borel sets A
for which (11.1) as so modified is true includes the closed sets and is closed
under countable unions and intersections, and is therefore .sf(X). Thus it is
sufficient to verify (11.1) as stated for closed sets A. Let A be a closed set,
and let 6 be a strictly positive number. In some metric for X let A. be a
sequence of nonempty closed subsets of A, of diameter < 1, with union A.
Define Bo = A and B 1 = Uj=o Ai' where n is so large that A(B1) > A(Bo) - 6.
Continue by induction: if B k has been defined as a closed subset of B k - 1
with A(Bk ) > A(A) - 6, we can use the preceding argument to find Bk + 1 , a
closed subset of B k , the union of finitely many closed sets of diameter
< 1/(k + 1), with A(Bk+l) > A(A) - 6. The set B = n~o Bk is a closed set
which can be covered by finitely many sets ofdiameter < 11k for every k > 0;
so B is compact. Moreover A(B) ~ A(A) - 6. Hence (11.1) is true.
This theorem implies that for any (f finite Borel measure J1. on a Polish
778 A.IV. Lattice Theoretic Concepts in Measure Theory
space the class of continuous functions with compact support on the space
is a dense subset of L 1 (J-l).
(12.2)
In particular, if (12.2) is required only when each set Sn is a closed ball with
center" the derivate is called the symmetric derivate. The convex derivate
exists at v almost every point" and the derivate function is v almost surely
the Radon Nikodym derivative dJ-l/dv. The latter notation will also be used
for the convex and symmetric derivates, with the intended interpretation
always specified.
If there is a finite number q such that
Uniform Integrability
This Appendix, consisting of only one section, lists for easy reference what
is needed in this book of the uniform integrability concept.
It will be convenient to call a function CI> from IR+ to IR+ a uniform
integrability test function if CI> is monotone increasing and convex and if
lims_ex> [CI>(s)/s] = +00.
Let (X, X, A) be a measure space with A(X) < + 00. All functions on X
in the discussion below are measurable from (X, X) into (~, £B(~)) unless
specified otherwise. Recall that a family {Jr, t E I} of such functions is said
to be uniformly integrable (relative to A) if
lim sup r
n-ex> tel Jllftl>n}
IJrldA = O.
The following uniform integrability properties are used in this book. Except
in (d), all functions of the family are in L 1 (A).
(a) The family f. is uniformly integrable if and only if it is L 1 bounded
and if the set function family {A f-+ SA IJr IdA, t E I} is uniformly absolutely
continuous relative to A; more formally f. is uniformly integrable if and
only if
r
sup IJrI dA <
tel Jx
+ 00, and lim sup
.t(A)-O tel
fA
IJrI dA = O.
lim inf
n-C() Jrxin dA ~ f
x
lim inffn dA.
n-+oo
Generalization
Let (X, fl") be a measurable space, and let I be an arbitrary nonempty set.
Suppose that for each t in I there is a function}; on X and a finite measure
A, on fl". The family is said to be uniformly integrable relative to A. if
The obvious translations of (a) and (b) into the present context are valid.
Appendix VI
1. Kernels
Let (X,~) and (Y, qy) be measurable spaces. A kernel from the first space
into the second is defined as a function from X x qy into R+ with the follow-
ing properties:
(K I) p(', A) is ~ measurable when A e qy.
(K2) p(~,.) is a measure on qy when ~eX.
The kernel is called substochastic if p(', qy) ::;; I and stochastic if p(', qy) == I.
If (X, ~) = (Y, qy), the kernel is said to have state space (X, ~).
(~eX, A eqy)
Notation
If p is a kernel from (X,~) into (Y, qy) and ifjis a measurable function from
(Y, qy) into (1R,£i(R)), we write p(~,f) for hj("jp(~, cbJ) when this integral is
well defined, for example, whenj~ 0 andjis qy measurable. Up has density
q relative to a specified measure, we also write q(',f) for p(',f).
Let P be a substochastic kernel with state space (X, ~). This kernel can be
extended to be stochastic as follows. Adjoin a trap point (also called a
cemetery) a to obtain an enlarged space X' = Xu {a}, and define ~' as the
782 A.VI. Kernels and Transition Functions
(J algebra of subsets of X' generated by [I[ and the singleton {a}. A stochastic
kernel p' with state space (X', [1[') is then determined by setting p' = p on
X x [I[ and
Ifp is a kernel from (X, [I[) into (Y, <??t) and if the functionp(', X) is bounded,
we can extend each measure p(~,.) by partial completion to the (J algebra
C¥I(<??t) of universally measurable sets over <??t. Under this extensionp becomes
a kernel from (X, C¥I([I[)) into (Y, C¥I(<??t)). To see this, let fl. be the completion
of a finite measure on [1[, suppose that A E C¥I (<??t), define a measure v on [I[ by
v(·) = Jxp(~, ·)fl.(d~), and extend v by partial completion to the (J algebra
C¥I(<??t). Since A is v measurable, there are sets At, A 2 in <??t with At cAe A 2
and v(A t ) = v(A 2 ). This equality implies thatp(',A t ) = p(', A) = p(',A 2 ) fl.
almost everywhere on X; that is, p(', A) is fl. measurable for every fl., as was
to be proved. This argument shows that the definition of v(A) for A· in <??t
remains valid for A in C¥I(<??t).
It is important for the application to probability that we have actually
proved more than was asserted. In fact let C¥lp{<??t) be the (J algebra of those
subsets of Y which, for every choice of fl., are in the completion of the measure
v defined above. This (J algebra includes C¥I(<??t), and its sets will be called the
universally measurable sets over <??t relative to p. What we have proved is that
if p( ~, .) is extended by partial completion to this (J algebra, then p(', A) is
universally measurable, and the definition of v remains valid.
3. Transition Functions
Let I be a linearly ordered set, let (X, [i[) be a measurable space, and suppose
that to each pair (r, s) of points of I with r < s corresponds a stochastic
kernelp(r,', s,) with state space (X, [I[) such that for A in [I[ and r t < r2 < r3
in I the Chapman-Kolmogorov equation
definition will oe specified explicitly. The parameter set is usually either the
set of strictly positive integers discrete parameter case or the interval ]0, + oo[
(continuous parameter case).
Let (X,q') be a measurable space, let p(l,',') be a kernel with this state
space, and define inductively a sequence of kernels with this state space by
Then
Let (X, q') be a measurable space, and let p be a function from ]0, + oo[ x
X x q' into IR+ with the following properties:
(a) For each t in ]0, + oo[ the function p(t,',') is a kernel with state
space (X, q').
(b) The Chapman-Kolmogorov equation (3.3) (with rand s now in
]0, + ooD is satisfied.
e,
If each kernel p(t,',') is stochastic, the function (r, s, A) 1-+ p(s - r, A) e,
for 0 < r < s is a transition function with parameter set ]0, + 00[, but as in
the discrete parameter case the function p itself is called a stationary or
temporally homogeneous transition function. If the kernels are allowed to
be substochastic, in which case p is a substochastic transition function, a
784 A.VI. Kernels and Transition Functions
single trap point can be adjoined to Xto make each kernelp(t,·,·) stochastic
and thereby extend p to be a (stochastic) transition function.
pu(r + s,~, A) = pu(r + S,~, Ai) = Ix Pu(S, '1, Ai)pir,~, tJ,,), i = 1,2;
(3.4)
(1.1)
The following theorem gives conditions that such a limit relation be true.
The conditions are phrased for ease in application rather than for maximal
generality.
If the right side of (1.2) is + 00, inequality (1.2) becomes trivial. Thus to
prove (1.2), which implies the last assertion of the theorem, it is sufficient to
show that if f ~ IX < + 00 on a deleted open neighborhood A of (, then the
left side of (1.2) is at most IX. We can suppose, adding a constant to f if
necessary, that IX ~ O. Then
as was to be proved.
786 A.VII. Integral Limit Theorems
an = r k(n, rr)V(dr{),
JiliN
(2.1)
· an dV(O)
IIm- (2.2)
=dH .
"-00 bn
r k(n,rr)IVI(drr) <
JiliN
+00.
Suppose it has been proved that (2.2) is true under the following special
conditions: V E r, V ~ 0, and the derivate in (2.2) is the symmetric derivate
and vanishes. It then follows that (2.2) is true for V in r whenever the
derivate on the right exists as a symmetric variational derivate (see Section
IV.12 for the derivate definitions). In fact if q is the value of this derivate,
(3.1)
lim an = 0 (3.2)
bn
ft-oo
Theorem. Suppose that an' bn as defined by (3.1) are finite for all n and that
thefollowing conditions, in which p is some strictlypositive integer, are satisfied.
(a) k n is positive and monotone decreasing and has a continuous derivative
k~.
(b) Ifa > 0,
(c) There is a strictly positive function f on IR + such that the function knlf
is monotone decreasing for large n and that J(f f dex < + 00.
lim ex(r) = 0 rP
(d)
,-0 p(r) , lim sup P( ) < + 00.
,-0 r
To prove the theorem, choose e strictly positive and so small that the
limit superior in (d) is strictly less than lIe. If a is so small that ex ~ ep on
[0, a], then
r kndex
Jo
a
= ex(a)kn(a) - r cxk~d/1 ~ cx(a)kn(a)
Jo
a
_
- e r Pk~dl1
Jo
a
(3.3)
= kn(a) [ex(a) - ep(a)] +e f: kndP ~ ebn·
If a is so small that er P ~ p(r) for r in [0, a], then
bn ~ r kndP
a
= p(a)kn(a) - r Pk~dl1 ~ p(a)kn(a) - e r rPk~(r)11(dr)
a a
Jo Jo Jo (3.4)
= kn(a)[p(a) - eaP] + ep J: k n(r)r P- 111(dr) ~e J: k n(r)r P- 111(dr).
788 A.VII. Integral Limit Theorems
[Incidentally this inequality shows that condition (c) implies the finiteness
of an.] In view of condition (b) the limit superior in (3.5) is 0, and therefore
(3.2) is true.
lim K(s, r) N = O.
,"'0 K(so, r)(j(s)
4. A Ratio Integral Limit Theorem Involving Convex Variational Derivates 789
Observe that (Section IV.12) dV/dH and diN/dH exist and are finite as convex
variational derivates at H almost every point' of fRN.
For fixed H the class of charges V satisfying (a) is linear, contains IVI
with V, and contains H. Hence according to the argument in Section 2, it
is sufficient to prove that (4.2) is true for' when V is positive and both
diN/dH and dV/dH exist as finite convex derivates with (dV/dH)(O = o. To
simplify the notation, we assume that' = O. For r > 0 define ex(e,r) and
f3(e, r), respectively, as the V and H measures of B(e, r), and define ex(e, 0) =
f3(e,O) = O. By definition of the convex derivate
so that
r
J[O,<I(S))
K(s,r)dex(e,r) < ex(e,b(s»
h(e, s) - K(s, b(s»f3(e, b(s»
. (4.5)
-f
j<l(s),a]
(4.6)
K'(s, r)ex(e, r)/ 1 (dr).
j<l(s),a]
If now e > 0 and if a is so small that ex(e, r) ~ ef3(e, r) when lei ~ cr and
r ~ a, then the right side of (4.6) is majorized when K' ex is replaced by eK'f3,
and integration by parts yields
790 A. VII. Integral Limit Theorems
r
J]6(S),a]
K(s,r)da.(e,r)::;; K(s,a)[a.(e,a) - ep(e,a)]
- K(s, <5(s» [a.(e, <5 (s» - ep(e,<5(s»]
(4.7)
+e r
J]6(.),a)
K(s,r)dp(e,r)
Finally, if So is chosen as in condition (d) of the theorem, if e' > 0, and then
if s is sufficiently small,
(4.9)
Now u/h is the sum of the integrals on the left in (4.5), (4.8), and (4.9). The
first of these integrals tends to 0 with s when lei::;; c<5(s) by (4.3). The second
can be made arbitrarily small in the limit (s - 0) by choosing e small and then
choosing a small. For such a choice of a the right side of (4.9) is arbitrarily
small with e' when lei::;; c<5(s). Hence Theorem 4 is true.
Appendix VIII
{u l > c} = U {up> c}
pe I
792 A. VIII. Lower Semicontinuous Functions
simultaneously for every rational c and therefore for all c. Then uJ is lower
f f
semicontinuous, u J ~ u , and {u J > c} = {u > c} for all c. Hence {u J ~ c} =
f f f
{u ~ c} also, and subtraction yields {u J = c} = {u = c}; so uJ == u . The
second assertion of the theorem is left to the reader.
and it follows that u+J .:::; u+f . The reverse inequality is trivial; so there is
equality. The second assertion of the lemma is left to the reader.
Historical Notes
The modernization of classical potential theory during the last fifty years
has proceeded for the most part in small steps, many of which were more
and more rigorous derivations in more and more general contexts of facts
stated years earlier. Thus it is certain that the following notes, which give
reference to the "originators" of the more important advances, will appear
to knowledgeable readers to be inaccurate and unfair. The historical notes
to the probability discussion are only slightly more reliable. It is trivial for
research mathematicians to discover mistakes in historical accounts of their
own subjects, especially when the accounts rely on publication dates and on
the references in research papers. Thus no one should have much confidence
in a detailed history of the development of a mathematical theory. The
difficulty is compounded by the fact that many theorems are proved by
several authors in more or less overlapping formulations and that (see the
many papers on the Martin boundary) authors are frequently unwilling to
read their colleagues' papers carefully enough to state for the record the
exact differences '.:>etween the scopes of their papers. Thus the reader is
requested to read the following notes with a grain of salt and a lump of
tolerance.
Part 1
See Burkhardt and Meyer [I, 1900] and Lichtenstein [I, 1919] for reviews
of nineteenth and early twentieth century potential theory, and see Kellogg
[2, 1929] for potential theory just before its renaissance. See Brelot [11, 1952]
and [17, 1972] for more modern reviews. The books of Tsuji [I, 1959],
Helms [1, 1969], Brelot [15, 1969], Constantinescu and Cornea [I, 1972],
Landkof [1, 1972], and Wermer [I, 1974] on potential theory contain much
of the material in Part I but are organized differently with emphasis on
different aspects of the subject. The books of Murali Rao [4, 1977], Port
and Stone [1, 1978], and Chung [2, 1981] derive their potential theory as
a by-product of probability.
794 Historical Notes
Chapter 1.1
Chapter 1.11
Chapter I.III
Chapter l.IV
Chapter l.V
Section 1. Brelot [5, 1941] introduced polar sets to take the place of sets
of inner capacity 0 (called inner polar sets in this book) as the negligible
sets of classical potential theory. Cartan proved in [2, 1945], although he
announced the result in [I, 1942], that the polar sets are the sets of capacity
oin the capacity definition of Chapter IXIII.
Section 2. Choquet [2, 1957] showed, in a trivially different context, that
if A is a polar G6 subset of a Greenian subset D of ~N, then there is a measure
fJ. supported by A such that A is the set of infinities of GDfJ.. G. C. Evans had
proved the existence of such a potential for A polar and compact.
796 Historical Notes
Chapter LVI
Chapter 1.VII
Chapter I. VIII
See Vasilesco [3, 1938] for a survey of progress in the Dirichlet problem
just before Brelot's [3, 1939] definitive study of what is now called the
PWB method.
Section 1. The fact that relativization of a family of functions having an
average property (1.1) yields a family with a corresponding average property
(1.3) was pointed out in [Doob 9, 1958]. In a Markov process probabilistic
context this relativization corresponds to a modification of transition prob-
abilities (Section 2.VI.l3) conditioning paths to go where the conditioning
function is large. The analysis of the Dirichlet problem on a Greenian subset
of ~N provided with its Martin boundary in [Brelot 13, 1956] was essentially,
although not explicitly, for relative harmonic functions.
The Dirichlet problem for harmonic functions has been attacked in several
ways, but it was finally seen that each way involves two distinct problems.
(i) The first problem is to find, for a specified suitably restricted boundary
function f, certainly for an arbitrary finite-valued continuous boundary
function f, a perhaps generalized "solution" Ufo The function uf is to be
harmonic, and if the given domain and the given boundary function are
sufficiently smooth, the function uf is to have boundary limit function f;
that is, uf is the solution of the Dirichlet problem in the classical sense.
(ii) If uf exists and if a domain boundary point' is specified, the second
problem is to find conditions on the domain and boundary function ensuring
that uf has limitf<O at ,. The simple Zaremba [1, 1911] example [Section 2,
Example (a)] and the more discouraging Lebesgue [1, 1912] spine example
(Section 15) showed that the Dirichlet problem may not be solvable in the
classical sense even when the boundary is the Euclidean boundary and
the boundary function is finite valued and continuous. Poincare [I, 1890;
2, 1899], however, had shown that for a sufficiently smooth Euclidean
boundary the Dirichlet problem has a solution in the classical sense for
every finite-valued continuous boundary function. The problem of finding
Dirichlet solutions in more general contexts was solved by generalizing the
798 Historical Notes
Sections 12 to 14. Poincare [1, 1890] used the idea of what is now called
a barrier. Lebesgue [2, 1912] coined the term and used the existence of
barriers for a regular region to prove the convergence to the Dirichlet solution
(for a finite-valued continuous boundary function) of a certain sequence of
approximants. Lebesgue [3, 1924] found that for the existence of a barrier
at a Euclidean boundary point it is necessary and sufficient that the point
be regular. Bouligand [I, 1926] showed that it is sufficient for regularity
that the barrier be a weak one and proved the related result that a Euclidean
boundary point is regular if and only if the Green function GD(~") of
the given domain D has limit 0 at the boundary point for every pole ~
(equivalently, a single pole if D is connected).
Section 15. In the years when potential theory was finally conquering
the Dirichlet problem the cone regularity condition was ascribed to both
Poincare and Zaremba. Only Clio now remembers why Zaremba was later
given the sole credit; the condition will be given both names in this book.
Section 19. The proof of Theorem 19(b4) follows that in [Murali Rao
3, 1974]. The result was proved by Brelot [6, 1944] in the course of his
treatment of potential theory on IR N extended by a point at infinity.
Part I 799
Chapter l.IX
Everything in this chapter is in the folk lore of potential theory, and much
of it has appeared explicitly.
Sections 9 and 10. The classes of quasi-bounded and singular harmonic
functions were first discussed by Parreau [1, 1951]'
Chapter IX
Chapter IXI
See [Brelot 16, 1971] for further elaboration of the fine topology and its
applications.
Section 1. Brelot [4, 1940] defined thinness of a set at a point by XI(2.1).
Cartan pointed out in a letter to him that thinness could be interpreted by
means of what is now called the fine topology. For some years thereafter,
however, the fine topology was merely a tool for phrasing results elegantly;
in fact topological language was not commonly used in discussions involving
thinness. Cartan [3, 1946] noted that the fine topology is the restriction of a
certain topology of measures to the class of unit measures supported by
singletons. According to Constantinescu and Cornea [I, 1972], the Baire
property of the fine topology was noted by Cornea in 1966.
Section 4. The existence of the fine limits in Theorem 4(a) was proved by
Doob [8, 1957] by probabilistic and [II, 1959] by nonprobabilistic methods.
The present proof is new. The identification of these limits could easily
(see the application in Section XII.l9) have been made in these earlier
papers but was not.
Section 5. See [Brelot 6, 1944] for classical potential theory extended
to ~N U roo}.
Section 6. Theorem 6 is due to Brelot [7, 1944].
Section 9. Theorem 9 is due to Cartan [see Deny I, 1950, p. 171] for
fine limits and to Doob [11, 1959] for fine cluster values (in the Martin
boundary context).
Section 11. Theorem II is due to Doob [17, 1966].
Section 12. Theorem 12 is due to Brelot [4,1940].
Sections 14 and 15. Theorems 14 and 15 are due to Brelot [8, 1945].
Section 18. Theorem 18 is due to Brelot [10, 1948], but see also Vallee
Poussin 4, 1938].
Section 19. See [Fuglede I, 1972] for a discussion of classical potential
theory based on fine superharmonic and fine harmonic functions.
Sections 21 and 22. The material in these sections is taken from [Brelot
9, 1946].
Section 23. See the note to Section XVIII.l6 on the parabolic context
domination principle.
Part 1 801
Chapter lxn
Sections 1 to 9. Martin [1, 1941] defined what is now called the Martin
boundary and proved what is now called the Martin representation theorem
(Theorem 9). By now the Martin boundary of a set D on which harmonic
functions in some generalized sense are defined is a rather vague concept.
Roughly any set of points (, to each of which corresponds a minimal har-
monic function K«(, .), which is adjoined to D along with possible other
points to form a topological space and which then gives as a representation
J
of an arbitrary positive harmonic function u an integral K«(, ·)Mu(d() is
called a Martin boundary for D. The treatment in Sections 1 to 9 follows
Martin as modernized by Brelot [13, 1956] and put into the context of
h-harmonic functions. The significance for its Martin representation of quasi
boundedness ofa harmonic function was pointed out by Parreau [I, 1951].
Section 10. Theorem 10 is due to Brelot [13,1956]. Heins [I, 1959] defined
a "generalized harmonic measure" on a Riemann surface D as a positive
harmonic function u for which 0:::;; u :::;; 1 and GMD[u 1\ (1 - u)] = O.
According to the remark "Intrinsic definition of h-harmonic measure,"
such a function u is actually the harmonic measure of a Martin boundary
subset. (The Martin boundary discussion is applicable to Riemann surfaces.)
Sections 11 to 14. Nairn [1, 1957] defined the minimal-fine topology on
a Martin space (in a more satisfying way than that in Section 12, where her
elegant approach is considerably abbreviated) and proved Theorems 11,
13, and 14. Theorems 13(a) and 14 had already been proved in different
terminology for D a half-space by Lelong [1, 1949].
Section 16. Nairn [1, 1957] proved the part of Theorem 16 involving
minimal-fine limits. The cluster set part of Theorem 16 is taken from [Doob
11, 1959].
Section 18. Theorem 18 is due to Nairn [1, 1957]'
Section 19. Theorem 19 was proved by Doob [8, 1957] using probabilistic
and [11,1959] nonprobabilistic methods. This theorem has been generalized
to axiomatic potential theory contexts by Gowrisankaran (to Brelot har-
monic spaces) and by Sibony (to a context including Bauer harmonic spaces).
See [Taylor 1, 1980] for a simple version of Sibony's result with references
to previous work.
Section 21. Theorem 21 was proved by Brelot and Doob [1, 1963] along
with further theorems on the relations between nontangential and minimal-
fine boundary limits of functions defined on a half-space. See the references
there to work of Constantinescu and Cornea and others on the relations
between nontangential and minimal-fine cluster values of functions defined
on a ball and see [Brossard 1, 1978] for such relations derived in probabilistic
language.
802 Historical Notes
Sections 22 and 23. Theorem 23(a) for n = 2, in the disk rather than the
half-plane context, was proved by Littlewood [I, 1928] long before the fine
topology was invented. His result was generalized to the N-dimensional
context by Privalov [I, 1938]. The proofs of Lemma 22 and Theorem 23
are taken (corrected) from [Doob 16,1965], an unreadably garbled paper.
Fine topology confusion. Let D be a half-space, let' be a finite boundary
point of D, and let A be a subset of D. The relations between thinness of A
at', minimal thinness of A at', and the relations between these two concepts
when A is in a cone with vertex' are not obvious and have sometimes been
misstated in the literature. The situation has been complicated by the habit
of Doob and some other authors of omitting the qualifier "minimal" in
discussing minimal-fine limits and cluster values at Martin boundary points.
Jackson [I, 1970] surveyed this situation and made the necessary corrections.
Chapter Ixm
Section 1. In a pioneering paper Gauss [I, 1840] considered measures v
supported by a smooth surface A in ~3. For f a given function on A he
J
studied the properties of v chosen to minimize A (Gv - 2f) dv for specified
v(A); the measure v was by hypothesis given by a smooth density relative
to surface area. He took it for granted that a minimizing measure j.l existed
and showed that then Gj.l - f is identically constant on the support of j.l.
In particular (f = const), Gauss thereby obtained an equilibrium distribu-
tion for A and, if f is the restriction to A of the potential of a measure A,
Gauss obtained the sweeping of A onto A. Finally Gauss showed how to
manipulate his result to solve the Dirichlet problem for the domain bounded
by A. His work was ofcourse not rigorous but offered ideas not fully digested
for a century. Careful formulations suggested by some of his ideas are
presented in Section 14. The first rigorous derivation of an equilibrium
distribution for an arbitrary compact subset of ~3 was carried through by
Frostman [I, 1935], whose basic tool was a modernization of Gauss's
technique of minimization of the energy integral. The capacity of an arbi-
trary compact subset A of ~3 was defined by Wiener [2, 1924] by solving
the (generalized) Dirichlet problem for the unbounded open connected
component of ~3 - A with boundary function I on iJA and 0 at the point
00. This solution can be identified with the restriction to D of the potential
Gj.l of a measure on A, and Wiener defined the capacity of A as j.l(A). [Since
A
Gj.l is in fact the smoothed reduction R +1
(relative to ~3), the potential Gj.l
is the capacitary potential of A.] This capacity definition was extended by
Vallee Poussin [I, 1932] who defined the capacity of an arbitrary subset A
of ~3 as the supremum of v(~3) for measures v supported by compact subsets
of A with potentials Gv ;s; I, and he showed that this definition coincided
with Wiener's for compact sets. The Vallee Poussin capacity is the inner
capacity as defined in Section II.
Part 1 803
Chapter lXIV
Chapter lXV
there that for an open set bounded by hyperplanes the Euclidean boundary
is regular for the heat equation is false.
Section 5. The proof of Theorem 5 is taken from [Tychonoff I, 1935].
Section 11. See [Moser I, 1964] for a more precise Harnack-type inequal-
ity than that given in Section 11.
Section 16. The Appell transformation dates back to [Appell 1, 1892].
Chapter IXVI
Chapter I. XVII
Chapter I.XVIII
Section 1. Sternberg [I, 1929] was apparently the first to observe that the
Perron method of attacking the Dirichlet problem could be applied in the
parabolic context, although he restricted himself to functions on very special
domains.
Part I 805
Chapter IXIX
Part 2
The most useful reference books for Part 2 are [Meyer 6, 1966], [Dellacherie
and Meyer 1, 1975; 2, 1980], and [Dellacherie 2, 1972]. For Markov pro-
cesses see [Dynkin 1, 1960; 2, 1965] and [Blumenthal and Getoor 1, 1968].
[Meyer 8, 1968] contains a useful summary of key ideas in the general theory
of stochastic processes, including classification of optional times, classifica-
tion of types of stochastic process measurability, and a discussion of section
theorems. The books ofK. M. Rao [4,1977], Port and Stone [1,1978], and
Chung [2, 1981] are useful references for the relations between probability
and classical potential theory.
Part 2 807
Chapter 2.1
Chapter 2.11
Section 1. Like the Moliere character who spoke in prose without realizing
it, mathematicians had dealt with optional times for centuries without finding
it necessary to define them precisely. Precise defmitions were finally intro-
duced, along with (1 algebra filtrations, to answer the needs of Markov
808 Historical Notes
process and martingale theories. Meyer [6, 1966; 8, 1968] first classified
optional times.
Section 4. Hunt [2, 1957] was the first to show that in an appropriate
context the hitting time of an analytic set is optional. Doob [5, 1954] had·
shown that the hitting time by Brownian motion of a capacitable set is
optional, but in 1954 it was not known that all Borel sets are capacitable
in his context. Meyer [2, 1962-1963] proved that the hitting time of a
progressively measurable set is optional.
Section 7. Observe that predictable optional times are defined slightly
differently in [Dellacherie and Meyer 1, 1975].
Section 8. Section theorems were introduced into probability theory by
Meyer [2, 1962-1963], more successfully in [6, 1966]. See Dellacherie [1,
1972], from which the proof of Theorem 8 is taken, for an elegant unified
approach to them.
Section 9. The proof of Theorem 9 is taken from the correction sheet in
[Dellacherie and Meyer I, 1975].
Section 10. Dellacherie [1, 1969] proved that, in the notation of this
section, a predictable subset A of IR+ x n is semipolar if for almost every
w the set {t: (t,w)eA} is countable.
Chapter 2.m
Before martingales had been formally christened, Levy [1, 1935; 2, 1937],
Bernstein [I, 1937], and other mathematicians had analyzed some of their
properties in special contexts; usually the martingales in question arose as
partial sums n 1--+ I:~Yj of a sequence Y. of random variables under the condi-
tion E{yAyo, ... , Yj-l} = 0 so that the sums arose as generalizations of
sums of independent random variables with zero means. Ville [1, 1939]
defined a martingale very nearly as a positive martingale is now defined but
tied it to a sequence of independent random variables under analysis. His
fundamental tool, a fact he proved, was that almost every sample sequence
ofa positive martingale sequence is bounded (see Theorem 9). Doob [1, 1940]
discussed martingales and proved the basic martingale convergence theorems
under the name "family of random variables with the property E." (" E"
was chosen not as the initial letter of "expectation" but as the first letter in
the alphabet following D.) Under the respective names "semimartingale"
and "lower semimartingale," submartingales and supermartingales were
introduced in [Snell 1, 1952] and [Doob 4, 1953]. This obviously inappro-
priate nomenclature was chosen under the malign influence of the noise
level of radio's SUPERman program, a favorite supper-time program of
Doob's son during the writing of [Doob 4, 1953]. For further work in
martingale theory see [Neveu 1, 1972] (discrete parameter context) and
[Dellacherie and Meyer 2, 1980] (continuous parameter context).
Part 2 809
Section 4. The trivial but useful map in this section appears to be new.
Section 6. Theorem 6 and its generalizations to various forms of optional
sampling in Chapters III and IV are adapted from [Doob 1, 1940; 4, 1953]
with improvements from [Meyer 6, 1966].
Section 9. Theorem 9 is taken from [Doob 4, 1953]. In the martingale
case or the Imartingale I case Theorem 9(a) was proved by Levy [2, 1937],
Bernstein [1, 1937], and Ville [1, 1939].
Section 11. Theorem 11 is taken from [Doob 4, 1953].
Section 12. Inequality (12.2) is new, as are (12.3) and (12.4) except when
y(o) == 1. Crossings (implicit in [Doob 1, 1940]) were formally introduced
into martingale theory in Doob [3, 1951], where a variant of (12.3) was
obtained for x(o) a martingale and y(o) == 1. Snell in [1, 1952] extended
crossing inequalities to submartingales and supermartingales. Dubins [I,
1966] obtained a variant of (12.4) with y(o) == 1.
Sections 13 to 17. These results are taken from [Doob 4, 1953]. In the
martingale case Theorems 13 and 17 were in [Doob 1, 1940].
Section 19. This may be the first time that the natural decomposition
theorem appears in print in the martingale theory context, but the result is
merely a special application of the general theory.
Section 22. The first application of reduction theory to martingale theory
was made by Snell [1, 1952]. See Neveu [1, 1972] for further discussion of
related problems. The infimum of the class of supermarting~lesmajorizing
a given process under appropriate side conditions is called the Snell envelope
of the given process.
Chapter 2.IV
Sections 6 to 12. Doob [4, 1953] proved the rather trivial discrete param-
eter decomposition Theorem 8 and after searching for several years found a
mathematician who could prove the continuous parameter version Theorem
II [Meyer 4, 1962; 5, 1963]. See the appendix to Meyer [6, 1966] for earlier
decomposition results due to Volkonski, Sur, and Meyer which are for
supermartingales associated with Markov processes. Perhaps as tribute to
Doob's persistent search for this holy grail, the Meyer decomposition is
sometimes inappropriately called the Doob-Meyer or even the Doob decom-
position. Meyer proved Theorem II with the monotone increasing process
A (.) natural in the sense of Section 7. The equivalence between natural and
nearly predictable [Theorem 7(a3)] was proved by Doleans [I, 1967]'
Rao's [I, 1969] proofofTheorem II is followed in the text. See [Dellacherie
and Meyer 2, 1980] for extensive applications of the Meyer decomposition.
Sections 17 to 20. Reduction theory in this form seems to be new, but see
also related work involving Snell envelopes by Mertens [I, 1972], Azema
[I, 1972], and Azema and Jeulin [I, 1976]. Results in the latter paper
together with Theorem 13 suggest that in some contexts R~.) in Section 17
should be defined as the infimum of the class of almost surely right contin-
uous positive supermartingales whose left limit processes majorize that of
z(·) on A. This definition is also suggested by the awkward extra hypotheses
in Section 18(m).
Chapter 2.V
Chapter 2. VI
This chapter treats only those aspects of Markov process theory needed in
this book. Readers interested in going further into probabilistic potential
theory, which is based on Markov processes, may consult [Dynkin 2, 1965],
[Blumenthal and Getoor 1, 1968], and [Chung 2, 1981]. Knowledgeable
readers will observe that translation operators are not mentioned in this
chapter. They are not needed in this book.
Section 1. A. A. Markov introduced what are now called Markov pro-
cesses into probability theory in [I, 1906].
Section 3. The strong Markov property in the discrete parameter case is
trivial to prove, but the realization that such.a property is relevant and
requires proofhad to await the sophistication not present before the property
was needed in the technically more difficult continuous parameter case. Even
now rather than explicitly recalling and applying this property, it is frequently
easier, when the discrete parameter strong Markov property is relevant in a
computation, to make the computation detailed enough to avoid explicit
statement and use of the property.
Section 4. Kakutani [3, 1945] defined random walks on domains of 1R 2
as in the example in this section. He proved, omitting some details, what
amounts to the fact that the distribution of x(n) in the example tends to
harmonic measure relative to the initial point.
Section 6. Hunt [2, 1957] was the first to consider in depth the hitting
probabilities of sets by Markov process trajectories.
812 Historical Notes
Section 8. See Meyer [7, 1967] for a more' complete analysis of the
filtrations generated by Markov processes. The 0-1 law in this section
is known as the Blumenthal 0-1 law in view of [Blumenthal I, 1957].
Blumenthal's paper is probably the first paper to treat a Markov process
explicitly as a process adapted to a general filtration and having the Markov
property relative to the filtration.
Section 9. The first version of the strong Markov property in a continuous
parameter context was proved by Doob [2, 1945] in the context of a count-
able state space. Hunt [I, 1956] proved a version for processes with inde-
pendent increments. The first generally applicable versions were proved
independently by Dynkin and Yushkevich [I, 1956] and Blumenthal [I,
1957].
Sections 10 to 12. Hunt [2, 1957] introduced excessive functions and
measures into Markov process theory as part of his fundamental develop-
ment [I, 1957; 2, 1957; 3, 1958] of probabilistic potential theory based on
Markov processes.
Section 13. Conditioned Markov processes were introduced in [Doob 8,
1957] in the context of Brownian motion. See [Dynkin 2, 1963] for condi-
tioned Markov processes in the context ofmultiplicative linear functionals.
Section 15. See [Meyer, Smythe, and Walsh I, 1972] for a deep discussion
of Markov processes killed at various kinds of ra.ndom times.
Chapter 2. VII
The Brownian motion process is the link between classical potential theory
and martingale theory, and only those Brownian motion properties relevant
to this linkage are discussed in this book. For more information on Brownian
motion see, for example, [Levy 4, 1948], [Ciesielski I, 1966], [Freedman
I, 1971], [Ito and McKean I, 1974], [Knight I, 1981], and, especially for
the physical significance of Brownian motion, [Nelson 1,1967]. The process
takes its name from the English botanist Brown who in 1827 observed
irregular motion of pollen particles in a liquid. Einstein in 1905 obtained
from physical considerations the fact that the mean square displacement of
a Brownian particle is a multiple of the displacement time and evaluated
this multiple. Bachelier [I, 1900; 2, 1901] and later papers derived many
distributions involving Brownian motion considered as a limit of random
walks and saw the connection with the heat equation. The first rigorous
construction of a Brownian glotion process was given by Wiener [I, 1923],
but his work remained unknown to or at least ignored by other probabilists
for about 15 years. Thus probabilists were at a disadvantage in treating
sample functions of Brownian motion; although they realized that in some
sense these sample functions were continuous, it was not clear how to
Part :2 813
Chapter 2.VIII
The integral III dw with I a function from I into ~ and w(o) a Brownian
motion was first discussed by Wiener [I, 1923]. Ito [I, 1944] allowed the
integrand to depend on the Brownian paths, thereby inaugurating a far-
reaching further development. See McKean [1,1969] for many applications
of Ito's integral, and see [Dellacherie and Meyer 2, 1980] for stochastic
integrals with differentials more general than Brownian motion differentials.
Section 3. The problem of finding conditions that y. as defined by (3.10)
be a martingale is a special case of a problem proposed by Girsanov in 1960
in which w(o) is a local martingale. Various sufficient conditions have been
found; for example, Novikov [1, 1972] found a condition reducing to (k)
in our context.
814 Historical Notes
n
lim
II-CO
L [w(tJ"l) -
1
w(tl~\)]2 = q 2b a.s.
See [Doob 10, 1953] for a martingale proof of this limit theorem.
Section 12. Ito's lemma, also called Ito'sformula, was proved in [2,1951].
Section 14. The fact that the composition of an analytic function with
plane Brownian motion is Brownian motion with a new time scale is due
to Levy [4, 1948].
Chapter 2.IX
tions and going to the obvious limit. They refer to the probabilistic inter-
pretation of their difference equation. Petrowsky [1, 1933-1934] gave a
similar discussion, and Khintchine [1, 1933] in a corresponding discussion
for both harmonic and parabolic functions mentions the Brownian motion
interpretation of the limiting case. Such ideas were common at the time,
but Wiener's [1, 1923] treatment of Brownian motion was unknown or
unappreciated, and, for example, Khintchine's Brownian motion interpreta-
tion was therefore somewhat artificial. Kakutani [2, 1944; 3, 1945] stated
Theorem 3(a) with indications of a proof.
Section 14. Theorem 14 (in a much more general context) is due to Hunt
[2, 1957].
Section 15. The dichotomy in Theorem 5 in the classical and parabolic
contexts [Doob 5, 1954; 6, 1955] has been generalized to define fine and
cofine topologies in the probabilistic potential theory of Markov processes.
Khintchine [I, 1933] proved the iterated logarithm law for Brownian motion,
aside from the fact that he could not quite define the probabilities involved
without a rigorous definition of Brownian motion.
Section 17. Theorem 17 is part of the folk lore of the subject but is new
as stated.
Chapter 2.X
Part 3
Chapter 3.1
The lattice theoretic results in this chapter are mostly routine or in the
folklore; so few references to their origin will be given.
816 Historical Notes
Chapter 3.11
Chapter 3.I11
Appendixes
Appendixes I and II
Appendixes III to VI
Appendix VII
See [Doob 13, 1960; 14,1960-1961] for ratio integral limit theorems; those
in Appendix VII are adaptations to fit the needs of this book.
Bibliography
Helene Airault: [I] "Theoreme de Fatou et frontiere de Martin." J. Funct. Anal. 12 (1973),
418-455.
Helene Airault and Hans Follmer: [I] "Relative densities of semimartingales." Inventiones
Math. 27 (1974),299-327.
Desire Andre: [I] Solution directe d'un probleme resolu par M. Bertrand. C.R. Acad. Sci.
Paris 105 (1887),436-437.
P. Appell: [I] Sur I'equation o2 zlox2 - ozloy = 0 et la th<iorie du chaleur. J. Math. Pures.
Appl. (4) 8 (1892), 187-216.
Maynard Arsove and Heinz Leutwiler: [I] Quasi bounded and singular functions. Trans. Amer.
Math. Soc. 189 (1974),275-302.
Jacques Azerna: [I] Quelques applications de la theorie generale des processus. I. Inventiones
Math. 18 (1972),293-336.
J. Azema and T. Jeulin: [I] Precisions sur la measure de Follmer. Ann. Inst. Henri Poincare
12 (1976), 257-283.
I. Babuska and R. Vyborny: [I] Reguliire und stabile Randpunkte fUr das Problem der
Warmeleitungsgleichung. Ann. Polon. Math. 12 (1962), 91-104.
Louis Bachelier: [I] Theorie de la speculation. Ann. Sci. Ecole Norm. Sup. (3) 17 (1900),21-86.
[2] Theorie mathematique du jeu. Ann. Sci. Ecole Norm. Sup. (3) 18 (1901), 143-210.
Serge Bernstein: [I] On some transformations of the Chebychev inequality. (Russian) Dokl.
Akad. Nauk SSSR 17 (1937), 275-277.
A. S. Besicovitch: [I] "A general form of the covering principle and relative ditTerentiation
of additive functions II." Proc. Cambridge Phil. Soc. 42 (1946), 1-10.
R. M. Blumenthal: [I] An extended Markov property. Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 85 (1957),
52-72.
R. M. Blumenthal and R. K. Getoor: [I] Markov Processes and Potential Theory. New York,
Academic, 1968.
[2] "Dual processes and potential theory." Proc. Twelfth Biennial Sem. Can. Math. Congr.
1970,137-156.
Maxime B6cher: [I] "Singular points of functions which satisfy partial ditTerential equations
of the elliptic type." Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 9 (1903),455-465.
Georges Bouligand: [I] "Sur Ie probleme de Dirichlet." Ann. Soc. Polon. Math. 4 (1926),
59-112.
M. Brelot: [I] "Fonctions sous-harmoniques et balayage I, II." Acad. Roy. Belgique, Bull. Cl.
Sci. (5) 24 (1938),301-312,421-436.
[2] "Sur Ie potentiel et les suites de fonctions surharmoniques." C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 207
(1938), 836-838.
[3] "Familles de Perron et probleme de Dirichlet." Acta Lilt. Sci. Szeged9 (1939),133-153.
[4] "Points irreguliers et transformations continues en th<iorie du potentiel." J. Math. Pures.
Appl. 19 (1940),319-337.
[5] "Sur la theorie autonome des fonctions sousharmoniques." Bull. Sci. Math. 65 (1941),
72-98.
[6] "Sur Ie role du point a l'infini dans la th<iorie des fonctions harmoniques." Ann. Sci.
Ecole Norm. Sup. 61 (1944), 301-332.
[7] "Sur les ensembles effiles." Bull. Sci. Math. 68 (1944), 12-36.
[8] "Minorantes sous-harmoniques, extremales et capacites." J. Math. Pures. Appl. 24(1945),
1-32.
820 Bibliography
Jacques Deny: [I] "Les potentiels d'energie finie." Acta Math. 82 (1950),107-183.
C. Doleans (= C. Doleans-Dade): [I] "Processus croissant naturels et processus croissant
tres-bien-measurables." C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 264 (1967),874-876.
J. L. Doob: [I] "Regularity properties of certain families of chance variables." Trans. Amer.
Math. Soc. 47 (1940), 455-486.
[2] "Markoff chains-denumerable case." Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 58 (1945),455-473.
[3] "Continuous parameter martingales." Proc. Sec. Berkeley Symp. Math. Statistics Prob.
1950, Berkeley, 1951, pp. 269-277.
[4] Stochastic Processes. New York, Wiley, 1953.
[5] "Semimartingales and subharmonic functions." Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 77 (1954),
86-12l.
[6] "A probability approach to the heat equation." Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 80 (1955),
216-280.
[7] "Probability methods applied to the first boundary value problem." Proc. Third Berkeley
Symp. Math. Statistics and Prob. 1954/5 Yol. 2, Berkeley, 1956, pp. 49-80.
[8] "Conditional Brownian motion and the boundary limits of harmonic functions." Bull.
Soc. Math. Fr. 85 (1957), 431-458.
[9] "Probability theory and the first boundary value problem." lll. J. Math. 2 (1958), 19-36.
[10] "Boundary limit theorems for a halfspace." J. Math. Pures. Appl. (9) 37 (1958),385-392.
[II] "A non-probabilistic proof of the relative Fatou theorem." Ann. Inst. Fourier Grenoble
9 (1959),293-300.
[12] "A relativized Fatou theorem." Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 45 (1959),215-222.
[13] "A relative limit theorem for parabolic functions." Trans. Second Prague Conference on
Information Theory, Statistical Decision Functions, Random Processes. Prague, Czechoslo-
vak Acad. Sci., 1960, pp. 61-70.
[14] "Relative theorems in analysis." J. Anal. Math. 8 (1960-1961),289-306.
[15] "Conformally invariant cluster value theory." lll. J. Math. 5 (1%1),521-549.
[16] "Some classical function theory theorems and their modem versions." Ann. Inst. Fourier
Grenoble 15 (1965), 113-136.
[17] "Applications to analysis of a topological definition of smallness of a set." Bull. Amer.
Math. Soc. 72 (1966),579-600.
Lester E. Dubins: [I] "A note on upcrossings of semimartingales." Ann. Math. Stat. 37 (1966),
728.
R. M. Dudley: [I] "Wiener functions as Ito integrals." Ann. Prob. 5 (1977),140-141.
E. B. Dynkin: [I] Foundations ofthe Theory ofMarkov Processes (translation ofhis 1959 Russian
book: OCH06aHu// Teopuu MapK06cKUX npouecc06). Oxford, Pergamon, 1960.
[2] Markov Processes (translation of his 1963 Russian book: MapK06cKUe npOljeCcbl). Berlin,
Springer-Yerlag,1965.
[3] "The space of exits of a Markov process." Russ. Math. Surv. 24/4 (1969),89-157.
[4] "Initial and final behavior of Markov process trajectories." Russ. Math. Surv. 26 (1971),
165-185.
E. B. Dynkin and A. A. Yushkevich: [I] Strong Markov processes. Theory Prob. Appl.l (1956),
134-139.
G. C. Evans: [I] "Application of Poincare's sweeping-out process." Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA
19 (1933), 457-461.
[2] "OR potentials of positive mass." Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 37 (1935),226-253.
P. Fatou: [I] "Series trigonometriques et series de Taylor." Acta Math. 30 (1906),335-400.
D. L. Fisk: [I] "Quasi-martingales". Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 120 (1%5),369-389.
Hans Follmer: [I] "On the representation of semimartingales." Ann. Prob. 1 (1973), 580-
589.
David Freedman: [I] Brownian motion and diffusion. San Francisco, Holden-Day, 1971.
Otto Frostman: [I] "Potentiel d'equilibre et capacite des ensembles avec quelques applications
ala theorie des fonctions." Meddel. Lunds Univ. Mat. Sem. 3 (1935),1-118.
[2] "Sur Ie balayage des masses." Acta Lilt. Sci. Univ. Szeged, Sec. Sci. Math. 9 (1938),
43-51.
Bent Fuglede: [I] Finely Harmonic Functions. Lecture Notes in Mathematics 289. Berlin,
Springer-Yerlag, 1972.
C. F. Gauss: [I] Allgemeine Lehrsiitze in Beziehungauf die im vehrkehrten Yerhiihnisse des
Quadrats der Entfemung wirkenden Anziehungs- und Abstossungs-Kriifte. Gauss Werke 5,
pp. 197-242, 1840, Gottingen, 1867.
George Green: [I] An essay on the application of mathematical analysis to the theories of
822 Bibliography
electricity and magnetism. Nottingham 1828. Math. Papers. London, Macmillan, 1871,
pp.9-41.
A. Harnack: [I] Die Grundlagen der Theorie des logarithmischen Potentials und der eindeutigen
Potentialfunktion. Leipzig, Teubner, 1887.
Philip Hartman, Aurel Wintner: [I] "On the solutions of the equation of heat conduction."
Amer J. Math. 7'l (1950),367-395.
Maurice Heins: [I] On the principle of harmonic measure. Comment. Math. Helv. 33 (1959),
47-58.
L. L. Helms: [I] Introduction to Potential Theory. New York, Wiley, 1969.·
G. Herglotz: [I] "Uber Potenzreihen mit positivem reellen Teil im Einheitskreis." Ber. Verhandl.
Sachs. Akad. Wiss. Leipzig Math.-Phys. KI. 63 (1911),501-511.
G. A. Hunt: [I] "Some theorems concerning Brownian motion." Trans. Amer. Math. Soc.
81 (1956),294-319.
[2] "Markoff processes and potentials I." /1/. J. Math. 1 (1957),44-93.
[3] "Markoff processes and potentials II." /1/. J. Math. 1 (1957), 316-369.
[4] "Markoff processes and potentials III." l//. J. Math. 2 (1958),151-213.
Kiyosi Ito: [I] "Stochastic integral." Proc. Imp. Acad. Tokyo 20 (1944),519-524.
[2] "On a formula concerning stochastic differentials." Nagoya Math. J. 3 (1951),55-65.
[3] "Multiple Wiener integraL" J. Math. Soc. Japan 3 (1951), 157-169.
K. Ito and H. P. McKean, Jr.: [I] Diffusion processes and their sample paths. Berlin, Springer-
Verlag, 1974.
K. Ito and S. Watanabe: [I] "Transformation of Markov processes by multiplicative func-
tionals." Ann. Inst. Fourier Grenoble 15, I, (1965),15-30.
H. L. Jackson: [I] "Some results on thin sets in a halfplane." Ann Inst. Fourier Grenoble 20
(1970),201-218.
Klaus Janssen: [I] Martin Boundary and HP Theory of Harmonic Spaces. Lecture Notes in
Mathematics 226. Berlin, Springer-Verlag, 1971, pp. 102-151.
[2] "A co-fine domination principle for harmonic spaces." Math. Ztschr. 141 (1975),185-191.
Berge Jessen: [I] "The theory of integration in a space of an infinite number of dimensions."
Acta Math. 63 (1934),249-323.
Shizuo Kakutani: [I] "On Brownian motions in n-space." Proc. Imp. Acad. Tokyo 20 (1944),
648-652.
[2] "Two dimensional Brownian motion and harmonic functions." Proc. Imp. Acad. Tokyo
20 (1944), 706-714.
[3] "Markoff process and the Dirichlet problem." Proc. Japan Acad. 21 (1945), 227-233
(1949).
Robert Kaufman and Jang-Mei Wu: [I] "Parabolic potential theory." J. Differential Equations
43 (1982),204-234.
O. D. Kellogg: [I] "Unicite des fonctions harmoniques." C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 187 (1928),
526-527.
[2] Foundations of Potential Theory. Berlin, Springer-Verlag, 1929.
John T. Kemper: [I] "Temperatures in several variables. Kernel functions, representations,
and parabolic boundary values." Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 167 (1972), 243-262.
A. Khintchine: [I] "Asymptotische Gesetze der Wahrscheinlichkeitsrechnung." Erg. Math.
Grenzgebiete 2/4 (1933), Berlin, Springer-Verlag.
Frank B. Knight: [I] Essentials of Brownian motion and diffusion. Math. Surveys 18. Provi-
dence, Amer. Math. Soc., 1981.
A. Kolmogoroff: [I] "Grundbegriffe der Wahrschleinlichkeitsrechnung." Erg. Math. Grenzge-
biete 2/3 (1933), Berlin, Springer-Verlag.
Adam Koranyi and J. C. Taylor: [I] "Fine convergence and parabolic convergence for the
Helmholtz equation and the heat equation." l//. J. Math.
K. Krickeberg: [I] "Convergence of martingales with a directed index set." Trans. Amer.
Math. Soc. 83 (1956),313-357.
Hiroshi Kunita and Shinzo Watanabe: [I] "On square integrable martingales." Nagoya Math. J.
30 (1967),209-245.
Hiroshi Kunita and Takesi Watanabe: [I] "Markov processes and Martin boundaries Part I."
/1/. J. Math. 9 (1965), 485-526.
[2] "On certain reversed processes and their applications to potential theory and boundary
theory." J. Math. Mech.15(1966). 393-434.
Charles W. Lamb: [I] "A note on harmonic functions and martingales." Ann. Math. Stat.
Bibliography 823
42 (1971), 2044-2049.
N. S. Landkof: [I] Foundations ofmodern potential theory (translation from his Russian book
of 1966: OcHOBbl coBpeMeHHoi! TeopHH nOTeHUHaJla) Berlin, Springer-Verlag, 1972.
H. Lebesgue: [I] "Sur les cas d'impossibilite du probleme de Dirichlet." C. R. Seances Soc.
Math. Fr. (1912).
[2] "Sur Ie probleme de Dirichlet." C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 154 (1912),335-337.
[3] "Conditions de regularite, conditions d'irregularite, conditions d'impossibilite dans Ie
probleme de Dirichlet." C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 178 (1924),349-354.
J. Lelong: [I] "Etude au voisinage de la frontiere des fonctions surharmoniques positive dans
un demi-espace." Ann. Sci. Ecole Norm. Sup. (3) 66 (1949),125-159.
Paul Levy: [I] "Proprietes asymptotiques des sommes de variables aleatoires enchainees."
Bull. Soc. Math. Fr. 59 (1935),1-32.
[2] Theorie de ['Addition des Variables Ateatoires. Paris, Gauthier-Villars, 1937.
[3] "Le mouvement brownien plan." Amer. J. Math. 62 (1940), 487-550.
[4] Processes Stochastiques et Mouvement Brownien. Paris, Gauthier-Villars, 1948 (2d. ed.,
1965).
L. Lichtenstein: [I] "Neuere Entwicklung des Potentialtheorie. Konforme Abbildung." Encykl.
Math. Wiss. IIC3 (1919), 177-377.
J. E. Littlewood: [I] "Mathematical Notes (8): On functions subharmonic in a circle (II)."
Proc. London Math. Soc. (2) 28 (1928),383-394.
Alfred J. Maria: [I] "The potential of a positive mass and the weight function of Wiener."
Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 20 (1934), 485-489.
A. A. Markov: [I] "Extension of the law of large numbers to dependent events" (Russian).
Bull. Soc. Phys. Math. Kazan (2) 15 (1906), 135-156.
R. S. Martin: [I] "Minimal positive harmonic functions." Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 49 (1941),
137-172.
H. P. McKean, Jr.: [I] Stochastic Integrals. New York, Academic, 1969.
Jean-Francois Mertens: [I] "Theorie des processus stochastiques generaux. Applications aux
surmartingales." Ztschr. Wahrscheinlichkeitstheorie 22 (1972), 54-68.
Paul-Andre Meyer: [I] "Fonctions multiplicatives et additives de Markov." Ann. Inst. Fourier
Grenoble 12 (1962),125-230.
[2] "Vne presentation de la theorie des ensembles sousliniens. Applications aux processus
stochastiques." Sem. Brelot-Choquet-Deny (Theorie du potentiel) 7 (1962-1963).
[3] "Interpretation probabiliste de la notion d'energie." Sem. Brelot-Choquet-Deny (Theorie
du Potentiel) 7 (1962-1963).
[4] "A decomposition theorem for supermartingales." Ill. J. Math. 6 (1962),193-205.
[5] "Decomposition of supermartingales: the uniqueness theorem." Ill. J. Math. 7 (1963),
1-17.
[6] Probability and Potentials. Waltham, Blaisdell, 1966.
[7] Processus de Markov. Lecture Notes in Mathematics 26. Berlin, Springer-Verlag, 1967.
[8] Guide detaille de la theorie generale des processus. Sem. Prob. II. Lecture Notes in
Mathematics 51. Berlin, Springer-Verlag, 1968.
[9] Processus de Markov: la frontiere de Martin. Lecture Notes in Mathematics 77. Berlin,
Springer-Verlag, 1968.
P. A. Meyer,R. T. Smythe, and J. B. Walsh: Birth and death of Markov processes. Proc. Sixth
Berkeley Symp. Math. Stat. Prob. 1970/71 Vol. III. Berkeley, Vniv. of California, 1972,
pp. 295-305.
Gabriel Mokobodzki and Daniel Sibony: "Sur une propriete characteristique des cones de
potentiels." C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 266(1968), 215-218.
Jiirgen Moser: [I] "A Harnack inequality for parabolic differential equations." Comm. Pure
Appl. Math. 17 (1964), 101-134.
Linda NaIrn (= Linda Lumer-Nalm): [I] "Sur Ie role de la frontiere de R. S. Martin dans la
theorie du potential." Ann. Inst. Fourier Grenoble 7 (1957),183-281.
Edward Nelson: [I] Dynamical Theories of Brownian Motion. Math. Notes Princeton V. Press,
Princeton, 1967.
J. Neveu: [I] Martingales a Temps Discret. Paris, Masson, 1972.
A. A. Novikov: [I] "On an identity for stochastic integrals:" Theory Prob. Appl. 17 (1972),
717-720.
M. Parreau: [I] "Sur les moyennes des fonctions harmoniques et analytiques et la classification
des surfaces de Riemann." Ann. Inst. Fourier Grenoble 3 (1951),103-197.
824 Bibliography
[4] "Points irregulier. Determination des masses par les potentiels." Acad. Belg. Bull. CI. Sci.
(5) 24 (1938),368-384.
Florin Vasilesco: [I] "Sur la continuite du potentiel it travers les masses, et la demonstration
d'un lemme de Kellogg." C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 200 (1935), 1173-1174.
[2] "Sur une application des families normales de distributions de masse." C. R. Acad. Sci.
Paris 265 (1937),212-215.
[3] La notion de point irregulier dans Ie probleme de Dirichlet. Act. Sci. Ind. 660 (1938),
Paris, Masson.
Jean Ville: [I] Etude Critique de 10 Notion de Collectif. Paris, Gauthier-Villars, 1939.
Michel WeiI: [I] "Proprietes de continuite fine des fonctions coexcessives." Ztschr. Wahrsch-
einlichkeitstheorie verw. Geb. 12 (1969),75-86.
John Wermer: [I] Potential Theory. Lecture Notes in Mathematics 408. Berlin, Springer-Verlag,
1974.
D. V. Widder: [I] "Positive temperatures on an infinite rod." Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 55
(1944),85-95.
[2] The Heat Equation. New York, Academic, 1975.
Norbert Wiener: [I] "Differential space." J. Math. Phys. Mass. Inst. Tech. 2 (1923),131-174.
[2] "Certain notions in potential theory." J. Math. Phys. Mass. Inst. Tech. 3 (1924), 24-51.
[3] "The Dirichlet problem." J. Math. Phys. Mass. Inst. Tech. 3 (1924),127-146.
[4] "Note on a paper by O. Perron." J. Math. Phys. Mass. Inst. Tech. 4 (1925),21-32.
Jang-Mei G. Wu: [I] "On parabolic measures and subparabolic functions." Trans. Amer. Math.
Soc. 25 (1979), 171-185.
S. Zaremba: [I] "Sur Ie principe de Dirichlet." Acta Math. 34 (1911),293-316.
Notation Index
References are to sections, say 1.11.3 or, for the Appendixes, A1.2. The index
covers neither the Historical Notes nor the Bibliography.
Ball
Classical context: the Green function and the Poisson integral, 1.11.1;
Riesz-Herglotz theorem, 1.11.14; V(JlB-) and D(JlB-) classes of har-
monic functions, 1.11.14, l.IX.12; Fatou boundary limit theorem,
1.11.15; minimal harmonic functions, 1.11.16; reductions, 1.III .4;
potential of a uniform boundary distribution, I.IV.2; PWB solutions,
1.VIII.2; universal and universal internal resolutivity of the boundary,
I.VIII.9; lattices of relative harmonic functions, l.IX.12; Martin
boundary, I.XII.3; classical versus minimal fine boundary limit
theorems for relative harmonic functions, 1.x1l.20; ball capacity,
I.XIII.13; conditional Brownian motion in, 2.x.9
Parabolic context: regularity of the boundary, parabolic ball and the
irregularity of its highest point, 1.XVIII. 6
Band: of a vector lattice, A.III.8; projection on, A. III .9; generated by a
singleton, A.III.II
Barrier
Classical context: definition, local nature, versus weak-, at 00, I.VIII.l2;
relation with boundary point regularity, I.VIII.l3, I.VIII.14, I.VIII.16;
Poincare-Zaremba examples, I.VIII.12, I.VIII.15
Parabolic context: definition, local nature, versus weak-, relation with
boundary point regularity, 1.XVIII. 3
Below: a point of IR N relative to a set, I.XV.1
BLD function: I.XIII.6
Boundary limit theorems
Classical context: for the Poisson integral, semicontinuous boundary
function, 1.11.1; ratio, for harmonic functions on a ball, 1.11.15, 2.X.8;
for superharmonic functions at an irregular boundary point, LXI. 2I ;
ratio, for superharmonic functions on a Martin space, I.XII.l3,
I.XII.14, I.XII.18, I.XII.19; classical versus fine topology approach
to a ball boundary, I.XII.20; for potentials on a half-space, l.XII.22,
I.XII.23; ratio, for superharmonic functions, along stochastic process
paths, 2.VI.4, 2.IX.7, 2.IX.13, 2.X.8, 3.1II.4, 3.1II.5; for Dirichlet
solutions, 2.IX.l3, 3.11.2
Parabolic context: for the Poisson integral on an interval or slab, semi-
continuous boundary function, I.XV.9, I.XVI.l; ratio, for superpara-
bolic functions on a slab, LXVI. 7, I.XVIII.15; for superparabolic
functions at an irregular boundary point, I.xVIII.I7; ratio, for super-
parabolic functions on a Martin space, with applications to a slab and
to the fourth quadrant of 1R 2 , I.xIX.l3-1.XIX.15; ratio for super-
parabolic functions, along stochastic process paths, 2.IX.7, 2.IX.13,
2.X.12,3.1I.1 .
Brownian motion (see also Conditional Brownian motion and Space-time
Brownian motion): definition, 2. VII.2; path continuity, 2. VII.3; right
continuity and predictability of-filtrations, predictability of-optional
times, continuity properties of supermartingales relative to-filtrations,
Index 831
D class
Classical context (D(Jl~_»: of h-harmonic functions on a ball, 1.11.14,
1.IX.12; of functions on an open set, in particular h-harmonic and
positive h-subharmonic functions, I.lX.3
Parabolic context (D(Jit»: of parabolic functions on a slab, LXVI.6; of
functions on an open set, 1.XVIII.19
Probability context: of stochastic processes, 2.11.11; includes right closed
positive submartingales, 2.111.6, 2. V.3; includes potentials generated by
increasing processes, 2.1V.6
Combined context: notation, 3.1.3; the PWB method, 3.1.4; 8 m 11 D =
8 mqb , 3.1.5; 8;qb = D 11 8 +, 3.1.9
Decomposition
See Krickeberg decomposition, LP, Rao decomposition, and Riesz-Herglotz
representation for decompositions in various contexts of a vector lattice
element into a difference between positive elements, see A.III.5 for the
abstract version of such a decomposition, and see A.lV for such decom-
positions in measure theory. See Lattice for decompositions of a vector
lattice into bands.
Riesz: of a superharmonic function, 1.1.8, 1.IV.8, 1.IX.lI; of a su-
perparabolic function, LXVII.?; of a supermartingale, 2.111.21,
2.V.8
Natural order: for superharmonic functions, 1.1I1.?; for superparabolic
functions, 1.XVII.2; for supermartingales, 2.1II.19, 2.V.5
Index 833
Harmonic measure (Jl~): for domains with smooth boundaries, 1.1.8; null
sets, l.VIII.S; of roo}, l.VIII.S; definition, l.VIII.8; for ball and half-
space, l.VIII.9; dependence on D, l.VIII.17; relation with the sweeping
kernel, l.X.2; on a polar set, l.X.8; relative to an irregular boundary
point, I.XI.22; for the Martin space, l.XII.tO; as a conditional Brownian
motion hitting distribution, 2.1X.13, 2.X.7, 3.11.2
Harnack convergence theorem: classical context, l.1I.3, parabolic context,
l.XV.Il
Harnack inequality: classical context, l.1I.2; parabolic context, l.XV.Il,
I.XVIII.17
Hermite polynomials: l.XV.3; composition of space-time-with space-
cotime Brownian motion, 2.1X.2
Hitting: by progressively measurable processes, and the dependence on the
choice of process with prescribed finite dimensional distributions, 2.1.9-
2.1.12; hitting, entry, and last hitting times, 2.11.4; the hitting probability
for a Markov process of an analytic set, in particular of an F" set, as a
function of the process initial point, 2. V1.6, 2.1X.4, and the excessive
function so defined, 2.VI.I2; by Brownian motion, 2.VII.6, 2.VII.8,
2.1X.I, 2.1X.4, 2.1X.9, 2.1X.IS; of a parabolic semipolar set by space-time
Brownian motion, 2.1XIS; harmonic measure as a conditional Brownian
motion hitting distribution, 2.1X.13, 2.x.7, 3.11.2; capacitary distribu-
tions in terms of last hitting distributions, 2.x.10
Hunt potential theory: 2. VI. I0
Application to martingale theory: 'S±, 'S+, S±, S+, 2.V.5; 'S, S, 2.V.6;
'Sm, Sm, 2.V.7; 'Sp, Sp, 2.V.8; Sp, Spqb' Smqb in the specific order, and
their primed counterparts, 2.V.9; S., Sms' Sps in the specific order,
and their primed counterparts, with orthogonal decompositions of'S
and S, 2.V.1O, 2.V.lI
Combined application to nonprobabilistic potential theory and to martingale
theory: background, 3.1.1; band relations, 3.1.2; LP and D, 3.1.3; D
and the PWB method, 3.1.4, 3.1.5; characterizations of Sqb' S., Sm.'
Spqb' Smqb' Sp., 3.1.6-3.1.10; band identification of the composition
of an h-superharmonic function with h-Brownian motion, 3.1.11,
3.1.13
Law of large numbers: for Brownian motion, 2.VII.5
Lebesgue decomposition: A.lV.8
Lebesgue spine: 1.VIII.15
Uvy Brownian motion square increment theorem: 2.VIII.lO
Lifetime: of a Markov process, 2.VI.3, 2.VI.7; of conditional Brownian
motion, 2.X.I, 2.X.4, 2.X.9, 3.1.12
Liouville's theorem: 1.11.2, 1.11.13, 1.V. 5
LM (see also GM)
Classical potential theory: definition and existence, 1.11I.1, 1.11I.2; for
subharmonic functions in various classes, I.lX.2-I.lX.4
Parabolic potential theory: definition and existence, I.XVII.I
Martingale theory: definition and existence, 2.11I.20, 2.1V.14; for sub-
martingales in various classes, 2.V.2-2.V.4
Logarithmic potential on 1R 2 : defined, I.lV.I; Riesz type decomposition of a
superharmonic function, l.IV.9; domination principle, I.V.lO; infinity
set, I.V.ll
Lower semicontinuous functions: smoothing of a function, A.VIII.I ; supre-
mum of a family of, A.VIII.2; Choquet topological lemma, A.VIII.3
Lusin's measurability theorem: A.II.4
Quasi-bounded
Classical context: the classes S;b' S~qb' S~b' I.IX.9; significance for the
PWB method of quasi-boundedness, I.lX.9; significance of quasi-
boundedness of a harmonic function in relation to the class D property
and the Riesz-Herglotz and Martin representations, I.IX.l2, I.XII.9
842 Index